Porsche 911 2020

911
WKD 992 01 21 21
911
Good to know – Owner’s Manual
WKD 992 01 21 21 11/2020 them could result in serious mechanical failure, seri-
ous personal injury or death.
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG is the owner of numerous Different types of warnings and symbols are used in
trademarks, both registered and unregistered, in- this Owner's Manual.
cluding without limitation, the Porsche Crest®, Serious injury or death
Porsche®, Boxster®, Carrera®, Cayenne®, Cayman®, DANGER
Macan®, Panamera®, Taycan®, PCMTM, PDK®, 911®,
718®, 4S®, RS® and the model numbers and the dis- Failure to observe warnings in the "Danger" category
tinctive shapes of the Porsche automobiles, such as will result in serious injury or death.
the federally registered 911 and Boxster automo-
biles in the US. The third party trademarks contained Possible serious injury or
herein are the property of their respective owners. WARNING
death
All text, images, and other content in this publication
are protected by copyright. No part of this publica- Failure to observe warnings in the "Warning" cate-
tion may be reproduced in any form or by any means gory can result in serious injury or death.
without prior written permission of Porsche Cars
North America, Inc. Possible moderate or
CAUTION
Porsche Cars North America, Inc. and its affiliates minor injury
believe the specifications to be correct at the time of
Failure to observe warnings in the "Caution" cate-
printing. However, specifications, standard equip-
gory can result in moderate or minor injuries.
ment, and options are subject to change without
notice. Some options may be unavailable when any
particular car is built. Some vehicles may be shown NOTICE
with equipment that is not available in the US or
Canada. Please ask your authorized Porsche dealer Failure to observe warnings in the "Notice" category
for advice concerning the current availability of op- can result in damage to the vehicle.
tions and verify that your vehicle includes the op-
tional equipment you ordered.
Information
Porsche recommends seat belt usage and observ-
ance of traffic laws at all times. Additional information is indicated using the word
© 2020 Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG "Information".
b Prerequisites that must be met in order to use a

Safety instructions, warnings and symbols in function.
the Owner’s Manual e Instructions that must be followed.
For your own protection and longer service life of 1. Instructions are numbered in cases where a se-
your vehicle, please heed all operating instructions quence of steps must be followed.
and special warnings. These special warnings con-
tain important messages regarding your safety and/ 1. Instructions that must be followed on the touch
or the potential for damage to your Porsche. Ignoring display.
1
> Indicates where you can find more information
on a topic.
2
Structure of the Manual
Owner’s Manual – Digital Table of Contents Safety and Driving Pleasure Overviews
The Owner's Manual is available in Obtain an overview and find the Learn how you can contribute to safe Get to know the various components
digital form on-board in the vehicle topics you are looking for. driving pleasure. and controls.
and as an app. > From page 6 > From page 23
> Page 4
Practical Tips Topics from A - Z Technical Data Index
Browse for additional information on Learn how components and controls Look up specific values. Go directly to the information you are
new functions. function and how to operate them. > From page 327 looking for.
> From page 30
3
Owner’s Manual – Digital
Further information about your vehicle is available (depending on country) in the on-board Owner's Manual in your vehicle and in the Porsche "Good to know" app:
Video instructions, interactive graphics, practical tips and functions in detail.
On-board App
You can find the Owner's Manual in the Porsche You can download the Owner's Manual from the
Communication Management (PCM) under: relevant app store by searching for Gut zu wis-
sen, Good to know or 车主指南:
e CAR e CONTROL e Manual
Apple®, the Apple logo, CarPlay®, iPod®, Siri®, iPhone® and other designations of Apple are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
IOS® is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Technology, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by Apple. Google Play® and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC.
4
Contents Driving and Driver Assistance Systems Navigation and Connectivity
Active Lane Keeping ......................................................33 Apple® CarPlay ................................................................62
Safety and Driving Pleasure Active Parking Support .................................................37 Apps ...................................................................................64
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................................43 Device Manager ...........................................................111
Overviews Auto Start Stop function ..............................................66 Navigation ......................................................................175
Cockpit ..............................................................................24 Brakes ................................................................................75 Porsche Connect .........................................................204
Control Panel ...................................................................25 Cruise control ...............................................................107
Driving Programs .........................................................112 Luggage and Transport
Driver's Cockpit ...............................................................23 Cup Holders ...................................................................109
Filler Openings ................................................................28 Front Axle Lift System ...............................................128
HOLD Function .............................................................135 Electrical Socket ..........................................................115
Overhead Console ..........................................................27 Luggage Compartment ..............................................162
Sensors and cameras ....................................................22 Lane Change Assist (LCA) ........................................148
Lane Keep Assist .........................................................153 Roof transport system ...............................................225
Switch Panel ....................................................................26 Smoker's Package .......................................................239
Lights ..............................................................................156
Practical Tips Night View Assist ........................................................180 Storage ...........................................................................247
Practical Tips ...................................................................30 ParkAssist ......................................................................182 Mobility and Minor Repairs
Opening and Locking Porsche Active Safe (Warn and Brake Assist) ....193 Battery ...............................................................................69
Alarm system ...................................................................61 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) Brake Fluid ........................................................................74
Central Locking ...............................................................85 ............................................................................................196 Car Care .............................................................................78
Convertible Top ...............................................................97 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) ............................................207 Coolant ...........................................................................105
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ..........................133 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ..................215 Emergency Call Systems ...........................................116
Hood ................................................................................137 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) ............218 Emergency Starting ....................................................118
Luggage Compartment Lid .......................................165 Rear Cross Traffic Alert ..............................................220 Emission Control System ..........................................121
Slide/Tilt Sunroof ........................................................236 Spoilers ...........................................................................240 Engine Oil .......................................................................123
Targa Roof System ......................................................250 Sport Chrono Stopwatch ...........................................242 Flat Tire ...........................................................................126
Vehicle Key ....................................................................268 Starting and Stopping the Engine ..........................245 Fuses ...............................................................................130
Windows ........................................................................320 Traffic sign recognition ..............................................260 Jack and Lifting Platform ..........................................147
Transmission .................................................................262 Refueling ........................................................................221
Air Conditioning and Ergonomics Windshield Wipers ......................................................322 Test Stand Measurement .........................................256
Air Conditioning System (2-Zone Automatic Air Towing ............................................................................257
Conditioning) ...................................................................55 Instrument Cluster and PCM
Instrument Cluster ......................................................138 Washer fluid ..................................................................299
Airbag Systems ...............................................................50 Wheels and Tires .........................................................300
Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats) .....................91 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) ... 197
Interior lighting .............................................................146 Trip Information Display ............................................267 Technical data
Mirrors .............................................................................171 Vehicle Settings ...........................................................270 Software Licenses .......................................................343
Personal Settings ........................................................186 Warning and Information Messages ......................280 Technical Data ..............................................................327
Rollover Bar System (Cabriolet) ..............................224 Entertainment and Communication Index ................................................................................349
Seat Belts .......................................................................229 Media ...............................................................................168
Seats ................................................................................232 Phone ..............................................................................188
Steering Wheel .............................................................246 Voice Control ................................................................272
Sun visors .......................................................................249
5
Safety and Driving Pleasure
Safety and Driving Pleasure accordance with Porsche’s high standards of engi- English: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesaf-
Dear Owner, thank you for choosing a Porsche sports neering quality and safety. ety/menu.htm
car. No other car embodies such a unique blend of Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the French: http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomo-
legendary heritage, cutting edge innovation, high driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the pas- bile/menu.htm
performance and great sportiness. senger's side of the vehicle.
As your safety and driving experience is our goal, we Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual Note to owners
encourage you to read the Owner's Manual and take are based on the information available at the time of In Canada, this manual is also available in French. To
time to familiarize yourself with the operation of your printing. obtain a copy contact your authorized Porsche
Porsche vehicle before you drive it. It has always been Porsche’s policy to continuously centre or write to:
To prevent or minimize injury, always use your seat improve its products. Porsche, therefore, reserves
belts and always lawfully operate your Porsche the right to make changes in design and specifica- Note aux proprietaires
vehicle. tion, and to make additions or improvements in its Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de ce
Always keep your Owner's Manual in the car. If you product without incurring any obligation to install Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire ou du:
sell your Porsche vehicle, pass the Owner's Manual them on products previously manufactured. Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
and other operation manuals on to the new owner. We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
Should you have any questions regarding the opera- driving in your Porsche. 165 Yorkland Boulevard
tion or maintenance of your vehicle, please call 1- Unit 150
800-PORSCHE or contact your authorized Porsche For Canada only Toronto
dealership. If you live in Canada and you believe that your ve- Canada, ON, M2J 4R2
A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how you hicle has a defect that could cause a crash, injury or Telephone number for customer assistance:
can keep your Porsche in top driving condition by death, you should notify Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd. 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
having it serviced regularly. immediately and may also inform Transport Canada,
A separate Warranty and Customer Information Defect Investigations and Recalls. Reporting Safety Defects
Booklet contains detailed information about the Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
warranties covering your Porsche. related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investi- For U.S. only:
gations and Recalls, may either call Transport Cana- If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which
Misuse of your Porsche
WARNING da toll-free at: could cause a crash, injury or death, you should im-
Tel: 1-800-333-0510 or mediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe manner Tel: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa region and from Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
obeying the local traffic laws and in the light of driv- other countries) fying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. (Porsche
ing conditions faced by you, and in accordance with TTY for hearing impaired: Cars N.A.).
the instructions provided in this Owner’s Manual. 1-888-675-6863 If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
or contact Transport Canada by mail at:
e Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those investigation, and if it finds that a safety problem
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga- exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
tions Laboratory remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
instructions in this manual. 80 Noel Street Gatineau, involved in individual problems between you and
QC J8Z 0A1 your authorized Porsche dealer, or Porsche Cars N.A..
Your car has thousands of parts and components
which have been designed and manufactured in For additional road safety information, please visit To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
the Road Safety website at: Hotline toll-free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY:
6
1–800–424–9153); go to – Door and interior mirrors are intact and cor- Setting the right tire pressure
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, rectly adjusted
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, Washington, DC – Sensors and cameras are intact without any
20590. flaws or damage
You can also obtain other information about motor – Cooling air ducts, sensors and cameras are
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. not obstructed (e.g. with film, stone shields
or license plate holders)
Excellent technology: A prerequi- e Only operate the in-vehicle telephone or radio
equipment with installed radio antenna using the
site for your driving pleasure connected external aerial so that the threshold
For your Porsche to achieve its full driving potential, values for electromagnetic radiation in the ve-
the vehicle requires your attention and care. hicle are not exceeded. Too low or too high tire pressure destroys the tire
and wheel, extends the braking distance, and signif-
Checking the vehicle for damage and correct Checking tires for damage icantly increases the risk of an accident. If the tire
functioning pressure is too low, there may also be a noticeable
increase in fuel consumption.
e Adjust tire pressure in accordance with the tires
fitted and the load.
> Please see chapter "Technical Data" on
page 327.
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on
page 300.
e Ensure that the settings in the Tire Pressure
menu in the multifunction display correspond to
Damaged tires may burst while driving. You may lose
A vehicle with technical issues may be the cause of the tires fitted on the vehicle and the current
control of the vehicle.
load of the vehicle.
accidents due to faulty operating behavior, for e Inspect the tires as often as required depending
example. e If a red tire pressure warning appears on the
on use, but at least once a month, for any foreign
e Check your vehicle regularly (at least once a objects that may have entered, pricks, cuts,
multifunction display: Stop immediately in a
month and prior to long trips) to ensure it is free suitable place and check the tires for damage. Do
tears, or dents. Check the tire sidewalls in the
of technical issues. Pay particular attention to not continue driving with damaged tires. If nec-
process.
essary, repair damage using tire sealing
the following: e If in doubt, have the tire and the entire wheel
– Undamaged tires, correct tire pressure and compound.
checked by an authorized Porsche dealer.
> Please see chapter "Flat Tire" on page 126.
sufficient tread e Do not continue driving with damaged tires.
– Operation of headlights, brake lights and turn Have damaged tires replaced immediately: Visit
signals an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have
– Undamaged aerodynamic components trained technicians and the necessary parts and
– Intact windshield wipers tools.
– Windshield and window glass is clear and
free of cracks or other damage
7
Checking the lights Keeping the windshield, windows and wind- e Have all service work and modifications to the
shield wipers clean and functional vehicle performed exclusively by an authorized
Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians
and the necessary parts and tools. This ensures
that your vehicle remains reliable and safe to
drive, and that no consequential damage occurs
to your vehicle.
e Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
engineering features built into your car.
If the lights are not working, your vehicle will be dif- Diagnostic socket
ficult to see when visibility is poor. Other road users Dirty windshields and windows as well as defective
may notice you too late, increasing the risk of an windshield wipers reduce visibility and significantly
accident. increase the risk of an accident.
e Check that all lights function correctly and have e Keep the vehicle and windshield/windows clean.
defective lights repaired immediately. Compo- e Thaw frozen windshield wipers and free them
nents of the lighting system are the following: from the windshield.
– Side, low beam, driving, high beam lights e Replace windshield wipers regularly, or at the
– Turn signal, brake and reversing lights latest when they leave streaks on the windshield.
– Fog lights > Please see chapter "Windshield Wipers" on
page 322.
Checking aerodynamic components The diagnostic socket is used to connect diagnostic
Service and modifications to the vehicle must devices in authorized Porsche dealers.
be performed by an authorized Porsche dealer External equipment (e.g. navigation units, head-up
displays) connected to the diagnostic socket can
impair operation of the vehicle systems and run
down or damage the battery (exhaustive discharge)
when the ignition is switched off. The external
equipment and cables can obstruct clearance
around the pedals or become caught between the
pedals when braking or changing direction.
e Do not connect any equipment to the diagnostic
Damaged or missing aerodynamic components socket.
(such as spoilers or underbody paneling) impair ve- e Do not place any equipment or cables in the
hicle handling. Any modification to the vehicle may impair or elimi- driver’s footwell.
e Check your vehicle regularly for damage. nate its safety functions. Unauthorized work per-
e Damaged or missing components must be re- formed during the warranty period may result in
placed immediately. claims being invalidated.
8
Spare parts for your Porsche Load, safety systems, children in e Always fasten seat belts tightly, even on short
the vehicle: Knowledge for Por- drives.
e Use one seat belt to secure one occupant only.
sche drivers e Remove any loose articles of clothing, e.g. winter
With your Porsche, you can accelerate to above 60 coats.
mph (100 km/h) within a few seconds. This being e Do not place the seat belts across hard or fragile
said, you should do everything necessary to ensure objects (e.g. glasses or ball-point pens).
safety before driving.
e Do not twist the seat belts.
Correct use of seat belts e Always fully roll up unused seat belts.
e Pregnant drivers or passengers should position
the lap belt under the belly and shoulder belt taut
e Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your
over the chest.
vehicle or spare parts of a similar quality, which
e If worn or damaged, have the belt, belt buckle or
have been manufactured according to the spec-
attachment points replaced.
ifications and production requirements of Por-
sche. This helps to ensure that your vehicle > Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 229.
remains reliable and safe to drive, and that no
consequential damage occurs to your vehicle. Airbag system
These parts are available from authorized Por-
sche dealers.
e Only use accessories that originate from the The seat belts can only protect you from injuries if
Porsche Tequipment range or that have been they are functional and are used correctly.
tested and approved by Porsche. For information
on Porsche Tequipment: Contact an authorized Information
Porsche dealer.
Severe injuries can occur at speeds as low as 20
mph (30 km/h). Safety systems only protect when
Information used in combination. For example, the airbags can
If other spare parts or accessories are used, Porsche protect you properly only if the seat belts are worn Airbag systems can only perform their protective
does not accept any liability for damages caused by correctly. function if all occupants have their seat belts fas-
these parts. tened and maintain the correct seating position.
Even if a supplier has obtained a General Operating Objects and luggage must be stowed safely.
License for spare parts or accessories, the safety of e Make sure that there are no persons, animals or
the vehicle may still be affected. objects between the occupants and the area into
The use of spare parts or accessories not approved which the airbag deploys.
by Porsche may also void your vehicle warranty. e Maintain a distance from the airbags, e.g., do not
lean against the inside of the doors. Always keep
your feet in the footwell while driving. Do not put
feet on the dashboard or the seat cushion.
9
Airbag systems that have been tampered with offer Information Preventing crushing hazards
no protection. They may either not trigger or be
triggered in an uncontrolled manner. Uncontrolled Unsecured objects can, for example, be thrown for-
triggering can cause serious injuries. ward at up to 50 times their weight in the event of a
e Do not use protective seat covers. rear-end collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). For exam-
e Do not attach any additional trims or stickers to ple, a 1.5 liter (0.4 gal) bottle of water has a force of
the steering wheel or in the vicinity of the pas- 165 lbs. (75 kg) as it flies through the interior.
senger airbag, side airbags or head airbag.
e Do not route any cables of additional electrical e As a rule, transport only secured objects in the
equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring vehicle.
harnesses. e Always stow items safely, e.g. in the trunk.
e Do not remove airbag components (e.g. steering e Place small objects in the storage compartments If persons or animals are within the range of move-
wheel, front seats, roof trims). and close all storage compartments. Objects ment of certain vehicle components, there is a risk of
e Do not modify the wiring or components of the must not protrude out of the storage body parts being trapped or crushed. These compo-
airbag system. compartments. nents include:
> Please see chapter "Airbag Systems" on e Never place objects on top of the dashboard. – Adjustable front seats
page 50. e Secure loads with tie-down belts (tear strength – Doors
at least 1540 lbs.). – Windows
Securing all objects in the passenger e Do not transport heavy objects in open storage – Trailer hitch
compartment compartments. – Flaps and lids
e Also provide your passengers with all information – Storage compartment lids
regarding safety measures.
How to load your Porsche correctly and how to stow e Make sure that no persons or animals are within
loads: the range of movement when moving these ve-
> Please see chapter "Storage" on page 247. hicle components.
> Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on
page 162.
Take account of children's behavior
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load in the

passenger compartment can slide around as a result
of braking, acceleration, changes of direction or ac-
cident. Occupants may be endangered or injured.
Children often cannot judge dangers correctly and

may behave inappropriately in dangerous situations.
10
Children can accidentally trigger automatic settings Drive safely – uses driving skills wisely and always drives within
(e.g. seat adjustment) and suffer injury. Children her/his own capabilities and the level of famili-
may not be able to exit the vehicle in emergency arity with the vehicle.
situations e.g. overheated passenger compartment. You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to
This is dangerous to life, especially for young perform most of the checks and actions listed on the
children.
following pages. If in doubt, have these checks per-
e Keep children away from live or hot parts, e.g. the formed by your authorized Porsche dealer.
exhaust tailpipe.
e Keep toxic materials, e.g. tire sealing compound, Avoid distractions
engine oil, out of the reach of children.
e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
e Never drive after you have consumed alcohol or
Safe use of child restraint systems drugs.
e Always drive defensively.
e Expect the unexpected.
e Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
e Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
conditions warrant it.
e Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, depending on traffic, road and If you operate the PCM or other vehicle components
weather conditions. while driving, you will be distracted from the traffic
e Reduce speed at night and during inclement situation and may not be able to respond to danger-
weather. ous situations in time. For your safety, some func-
Child restraint systems only function when installed tions are only available when the vehicle is
e Driving in wet weather requires caution and re-
correctly. stationary.
duced speeds, particularly on roads with stand-
e Only use child restraint systems approved for e Never adjust the mirror, seat or steering wheel
ing water, as the handling characteristics of the
your Porsche. vehicle may be impaired due to hydroplaning of while driving. The seat or steering wheel may
e Before using a child restraint system: Read and the tires. move further than desired. You may lose control
of the vehicle. Adjust the mirror, seat and steer-
follow the instructions from the child restraint e Always observe speed limits and obey road signs
system manufacturer as well as this Owner's ing wheel position as required before your
and traffic laws.
Manual. journey.
e When tired, get well off the road, stop and take a
> Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems e Only use the multifunction steering wheel, radio,
rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the vehicle
(Child Seats)" on page 91. navigation system, etc. while driving if the traffic
with engine idling.
e On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
Safe, competent driving: Making curb.
the right decisions The safe driver:
You are ultimately responsible for keeping your – knows her/his car and all controls,
powerful vehicle under control. – maintains the vehicle properly,
11
situation allows you to do so safely. In case of Suitable tires and appropriate driving style Driving with snow tires
doubt, stop the vehicle. Maximum speed values apply for snow tires. If you
e Do not use a phone or other mobile devices while exceed the maximum permitted speed, the tires may
driving. burst.
e Only make or receive calls using hands-free e Always observe the maximum permitted speed
equipment. for the respective tire.
e Do not reach between the steering-wheel spokes e Affix the sticker with the maximum permitted
while driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to speed in the driver’s field of vision. Observe
react in time to dangerous situations in time. country-specific regulations.
e Set the maximum permitted speed as the speed
Be aware of braking behavior in rain or snow limit using the instrument cluster.
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on > Please see chapter "Instrument Cluster" on
page 300. page 138.
Reacting correctly to uneven running and vibration Driving with summer tires
Damage to tires or the vehicle can cause uneven Parking or maneuvering at outside temperatures
running or vibration while driving. You may lose below 60 °F (15 °C) may result in noises.
control of the vehicle. e Change to snow tires when outside temperatures
e Reduce speed immediately, but without braking are below 45 °F (7 °C).
sharply.
e Stop the vehicle and inspect the tires. If a cause Assistance systems and their limits
cannot be established for the fault, drive on
In heavy rain, while driving through water or after
carefully and have the fault corrected. Visit an
leaving a car wash, the brake disks are coated with a
authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained
water film, the braking action may be delayed and
technicians and the necessary parts and tools.
increased pressure may be required.
Following a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a Keeping tires in a safe condition
coating may form on the brake disks and pads that Damaged tires can burst, especially at high speeds.
significantly reduces friction and therefore also the Prevent damage to the tires by driving carefully.
braking action. e Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
e Dry the brakes by frequent braking, particularly possible.
before you park the vehicle. This will prevent e Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
corrosion. Your Porsche is equipped with driver assistance
Running in new tires systems for driving comfort.
e Corroded brakes tend to "judder". If braking
New tires have not yet achieved their maximum grip None of these systems can overcome the limits set
comfort is noticeably impaired, have the brake
and tend to slip. by the laws of driving physics.
system checked.
e Run in new tires at a moderate speed for the first e These systems should not induce you to take
125 miles (200 km). greater risks with your safety. The driver
12
assistance systems cannot reduce the risk of Tire Pressure Monitoring System > p. 138 Driving with a loaded vehicle
accidents due to an inappropriate driving style. (TPMS)
e The driver assistance systems cannot replace
your attention. Drive with care so you can re- Rear Cross Traffic Alert > p. 220
spond appropriately to the traffic situation.
e Familiarize yourself with the driver assistance Lane Keep Assist > p. 153
systems before using them.
An overview of the driver assistance systems is Lane Change Assist (LCA) > p. 148
provided below:
Cruise control > p. 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 43
Traffic sign detection > p. 260 The handling of your Porsche changes depending on
Active Parking Support > p. 37 the load condition. Use of a roof transport system
creates greater wind resistance.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) > p. 215 Emergency braking function e Adapt your driving style to the altered vehicle
handling.
HOLD function > p. 135 e Do not drive at a speed of more than 80 mph
(130 km/h) when the roof transport system is
Automatic Headlights, PDLS Plus, > p. 156 fitted.
High Beam Assistant e Before fitting a roof transport system or driving
with a roof transport system, read the following
Night View Assistant > p. 180 section in this Owner’s Manual:
ParkAssist, Rear View Camera, > p. 182 Driving off with Launch Control
Surround View
You can carry out full braking using the electric
Porsche Active Safe (PAS) > p. 193 parking brake, for example if the conventional foot-
brake is defective.
Porsche Active Suspension Man- > p. 196 This emergency braking function works with very
agement (PASM) high braking power. As a result, the traffic behind
may be endangered.
Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 207 e Only use the emergency braking function in an
emergency situation and not during normal
Porsche Stability Management > p. 215 driving.
(PSM) e For emergency braking, pull and hold . Release The vehicle accelerates very rapidly when driving off
the switch to stop braking. with Launch Control activated. In some situations
Porsche Vehicle Tracking System > p. 218 > Please see chapter "Brakes" on page 75. (poor road conditions, driver inattention, etc.) control
(PVTS) over the vehicle may be lost or other road users may
be endangered as a result.
13
e Only use Launch Control on public roads if the Hazards during refueling e Only work on the vehicle outdoors or in wellven-
road and traffic conditions permit. tilated spaces.
e Do not endanger other road users when driving e Fluid containers must be labeled appropriately
off with Launch Control. and must be kept out of reach for children.
> Please see chapter "Transmission" on e Dispose of residues in an environmentally
page 262. friendly manner and according to regulations.
e By switching the sports exhaust system to the e Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly
sound-optimized mode, the very sporty driving with soap and water.
style is accompanied by a significantly increased ngine oil can ignite. Engine oil stored in nonventi-
noise level. Therefore, assume your social related areas or thrown-away cloths with engine oil
sponsibility and respect nearby residents, espe- residues can self-combust and result in a fire.
cially at night. Fuel is highly flammable, can burn quickly or ex- e Wipe up spilled engine oil with a cloth.
plode. Fuel and fuel vapors are also harmful to e Cloths soaked with engine oil must be stored in a
Responding correctly to warning signals health. well-ventilated area until disposal.
e Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited
during refueling. Portable Fuel Containers
e Do not inhale fuel vapors.
e Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
> Please see chapter "Refueling" on page 221.
Hazardous fluids
If the systems detect malfunctions or defective

parts, the vehicle warns you with lights or messages
in the instrument cluster or PCM. Disregarding ve- Portable Fuel Container
DANGER
hicle warning signals may result in an increased risk Leaks
of accidents, injuries and damages on the vehicle.
Portable fuel containers may leak, whether they are
e Familiarize yourself with the meaning of warning
lights and messages and pay attention to the in- Not only fuel, but also engine oil, transmission oil, full or partially empty. Fuel leaking from a portable
structions regarding warning and information electrolyte, coolant, refrigerant and brake fluid are container carried in your vehicle could, in case of an
messages before starting to drive so that you hazardous to health and may be fatal if swallowed. accident, cause a fire or explosion.
can respond correctly to the warnings. Stop Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused e Never carry additional fuel in portable containers
driving if necessary. cancer in laboratory animals. in your vehicle.
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information
Messages" on page 280.
> Please see chapter "Instrument Cluster" on
page 138.
14
Toxic exhaust gases Parking the vehicle safely children around the vehicle during time when the
exhaust pipe could be hot. A hot exhaust pipe
can cause serious burns.
Just in case: Safety in the event of

a breakdown or emergency
For your own safety, follow the instructions on the
following pages in the event of a breakdown.
Do not use voice control in case of an

Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless carbon An improperly parked vehicle can roll away in an un-
emergency
monoxide, which is toxic even in low concentrations. controlled manner, endangering persons or causing
e Turn off the engine when the vehicle is station- vehicle damage.
ary. Never leave the engine running unnecessa- Before you leave the vehicle:
rily in confined spaces. e Activate the electric parking brake.
e Perform work with the engine running only out- e Vehicles with PDK: Activate the transmission
doors or with suitable extraction systems for the parking lock using the P button. If operating
exhaust gases. mode P flashes on the instrument cluster, the
parking lock is not correctly engaged. Press the P
California Proposition 65 button on the selector lever again or switch off
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and cer- the ignition.
tain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals The transmission parking lock is engaged auto- In an emergency, your voice can change so much
known to the State of California to cause cancer and matically when the ignition is switched off. due to stress that voice control does not recognize
birth issues or other reproductive harm. e Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift into it.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and first gear or reverse. e Do not use voice control in an emergency.
certain products of component wear contain or emit Hot Exhaust System
chemicals known to the State of California to cause CAUTION
cancer and birth issues or other reproductive harm.
The exhaust system is very hot when the engine is
running and for a while after the engine has been
stopped. Risk of burns and fire!
e Do not park your vehicle in places where com-
bustible materials, such as dry grass or leaves,
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system.
e To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing your
legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely supervise
15
Removing the fire extinguisher Caution when working on the vehicle 140 °F / 60 °C.
e If you are not fully familiar with repair or mainte-
nance procedures, do not attempt the works de-
scribed in the manual. Visit an authorized
Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians
and the necessary parts and tools.
Certain work to the vehicle requires the wearing of

protective equipment, for example, protective gloves
protecting against cuts.
e Have all work to the vehicle performed exclu-
If available in the relevant vehicle, the fire extin- Hot Engine Parts and Hot sively by a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche
WARNING
guisher is located under the passenger seat. Coolant recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as
e Hold the extinguisher with one hand and press The engine and adjacent components, the exhaust
they have trained technicians and the necessary
the PRESS button on the fire extinguisher holder parts and tools.
system and the coolant become very hot when the
with the other hand.
engine is running. Emergency starting
For a proper and safe handling of the fire extin-
guisher, please note the following points: The coolant reservoir is pressurized. The hot coolant
e Observe the inspection intervals for the fire ex-
may suddenly escape if the coolant reservoir is not
tinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used after opened carefully.
the inspection interval has elapsed, functionality The fans can also start running automatically even
is no longer guaranteed. when the engine is stopped and the vehicle key is
e Observe the operating instructions on the fire removed.
extinguisher. e Stop the engine and, if possible, let it cool.
e Observe the safety instructions on the leaflet e Keep body parts, clothes, long hair and jewelry
supplied by the fire extinguisher manufacturer on away from all moving parts, such as fans and
the extinguisher handle. drive belts.
Starting the vehicle using unsuitable jumper cables
e Have the fire extinguisher checked by an au- e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts,
or following incorrect procedures can cause short
thorized Porsche dealer every one or two years. particularly the engine and exhaust system. circuits and potentially a fire. A highly explosive gas
e Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use. e Wear protective gloves that protect against hot mixture can form around the battery during emer-
parts. gency starting.
e Only top up coolant when the engine is stopped Moreover, battery acid and parts that start auto-
and the ignition is switched off. matically, e.g., radiator fan, may cause injuries when
e Do not open the cap of the coolant reservoir working in the engine compartment.
when the engine is hot. Wait until the coolant Before providing or receiving jump starting:
temperature gauge displays a temperature below > Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on
page 118.
16
Towing Flat tires Carry Emergency equipment

Vehicles with PDK
Depending on the driving speed, the vehicle can no It is good practice to carry emergency equipment in
longer be steered safely when the tires are damaged. your vehicle.
Danger of significant damage to the vehicle as a re-
sult of tow-starting and push-starting. e Never continue to drive with a flat tire.
e Never tow-start or push-start the vehicle. e Stop the vehicle safely in line with the traffic Before driving: Important infor-
conditions and repair the damage.
e Before towing your vehicle or having your vehicle mation regarding your Porsche
towed: > Please see chapter "Flat Tire" on page 126.
> Please see chapter "Towing" on page 257. Seats
After a collision
Vehicles with manual transmission1 Vehicles with full bucket seats have two seats.
Towing poses an increased risk of accidents. Power Passengers may not be carried in the space behind
assistance may not be available, so more effort is the seats.
required to steer. If the brake booster has failed, a
great deal of effort is required for braking. Feel comfortable in the driver’s seat
e Exercise extreme caution when towing in the
case of a stopped engine or if power steering or
the brake booster has failed.
e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be
towed.
> Please see chapter "Towing" on page 257. The safety systems may not be operational (e.g.
seat-belt pretensioners and airbags) after a collision.
The safety systems can then no longer protect you.
e Have the safety systems checked even if they
were not triggered.
e Have triggered safety systems replaced. Visit an e Check operation of the horn
authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained e Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
technicians and the necessary parts and tools. controls. To reduce the possibility of injury from
1. Feature might be available at a later point of time or limited to specific markets

17
the air bag deployment, you should always sit Breaking in new brake pads The front axle lift system (depending on equipment)
back as far from the steering wheel as is practi- can lift the front body by approx. 1.57 in. (40 mm)
cal, while still maintaining full vehicle control. (front spoiler front edge).
e Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
e Check operation of the foot and electric parking Driving on race circuits
brake.
e Never leave an idling car unattended.
e Lock doors from inside, especially with children
in the car to prevent inadvertent opening of
doors from inside or outside.
e Drive with doors locked.
New brake pads and brake disks have to be “bedded
Breaking in the vehicle in” and therefore only attain optimal friction when
the vehicle has covered several hundred miles.
The somewhat reduced braking effect requires more
effort when pressing the brake pedal. This is also the Compared to normal road use, when driving on cir-
case after the brake pads or brake disks have been cuits the vehicle is subjected to disproportionately
replaced. higher loads. In pure racing vehicles these loads are
taken account of by regular maintenance and com-
Observing the ground clearance ponent reconditioning intervals. These cover checks
and the replacement of individual components
where necessary after each use on the circuit, as
well as the reconditioning of entire assemblies after
certain periods of use.
The moving parts of a new vehicle must be run in.
e Always make inquiries about the current stipula-
The parts require the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km)
for this purpose. The oil and fuel consumption may tions before driving on race tracks: Contact an
be somewhat higher than normal during this period. authorized Porsche dealer.
During the breaking-in period, drive as follows: Following race circuit sessions, "cooling laps" must
be performed to control the temperature reduction
e Preferably take long trips. Avoid frequent cold
of chassis components which are subjected to par-
starts with short-distance driving whenever
The vehicle may touch the ground as a result of the ticularly strong thermal load. Instantaneous stopping
possible.
low ground clearance. of the vehicle would result in a further rise in com-
e Do not participate in motorsport events, sports
driving training or similar events. e Avoid steep ramps. ponent temperature due to stationary heat build-up.
e Avoid high speeds of over 4,000 rpm. Drive at e Drive carefully on the following: This can irreparably damage individual components.
low engine speeds when the engine is cold. – Steep slopes (e.g. parking garages) Brake system
– Curbs Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over time.
– Uneven road surfaces This absorption of water lowers the boiling point and
– Lifting platforms can severely impair braking efficiency at high
temperatures.
18
Driving on racetracks puts high pressure on brake Before driving abroad If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
pads and brake disks. bring it back home, be sure to find out about ship-
e If the brake fluid is more than 12 months old: ping and forwarding requirements, as well as current
Replace brake fluid before driving on a track. import and customs regulations.
e Have the brake pads and brake disks checked for
wear before and after driving on tracks. Data processing in the vehicle
Tires
The tires are also subject to high stress when the
vehicle is driven around a track.
e Have the tires checked for wear before and after
driving on tracks. Government regulations in the United States and
e Do not fit racing tires. Racing tires are not ap- Canada require that automobiles meet specific
proved by Porsche. emission regulations and safety standards. There-
Engine oil fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
e Add engine oil up to the maximum mark before vehicles sold in other countries.
driving on tracks. If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti- Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle.
Some of these are required for the operational safety
e Check the engine oil level before and after driving nental limits of the United States or Canada, there is
the possibility that: of your vehicle, while others provide assistance while
on tracks.
driving (driver assistance systems). Moreover, your
> Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123. – Unleaded fuel may not be available,
– Unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower vehicle offers comfort and entertainment functions
Central lock octane rating. Excessive engine knock and seri- which are also made possible through electronic
e Check the tightening torque of the central bolts ous damage to both engine and catalytic con- control units.
before and, if necessary, during and after driving verters could result,
on racetracks. – Service may be inadequate due to lack of proper
Storing technical data in the vehicle
e After every racetrack operation check all com- service facilities, tools or diagnostic equipment, Electronic control units have data memories that can
ponents of the central lock for wear and, if nec- – Replacement parts may not be available or very temporarily or permanently store technical informa-
essary, replace. difficult to get. tion about vehicle status, component stress, servic-
> Please see chapter "Changing wheels with a – The authorized Porsche dealer may not be able to
ing requirements, events or faults. Generally
central lock" on page 311. speaking, this technical information documents the
carry out all repair work.
> Please see chapter "Driving on racetracks (e.g. – Technical adjustments need to be made to the
status of a component, module, system or environ-
sports driving training, motorsport events)" on ment such as:
vehicle,
page 319. – Operating states of system components (e.g. fill
– Some countries require additional tools and spe-
levels)
cial spare parts to be carried in your vehicle,
– Status messages about the vehicle and its indi-
make enquiries before driving abroad.
vidual components
Porsche cannot be responsible for the mechanical – Malfunctions and faults in important system
damage that could result because of inadequate components (e.g. lights, brakes)
fuel, service or parts availability.
19
– Information about events that can damage the you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, required data exchange takes place via a protected
vehicle USB stick or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the connection, e.g. with the Porsche IT systems set up
– The vehicle response in special driving situations vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is for this purpose. Collection, processing and use of
(e.g. triggering an airbag, activation of the only sent to third parties at your request and partic- personal data beyond that required for the provision
stability control system) ularly while using online services, only in accordance of services takes place exclusively on the basis of
– Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature) with the settings you have selected. legal authorization or consent.
If your vehicle has the required equipment, you can Usually, you can activate or deactivate the (often
In addition to providing the actual control unit func-
control your connected smartphone or another mo- fee-based) services and functions and in some
tion, this data is used to detect and correct faults
bile device using the controls integrated in the ve- cases, even the entire data connection in the vehicle.
and enables the manufacturer to optimize vehicle
hicle. Images and sound from your smartphone can This does not apply to functions and services re-
functions. Most of this data is volatile and is only
be output via the multimedia system. Certain infor- quired by law, in particular.
processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small part of
mation can also be transferred to your smartphone. If there is a possibility of using online services from
the data is stored in event or fault memories. More-
This includes general vehicle information or position other providers, these are the responsibility of and
over, your vehicle offers comfort and entertainment
data, for example, depending on the type of integra- subject to the data protection policy and terms of
functions which are also made possible through
tion. This allows optimal use of selected apps on the usage of the relevant provider. Porsche has no influ-
electronic control units.
smartphone, e.g. for using a navigation system or ence on the data exchanged in these cases. Given
music playback. The smartphone cannot be used to this, please request information from the relevant
Read-out of technical data
actively access vehicle data. The type of subsequent service provider on the type, scope and purpose of
When having your vehicle serviced, service network data processing is determined by the provider of the such data collection and the use of personal data in
employees (e.g. workshops, roadside assistance, relevant app being used. Whether and which set- the context of third-party services.
manufacturers) can read out the technical informa- tings you can configure for this depends on the app
tion from the vehicle. Services include repair serv- and the operating system on your smartphone.
ices, service processes, warranty claims and quality
assurance measures for example. The data is read Use of online services
out using a legally required connection for OBD
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
("On-board diagnosis") in the vehicle. The data is
this can be used to exchange data between your
collected, processed and used by the relevant serv-
vehicle, the surrounding area and other systems. You
ice network personnel and may be sent to Porsche in
can connect to the wireless network via the send
order to comply with product monitoring obligations
and receive unit in the vehicle or via your connected
or to improve quality for example. Fault and event
mobile devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions
memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service
can be used via this wireless network connection.
center during repairs or servicing.
These include online services and applications/apps
that are available to you through Porsche or other
Using functions in the vehicle
providers.
Within the scope of the selected equipment options, For Porsche online services, the various functions
you can enter information such as multimedia and are described at a suitable place (e.g. the Porsche
address book data or navigation destinations and Connect website) and the related data protection
other settings in the vehicle comfort and infotain- legislation information is provided. Personal data can
ment functions. This data may be stored locally in be used for the provision of online services. The
the vehicle or it may be contained on a device which
20
Overview Illustrations
On the following pages you will find overviews of all
areas of the vehicle, with a brief explanation. Further
information can be found on the specified pages.
21
Sensors and cameras
Sensors and cameras

A Surround View > p. 182
B Active Lane Keeping > p. 33
Lane Keep Assist > p. 153
Dynamic high beam > p. 156
Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 207
Traffic sign recognition > p. 260
Porsche Active Safe (Warn and Brake > p. 193
Assist)
C Active Lane Keeping > p. 33
Assist)
D ParkAssist > p. 182
E Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 43
Active Lane Keeping > p. 33
Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 207
Assist)
F Night View Assist > p. 180
G ParkAssist > p. 182
H Active Lane Keeping > p. 33
Lane Change Assist > p. 148
22
Driver's Cockpit
Driver's Cockpit
A Door opener > p. 85
B Memory buttons > p. 186
Personal settings
C Central locking buttons > p. 87
D Power windows > p. 320
E Light buttons > p. 156
F Overhead console > p. 27
G Door mirror adjustment > p. 171
H Ignition lock > p. 245
I Hood release > p. 137
Luggage compartment lid release > p. 165
J Steering wheel adjustment > p. 246
K Seat adjustment > p. 232
23
Cockpit
Cockpit
A Turn signal and high beam > p. 160
B Shift paddles > p. 262
C Instrument cluster > p. 138
D Windshield wiper > p. 322
E Sport Chrono stopwatch > p. 242
F Porsche Communication Management > p. 197
(PCM)
G Air vents > p. 58
H Glove compartment lock > p. 247
I Cruise control > p. 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 43
J Voice control, Infotainment, instrument > p. 140
cluster controls
K Heated steering wheel > p. 246
L Phone, Infotainment, instrument cluster > p. 140
controls
M Mode switch > p. 112
N Switch panel > p. 26
O Air-conditioning upper control panel > p. 25
P Lower control panel > p. 25
Q Ashtray > p. 239
Cup holders > p. 109
R Armrest, storage compartment > p. 248
S Electric parking brake > p. 75
24
Control Panel
Control Panel
A Switch PCM on and off > p. 197
Adjust the volume
B Air-conditioning control panel > p. 55
C Rotary push button (for controlling the > p. 200
PCM)
D Parking lock > p. 262
E Manual shifting mode > p. 263
F Seat heating/seat ventilation > p. 234
G Active Parking Support > p. 37
H Slide/tilt sunroof control panel > p. 236
Cabriolet convertible top > p. 97
Targa roof system > p. 250
25
Switch Panel
Switch Panel
A Front axle lift system > p. 128
B Quick access button (◊ button) for indi- > p. 270
vidual assignment of functions
C Emergency flasher > p. 161
D Porsche Stability Management (PSM) > p. 215
E Porsche Active Suspension Management > p. 196
(PASM) with Porsche Dynamic Chassis
Control (PDCC)
F WET Mode driving program > p. 112
G SPORT driving program > p. 112
H Porsche Active Suspension Management > p. 196
(PASM)
I Sport exhaust system > p. 112
26
Overhead Console
Overhead Console
A Reading lights > p. 146
B Button for interior/reading light > p. 146
C Interior light (illumination on the control > p. 146
panel)
D SOS button > p. 116
E Automatic dimming button > p. 174
F PASS AIR BAG OFF/ON warning light > p. 52
27
Filler Openings
Filler Openings
A Brake fluid > p. 74
B Washer fluid > p. 299
C Coolant > p. 105
D Engine oil > p. 123
28
Practical Tips
On the following pages you will find practical tips for
the selected area of your vehicle.
29
Practical Tips
Practical Tips
General Operation of Porsche Advanced Cockpit and Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
Topic Tip
Operating assistance systems Assistance systems can be switched on and off via the PCM under ASSIST . Preliminary settings for the
assistance systems can be made under ASSIST e Options e Assistance system settings.
Making vehicle settings General vehicle settings can be made under CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle (vehicle settings) or under CAR
e CONTROL e Displays (settings for the PCM touch display and instrument cluster).
Operating the instrument cluster The displays integrated on the left and right in the instrument cluster are displayed by turning and pressing the
right rotary knob on the multifunction steering wheel.
Using quick access buttons (◊ buttons) The quick access buttons (◊ buttons) of the multifunction steering wheel or the center console switch panel can
be freely assigned to a wide range of vehicle and infotainment functions (e. g. radio/media playback, navigation
etc.).
Quick access via the Info widget and The Info widget and the homescreen provide fast access to the most important vehicle and infotainment
homescreen functions and can also be individually adapted.
Opening the Device Manager Connections can be managed centrally using the Device Manager (e.g. connect phone or Bluetooth® audio
player).
e Select or in the header (depending on the connection status).
Activating voice control The button on the steering wheel activates various functions depending on the application:
– Brief press: PCM voice control is enabled.
– Longer press: Siri voice recognition is activated (only in conjunction with Apple CarPlay).
Switching between two connected If a cellphone is already connected to the PCM, a second cellphone can also be connected to the PCM and the
cellphones user can switch between the two cellphones.
e Select the currently connected cellphone at the top right in the header. The two devices already connected
are displayed. e Select the desired cellphone.
30
Practical Tips
Garage door opener

Topic Tip
Programming the garage door opener Descriptions of all functions for programming and using the integrated garage door opener are provided under
CAR e CONTROL e HomeLink®Garage door opener.
Programming the garage door opener Insufficient battery power in the original remote control can cause malfunctions in signal transmission. In this
case, the system in the vehicle learns an incorrect code that cannot be reliably detected by the garage door drive
system.
e Make sure that there is a new battery in the original remote control for the garage door opener.
Air conditioning
Topic Tip
Switching upper ventilation panel on or off The upper ventilation panel can be activated or deactivated via the PCM:
e CLIMATE e AIR e Center
Adjusting the fresh air supply depending on The auto air-recirculation mode can be switched on or off via the PCM:
the air quality e CLIMATE e AIR e Auto air circ.
Central locking
Topic Tip
Only one door is unlocked when the vehicle is The setting for locking and unlocking the doors has been changed. All doors can be unlocked irrespective of the
unlocked. selected setting.
e Press button on the vehicle key twice within 5 seconds.
The setting can be changed under CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking.
31
Topics
On the following pages, the content is arranged in
topics in alphabetical order.
32
Active Lane Keeping
Active Lane Keeping1 e Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all passive at any time. A
times order to always be ready to steer. e Drive with extreme care. B
General Safety Instructions e Always be ready to take over driving tasks e Always hold the steering wheel with both hands.
(steering, accelerating or braking) yourself. If a C
Lack of attention warning appears on the instrument cluster, take
WARNING System fault with a
WARNING D
over control of the vehicle immediately. warning message
Active Lane Keeping is designed for use on highways e Drive with extreme care. E
and well-surfaced country roads only. The increased e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and If a system fault occurs, Active Lane Keeping may
switch off automatically. The status display goes F
comfort offered by Active Lane Keeping should not the vehicle surroundings.
induce you to risk your safety. Responsibility for e Adapt your driving speed to road and weather out, and a warning message appears on the instru- G
staying in the lane and correctly assessing the traffic conditions. ment cluster.
H
situation always lies with the driver. The following e Drive with extreme care.
driving situations may arise: WARNING
Restricted perception of e Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. I
– In the event of heavy braking, corrective steering
the environment e Always be ready to take over driving tasks J
intervention might not take place. (steering, accelerating or braking) yourself.
Detection of the area around the vehicle by the sen-
– During active steering by the driver, corrective e If a warning appears on the instrument cluster, K
sors (e.g. camera, radar) may be restricted by differ-
steering intervention might be reduced or not take over control of the vehicle immediately. L
ent influencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy
take place. water spray, oncoming headlights, dirt or damage).
M
– The system cannot fully detect the environment. This can result in failure to make steering interven-
Steering interventions might not take place. tions or in unexpected steering interventions.
System limitations N
– The system cannot correctly interpret the envi- e Drive with extreme care. WARNING
Driving situations with
O
ronment. This could result in inadvertent steer- e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and risk of accidents
ing interventions. the vehicle surroundings. P
There are some driving situations in which the sys-
– Corrective steering intervention alone may not e Clean the front camera lens and front radar reg- tem cannot guarantee active lane guidance. There is Q
be sufficient to keep the vehicle in the driving ularly and keep them free of snow and ice. therefore a risk of accidents when using the system!
lane if there are ruts, winding roads, inclined road e Do not cover the sensors. R
surfaces or a crosswind. The driver must actively These include the following driving situations:
e Check the windshield for damage in the area of S
steer in such situations. – when increased attention is required on the part
the camera lens at regular intervals.
– The system may not work as expected in unclear of the driver T
traffic situations, such as turn-off lanes, exits, Unexpected system – during sporty driving
building sites or city traffic. Steering intervention WARNING U
behavior – in adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow or
might not take place or be feasible. heavy rain) V
– It may be the case that the system will remain In some situations, corrective steering intervention – in unfavorable road conditions (including poor
active in unwanted or unexpected situations or is not enough to keep the vehicle in the lane. Fur- W
surfaces or unclear lane markings)
will unexpectedly go into passive mode. thermore, the function can change from active to – in areas with roadworks X
Y
Z
1. Available in some countries
33
Active Lane Keeping
A – when approaching humps and dips area around the vehicle and helps the driver to keep Behavior if there is no steering activity
– in urban traffic the vehicle in the selected lane. The driver's steering behavior is monitored when
B
– on winding and narrow country roads – When the system is active, the driver can set a Active Lane Keeping is switched on and active. If
C – in unclear traffic situations such as intersections preferred position within the lane. When the there is no steering activity (e.g. hands not on the
or tollbooths driver keeps the vehicle at the desired position steering wheel or only resting lightly), a warning ap-
D for several seconds, the system ends lane center
– off-road or on unpaved or slippery roads pears on the instrument cluster. The system
E guidance and starts driving at the selected offset prompts the driver to actively take over the steering.
The system does not always keep the vehicle in the
position. The shift in position is reset again when If the driver does not react to the takeover prompt,
F center of the lane or in a central position behind the the system becomes passive or is switched off the system switches to a passive state.
last vehicle in the line. (e.g. by activating the turn signal, changing lanes
G
Active Lane Keeping does not react to people and
H animals or vehicles crossing lanes or oncoming ve-
or braking). Display elements
– The system always prioritizes the lane markings
I hicles in the same lane. These are not detected as over other objects (e.g. vehicles). In some cases,
obstructions by the sensors. this can mean that the driver has to position the
J e Never use Active Lane Keeping in the specified vehicle in the center of the lane in order to acti-
K situations. vate the system. Activation of the system out-
e Do not use Active Lane Keeping to steer the ve- side the center of the lane is prevented so that
L hicle around obstructions lying on the road. the driver will not feel a strong movement on the
steering wheel immediately after the system is
M
activated.
N Information – The driver is responsible for moving to the side of
the road to create a lane for emergency vehicles.
O If there is a fault in the system or if Active Line
Keeping does not function as described in this sec- In such situations, the driver can switch off the
P tion, do not use the assistance function. Visit an au- system or override the system using the steering
thorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an wheel.
Q
R technicians and the necessary parts and tools. Behavior when the turn signal is activated
Activating the turn signal alerts the system to the
S
driver's intention to change lanes. Active Lane
T Responding to warning symbols Keeping therefore does not intervene in steering in Fig. 1: Active Lane Keeping status display
Always heed any warning and information messages this case.
U
displayed in the vehicle. Lane Change Assist, on the other hand, assists the Status display symbols
V > Please see chapter "Warning and Information driver when changing lanes by also activating the
The following symbols appear in the status display A:
Messages" on page 280. turn signal.
W
> Please see chapter "Lane Change Assist (LCA)"
X Operating principle on page 148.
Y Active Lane Keeping uses the front camera along
with front and rear radar to continuously scan the
Z
34
Active Lane Keeping
Symbol Meaning A
B
No Active Lane Keeping is switched off.
display C
D
Active Lane Keeping is switched on
and passive. E
F
Active Lane Keeping is switched on
and active.
G
H
Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep I
Assist are switched on, and both are
passive. J
K
Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep
Assist are switched on, and both are Fig. 2: Control lever for driver assistance systems L
active. Selecting and deselecting Active Line Keeping. M
1. Press button S on the control lever.
Active Lane Keeping is active, and N
Lane Keep Assist is passive. The options menu for the driver assistance sys-
tems appears on the instrument cluster. O
2. Select Act. Lane Keeping using the rotary knob P
Active Lane Keeping is passive, and
on the steering wheel and press to confirm.
Lane Keep Assist is active, e.g. when Q
– or –
the ACC status is "Ready".
e ASSIST e Act.Lane Keeping R
S
Switching Active Lane Keeping on
Information T
and off
It can be selected or deselected using the control Active Lane Keeping can be deactivated at any time U
lever in the instrument cluster and in the central by pressing the brake or by oversteering.
V
display. The function is available when Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) or Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is W
activated.
X
> Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)" on page 43. Y
> Please see chapter "Porsche InnoDrive (PID)" on
Z
page 207.
35
Active Lane Keeping
A Additional information
B Comparison of Lane Keep Assist and Active
C Lane Keeping
D
Function Lane Keep Assist Active Lane Keeping Lane Keep Assist + Active Lane
E Keeping
F
Status icon
G
H Lane center guidance No Yes Yes
I
Lane departure warning Yes No Yes
J
Steering intervention to prevent lane Yes No No
K departure (lane edge guidance)
L
Speed range approx. 40-156 mph (65-250 km/h) approx. 0-165 mph (0-210 km/h) See the individual function
M
N ACC dependence No Only in conjunction with active ACC See the individual function
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
36
Active Parking Support
Active Parking Support1 CAUTION

Adverse environmental – When there are unusual road surfaces, such as A
conditions off-road, unpaved roads, loose substrate, in-
B
General safety instructions In the event of adverse environmental conditions,
clined road surfaces or wheel ruts.
the system will be restricted or not available: There is – In poor lighting conditions (e.g. dusk, darkness, C
Lack of attention strong sunlight).
WARNING a risk of injuries and damage. D
– In the case of heavy vegetation or an accumula-
e Only use the system in suitable environmental
The system must not induce you to take risks with tion of leaves on the lane boundaries (e.g. in front E
conditions. of curbs).
your safety. The driver is always responsible for tak- e Adapt your driving style to the visibility, weather, F
ing due care. The system is no substitute for the – External ultrasound waves (e.g. air brakes from
road and traffic conditions. other vehicles, road sweeping machines, pneu- G
driver's attentiveness.
matic hammers) can interfere with obstacle
e Always check the traffic situation and the area H
NOTICE detection.
around the vehicle.
I
e If necessary, take over control of the vehicle. NOTICE
e Observe the safety instructions and system lim- The system can guide the vehicle over curbs. The J
its of the supporting systems, sensors and tires, rims, bumpers and spoiler of the vehicle may
The system cannot detect: K
cameras. be damaged.
– Low, narrow and protruding objects (e.g. trailer
e If necessary, take control of the vehicle or cancel L
For further information, see: hitches, drawbars of parked trailers, chain bar-
the parking maneuver.
riers, poles or fences).
> Please see chapter "General safety instructions" M
on page 182. – Objects above the detection area (e.g. bumpers
Information on parked vehicles, half-open garage doors and N
> Please see chapter "Rear view camera" on
other objects that are not touching the ground). O
page 184. Observe any country-specific laws relating to the
– Objects with sound-absorbing or sound-reflect-
> Please see chapter "Surround View" on use of parking assistance systems. P
ing surfaces and structures (e.g. textiles, pillars
page 184.
The opposite driving lane can be used during a and columns in parking garages in unfavorable Q
Restricted detection conditions).
WARNING parking maneuver.
ranges of sensors – Objects that move quickly into the detection area R
(e.g. other road users). S
Sensors do not cover all parts of the surrounding System limitations – Raised parking lot restrictions, e.g. parking stops,
area. Persons, animals and obstacles may not be The system is not available: may be detected as obstacles. T
detected in this area or may only be detected to a – On uphill gradients above 10 %. – Precipices and embankments. U
limited extent. There is a risk of injury and damage. – On tight bends.
e If necessary, take control of the vehicle or cancel
e Always check the traffic situation and the area The system is available to a limited extent:
V
around the vehicle. – In poor weather conditions (rain, snow or ice) or W
when snow chains are fitted.
X
Y
Z
1. Equipment may be available for use only at a later time or is only available in certain markets.
37
A – Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to 2. Drive past the parked vehicles.
the road, between two parked vehicles. 3. Follow instructions in the PCM.
B
– Driving forward into parking spaces perpendicu- 4. Parking space search is first active on the pas-
C lar to the road, between two parked vehicles. A senger side.
parking procedure can also be started here if the In order to change the parking side, activate the
D front of the vehicle is already positioned in the corresponding turn signal (left/right).
E parking space. – or –
Pulling out Tap the relevant symbol A (Fig. 4) in the PCM.
F
Pulling out works if the vehicle is moved forward out 5. When a parking space is found, stop the vehicle.
G of a parking space parallel to the road and the park- A found parking space is displayed as an orange
H ing space is approx. 3 ft. (1 m) longer than your area in the PCM. If several parking directions are
vehicle. possible, they will be displayed.
I Fig. 3: Pillars and columns in parking garages 6. If an arrow is displayed in front of the vehicle on
J e Do not choose parking areas in parking garages Parking space search the display, drive the vehicle further forward.
with pillars or columns on them. The parking procedure can only be started when
K Starting a parking space search a route to the parking space is displayed.
L Functions 7. To select the parking space, tap the parking
The system can provide assistance when searching space symbol B (Fig. 4) with the desired parking
M direction in the PCM.
for a suitable parking space and take over parking
N and pulling out. The driver must independently The button in the center console flashes red.
check whether the parking space is suitable for
O parking. The system monitors the vehicle surround- Canceling parking space search
P ings using sensors. If an obstacle is detected, the
system performs a braking intervention. e Tap in the PCM.
Q Fig. 4: Active parking support, parking space search
Parking space search The search is cancelled automatically:
A Select the parking or pulling-out side
R Parking space search works: B Select the parking direction. – If the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h).
– When driving forward. – When transmission range R is selected.
S
– If the distance to parked vehicles is a maximum The parking space search runs in the background.
T of approx. 5.0 ft (1.5 m). The parking space can be selected even if the park-
Parking maneuver
– For parking spaces parallel to the road up to a ing space search is not started until after you have
U driven past a parking space.
speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). Starting the parking procedure
V – For parking spaces perpendicular to the road up
1. Tap . b Vehicle is stationary.
W to a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
– or – b Brake pedal pressed.
X Parking ASSIST e ParkAssist e SEARCH b Parking space selected in the PCM.
Parking is active under the following conditions: The parking space search is displayed. 1. Take your hands off the steering wheel and keep
Y – Parking backward into parking spaces parallel to the brake pedal pressed.
Z the road. 2. Press and hold button in the center console.
38
The button lights up red. The button in the center console flashes red. Remote parking A
3. Release the brake pedal. 4. Press and hold button in the center console.
General safety instructions B
The parking procedure starts. 5. Release the brake pedal.
4. Always pay attention to the traffic situation and The pulling-out procedure starts. Toxic exhaust gases C
the vehicle surroundings. DANGER
6. Always pay attention to the traffic situation and D
5. As soon as an obstacle appears or there is an the vehicle surroundings.
obstacle in the displayed route, interrupt the Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless carbon E
7. As soon as an obstacle appears, interrupt the
monoxide, which is toxic even in low concentrations.
parking maneuver (e.g. by releasing button in parking maneuver (e.g. by releasing button in F
the center console). e Never leave the engine running in confined
the center console).
> Please see chapter "Interrupting the parking spaces. G
> Please see chapter "Interrupting the parking
maneuver" on page 39. e After parking, check that the engine has been H
maneuver" on page 39.
A message appears when the vehicle reaches the switched off.
A message appears when the vehicle reaches the I
target position. target position. Lack of attention
On slopes, the wheels are steered towards the The vehicle drives out of the parking space until a WARNING J
curb. collision-free exit is possible. K
The transmission parking lock is activated and 8. Take over control of the vehicle. The system must not induce you to take risks with
the parking brake is applied. If the driver does not take control of vehicle, a your safety. The driver is always responsible for tak- L
6. Take over control of the vehicle. message appears and the engine is switched off. ing due care. The system is no substitute for the M
If the driver does not take control of vehicle, a driver's attentiveness.
message appears and the engine is switched off. Interrupting the parking maneuver The person who operates the active parking support N
Starting the pulling-out procedure e Release button in the center console. with the cellphone is considered the driver of the O
– or – vehicle and must have a valid driving license.
b Engine is running. e Always check the traffic situation and the area
P
Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the
b Vehicle has not been moved yet. around the vehicle. Q
brake pedal.
b Brake pedal pressed. e Observe a suitable distance to the vehicle.
The parking maneuver can then be continued by R
1. Take your hands off the steering wheel and keep e No persons or animals may be in the vehicle
the brake pedal pressed. pressing button in the center console again.
during the parking maneuver. S
Release the brake pedal if necessary.
e If necessary, take over control of the vehicle. T
2. Tap . Canceling the parking maneuver: e Observe the safety instructions and system lim-
– or – e Take control of the steering. its of the supporting systems, sensors and U
ASSIST e ParkAssist e SEARCH – or – cameras. V
3. In order to change the pulling-out direction, ac- e Change transmission range.
– or – e For further information, see: W
tivate the corresponding turn signal (left/right).
– or – e Apply the parking brake. > Please see chapter "General safety instruc-
X
– or – tions" on page 182.
Tap the relevant symbol A (Fig. 4) in the PCM.
e Press the accelerator. > Please see chapter "Rear view camera" on Y
The parking maneuver must be restarted. To do this, page 184. Z
switch the engine off and on again when pulling out.
39
A > Please see chapter "Surround View" on Parking 1. Open the Device Manager in the PCM. To do
page 184. Parking is active under the following conditions: this, select or in the header (depend-
B
> Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" – Parking backward into parking spaces parallel to ing on the connection status).
C on page 37. the road.
– Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to 2. Select FernPark .
D
the road, between two parked vehicles.
Information 3. Open the Porsche Connect App1 on the
E – Driving forward into parking spaces perpendicu- cellphone.
Observe any country-specific laws relating to the lar to the road, between two parked vehicles. A
F 4. Select in the app.
use of parking assistance systems with remote parking procedure can also be started here if the
G control. front of the vehicle is already positioned in the 5. Follow instructions in the app.
parking space. > Please see chapter "Apps" on page 64.
H
– Forwards into single garages (minimum width at
I System limitations the narrowest point 8.5 ft. (2.60 m)) when the Information
The system limits of active parking support apply: vehicle is positioned as straight as possible in
J > Please see chapter "System limitations" on front of the single garage. Further information about Porsche Connect (Help
K page 37. videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and
Pulling out Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por-
In addition, the following conditions apply: Pulling out works:
L sche.com/connect..
The system is not available: – Forwards out of parking spaces parallel to the
M If the Bluetooth® connection between cellphone and road that are at least approx. 3.3 ft. (1 m) longer
vehicle is affected by interference from other than your vehicle. Resetting pairing
N
devices. – Forwards perpendicular to the road to the left or In the event of connection problems between cell-
O The system cannot detect: right. phone and PCM, the pairing must be reset.
P – Objects in garages above the detection area (e.g. – Straight reversing perpendicular to the road. 1. Open the Device Manager in the PCM. To do
garage door linkage, and other objects that are – Reversing out of single garages (minimum width
Q not touching the ground). this, select or in the header (depend-
at the narrowest point 8.5 ft. (2.60 m)).
– Objects that are very low or lying on the ground. ing on the connection status).
R
– Very narrow or protruding obstacles (e.g. parked Preparing the cellphone 2. Options e Delete paired devices
S bicycles). In order to use a cellphone for remote parking, it
– Double garages. 3. Select the connected cellphone for remote
T must be paired with the active parking support.
parking.
b Porsche Connect App1 is installed on the
U Functions cellphone. 4. Select Delete.
V With remote parking, the functions of the active
parking support can be controlled via the app with 5. Delete all connections to the vehicle in the set-
W remote-control function outside the vehicle. tings menu of the cellphone.
X > Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" on 6. Carry out the steps for "Preparing the cellphone".
page 37.
Y
Z
1. Name and function changes reserved
40
> Please see chapter "Preparing the cellphone" Information 1. Start the Porsche Connect App1 and select . A
on page 40. 2. Follow the operating instructions and start the
The vehicle key and cellphone must be a maxi- B
engine using the cellphone.
Starting a parking space search mum of approx. 10 ft. (3 m) away from the ve- 3. Select the pulling-out direction and side and C
hicle, otherwise the parking maneuver is start the pulling-out procedure.
interrupted. D
4. As soon as an obstacle appears, interrupt the
parking maneuver (e.g. by releasing the button E
5. Close the doors and luggage compartment lid.
on the cellphone).
F
6. Start the Porsche Connect App1, select and > Please see chapter "Interrupting the parking
follow the operating instructions. maneuver" on page 41. G
7. Start the parking procedure with the cellphone. 5. When the vehicle has reached the desired posi- H
Fig. 5: Remote parking, parking space search 8. As soon as an obstacle appears, interrupt the tion, release the drive button and approach the
parking maneuver (e.g. by releasing the button vehicle. I
A Select parking or pulling-out side
on the cellphone). 6. Reach into the handle recess of the door handle.
B Select the parking direction. J
C Start remote parking > Please see chapter "Interrupting the parking Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of
maneuver" on page 41. the door handle when doing this. Wait until the K
For information on parking space search: 9. Observe the operating instructions on the vehicle is unlocked.
> Please see chapter "Parking space search" on L
cellphone. 7. Get into the vehicle without moving the steering
page 38. A message appears when the vehicle has wheel, press the brake pedal and turn the oper- M
reached the park position. ating device in the ignition lock to ignition lock
Starting the remote parking procedure N
The park position reached can be corrected for- position 2.
b Vehicle is stationary. ward and backward using the cellphone. > Please see chapter "Ignition lock" on O
b Parking space or single garage selected in the After successfully completing the parking page 245.
PCM.
P
procedure:
– Operating mode P is selected. Information Q
1. Tap Remote-contr. park. in the PCM C
(Fig. 5) and follow instructions. – Parking brake is applied. R
Following driver take-over, the engine can be
– Engine is switched off.
2. Activate the transmission parking lock using the switched off using the Auto Start Stop function. S
– Vehicle is locked.
P button on the selector lever.
T
3. Confirm the message to activate remote Starting the remote pulling-out procedure Interrupting the parking maneuver U
parking. b Vehicle parked.
e Release button on the cellphone.
b Engine switched off. V
4. Leave the vehicle with the vehicle key and The parking maneuver is interrupted at any time.
cellphone. b The vehicle key and cellphone remain a maxi- W
mum of approx. 10 ft. (3 m) away from the The parking maneuver is interrupted automatically:
vehicle. – If an obstacle is detected in the vehicle's path. X
Y
Z
41
A – If the vehicle key or cellphone is out of range for

B
– If a door or the luggage compartment lid is
C opened.
– If the Porsche Connect App1 is pushed into the
D
background by an incoming call or other apps.
E After eliminating the cause, the parking maneuver
F can be continued:
e Press button on the cellphone.
G
The parking maneuver is canceled:
H – If a button on the vehicle key is pressed.
I – If an interaction is detected in the vehicle
interior.
J – If the time limit for the parking maneuver is
K exceeded.
– If the maximum permissible distance for a park-
L ing maneuver has been covered.
M The vehicle is brought to a standstill, the electric
N parking brake activated, operating mode P engaged
and the parking maneuver ended.
O
P Information
Q When the parking maneuver is ended, the driver
must take control of the vehicle. Start the parking
R space search again to park the vehicle.
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
42
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control traffic calming. WARNING

Radiofrequency Radia- A
e Switch off the driver assistance system tempo- tion Exposure
(ACC)1 rarily when driving on turn-off lanes, highway
B
This equipment complies with the specified FCC ra-
exits or in areas with roadworks. C
General Safety Instructions e Observe all local and national speed limits.
diation exposure limits for an uncontrolled environ-
ment. This equipment should be installed and D
Lack of attention
WARNING Covered radar sensor operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm)
WARNING E
between the radiator and your body.
The increased comfort offered by the driver assis- e This transmitter must not be co-located or op- F
tance system should not induce you to risk your Covering the radar sensor can impair the function of erating in conjunction with any other antenna or G
safety. Even when the driver assistance system is the driver assistance system or prevent it from transmitter.
activated, responsibility for maintaining a safe dis- working. H
tance, choosing a suitable speed, etc. remains with e Always keep the radar sensor free of dirt, ice and Damage to the radar I
WARNING
the driver. The driver assistance system is not a snow. sensor
substitute for the driver's attentiveness. J
Impact or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or
e Drive with extreme care. underbody, e.g. through parking collisions, can dis- K
e If the system-related deceleration is insufficient, place the radar sensor. This may impair the per-
slow the vehicle down immediately using the
L
formance of the Adaptive Cruise Control.
footbrake. M
e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
e Make sure that you can take control of the ve-
ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they N
hicle at any time.
have trained technicians and the necessary parts
O
Unsafe traffic situations and tools.
WARNING P
and unfavorable road
Foot on the accelerator
conditions WARNING Q
If the prevailing situation does not allow you to drive R
The driver assistance system does not brake auto-
safely at a sufficient distance and constant speed,
matically when your foot is on the accelerator pedal. S
the driver assistance system can cause accidents.
Placing your foot on the accelerator pedal may
The vehicle can accelerate to the set speed when T
override the cruise and distance control.
driving on turn-off lanes, highway exits or in areas
e Take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the U
with roadworks.
Fig. 6: Radar sensor position driver assistance system is activated. V
e Do not use the driver assistance system in heavy
traffic, where there are roadworks, in built-up W
areas, on private or field tracks, or in zones with
X
Y
Z
1. Availability dependent on country
43
A System limitations Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and Vehicles entering and exiting bends and sta-
Unfavorable road condi-
out and narrow vehicles tionary vehicles
B WARNING
tions and poor weather
C conditions
D
The range of the radar sensor may be restricted by
E rain, snow, ice, fog, stone chippings and spray. Ve-
hicles up ahead may not be adequately detected, or
F
may not be detected at all.
G Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, crash bar-
H riers or tunnel entrances may impair the functional-
ity of the radar sensor. A message indicating that the
I driver assistance system is not available appears on
J the instrument cluster.
e Do not use the driver assistance system under
K
such conditions.
L
Undetected vehicles or
M WARNING
objects
N Fig. 7: Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out (A) Fig. 8: Vehicles entering and exiting bends (C) and station-
The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped and narrow vehicles (B) ary vehicles (D)
O area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or
A vehicle that is driving erratically or weaving in and Vehicles entering and exiting bends may not be de-
P objects may not be detected in time or cannot be
out will only be detected if it is completely in its own tected or may not be detected in time or the radar
detected in the following situations:
Q driving lane. sensor may react to vehicles in adjacent lanes.
– Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out A narrow vehicle may not be detected in time, if at A stationary vehicle or obstacle that suddenly ap-
R – Vehicles with a small cross-section or narrow all. pears in the radar sensor's range, e.g. after a vehicle
vehicles
S ahead changes lanes or at the end of a traffic jam,
– Vehicles entering and exiting curves may only be detected to a limited extent by adaptive
T – Stationary vehicles cruise control.
U – Vehicles with large projecting loads
– Pedestrians, cyclists and animals
V – Objects on the road
W – Oncoming vehicles and cross-traffic
e Intervene and brake yourself if necessary.
X
e Drive with extreme care and always pay attention
Y to the traffic conditions and vehicle
surroundings.
Z
44
Vehicles with large projecting loads are set again after the accelerator pedal is released. A
The speed of the vehicle can be decreased at any
time by braking. This switches the driver assistance B
system to passive mode. C
D
Controls
E
F
G
Fig. 9: Vehicles with large projecting loads H
In the case of vehicles ahead with long projecting I
loads (e.g. a timber transporter), the end of the ve-
hicle may not be detected or may not be detected J
correctly by the radar sensor.
K
Operating principle Fig. 11: ACC in the Speed & Assist display L
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) automatically main- A Desired distance from the vehicle ahead M
tains a set speed and a set distance at a speed of B Status display and desired speed
approx. 19 mph – 130 mph (30 km/h – 210 km/h) C Vehicle detected ahead N
D Current distance from the vehicle ahead
without having to use the accelerator pedal. O
E Current speed of the vehicle ahead
If another vehicle that is traveling slower than the F Status display and desired speed
selected speed is detected ahead in the same lane, P
ACC automatically maintains a set distance. Adap- Fig. 10: Control lever for driver assistance systems When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is switched on, Q
tive Cruise Control will cause the vehicle to brake if R Switch driver assistance systems on/off and open op- the status display B appears on the Speed & Assist
the distance from the vehicle in front becomes too tions menu display in the instrument cluster. R
small and accelerate if the distance increases. S Open options menu (when driver assistance system is
S
If the vehicle in front stops, ACC brakes the vehicle switched on) Status display symbols
to a stop and then starts it again automatically, pro-
1 Set/increase the desired speed T
2 Reduce the desired speed
vided the vehicle in front starts driving again within a 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed Symbol Meaning U
limited time window. A driver assistance system 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control
message in the Speed & Assist display on the in- ACC is passive. V
strument cluster informs the driver that the vehicle W
is ready to move off. Otherwise, the driver can re- Display elements
sume automatic speed and distance control. All important information, messages and warnings X
The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any for Adaptive Cruise Control are displayed in the ACC ACC is passive with set desired
main menu on the Speed & Assist display in the in-
Y
time by pressing the accelerator pedal. The stored speed.
desired speed and distance settings are retained and strument cluster. Z
45
A Symbol Meaning – The status display B is gray. Information

– There is no control.
B An activated driver assistance system will be acti-
ACC is active with set desired speed. – The set desired speed and the set desired dis-
C tance are retained. vated again even after switching off and restoring
– Control is active again after releasing the accel- operational readiness.
D
erator pedal.
E A vehicle was detected ahead while Switching off ACC
F the desired speed was set. A vehicle Switching Adaptive Cruise Control e Press button R on the control lever.
The set desired speed is deleted.
G
symbol is displayed instead of the (ACC) on and off
cruise control symbol. The desired distance is stored.
The driver assistance system that was selected last
H is always switched on. The driver assistance system
is initially in passive mode when switched on. Cruise Activating Adaptive Cruise Con-
I Operating modes control must first be activated before the control trol (ACC)
J
Passive
function starts working. b ACC switched on.
K This mode is set after switching on and when ACC is Switching on ACC 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel-
L active after pressing the brake pedal and after b A driver assistance system is not yet switched erator pedal.
pressing down the control lever (position 4, on. 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position
M CANCEL). 1. Press button R on the control lever. 1) and release the accelerator pedal.
N – The status display B is gray. The options menu for the driver assistance sys- ACC is active.
– There is no control. tems appears on the instrument cluster. The current driving speed is set as the desired
O 2. If ACC is not already selected, select ACC using speed.
– The set desired speed and the set desired dis-
the rotary push button on the steering wheel and The current desired speed is green in the status dis-
P tance are retained.
press to confirm. play and is automatically maintained unless a slower
Q Active ACC is switched on and passive. vehicle is detected ahead.
R This mode is set after setting the speed, after re- Switching from an already activated driver assis-
suming control (position 3, RESUME) and after tance system to ACC
Changing the desired speed
S The set desired speed can be changed by pressing
temporarily overriding control by pressing the ac- 1. Press button S on the control lever.
T celerator pedal. the control lever.
The options menu for the driver assistance sys-
– The status display B is green. b ACC is active.
U tems appears on the instrument cluster.
– Speed and distance to the vehicle ahead are 2. Select ACC using the rotary push button on the Increasing the speed
V controlled. steering wheel and press to confirm. e Press the control lever forward (position 1):
W ACC is switched on and passive. – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments
Temporarily passive – Press and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h)
X This mode is set while the accelerator pedal is increments
Y pressed when ACC is active.
Reduce speed
– A message indicating that ACC is passive ap-
Z pears in the instrument cluster. e Pull the control lever (position 2):
46
– Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments Displaying the distance from the vehicle in A
– Pull and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h) increments front
B
Status display B indicates the new desired speed. If a vehicle is detected ahead, the vehicle symbol C
The green bar F indicates the set desired speed of appears on the instrument cluster and in the status C
your vehicle. display B.
D
The gray area D shows the current distance from the
Setting the desired distance vehicle in front (Fig. 11). E
The desired distance from the vehicle ahead can be The shorter the distance to the vehicle in front C, the F
set in 5 stages. Stage 3 is recommended. The dis- larger the vehicle in the display. The longer the dis-
tance depends on the driving speed. It reduces as tance to the vehicle in front C, the smaller the ve- G
the vehicle slows down and increases as it speeds hicle in the display.
H
up.
Symbol Suitable for Distance at 75 I
mph (120 km/
Information h)
J
When you switch to the WET driving program, the K
set distance for adaptive cruise control is changed to Traveling at approx.
Fig. 12: Setting the desired distance speed in lines 36 yards (33 L
the medium setting ("half speedometer distance") if
the set distance was previously lower. of traffic meters) (≙ M
Information 1 sec.)
> Please see chapter "Selecting driving program" N
When the system display is not active, pressing Driving in lines approx.
on page 112. O
switch Z for the first time displays the main menu for of traffic 51.4 yards (47
the driver assistance system without changing the meters) (≙ ap- P
desired distance.
prox. 1.4 sec.) Q
Corresponds approx. R
Increasing the desired distance
to "half speed- 65 yards (60
e Push switch Z upward. meters) (≙ ap-
S
ometer
The relevant more distant segment of the de- distance" prox. 1.8 sec.) T
sired distance indication A to the vehicle in front
C is displayed. U
V
Reducing the desired distance
e Push switch Z downward. W
The relevant closer segment of the desired dis- X
tance indication A to the vehicle in front C is
displayed. Y
Z
47
A Symbol Suitable for Distance at 75 Interrupting and resuming speed Automatic braking of the vehicle
B mph (120 km/ and distance control to a standstill
h) If the vehicle in front stops, Adaptive Cruise Control,
C Interrupting speed and distance control if active, brakes the driver's vehicle to a standstill
D Driving on approx. e Press the brake pedal. within the control parameters.
country roads 79.8 yards (73 – or – The light indicator on the instrument cluster
E meters) (≙ ap- Press the control lever on the steering wheel lights up.
F prox. 2.2 sec.) down (position 4, CANCEL). The vehicle is actively held in a stationary position.
The system is passive. The desired speed and For information on the HOLD function:
G Driving in approx. distance settings remain stored. > Please see chapter "HOLD Function" on
sparse traffic 95 yards (87
H The status display B changes from green to gray. page 135.
meters) (≙ ap-
I prox. 2.6 sec.)
Information Information
J Following too close
WARNING When the vehicle is stationary, the speed and dis- Depending on the traffic situation, e.g., in slow-
K tance control can only be canceled using the control moving traffic, deceleration begins with a slow
L Driving too close to the vehicle in front may result in lever. creeping phase that ends with the vehicle at a
a collision. standstill.
M
e Always maintain the specified distance that ap- Resuming speed and distance control
N plies in each country. Information
e Press up the control lever on the steering wheel
O (setting 3, RESUME). When distance control is active or while the vehicle
The system is active. The desired speed and
P Overriding speed and distance distance settings are applied again.
is held, the brake pedal may feel different and you
may hear hydraulic noises. This behavior is typical of
Q control at times The status display B changes from gray to green. the system. There is no fault.
Speed and distance control can be overridden at
R
times by pressing the accelerator pedal. This is use-
S Information
ful while overtaking, for example. Moving off again
T b ACC is active. ACC can be activated even while the vehicle is sta-
Depending on the operating status of Adaptive
1. Press the accelerator pedal. tionary by briefly pressing the control lever upward.
Cruise Control, it is possible to drive off again after
U The system is passive while the accelerator the vehicle has stopped and automatic speed and
V pedal is pressed (operating status passive at distance control can start again.
Information
times).
W 2. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If speed and distance control was interrupted by Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) active
X The system is active. moving the control lever to position 4 (CANCEL), it e Push up the control lever on the steering wheel
can only be resumed again when no stationary ob- (setting 3, RESUME).
Y jects are detected in front. – or –
Z Press the accelerator pedal briefly.
48
The vehicle continues driving automatically. Responding to warning message A

The vehicle moves off again automatically in
Takeover prompt in active control mode (ACC B
stop-and-go traffic within a few seconds.
active) C
Information If Adaptive Cruise Control has detected that braking
D
assistance is required on the part of the driver, a
Depending on the situation, Adaptive Cruise Control warning signal sounds and a warning message ap- E
supports automatic moving off again in stop-and-go pears on the instrument cluster.
traffic. This enables comfortable control in slow- F
For information about Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
moving traffic. warning messages: G
The message ACC ready on the instrument cluster > Please see chapter "Warning and Information
informs the driver that the vehicle is ready to move Messages" on page 280.
H
off. I
Inadequate braking
WARNING
power during automatic J
Risk of collision
WARNING braking
K
In this case, the deceleration through Adaptive
The vehicle may move off again in stop-and-go L
traffic, even if there is an obstacle between your ve- Cruise Control is insufficient to prevent a collision.
hicle and the vehicle in front. e Brake immediately. M
e Brake immediately. N
Exceptional conditions with O
Information
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P
It is not possible to move off as long as the vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not available or is Q
ahead remains stationary. switched off:
– If the ignition is switched off. R
– When the driver's door is open or the seat belt is S
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ready not fastened on the driver's side.
Automatic speed and distance control can be re- – When the electric parking brake is activated. T
sumed either when the vehicle is at a standstill or – If the selector lever is in position N, R and P. U
while it is moving if no stationary object has been
– On steep upward or downward slopes.
detected ahead. V
e Push up the control lever on the steering wheel
W
(setting 3, RESUME).
– or – X
Set the desired speed.
Y
Z
49
Airbag Systems
A Airbag Systems DANGER

Seat Belts and occupant sensing.
The vehicle is equipped with airbags and lap/ shoul- Positioning e Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat
B
der belts at both front seating positions. The airbags hangers) over the backrest.
Airbags are most effective when occupants wear
C are a supplemental restraint at those seating e Objects must not protrude out of the door stor-
seat belts and maintain a proper seating position.
positions. age compartment.
D
The airbags in combination with the seat belts make To provide optimal occupant protection, airbags e Do not add any additional coverings or stickers to
E up a safety system which offers the driver and the must inflate at very high speed. If you are not wear- the steering wheel or in the area of the passenger
passenger the greatest protection from injuries in ing your seat belt or are too close to the airbag when airbag, side airbags, knee airbags, and head air-
F it is deployed, inflating airbags can result in serious
case of an accident. bags. Doing so may adversely affect the func-
G Even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, personal injury or death. tioning of the airbag system or cause harm to the
the seat belts must be worn at all times, because e Always fasten seat belts. occupants if the airbag system should deploy.
H
the front or side airbags deploy depending on the e Make sure there are no persons, animals or ob- e No objects should be placed over or near the
I force and angle of impact. jects between the driver or passenger and the airbag on the instrument panel, because any
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag sys- area into which the airbags inflate. such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
J
tem, and during types of collisions which do not e Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to
K cause airbag deployment, the seat belts provide the wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full inflate.
primary protection to the occupants when correctly vehicle control. e Give your passenger all of the information in this
L worn. Therefore, all persons within the vehicle must e Always hold the steering wheel by the outer rim. chapter.
M wear seat belts at all times to minimize the risk of Never rest your hands on the center of the
severe injury or death in the event of a crash. steering wheel where the airbag module is Modification to Airbag
N In many states, state law requires the use of seat
DANGER
located. System
O belts. e Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. Do
> Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 229. not put feet on the dashboard or the seat area. A modified airbag system cannot offer protection.
P
The front airbags are located under the steering e Do not lean against the inside of the door or They may not trigger or could trigger in an uncon-
Q wheel center pad on the driver’s side and in the outside the window while the vehicle is moving. trolled way. An uncontrolled triggering of the airbag
dashboard on the passenger's side. system can result in serious personal injury or death.
R The side airbags on the front seats are installed in Safe Storage of Objects e Do not modify the seat coverings, since such
DANGER
S the side of the seat backrests. changes can block the seat-mounted side airbag.
The head curtain airbags are installed above the Do not attach additional cushions, protective
T Objects and load have to be stored securely to keep
doors in the side roof rail. In case of a car rollover coverings, or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do
U they help to inhibit an unintended passenger's ejec- from causing injury.
not affix things to the passenger's seat or cover it
tion from the vehicle (Coupé models only). e Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of with other materials. Do not cover the back of
V the passenger seat. These could impair the
The knee airbags of the front seats are located in the the backrest. Do not make changes to the pas-
W knee area on the driver and the passenger side. function of the airbags, the seat belts, and senger's seat, the cushion or foam or to the seat
X
Y
Z
50
Airbag Systems
base frame. The inflation process generates the amount of gas To retrieve this information, special equipment is A
e Do not modify any wiring or components of the required to fill the airbags at the necessary pressure needed and access to the vehicle or feature that
in fractions of a second. stores that data is required. Some states only allow B
airbag system.
e Do not install any wiring for electrical accessory Airbags help to protect the head and body, while si- access to such information under restricted circum- C
equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring multaneously damping the motion of the driver and stances, including:
passenger in the impact direction in the event of a – In response to a request of police or other gov-
D
harnesses. Doing so may disable the airbag sys-
tem or cause inadvertent inflation. frontal impact or side impact. ernment office; or E
e If the airbag warning light on the tachometer il- In order to help provide protection in severe colli- – with the consent of the registered owner, or if
sions which can cause death and serious injury, air- the vehicle is leased, with the lessee, or F
luminates, the airbag system should be repaired
immediately by your authorized Porsche dealer. bags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high speed – through a discovery process in litigation; or as G
e Using accessories not approved by Porsche can inflation has a negative but unavoidable side effect, otherwise permitted or required by law.
which is that it can and does cause injuries, including H
cause the capacitance occupant sensing system Your rights with respect to the information dis-
to be impaired. facial and arm abrasions, bruising and broken bones. I
cussed above may vary from state to state. Check
e Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin- You can help minimize such injuries by always
your state law for further information.
wearing your seat belts. J
guisher, or first aid kit under the seat.
e Only have seats removed and installed by an au- There are many types of accidents in which airbags
Advanced Airbag K
thorized Porsche dealer so that capacitance oc- are not expected to deploy. These include accidents
where the airbags would provide little or no benefit, Your vehicle is equipped with capacitance occupant L
cupant sensing components will not be
such as a rear impact, or certain diagonal impacts sensing for the front passenger seat in accordance M
damaged.
against your vehicle. Other accidents where the air- with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
bag system is designed not to deploy are those 208. N
Information where the risk of injury from the airbag deployment The components of the advanced passenger airbag O
could exceed any protective benefits, such as in low system include a capacitance occupant sensing
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, seats) may P
speed accidents or higher speed accidents where system for the front passenger seat and a PASSEN-
be disassembled only by an authorized Porsche
the vehicle decelerates slowly over a longer time. GER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light. The system
dealer. Q
Since airbag deployment does not occur in all acci- measures the electrical capacitance acting on the
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety in- dents, this further emphasizes the need for you and seat to determine whether the front passenger air- R
structions must be followed. These instructions can your passengers to always wear seat belts. bag should be switched on or off.
be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. S
Your Porsche vehicle is equipped with electronically Depending on the angle and force of impact, only a
controlled systems that help to ensure your vehicle passenger airbag that is switched-on by the capaci- T
operates properly. These systems monitor the oper- tance system will be triggered during a collision. You
Function of the Airbag System ation of various systems and electronically store in- can determine the on/off status of the passenger U
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your pri- formation that is useful to service technicians when airbag system from the indicator lamp on the over- V
mary protection comes from your seat belts. The they need to diagnose and repair these systems. head console.
front airbags are triggered during a frontal collision Your vehicle is equipped with crash-sensing diag- > Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of W
of sufficient force and direction. nostic devices that may record information at the the passenger airbag" on page 52. X
In the event of a side impact of corresponding force, time of a collision, including whether the airbag and If the front passenger airbag is turned on, the PAS-
the side airbag on the impact side is triggered. seatbelt pretensioners deployed and whether the SENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light will go out and
Y
seat belt was in use. the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator light is Z
51
Airbag Systems
A continuously illuminated when the ignition is DANGER passenger's airbag may be switched off.
B
switched on and/or the engine is running. If the e Select an upright seat position, and do not sup-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light stays illu- port weight on the armrests or center console, or
Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the
C minated, the passenger airbag will not deploy. lean out of the window while driving.
passenger airbag triggering unintentionally.
D Improper Use of Front e If the front passenger seat gets wet, dry it e Always keep feet positioned on the floor in the
DANGER
Passenger Seat immediately. footwell while driving. Do not put feet on the
E
e If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat, this dashboard or the seat area.
Improper use of the front passenger seat can unin-
F can keep the airbag system from working prop-
tentionally impair operation of capacitance occupant
erly and may, for instance, deactivate or activate
G sensing for the passenger’s airbag.
the passenger frontal airbag. If this happens, the
Adjusting the passenger seat
H If the electrical capacitance of an adult on the pas- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light Reclining Passenger
senger's seat is not properly maintained, the pas- WARNING
and the airbag warning light on the instrument Seatback
I senger's airbag may be switched off. cluster may come on.
J e Always make sure that there is nothing on the e If liquid is pooled on the front passenger seat, but
Seat belts only offer protection when the backrest is
front passenger seat that could cause the ca- positioned at an upright seating angle and the belts
K has not soaked in, this may also keep the ca-
pacitance occupant sensing system to judge that are properly positioned on the body.
pacitance occupant sensing for the front pas-
L the seat is occupied by a person when it is not. senger seat from working properly and cause the e Do not operate the vehicle with the driver or
e Never use cushions, pillows, blankets or similar passenger frontal airbag to be enabled (turned passenger backrests excessively reclined.
M
items on the front passenger seat. The additional on), even though there is a properly installed
N layers prevent the capacitance occupant sensing child restraint system on the seat. Wet towels or
for the front passenger seat from accurately other wet things on the seat cushion can have Modify vehicle to accomodate
O
measuring the capacitance of the child restraint the same effect. persons with disabilities
P system and/or the person on the seat and thus Because modifications to your vehicle could com-
keep the advanced airbag system from working Improper Front Passen- promise your advanced airbag system, please call
Q WARNING
properly. ger Seating 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your vehicle
R e Never place or use any electrical device (such as modified.
a cell phone, tablet, laptop, CD player, electronic Improper use of the front passenger seat can unin-
S tentionally impair operation of capacitance occupant
T
games device or power inverter) on the front
sensing for the passenger’s airbag.
Automatic deactivation of the
passenger seat if the device is connected to the
cigarette lighter socket. Such device can influ- If the electrical capacitance of an adult on the front passenger airbag
U
ence the capacitance registered by the capaci- passenger seat is not properly maintained, the Child Restraint in Front
V tance occupant sensing for the front passenger DANGER
Seat
W seat, so that incorrect information is provided to
the airbag control unit. The use of a child restraint system in the front pas-
X senger’s seat can result in serious personal injury or
Y
Z
52
Airbag Systems
death to the child from an airbag deployment Information inflating airbag. A

To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an In this case: B
Depending on the weight, body positioning and
accident, Porsche strongly recommends: e Child restraint systems facing forwards: Install
shape acting on the passenger's seat, it can occur in C
e Under all normal circumstances, the child seat the case of heavier children that the passenger air- on the rear seats.
must be placed in the rear. Do not use a child bag is active or, in the case of very light adults or e Child restraint systems facing rearwards: Do not D
restraint system on the front passenger seat. young persons, that the passenger airbag is drive with a rearward facing child restraint
system.
E
deactivated.
Before transporting a child on the passenger seat: e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author- F
> Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems
The condition of the passenger airbag system is
shown by the indicator light in the overhead operat- ized Porsche dealer.
(Child Seats)" on page 91. G
ing console. If in doubt:
– When an up to one-year old child is seated in the
e Fasten the forward facing child restraint system H
child restraint system on the front seat, the pas-
on the rear seat or transport the passenger on Detecting faults
senger airbag will be automatically deactivated. I
the rear seat. Faults are indicated by the red airbag warning light
– When an adult is seated in the front passenger J
seat the front airbag is automatically activated. on the tachometer.
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light lights up
The airbag warning light illuminates when the elec- K
The passenger airbag is switched off. tronic monitoring of the airbag system detects a
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light does not light up malfunction of the sensors, seat belt system, occu- L
The passenger airbag is active and ready for pant detection system, PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator M
operation. light, related wiring, airbag modules and control
units. N
Information e In the following cases you should immediately O
consult an authorized Porsche dealer in order to
After switching on the ignition, the PASS AIR BAG assure the airbag system is functioning P
OFF indicator light lights up for a few seconds as a properly:
Fig. 13: PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light check. Q
– If the warning light does not light up when
the ignition is switched on or R
Child Seat Detection – If the warning light does not go out once the
DANGER
Fault
S
engine is running or
– If the warning light appears while driving. T
When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old
child is seated in the child restraint system on the U
passenger seat the indicator light Information
V
PASS AIR BAG OFF must be on. Further information on the airbag system can be
found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as well W
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator light does not
light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and as on all airbag components. X
the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the For special recommendations on the use of child
restraints: Y
child at risk of death or severe injury from the
Z
53
Airbag Systems
A > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems

(Child Seats)" on page 91.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
54
Air Conditioning System (2-Zone Automatic Air Conditioning)
Air Conditioning System (2- A

Zone Automatic Air B
Conditioning) C
D
Brief Overview
E
This brief overview does not replace the compre-
hensive descriptions provided in the "Air Condition- F
ing System (2-Zone Automatic Air Conditioning)"
G
chapter. Safety messages and warnings, in particu-
lar, are not replaced by this brief overview. H
The air-conditioning system can be set using the I
buttons in the center console and via the PCM.
> Please see chapter "Porsche Communication J
Management (PCM)" on page 197. K
L
Fig. 14: Brief Overview – Air Conditioning

M
N
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?
O
Defrost windshield e Press button A. > p. 60
P
Switch on heated rear screen/door mirror heating e Press button B. > p. 60 Q
Switch on air-recirculation manually In some countries, air-recirculation mode can be > p. 59 R

switched on using the button in the center console S
or using the PCM touch display.
e Press button C.
T
– or – U
e CLIMATE e AIR e V
W
Switch A/C MAX mode (maximum air condition- In some countries, A/C MAX mode can be switched > p. 57
ing) on on using the button in the center console or using X
the PCM touch display. Y
e Press button C.
– or – Z
55
A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

B
C e CLIMATE e AIR e A/C MAX
D e Press button D. > p. 57

Switch on automatic mode
E
Set temperature e Press button E for the left side or button G for > p. 57
F the right side up (warmer) or down (colder).
G
Set air flow manually e Press button F up (increase) or down > p. 58
H (decrease).
I > p. 59
Set the strength of the air flow in automatic mode
J e CLIMATE e AIR e Style
K > p. 58
Manually adjust the air distribution
L e CLIMATE e AIR e Air distribution
M > p. 59
Set the footwell temperature
N e CLIMATE e AIR e Footwell
O > p. 58
Adjust the upper ventilation panel
P e CLIMATE e AIR e Center
Q
Depending on various factors like the vehicle interior The air-conditioning system operates most effec- at temperatures below approx. 36°F (2°C) and can-
R temperature, sunlight or air quality, the air condi- tively with the windows closed. not be switched on, even manually.
tioning system adjusts the temperature, air distri- If heat builds up in the vehicle interior: Temporarily setting the temperature to a lower or
S
bution and air flow fully automatically in automatic e briefly air the interior by opening the windows. higher value does not cool or heat the vehicle interior
T mode. Depending on the outside temperature and humid- to the desired temperature more quickly.
Automatic mode is deactivated as soon as the set- ity, condensation may drip from under the vehicle.
U
tings for the relevant function selected are adjusted This is quite normal and is not a defect. 2-zone air conditioning
V manually. In this case, automatic air conditioning If the battery voltage is too low, the air conditioning The temperature can be set individually for the left
continues to regulate the functions that have not functions are initially restricted and then switched and right climate zones. The air flow, air distribution,
W been changed manually. off. type of air conditioning footwell temperature and
X The air-conditioning system can be operated both The cooling function can switch off briefly to ensure can be set for the entire vehicle interior.
using the buttons in the center console and in the sufficient engine cooling when the engine is operat-
Y rear, as well as using the touch display in the PCM. ing under extreme load. It switches off automatically
Z
56
Switching air conditioning on and Switching maximum cooling out- Setting temperature A
off put on/off - A/C MAX mode B
The air-conditioning function can be switched off In A/C MAX mode, the vehicle interior is cooled at
and on in the entire vehicle. maximum power.
C
In some countries, A/C MAX mode can be switched D
e CLIMATE e AIR e Ventilation on and off using the button in the center console or
The display A/C OFF appears in the air-condi- using the PCM touch display.
E
tioning display in the center console, the out- F
side air supply is interrupted and the air-
conditioning is switched off. G
H
Switching on automatic mode I
The climate zones can be switched to automatic
mode. J
e Press button on the air-conditioning K
control panel.
The symbol on the button lights up.
L
Air temperature, flow and distribution are auto- M
matically controlled. Fig. 16: Setting temperature and air flow
If necessary, the automatic system can be controlled
N
A Set the temperature of the relevant air-conditioned
manually using a different function button. The area, appears on air-conditioning system display O
manual setting is retained until the relevant function B Set air flow and display on the air-conditioning display.
button is pressed again or until the but- P
The temperature of each air-conditioning zone can
ton is pressed. Q
Fig. 15: Maximum cooling output be adjusted individually between 62 and 84 °F (16.5
and 29 °C). R
Switching the cooling function on e Press button on the air-conditioning control Recommendation: 72°F (22°C) with cooling function
and off panel. switched on (A/C). S
The button lights up red or goes out. The selected temperature is indicated in the air- T
The cooling function cools and dries the air.
A/C MAX mode is switched off or on. conditioning system display in the center console.
In automatic mode, the cooling function is activated
– or – U
by default. The cooling output is automatically
Increasing and reducing temperature V
controlled. e CLIMATE e AIR e A/C MAX
e Press button A for the relevant air-con-
e CLIMATE e AIR e A/C A/C MAX mode is switched off or on.
ditioning zone upward or downward.
W
The cooling function is switched off or on. If LO or HI appears on the air-conditioning system X
display in the center console, the system is operat-
ing at maximum cooling or heating power. The Y
Z
57
A button is still illuminated, blower is Adjusting air vents Adjusting air distribution
regulated.
B Adjusting front air distribution
> Please see chapter "Using air-conditioning set-
C
tings for entire vehicle – SYNC mode" on 1. CLIMATE e AIR
D page 59.
2. Selecting air distribution:
E
Setting air flow The air flows toward the windshield and
F The selected air quantity is shown in a bar display on the side windows.
G the air-conditioning system in the center console The air flows toward the windshield and
above the button. The more bars that are dis- the side windows.
H played, the more air flows into the vehicle interior. The air flows from the center vent and
I side vents.
Increasing and reducing air flow
J e Press button upward or downward. Adjusting the upper ventilation panel
K Pressing button switches back to auto-
matic mode.
L If the air flow was reduced so much that OFF ap-
M pears on the air-conditioning display, the outside air
supply is interrupted and the air-conditioning is Fig. 17: Adjusting air vents
N switched off. Risk of damage to air
NOTICE
O Impaired vision with air vents.
WARNING
flow OFF
P e Do not insert any objects (e.g. smartphone cra-
Q The windows can mist up if the air flow setting is dle, air freshener) into the air vents.
OFF.
R e To increase the air flow again, press button
Opening and closing air vents
S upward or switch on automatic mode again.
e Turn the thumb wheel on the air vent upward or
T downward.
U Changing air flow direction
V e Swivel vent vanes in the desired direction.
Fig. 18: Adjusting the upper ventilation panel
W
The ventilation panel on the dashboard can be acti-
X vated or deactivated separately. The direction of the
air flow can be adjusted manually on horizontal lines.
Y
The air-conditioning system regulates the air flow
Z automatically.
58
Switching air flow on or off Switching air-recirculation mode e CLIMATE e AIR e A

1. CLIMATE e AIR
on and off manually B
Impaired vision in man-
Switching off air-recirculation mode manually
2. Select ventilation panel . WARNING e Press button .
C
ual recirculation mode
– or – D
Changing air flow direction In prolonged manual air-recirculation mode, the Press button .
e Swivel vent vanes in the desired direction. windows may mist up. As no fresh air is supplied, the – or –
E
driver can get tired and become less attentive. F
Setting climate style e CLIMATE e AIR e
e Do not switch on manual air-recirculation mode
G
Three air flow settings are available for the entire for an extended period.
vehicle interior in automatic mode.
In some countries, air-recirculation mode can be
Switching the ionizer on and off H
1. CLIMATE e AIR e Style switched on and off using the button in the center b Vehicles with ionizer (depending on equipment). I
console or using the PCM touch display. In regions with poor air quality – e.g. in large cities –
2. Select the desired climate style. J
the ionizer can help achieve better air quality in the
Switching on air-recirculation mode manually vehicle interior. K
Setting the footwell temperature Ionization itself does not produce any odor.
L
The footwell temperature can be set at a lower e Open the center vent.
M
temperature compared to the general vehicle interior
temperature. e CLIMATE e AIR QUALITY e Ionizer N
1. CLIMATE e AIR e Footwell O

Using air-conditioning settings for P
2. Select desired footwell temperature.
entire vehicle – SYNC mode
Q
e CLIMATE e AIR e SYNC
Switching automatic air-recircu- SYNC mode is switched on or off. When SYNC
R
lation mode on and off mode is activated, the display indicator values S
In automatic air-recirculation mode, the outside air for the passenger-side air-conditioned areas
supply is regulated depending on the air quality. At adopt the same values as the driver side.
T
outside temperatures below approx. 41°F (5°C), air- U
recirculation mode is automatically deactivated to Recommended air-conditioning settings for
prevent the windows from misting. V
lone drivers
e Switch on SYNC mode in the PCM for maximum
W
e CLIMATE e AIR e Auto air circ. Fig. 19: Switching air-recirculation mode on and off
e Press button . vehicle interior comfort. X
When air-recirculation mode is switched on, the Y
button lights up red.
– or – Z
59
A Storing A/C settings Switching the heated rear screen Information

B The selected air conditioning setting is automatically and door mirror heating on and off Cabriolet only: Risk of damage to rubber seals with
saved in the vehicle key via the respective driver
C profile. the convertible top open as a result of repeatedly
D > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on switching on the heated rear screen/door mirror
page 186. heating.
E e Do not switch the heated rear screen/door mirror
heating on several times in succession once the
F Defrosting windshield heating function has automatically been
G switched off after 5 to 20 minutes.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Fig. 21: Heated rear screen/door mirror heating button
O
Switching on heated rear screen and door
P
mirror heating
Q b Engine is running.
R e Press button .
Fig. 20: Defrosting windshield
The button lights up orange.
S Depending on the outside temperature, the heated
Switching defroster mode on
rear screen/door mirror heating switches off auto-
T e Press button .
matically after approx. 5 to 20 minutes.
U The button lights up orange.
The air flows toward the windshield and the front Switching off heated rear screen and door
V side windows. mirror heating
W The windshield is defogged/defrosted very
e Press button .
quickly.
X The orange illumination of the button goes out.
Y Switching defroster mode off
e Press button .
Z
The orange illumination of the button goes out.
60
Alarm system
Alarm system Switching off the alarm system Faults in the central locking system and alarm A
The alarm system monitors the following alarm when the alarm has been system
B
contacts: During locking of the vehicle, the light indicators
– Alarm contacts in doors, hood, engine lid and
triggered flash rapidly, light up continuously for 28 seconds C
convertible top. e Press the button on the vehicle key. and then flash in normal mode.
D
– Passenger compartment monitoring system: – or –
Movement inside this area when the vehicle is e Switch on ignition. Preventing theft E
locked, e.g. attempted theft by breaking a Before leaving the vehicle, always: F
window. Switching off passenger com- e Close the windows, roof system and convertible
– Inclination sensor: Vehicle incline (e.g. during an G
attempt to tow the vehicle away).
partment monitoring system and top. This will also prevent a false alarm by the
passenger compartment monitoring system. H
– Diagnostic socket. inclination sensor e Activate the parking lock P and the electric
If people or animals are remaining in the vehicle, the I
If one of these alarm contacts is triggered, the alarm parking brake.
passenger compartment monitoring system and in-
horn sounds for approx. 25 seconds and the emer- e Switch ignition off. J
clination sensor together with SAFELOCK can be
gency flasher flashes for approx. 300 seconds. e Close the glove compartment. K
deactivated when locking the vehicle (country-
The acoustic alarm is triggered again after a 5 sec-
dependent). e Close all storage compartments.
ond interval. This cycle is repeated up to ten times
> Please see chapter "Central Locking" on page 85. e Remove valuables, car papers, phone and house L
(country-dependent). keys from the vehicle. M
e Close the doors and luggage compartment lid.
Switching the alarm system on/ Alarm system function display e Close the engine lid / glass rear screen (Targa). N
The lock status is indicated by the light indicators in
off e Lock the vehicle. O
the doors flashing at different frequencies.
e The alarm system is activated after approx. 30 P
seconds when the vehicle is locked. Alarm system is activated Immobilizer
e The alarm system is deactivated when the ve- The light indicators flash rapidly when the vehicle is Every vehicle key contains a transponder (electronic Q
hicle is unlocked. being locked, then flash in normal mode. component) with a stored code. R
An authorized vehicle key is required in order to de-
Information The alarm system is activated and the pas- activate the immobilizer and start the engine. S
senger compartment monitoring system and T
If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency key in
inclination sensor are deactivated
the door lock, you must switch the ignition on within U
15 seconds of opening the door in order to prevent The light indicators flash rapidly when the vehicle is
the alarm system from being triggered. being locked, go out for 28 seconds and then flash in V
normal mode.
The time it takes to trigger the alarm system differs W
from country to country.
X
Y
Z
61
Apple® CarPlay
A Apple® CarPlay e To go from a different menu item to Apple® e To access the main menu within Apple®
B CarPlay, select Apple CarPlay . CarPlay select the Home button on the
Information touch display of the PCM.
C
Apple CarPlay® must be selected when connecting Information e To go to the main functions of the PCM, select
D
for the first time. It is then possible to switch be- – Recommendation: Install the latest iOS version. Apple CarPlay e Porsche.
E tween iPod and Apple CarPlay as desired. – Only those apps in the iPhone that are supported – or –
F by Apple CarPlay TM can be displayed. For infor-
> Please see chapter "Switching between Ap- Select a function (for example, MEDIA ).
mation on supported apps, go to www.apple.
G ple CarPlay and use of the iPhone as an iPod" on
com/ios/carplay.
H
page 63.
– The function can only be offered in countries Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
I Opening Apple® CarPlay in the
supported by Apple. For information on sup- voice recognition
ported countries:refer to www.apple.com/ios/
J PCM feature-availability/#apple-carplay. Starting Siri
– The content and functions displayed within the b Siri must be activated in the settings of the
K Apple CarPlay TM function are provided exclu- iPhone used.
L sively by the connected iPhone. b Ignition and PCM must be switched on.
M
– When Apple CarPlay TM s used, active Blue- b There must be no active phone call.
tooth® connections (such as telephony, media
b ParkAssist must not be active.
playback, or messages) are automatically
N b Voice control of the PCM must be active.
disconnected.
O – Some apps require an active data connection.
P You may incur additional charges, depending on
Fig. 22: USB port in the armrest your cellphone tariff, and particularly if using
Q abroad. The use of a flat-rate data plan is
b iPhone 7 or later, iOS 12.2 or higher. recommended.
R b Siri and Apple® CarPlay must be activated in the
S settings of the iPhone that is used. For information on operating the Porsche
b Use undamaged original cables from Apple Communication Management system (PCM):
T without a USB adapter to ensure trouble-free > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication Fig. 23: Voice control button on the steering wheel
U use. Management (PCM)" on page 197.
V 1. Connect your iPhone to the USB port (type A) A 1. Press and hold the button on the control
in the armrest. Operating Apple® CarPlay in the lever.
W 2. Say the desired voice command.
2. Confirm the notice that Apple CarPlay is being PCM
X used. The available apps are displayed. All available apps can be operated via the touch dis- Ending Siri
play, the rotary push button and the Back button of
Y Apple CarPlay is opened. b Siri active and waiting for a voice command.
the PCM.
Z e Press the button on the control lever.
62
Apple® CarPlay
A fading acoustic signal sounds. Apple CarPlay is opened. The available apps are A
For information on voice control: displayed.
B
> Please see chapter "Voice Control" on page 272. After you have connected the iPhone once, Apple
CarPlay starts automatically when you get into the C
Switching between Apple CarPlay vehicle. You can leave the cellphone in your bag or D
and use of the iPhone as an iPod trouser pocket, for example. (The Bluetooth® func-
E
tion and WiFi function must be activated.)
If the connected iPhone is connected as an iPod,
Apple CarPlay is not available. Use the Device Man- e To go from a different menu item to Apple Car- F
ager to switch between use of the iPhone as an iPod Play, select Apple CarPlay . G
or Apple CarPlay.
H
1. To open the Device Manager, select or Deleting stored iPhone from list of devices
I
(depending on the connection status) in the
header. 1. Select or in the header (depending on J
the connection status) e Options . K
2. Select Link of the iPhone used.
2. Select the desired device. L
Calling up Wireless Apple CarPlay M
(availability dependent on equip- N
ment and country) O
Wireless CarPlay allows you to use Apple CarPlay
without wires or cables. Wireless CarPlay always P
supports only one active cellphone.
Q
b The Bluetooth® function of the cellphone is acti-
vated and is visible for other devices. R
b The cellphone WiFi function is activated. S
b Wireless CarPlay activated on the cellphone.
T
1. Press or in the header (depending on U
the connection status) or select e Apple
CarPlay or Link under Connection Man- V
ager in the menu. W
2. Select the device from the list. X
3. Confirm the notice that Apple CarPlay is being Y
used.
Z
63
Apps
A Apps b The PCM WiFi function is activated. Information

B Various apps are available for your vehicle, depend-
ing on the country (download from Apple App Store Since it is possible to access vehicle-specific data
C or GOOGLE® Play Store). and other functions through the app, it is recom-
mended that this data be protected from unauthor-
D DANGER
Configuring settings and ized third-party access. Using the app could incur
operating while driving additional costs with your cellphone service pro-
E
vider, as the data is transmitted via cellphone
F Configuring settings and operating apps while driv-
networks.
ing can distract you from the traffic. You may lose
G control of the vehicle.
Fig. 24: Opening the Device Manager
H e Only use apps and configure settings while the Porsche Track Precision App
vehicle is stationary. 1. Display the WiFi access data of the PCM and
I establish a WiFi connection between your cell- The Porsche Track Precision App (availability de-
phone and the PCM. pendent on country) can be used to connect to the
J Information vehicle via a wireless local network (WiFi). This en-
a. In the header or (depending on ables driving data to be displayed, recorded and an-
K Further information about Porsche Connect (Help connection status) select e Options e alyzed directly on a cellphone. You do not necessarily
L videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and Vehicle hotspot. need a SIM card/data connection to use the Porsche
Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por- Track Precision App.
M Hotspot name and password of the PCM
sche.com/connect..
are displayed. For information on establishing a WiFi connection in
N b. Enter the WiFi access data of the PCM in the PCM:
O the WiFi settings of the cellphone. > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on
Porsche Connect App page 204.
P Porsche Connect App provides for the networking of 2. Select Apps . Detailed information on installation and the Porsche
vehicle and cellphone. Available contents of the Porsche Connect App Track Precision App functions are available in the
Q
Personal POIs (Points of Interest), destinations from are displayed. app itself and at www.porsche.com or from your
R the address book or calendar entries can be trans-
Communication between the vehicle and Porsche authorized Porsche dealer.
ferred to the PCM from the cellphone. Depending on
S the country, you can access music tracks with the
Connect App can be suppressed.
DANGER
Loss of control over the
> Please see chapter "Private mode" on page 206. vehicle
T music streaming function once the necessary apps
have been installed or you have created an account. Driving at excessive speeds and risky maneuvers
U
may lead to loss of control over the vehicle.
Connecting the Porsche Connect App to the
V e Adapt your driving style and maneuvers to your
PCM via WiFi and opening it on the PCM
W personal ability, the road and weather conditions,
b Porsche Connect App is installed on your cell- as well as the traffic situation.
X phone (download from Apple App Store or GOO- e Only use the app on closed circuits away from
GLE® Play Store).
Y public roads.
b Porsche Connect App is started.
Z b The cellphone WiFi function is activated.
64
Apps
Information A
Since vehicle-specific data can be accessed using B

the app, it is recommended to protect this data from C
unauthorized access by third parties.
D
E
Porsche Road Trip App
F
The Porsche Road Trip app allows you to plan and
book complete trips with all stopovers (e.g. the best G
lookout points, restaurants and hotels along the
route as part of the customized travel plan).
H
Further information is available at www.porsche. I
com/connect.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
65
Auto Start Stop function
A Auto Start Stop function Vehicles with manual transmis- The accelerator pedal is pressed with the driver's
B When the vehicle stops, e.g. at a traffic light or in a sion1: Engine stop and engine door closed and the driver's seat belt fastened.
traffic jam, the engine automatically stops, provided
C all the requirements for the auto stop function are
start If the driver leaves the vehicle while the engine has
stopped automatically (driver's door open and pedals
met. In addition, the engine can also stop automati- released), the requirements specified above must be
D Engine stop
cally when the vehicle stops while moving at walking detected within 30 seconds in order for the engine
E speed. In this way, the Auto Start Stop function 1. Brake the vehicle with the footbrake.
to start and Auto Start Stop mode to be resumed.
helps to save fuel. 2. Move the gear lever to neutral.
F Switching off the Auto Start Stop function within 30
The ignition remains on, even when the engine is 3. Release the clutch pedal. seconds after leaving the vehicle will result in an
G stopped automatically. All safety functions continue The engine stops. engine start only after closing the driver's door and
to operate. fastening the driver's seat belt. If none of these re-
H Engine start quirements are met, the engine must be started
I Prerequisites for the auto engine stop e Press the clutch pedal. manually 30 seconds after leaving the vehicle. A
b Auto Start/Stop function switched on. You can drive off normally. message prompting you to start the engine manually
J
b Engine, transmission and air conditioning have appears on the instrument cluster.
K reached operating temperature. Information > Please see chapter "Starting and Stopping the
L b The vehicle has traveled at least at walking Engine" on page 245.
speed since the last automatic engine stop. The engine will start automatically in certain situa-
M Vehicles with PDK tions, e.g. in order to maintain a comfortable tem- Vehicles with PDK: Engine stop
perature. The gear lever must be in neutral. In some
N b Brake pedal pressed. and engine start
cases, a message prompting you to press the brake
b Operating mode D, M, N or P selected.
O pedal will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
b Driver’s seat belt fastened or driver’s door Engine stop
P closed. 1. Brake vehicle with the brake pedal.
Vehicles with manual transmission. Reaction after leaving the vehicle 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
Q
b Driver's door closed. If the driver's door is opened during an automatic – or –
R b Gear lever in neutral and clutch pedal released. engine stop, the engine will not start automatically. e Press the P button on the selector lever when the
S An automatic engine start can still be performed by vehicle is stationary.
pressing the clutch pedal down fully.
T Auto Start Stop mode is resumed if one of the fol-
U lowing requirements is detected:
– The brake pedal is pressed, the driver's door is
V closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened.
W – or –
The driver's door is closed and the driver's seat
X belt is then fastened.
Y – or –
Z
66
Information Information The driver's door is closed and the driver's seat A
belt is then fastened.
The HOLD function can be activated by flooring the The engine will start automatically in certain situa- – or – B
pressed brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary. tions, e.g. in order to maintain a comfortable tem- The accelerator pedal is pressed with the driver's C
This keeps the vehicle at an engine stop without perature. In some cases, a message prompting you door closed and the driver's seat belt fastened.
having to continuously press the brake pedal. to press the brake pedal will also be displayed on the D
Switching off the Auto Start Stop function within 30
The engine starts automatically when the accelera- instrument cluster. E
seconds after leaving the vehicle results in an engine
tor pedal is pressed or when the engine needs to be start only after the driver's door has been closed and
started. F
Information the seat belt has been fastened. If none of these re-
quirements are met, the engine has to be started G
If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is active, the engine manually 30 seconds after leaving the vehicle. A
Information H
starts automatically when the vehicle in front moves message prompting you to start the engine manually
If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is switched on, the off again. appears on the instrument cluster. I
engine stops automatically when the vehicle is sta- > Please see chapter "Starting and Stopping the
tionary if the vehicle ahead has also come to a Engine" on page 245.
J
standstill. Reaction after leaving the vehicle > Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 229. K
The vehicle is held in a stationary position by the After leaving the vehicle after the engine has stop-
L
HOLD function. ped automatically (driver's seat belt unfastened,
driver’s door open and brake pedal released), the
Exceptional conditions for the
Auto Start Stop function M
engine will not start automatically. Additionally, in
Engine start operating mode D, R or M: The Auto Start Stop function is not available in the N
b Operating mode D, M, N or P selected. – The electric parking brake is engaged. following cases:
O
e Release the brake pedal (not in operating mode – The transmission parking lock P is engaged. – SPORT/SPORT PLUS driving programs active.
P). – PSM switched off or in Sport mode. P
The vehicle can still be moved with the driver's door
– or – open and the driver's seat belt unfastened by re- – Front axle lift system active. Q
e Press the accelerator pedal. leasing the electric parking brake manually. In this – "Maximum cooling" function is activated.
– or – case, the parking brake remains released and the – "Defrost windshield" function is activated. R
e Move the steering wheel. selected transmission range is still engaged. – At high altitudes. S
– or – If the parking brake is released in operating mode D, The Auto Start Stop function is only available to a T
e Select operating mode R. R or M, or if operating mode D, R or M is selected limited extent in the following cases:
You can drive off normally. while the brake pedal is pressed, the engine starts – When the demands placed on the air condition- U
again. ing or interior heating are high. V
Auto Start Stop mode is resumed if one of the fol- – When the battery charge is low.
lowing conditions is detected within 30 seconds of W
– On upward or downward slopes.
leaving the vehicle:
– During internal tests, e.g. automatic engine X
– The brake pedal is pressed and either the driver's
diagnostics.
door is closed or the driver's seat belt is fastened. Y
– When the outside temperature or battery tem-
– or –
perature is very low or very high. Z
67
A Information – at least one prerequisite for the auto engine stop

is not met
B If one of these states occurs after the engine has – or –
C been stopped automatically, the engine can be re- – at least one exceptional condition for the Auto
started automatically. Start Stop function is met.
D
> Please see chapter "Prerequisites for the auto
E engine stop" on page 66.
Switching the Auto Start Stop > Please see chapter "Exceptional conditions for
F
function on and off the Auto Start Stop function" on page 67.
G
H Switching off Responding to warning message
If there is a fault, a message appears on the instru-
I e CAR e DRIVE e Start Stop ment cluster to indicate that Start Stop mode is
J The automatic engine shut-off is suppressed. deactivated.
e Have the fault repaired by an authorized Porsche
K Switching on dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Por-
L sche dealer, as they have trained technicians and
e CAR e DRIVE e Start Stop the necessary parts and tools.
M
The engine is switched off automatically when the
N vehicle comes to a standstill.
O
Auto Start Stop function display
P Automatic engine stop and restart
Q readiness
If the engine has been automatically stopped by the
R
Auto Start Stop function and it is possible to start
S the engine automatically, the light indicator on the
instrument cluster lights up green.
T
Engine is not ready to stop or restart
U
If it is not possible to stop the engine automatically
V
or it is not possible to restart the engine after the
W engine has been stopped automatically, the light in-
dicator on the instrument cluster lights up yellow
X when the vehicle is stationary.
Y The Auto Start Stop system has detected that:
Z
68
Battery
Battery vehicle. components. A

e Removing and installing the battery must only be e The battery should only be removed and installed B
carried out by an authorized Porsche dealer. Fire or explosion at an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom-
WARNING
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they C
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the have trained technicians and the necessary parts
Many automotive fluids are highly flammable, e.g. D
necessary parts and tools. and tools.
fuel, engine or transmission oil. Fuel vapors can
Depending on the model, country and equipment,
combust. A highly explosive electrolytic gas mixture e Always detach the negative terminal on the bat- E
the vehicle features either a lead-acid battery with tery when working on the electrical system.
can form when charging lead-acid batteries. F
AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology or a 12-volt
lithium battery (LiFePO4). e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the G
On vehicles with lithium batteries, the battery is battery when working on the electrical system.
marked with a sticker. e To avoid static charges building, do not wipe H
e Never remove, deface stickers or render them down the battery with a dry cloth. I
illegible. e Before touching the battery, first touch the ve-
hicle itself to allow any static charge to dissipate. J
e Never smoke or use naked flames near the bat-
Lead-acid battery tery. Also beware of sparks, e.g. as a result of
K
Proposition 65 Warning cable contact. L
WARNING
e Only work on the vehicle outdoors or in well- M
ventilated spaces.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories N
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known Corrosive electrolyte
to the State of California to cause cancer and repro- CAUTION O
ductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals P
known to the State of California to cause cancer. Lead-acid batteries contain highly caustic battery
Wash hands after handling. acid that can cause damage to the skin and clothing Q
in the event of contact. Fig. 25: Lead-acid battery R
WARNING
Electric shock, short cir- e Wear safety gloves and eye protection.
The lead-acid battery is located under the plastic S
cuit or fire e If battery acid gets into your eyes or on your skin:
cover in the luggage compartment. For information
Touching conductive parts of the vehicle can give Rinse with cold water for several minutes.
on removing the plastic cover:
T
you an electric shock. Working on the vehicle's > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on U
electrical system can cause a short circuit. The short NOTICE page 162.
V
circuit can cause a fire. e When emergency starting, never connect the
e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the Risk of short circuiting, fire and damage to the al- black negative cable directly to the battery. Al- W
battery when working on the electrical system. ternator and electronic control units and ways connect the black negative cable to the -
X
e Tools or conductive items of jewelry (rings, ground point.
necklaces, watchstraps) must not be allowed to > Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on Y
come in contact with conductive parts of the page 118.
Z
69
Battery
Safety symbols on the lead-acid battery Never dispose of old batteries as house- Charge the lead-acid battery
A
hold waste.
B Consult the Manual
C Lead-acid battery care

Wear protective goggles
D
Information
E Keep children away
A good battery charge state will help prevent the
F battery from freezing. A discharged battery can
G Risk of explosion freeze even at 32 °F (0 °C), but a fully charged one
A highly explosive electrolytic gas mix- only freezes at –40 °F (–40 °C).
H ture can form when charging the battery,
I therefore:
Fire, sparks, naked flames and smoking What do I What action do I need to take?
J are prohibited want to do?
K Avoid sparking and short circuits when
handling cables and electrical devices. In Prevent bat- e Switch off any electrical con-
L the case of batteries with central de- tery from sumers not required on short
gassing, there is a higher concentration discharging trips.
M
of explosive electrolytic gas at the hose e Switch off the ignition when Fig. 26: Lead-acid battery terminals
N opening. The degassing hose must not leaving the vehicle.
+ Positive terminal
be twisted or clogged with dirt. e Avoid using the PCM when
O - Ground point
Risk of chemical burns the engine is stopped.
P Battery acid is highly corrosive, there- WARNING
Charging a frozen or
fore: protective gloves and goggles must Battery care e Keep the surface of the bat- damaged battery
Q tery clean and dry.
be worn. Do not tilt the battery as acid
R can escape from the degassing outlet. e Make sure the connections to If a frozen or damaged battery is charged, there is a
First aid the battery terminals are danger of explosion and chemical burns.
S secure. e Never attempt to charge a frozen or damaged
If acid splashes into your eye, rinse im-
T mediately for a few minutes with clean battery.
Prepare for e Have the battery checked be-
water. Immediately seek medical atten-
U tion from a doctor. If acid splashes onto winter use fore winter begins. e Observe the instructions of the charger
V your skin or clothing, neutralize immedi- manufacturer.
e Never attempt to charge a
ately with soapsuds and rinse with
Charge the e Batteries should only be charged in a well venti-
W battery frozen or damaged battery.
plenty of water. If you accidentally drink lated area.
X acid, consult a doctor immediately. 1. Open the luggage compartment.
Disposal > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment
Y Hand in old batteries at a battery collec- Lid" on page 165.
Z tion point. 2. Remove cover in luggage compartment.
70
Battery
> Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on NOTICE A
on page 162. page 300.
B
3. Connect the red positive cable of the charger to 3. Store the final positions on vehicles with slide/ Risk of short circuiting, fire and damage to the al-
the positive terminal for emergency starting +. tilt sunroofs. ternator and electronic control units and C
4. Connect the black negative cable of the charger > Please see chapter "Slide/Tilt Sunroof" on components. D
to the - ground point. page 236.
e The battery should only be removed and installed
5. Switch on the charger. E
at an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom-
6. After charging, switch off the charger before Lithium battery mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they F
disconnecting it.
Electric shock, short cir- have trained technicians and the necessary parts
e For recommendations for a suitable charger: WARNING G
cuit, fire or explosion and tools.
Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the H
Touching conductive parts of the vehicle can give battery when working on the electrical system.
Replacing lead-acid battery you an electric shock. You can cause a short circuit
I
The data on the battery casing is not enough to when working on the vehicle's electrical system. The J
identify a comparable battery that will fulfill all the short circuit can cause a fire. Many automotive fluids
specific demands of a Porsche vehicle. K
are highly flammable, e.g. fuel, engine or transmis-
e Always have the battery replaced by an author- sion oil. Fuel vapors can combust. L
ized Porsche dealer.
e The battery should only be removed and installed
e Lead-acid batteries should only be replaced with M
at an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom-
AGM technology (Absorbent Glass Mat) batteries N
mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
that fulfill the specific demands of the vehicle.
have trained technicians and the necessary parts O
Porsche recommends original Porsche batteries.
and tools.
e A new battery needs to be registered in the con- P
trol unit after installation in the vehicle. Visit an Escaping electrolyte fluid
authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends WARNING Q
and toxic gas
an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have
R
trained technicians and the necessary parts and Risk of electrolyte fluid and toxic gases escaping in
tools. exceptional cases if the battery is damaged or
S
e Observe the disposal instructions for batteries. handled incorrectly. T
e Avoid any inhalation of the vapors and any skin U
Power interruption Fig. 27: Lithium battery
contact with the electrolyte fluid.
Following a temporary power interruption, some
e Keep people away and on the side facing into the The 12-volt lithium battery is located under the V
equipment must be reinitialized. plastic cover in the front luggage compartment. For
wind. W
1. Store the final position of the power windows. e Only charge lithium batteries in well-ventilated information on removing the plastic cover:
> Please see chapter "Windows" on page 320. spaces. > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on X
2. Teach wheels and tires in the Tire Pressure page 162.
Monitoring System (TPMS). The 12-volt lithium battery is automatically discon-
Y
nected from the vehicle electrical system if the Z
71
Battery
Disposal
A battery charge condition is low. The electrical sys- What do I What do I need to bear in mind?
tem is deactivated temporarily. When the battery is Turn in old batteries at a battery collec-
B tion point. want to do?
charging (for at least 10 minutes) or when emer-
C gency starting or connection to an external power Never dispose of old batteries as house- Charge the e Never attempt to charge a
supply takes place, the electrical system is auto- hold waste. damaged battery.
battery
D matically reactivated. The 12-volt lithium battery is Always have maintenance work carried
E automatically connected to the vehicle electrical out by qualified technicians Storing the e If the vehicle is left for long
supply again. Never attempt to replace the battery vehicle periods in the garage or
F > Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on yourself. Replace the lithium battery of workshop, the doors, covers
G page 118. this vehicle only with a lithium battery and lids of the vehicle should
e Never connect jumper cables directly to the explicitly intended by Porsche for this be closed.
H battery. vehicle. The use of other lithium or lead- e Switch ignition off.
acid batteries will result in considerable
I
Safety symbols on the lithium battery malfunctions. including total failure of
J the electrical system. Information
Consult the manual
Always have the battery replaced by an
K authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- The battery will run down even if the vehicle is out of
Wear protective goggles ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, operation.
L
as they have trained technicians and the e To maintain its function, charge the battery ap-
M Fire, sparks, naked flames and smoking necessary parts and tools. proximately every 6 weeks or connect it to a
are prohibited trickle charger suitable for lithium batteries with
N Avoid sparking and short circuits when Lithium battery care a CC/CV or pure CV characteristic. Porsche rec-
O handling cables and electrical devices. ommends the charger and charge maintenance
Keep children away unit from Porsche Tequipment.
P What do I What do I need to bear in mind?
want to do?
Q Risk of explosion
R Prevent bat- e Switch off any electrical con-
Risk of chemical burns sumers not required on short
tery from
S Electrolyte fluid is highly corrosive: Wear trips.
discharging
T
safety gloves and eye protection. e Switch off the ignition when
First aid leaving the vehicle.
U If electrolyte fluid splashes into your eye,
rinse immediately for a few minutes with Prepare for e Have the battery checked be-
V clean water. Immediately seek medical winter use fore winter begins.
W attention from a doctor. If electrolyte
fluid splashes onto your skin or clothing,
X neutralize immediately with soapsuds
Y and rinse with plenty of water. If you ac-
cidentally drink electrolyte fluid, consult
Z a doctor immediately.
72
Battery
Charging the lithium battery – Max. charging voltage: 14.8 V (even in the by Porsche for this vehicle. The use of other lith- A
event of a fault with battery disconnected; no ium or lead-acid batteries results in significant
voltage peaks permitted) B
malfunctions including total failure of the elec-
– Max. charging current: 90 A trical system. C
e If in doubt, contact an authorized Porsche dealer. e Always have the battery replaced by an author-
D
ized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an
e Observe the instructions of the charger authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained E
manufacturer. technicians and the necessary parts and tools.
F
e Batteries should only be charged in a well venti- e Observe the disposal instructions for lithium
lated area. batteries. G
1. Open the luggage compartment. H
> Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment"
Power interruption I
on page 162.
2. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for Following a temporary power interruption, some
equipment must be reinitialized. J
emergency starting +.
3. Connect the red positive cable of the charger to 1. Store the final position of the power windows. K
the positive terminal for emergency starting +. > Please see chapter "Windows" on page 320.
L
4. Connect the black negative cable of the charger 2. Teach wheels and tires in the Tire Pressure
to the – ground point. Monitoring System (TPMS). M
Fig. 28: Lithium battery terminals
5. Switch on the charger. > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on
N
Escaping irritating gases page 300.
CAUTION 6. After charging, switch off the charger before
due to a damaged disconnecting it. O
battery
7. Close the cap on the positive terminal for emer- P
The use of boosters or non-approved chargers can gency starting +.
Q
result in the battery being charged with excessively For recommendations for a suitable charger:
high charging voltage and excessively high charging e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. R
current. This can damage the battery and irritating S
gases can escape. This can cause considerable Replacing the lithium battery
damage to the vehicle and chemical burns. Danger of fire due to un- T
WARNING
e Do not use boosters. suitable lithium battery U
e Only use chargers that have been approved by
In addition to significant malfunctions of the vehicle V
the equipment manufacturer for LiFePO4 bat-
electrical system, use of an unsuitable lithium bat- W
teries with integrated electronic protection
tery or its incorrect installation may, in exceptional
circuits.
cases cause a fire (e.g. during charging). X
e The following maximum values must never be
exceeded: e Never attempt to replace the battery yourself. Y
Only have the lithium battery of this vehicle re-
placed with a lithium battery explicitly intended Z
73
Brake Fluid
A Brake Fluid Checking the brake fluid level

B e Read off the brake fluid level on the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level must always be between
C the MIN and MAX markings.
D e Have the brake fluid topped up if the brake fluid
level is below the MIN marking: Visit an author-
E ized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an
F
G
H Changing the brake fluid
I Swallowing Brake Fluid
DANGER
J
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health and may be
K fatal if swallowed.
L e Keep brake fluid out of children's reach.
e Keep brake fluid away from pets. They can be
M
Fig. 29: Brake fluid reservoir attracted to it should there be a spill, or to used
N brake fluid left in an open container.
Responding to warning message e If brake fluid gets on your skin or into your eye,
O
If the brake fluid level is too low, the warning light immediately rinse the affected party of your
P (USA: , Canada: ) appears in the instru- body with clean water for a few minutes. Then
ment cluster and a warning message is displayed. If see a doctor immediately.
Q
the warning light comes on and more force must be e Note all the information on the refill container of
R applied to the pedal, this may indicate a fault in the the brake fluid.
brake system.
S
e Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and do not The brake fluid is regularly checked and changed as
T continue driving. part of servicing.
e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- e Do not change the brake fluid yourself.
U Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
V have trained technicians and the necessary parts ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
and tools. have trained technicians and the necessary parts
W > Please see chapter "Driving on race circuits" on and tools.
X page 18. > Please see chapter "Before driving: Important
information regarding your Porsche" on page 17.
Y
Z
74
Brakes
Brakes 1. Press the brake pedal. Activating the emergency braking function A
2. Press button. In the event of failure of the conventional brakes, the B
Electric parking brake The brake warning light (USA: /Canada: vehicle can be decelerated significantly and brought
The electric parking brake acts on the rear wheels ) goes out. to a stop using the electric parking brake. C
and is used to secure the vehicle when it is e Pull and hold switch. D
stationary. Automatically releasing the parking brake The brake warning light (USA: /Canada:
Despite the active parking brake, you can drive off as ) and the light indicator on the switch E
normal. start to flash. F
b Engine is running. To deactivate the emergency brake function:
b Driver's door closed. e Release the switch. G
b Driver's seat belt fastened or operating mode D, Severe deceleration H
R or M selected. WARNING
The electric parking brake detects the start request I
and opens automatically. Emergency braking results in a very high braking
J
If one of these prerequisites is not fulfilled, the force. This can endanger any following traffic and
electric parking brake is not automatically released control over the vehicle may be lost. K
when the driver attempts to drive off. e Only use the emergency braking function in an L
A message appears on the instrument cluster. The emergency.
brake warning light (USA: /Canada: ) and e Do not use the emergency braking function when M
the light indicator on the switch start to flash. driving normally. N
Messages" on page 280. O
Responding to warning message
P
Fig. 30: Switch for electric parking brake
Automatic engagement of the parking brake Brake warning light USA
b Vehicles with PDK. Brake warning light Canada Q
Applying the parking brake b Vehicle is stationary. R
If the electric parking brake cannot be fully applied
e Pull switch. b Operating mode D, R or M selected. when the vehicle is stationary, the light indicator on S
The light indicator on the switch and the b Driver’s door is opened. the button and the brake warning light flash.
brake warning light (USA: /Canada: ) b Driver’s seat belt is unfastened. > Please see chapter "Warning and Information T
light up. The electric parking brake engages automatically. Messages" on page 280. U
For information on warning lights and light The light indicator on the switch and the brake
indicators: warning light (USA: /Canada: ) in the Footbrake V
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information instrument panel come on. W
Messages" on page 280. For information on warning lights and light Vehicles with standard brake system
indicators: X
Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed gray
Manually releasing the parking brake > Please see chapter "Warning and Information cast iron, they will unavoidably start to corrode if the Y
b Ignition is switched on. Messages" on page 280. car is parked for an extended period. The brakes will
tend to rub as a result. The nature, extent and
Z
75
Brakes
A effects of corrosion depend on the amount of time Brake components increased foot pressure may be required.
B
the vehicle was parked, whether road salt or grit was
Blocked pedals e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle.
spread and whether grease-dissolving agents were WARNING e For this reason, keep further back from the ve-
C used in car washes. hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, it is Unsuitable or improperly secured floor mats can re- them at intervals. Make sure that the traffic be-
D recommended having the brake system checked by strict pedal travel or interfere with pedal operation. hind you is not affected.
E experts at an authorized Porsche dealer. The accelerator can be inadvertently actuated or the
brake pedal blocked. This can result in an unex- Reduced braking action
F Brake system function WARNING
pected increase in speed or make braking more
G Porsche sports cars are equipped with a power as- difficult.
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a
H
sisted hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disk e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the
brakes at the front and rear. coating may form on the brake discs and pads that
vehicle.
significantly reduces friction and therefore also
I Both circuits function independently. One brake cir- e Secure floor mats properly and do not place them
cuit operates the front left and rear right wheel and braking effect.
J loosely on the floor.
The brake discs will unavoidably start to corrode if
the other operates the front right and rear left wheel. e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each
K If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still op- your vehicle is parked for an extended period. The
other.
brakes will tend to “judder” as a result.
L
erate. However, you will notice an increased pedal e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted
travel when you apply the brakes. Failure of one
again after they have been removed, e.g. for e If braking comfort is noticeably impaired, it is
M brake circuit will cause the stopping distance to recommend that you have the brake system
cleaning.
increase. checked by experts.
N
No brake force boosting Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche
O Responding to warning symbols WARNING recommends an authorized Porsche dealer as
The functionality of the brake system warning light they have trained workshop personnel and the
P can be checked by switching the ignition to the "On" The brake booster is ready for operation only when necessary parts and tools.
Q position (position 1) and verifying that the warning the engine is running. If the engine is switched off or
light illuminates. there is a defect in the brake booster, much greater e To relieve the brake system on steep slopes, re-
R force has to be applied to the pedal when braking. member to shift to a lower gear in good time
Brake warning light USA
S Brake warning light Canada e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be (engine braking effect). If the engine braking ef-
towed. fect on slopes is not sufficient, use the footbrake
T The warning light in the instrument panel lights up. A at intervals. Continuous braking can cause the
U message will be displayed on the multi-function Water film on brake brakes to overheat, impairing their effectiveness.
display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid level WARNING For information on brake fluid and checking the
discs
V is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has increased) brake fluid level:
W one of the two brake circuits has failed. A greater In case of heavy rain, water crossing or after a car > Please see chapter "Brake Fluid" on page 74.
braking pressure will be required, stopping distances wash, the braking action may be delayed and With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly
X will be longer and the braking behavior will change, working brake system, the pedal travel to the point
particularly in curves. of brake application (start of brake pressure build-
Y
up) should not be longer than 10 mm.
Z
76
Brakes
e Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) and often only partially disappear after driving sev- A
value, have the brake system checked. Visit an The high performance brake system is designed to eral thousand kilometers.
B
authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends ensure the best possible braking effect at all speeds e Before driving your vehicle in this way, ask your
an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have and temperatures. Porsche partner about currently applicable C
trained technicians and the necessary parts and The wear of various components of the braking sys- guidelines.
tools. D
tem, such as brake pads and brake disks, largely de-
pends on the individual driving style and the E
Brake pads and brake disks conditions of use and thus cannot be expressed in
The wear on the brake pads and brake disks largely F
terms of mileage covered.
depends on the driving style and the conditions of The values quoted by Porsche are based on normal G
use and cannot therefore be expressed in terms of use in line with general traffic conditions. Wear in-
mileage covered. H
creases significantly if the vehicle is used on race-
The high performance brake system is designed to tracks or if a forceful driving style is adopted. I
ensure the best possible braking effect at all speeds e Before driving your vehicle in this way (e.g. on
and temperatures. J
race tracks), ask an authorized Porsche dealer
Braking noise may occur, depending on the speed, about currently applicable guidelines. K
braking force and ambient conditions (e.g., temper-
ature, humidity). Porsche Surface Coated Brakedisc (PSCB) L
e Have the brake system inspected at the intervals The high-performance brake system is designed for M
recommended in your Maintenance Booklet. optimal protection against wear and corrosion on
N
friction surfaces. Wear on different components of
Responding to warning symbols the brake system, e.g. brake disks or brake pads, O
The functionality of the brake system warning light depends to a great extent on the individual driving
can be checked by switching the ignition to the “On” style and therefore cannot be expressed in actual
P
position (position 1) and verifying that the warning miles on the road. In addition to the advantages Q
light illuminates. listed here, the innovative hard coating of the brake
disk friction surfaces gives the disks a very specific R
Brake wear warning light USA
look and cannot be compared with a standard brake S
Brake wear warning light Canada disk. Owing to the hard-coated brake disk, a longer
bedding-in period of the PSCB must be taken into T
account, during which a technically insignificant U
A warning message is displayed to indicate that the
friction noise may occur. When a vehicle is driven
brake pads are reaching their wear limit. V
normally in line with traffic conditions, a shiny
chrome-like friction surface covered with fine cracks
Messages" on page 280. W
appears after several thousand kilometers. Wear,
e Have the brake pads replaced immediately. Visit X
cracks and darkening of the shiny silver friction sur-
an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recom-
face increase when the vehicle is driven on race
mends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they Y
tracks or if a forceful driving style is adopted. These
have trained technicians and the necessary parts
visual changes have no relevant effect on braking Z
and tools.
77
Car Care
A Car Care Regular and expert car care helps maintain the value interior when cleaning the vehicle.
B
of your vehicle and can be a prerequisite for making e Follow the operating instructions provided by the
General care instructions claims under the vehicle warranty. equipment manufacturer.
C Water film on brake
Porsche recommends car care products from Por- e Do not use high-pressure cleaners or steam
WARNING sche Tequipment. cleaners to clean decorative films.
D disks
e Please read the application instructions on the e When cleaning protective films, do not aim high-
E After washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be packaging of the car care product. pressure cleaners directly at the edges of the
delayed and increased pressure may be required. e Store car care products out of the reach of films.
F
e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle. children. e Always observe a minimum distance of 20 in.
G e Allow a greater braking distance from the vehicle e Dispose of car care products in the correct (50 cm) during cleaning.
H in front and "dry" the brakes by applying them at manner. e Never use high-pressure cleaning equipment or
intervals. Make sure that this does not affect the To ensure that the condition of the vehicle is steam cleaners with round-jet nozzles. A high-
I traffic behind you. checked professionally and the warranty is retained pressure cleaning device or steam cleaner fitted
for the full period: Contact an authorized Porsche with a round-jet nozzle will damage your vehicle.
J
Chemical cleaners dealer. The dealer will prepare a condition report and Tires are particularly susceptible to damage.
WARNING
K will certify the level of care of the vehicle. e Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of the
L aforementioned components.
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your health. NOTICE
e Always turn off the engine and allow it to cool
M Most chemical cleaners are concentrates which re- down before working in the engine
quire dilution. High concentrations might cause High-pressure cleaning equipment or steam compartment.
N
problems ranging from irritation to serious injury. cleaners may damage the following components: e Never point the cleaning jet directly into open-
O e Keep cleaning agents out of the reach of – Convertible top ings, e. g. spark plug shafts and air cleaner
P children. – Convertible top element (Targa) housing or at the air cleaner. Cover the openings
e Observe all caution labels. – Tires before washing.
Q e Always read the directions on the container be- – Logos, emblems, decorative and protective films
R fore using any product. These directions may – Painted surfaces
contain information necessary to avoid personal – Alternator Washing your vehicle
S injury. The best way to protect your vehicle against dam-
– Electrical components and plug connections in
T e Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish the engine compartment aging environmental effects is regular washing and
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They – ParkAssist sensors preservation. The longer grit, road and industrial
U may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other dust, insect residue, bird excrement, tree secretion
– (Radar) sensors of the Adaptive Cruise Control
V ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well (ACC) and other assistance systems (e.g. resin, pollen), etc. remain on the vehicle, the
ventilated area. – Rear view camera more harmful their effect. No vehicle and convertible
W e Do not clean the underside of the chassis, fend- top is absolutely leak-proof. Water can sometimes
– Wiper blades
X ers, wheel covers, etc. without protecting your leak into the vehicle interior when cleaning the
hands and arms as you may cut yourself on No vehicle and convertible top is absolutely leak- vehicle.
Y sharp-edged metal parts. proof. Water can sometimes leak into the vehicle
Z
78
Car Care
To ensure your car is cleaned thoroughly and the Hazard What should be Cleaning the convertible top A
paintwork washed gently, please observe the fol- observed? (Cabriolet) and convertible top el- B
lowing points:
e Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly at Damage to converti- e Do not perform hot ement (Targa) C
the end of the gritting season at the latest. ble-top fabric (Cabrio- wax treatment.
NOTICE D
e Only wash the vehicle in areas intended for this let/Targa)
purpose to ensure that soot, grease, oil, and E
heavy metals do not harm the environment. Water leaking into the e Do not switch off The cleaning jet of the high-pressure cleaning
F
e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or if vehicle interior when ignition. equipment, unsuitable car washes or hot wax treat-
the bodywork is hot. windows are lowered – or – ment can damage the convertible top and converti- G
e If washing by hand, use a car shampoo, plenty of (Cabriolet/Targa) Lock the vehicle. ble top element.
e Do not clean the convertible top and convertible H
water and a soft sponge or washing brush.
e Start washing the vehicle by wetting the paint- Windshield wipers can e Switch windshield top element using a high-pressure cleaner. I
work thoroughly and rinsing off any heavy dirt. start to move and be- wipers off. e Use car washes with a convertible top wash
e Do not operate the
J
e After washing the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with come damaged in the program.
water, and rub with a chamois leather. When car wash. headlight cleaning e Do not perform hot wax treatment. K
wiping with the chamois leather, do not use the system in car
washes. To ensure proper cleaning and care of your vehicle, L
same leather as you do for cleaning the windows.
please observe the following:
M
Damage to exterior e Fold in door e Do not clean the convertible top and convertible
Cleaning in the car wash
parts mirrors. top element every time you wash your vehicle. It N
NOTICE e Completely remove is usually sufficient to rinse the convertible top
O
roof transport and convertible top element with clean water.
Car washes may damage optional add-on parts or
system. e Never remove snow and ice with sharp-edged P
e Lock the vehicle. objects.
parts that project beyond the contours of the Q
e Brush off dust from the convertible top cover in
vehicle.
Damage to wheels e Check the dimen- the direction of the fabric lines using a soft R
e Before using an automatic car wash, consult the sions of the car brush.
car wash operator. wash guide rail. S
e Only when the convertible top/convertible top
e Retract all spoilers before using an automatic car The wider the T
element is heavily soiled should you clean it by
wash. wheel rim and the
applying lukewarm water and shampoo & con-
lower the tire U
vertible top cleaner and rubbing this in gently
height, the greater
using a sponge or soft brush. V
the risk of damage.
e Rinse the washing shampoo & convertible-top
W
Scratches on wheels e Do not clean with cleaner thoroughly off the convertible top with
the wheel-washing clean water. X
with high-gloss or silk-
gloss finish brushes in the car Y
wash.
Z
79
Car Care
A Porsche recommends car care products from Preserving paintwork Caring for wiper blades
Porsche Tequipment. The paint surface will dull over time due to weath-
B
e Treat the convertible top cover with a converti- ering and should therefore be regularly protected NOTICE
C ble top care product after washing at least once with a paint preservative after washing the vehicle.
a year. Do not allow the care product to come This keeps the paint shiny and elastic, and prevents The graphite coating on the wiper blades can be
D into contact with paint or glass. If contact with dirt from adhering to the paint surface and industrial damaged if they are not cleaned properly.
E paint occurs, remove the product immediately. dust from penetrating the paint. e Ensure that the cleaning jet does not strike the
e If the convertible top cover, seams or folds leak, wiper blades.
F Polishing paintwork
use a convertible top care product. Read and e Do not clean wiper blades with a cloth or sponge.
G follow the instructions on the containers. Paint polish should only be used to clean the paint- e Clean wiper blades with clear water only.
Porsche recommends car care products from work when the original shine can no longer be ob-
H Porsche Tequipment. Windshield wiper blades in perfect condition are vi-
tained using preservatives.
I e Remove bird droppings immediately, as the acid Headlights must not be polished. tal for ensuring a clear view.
they contain will make the rubber swell, causing e Clean the windshield regularly with a window
J the convertible top and convertible top element Removing marks cleaning agent, particularly after going through a
K to leak. Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects, etc. as carwash.
e Open the convertible top and convertible top el- soon as possible using an insect remover and wash e If extremely dirty (e.g. due to insect residues),
L ement only when completely dry to prevent clean the windshield using a sponge or cloth.
the area carefully afterwards as they discolor the
M stains and abrasion damage. paint if left to work on it over time. The wiper blades should be replaced twice per year
e Remove spots on the convertible top cover by (before and after the cold season) or if wiper per-
N rubbing carefully with a soft rubber sponge. Repairing paint damage formance deteriorates or the wipers are damaged.
O Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches or
P Paint care stone chips) repaired immediately, before corrosion Cleaning windows
begins. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche The front side windows have a water-repellent (hy-
Q NOTICE recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they drophobic) coating, which reduces soiling of the
have trained technicians and the necessary parts windows. This coating is subject to natural wear and
R Dust particles on painted surfaces can damage the and tools. can be renewed.
S paintwork if not properly dealt with. If traces of corrosion have already formed, these e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
e Do not rub dust with a dry cloth. must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion pri- ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
T
mer must then be applied to these spots, followed have trained technicians and the necessary parts
U NOTICE
by top-coat paint. and tools.
V To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please
The matt effect of components may be lost if not observe the following:
W e Clean all windows regularly, inside and out, using
cared for properly.
a window cleaning agent.
X e Do not treat matt-effect bodywork sections with
e Do not dry the windows with the same chamois
Y preservatives or polishes.
80
Car Care
leather you use for the painted surfaces. Residue Cleaning decorative films Cleaning headlights, lights, plastic A
from preservatives could impair visibility. components and surfaces, sen- B
e Remove insect residues with insect remover. NOTICE
sors and cameras C
Repairing the underbody Risk of damage through detachment of the decora- NOTICE D
tive films during cleaning.
protection
e Do not use polish or hot wax. Cleaning agents can seep into the controls or E
WARNING
Flammable material e Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment or switches, for example, and damage them. Unsuitable F
close to the exhaust steam cleaners. cleaning agents can damage the plastic surfaces.
system e Use a soft sponge, pH-neutral soap and plenty of e Do not spray water and interior window cleaner
G
water. directly onto the plastic components in the ve- H
Additional rust or underbody protection agents in
the area of the exhaust system can become too hot hicle interior. I
when driving and ignite. e Only use clean water and a little washing-up
Care instructions for protective J
e Do not apply additional underbody protection or liquid or interior window cleaner to clean head-
rustproofing agents on or near the exhaust
films lights, lights, plastic components and surfaces, K
manifold, exhaust pipes, catalysts, or heat radar sensors for Adaptive Cruise Control and
NOTICE L
shields. vehicle cameras. Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-
free cloth for this purpose. M
The underside of your vehicle is permanently pro- Risk of damage due to incorrect care of protective e Headlights must not be polished.
tected against chemical and mechanical influences. films. e Only clean the center console with touch-sensi- N
Damage to this protective coating cannot be ex- e Follow the care instructions provided by the tive buttons using a microfiber cloth. O
cluded in day-to-day driving. protective film manufacturer. e Never use other chemical cleaning agents or
e Porsche recommends having the underside of e After applying the film, wait at least 48 hours solvents. P
the vehicle inspected at regular intervals by an before washing the vehicle.
Q
authorized Porsche dealer and the protective e When using car washes, only wash the vehicle in
coating restored as necessary. Contact an au- textile car washes. Before using a car wash, Wheel care R
thorized Porsche dealer. consult the car wash operator. Cleaning agent film on S
e Do not aim high-pressure cleaning equipment WARNING
the brake disks
directly at the edges of the films. T
e Remove dirt, e.g. insects, as quickly as possible. If cleaning agent (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) comes
U
e Remove stubborn dirt using a 99 percent iso- into contact with the brake disks, the film that forms
propanol solution. V
e Apply hot wax evenly and make sure it is smooth W
and consistent.
X
Y
Z
81
Car Care
A on the brake disks may impair braking performance. e Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and grit) b Ensure there is no direct sunlight.
B e Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into from all seals regularly using warm soapy water. 1. Blot the entire seat and backrest surface using a
contact with the brake disks. e If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door clean, absorbent sponge and distilled water.
C e If cleaning agents do come into contact with the seals and lid and flap seals from freezing using a Make sure that perforated leather does not get
brake disks, clean the brake disks thoroughly suitable care product. wet on its reverse side.
D
with a strong jet of water. 2. Allow the seat covering to dry completely at
E e Paying attention to any traffic behind you, dry Leather care room temperature out of direct sunlight. Do not
the brake disks by applying the brake. switch on the seat heating and seat ventilation to
F NOTICE do this.
G Metal particles (e.g. brass or copper in brake dust) 3. Once dry, wipe the seat covering with a dry, lint-
must not remain too long on alloy wheels. Contact The leather may become damaged by the use of free cloth.
H corrosion can cause pitting. unsuitable cleaning agents and care products, and
I Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or incorrect by inappropriate treatment. Cleaning carpet, floor mats
J
pH value, as are commonly used for other metals, as e Do not use aggressive cleaners or hard cleaning
well as mechanical equipment and products, will Obstructed pedals
objects. WARNING
K damage the surface and are therefore unsuitable. e Make sure that perforated leather does not get
e Only use acid-free cleaners for alloy wheels (pH wet on its reverse side. Unsuitable floor mats or floor mats that are not
L value between 4 and 10). Products with the in- e Remove water drops from the leather properly secured can restrict the movement of the
M correct pH value can destroy the surface of the
immediately. pedals or interfere with actuation of the pedals. The
wheels.
N accelerator pedal can be depressed unintentionally
e If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks To ensure proper cleaning and care of your vehicle, or the brake pedal blocked. This can result in an un-
O with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels are please observe the following: expected increase in the driving speed or make
exposed to grit or industrial dust, weekly clean- e Clean all types of leather regularly to remove fine braking difficult.
P ing is necessary. dust using a soft, white woolen cloth, or a com-
mercially available microfiber cloth. e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the
Q
vehicle.
Cleaning door, roof, lid, and win- e Remove heavy soiling (not water or moisture
R e Secure the floor mats properly and do not lay
dow seals stains) with a leather cleaning agent. Follow the
application instructions on the containers. them loosely.
S
Porsche recommends car care products from e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each
NOTICE
T Porsche Tequipment. other.
e Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted
U The lubricant coating on the inner door seals may be
product. again after they have been removed, e.g. for
V damaged by unsuitable cleaning agents and care
cleaning.
products.
W Cleaning seats with seat ventilation
e Do not use chemical cleaning agents or solvents. To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please
X e Do not use care products. Rain water or moisture can stain the perforated observe the following:
leather of the seats.
Y To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please Removing water and moisture stains
observe the following:
Z b Seat heating and seat ventilation is switched off.
82
Car Care
e Clean using a vacuum cleaner or a brush that is e When lightly soiled, wet a soft cloth with water Cleaning screens and touch A
not too soft. or a pH neutral soap solution and wipe off the displays B
e Remove heavy dirt and stains using a stain dirt.
remover. e When heavily soiled, wet a soft cloth with luke- NOTICE C
Porsche recommends car care products from warm water or thinned white spirit and dab the
Porsche Tequipment. dirt from the outside in.
D
Unsuitable cleaning and care agents and incorrect
To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accessories Steering wheels with a microfiber cover made of treatment can damage screens and touch displays. E
includes the correct size of floor mats with the ap- Alcantara®/Race-Tex can become more heavily
propriate fastening. soiled as a result of permanent contact with the skin. e Do not use solvents such as mineral spirits, thin- F
ners, gas or acetone; alcohol (ethanol, methanol
e When lightly soiled, wet a soft cloth with a pH G
or isopropyl alcohol) or abrasive agents for
Cleaning airbag covers neutral soap solution and wipe the outer rim of
cleaning. H
the steering wheel with this.
Improper cleaning
e When heavily soiled, the outer rim of the steering e Do not spray cleaning agents or other liquids di-
DANGER I
wheel can be cleaned by rubbing/dabbing it rectly onto screens or touch displays. The elec-
lightly with a soft cloth and a commercially tronics can be damaged irreparably if liquids leak J
Unsuitable cleaning and care agents can penetrate
available upholstery foam cleaner in accordance in. Instead, moisten a cloth and carefully wipe the K
into the airbag system. Risk of damage to the airbag
with the instructions provided by the foam screen.
system if incorrectly handled. In the event of an ac- L
cident, the airbag systems may not be triggered. manufacturer.
To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please
e Do not make any modifications whatsoever to observe the following: M
individual components, such as the covers of the Cleaning the seat belts e Screens and touch displays are susceptible to N
steering wheel, dashboard, front seats and door To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please scratching. From time to time, clean the screens
and roof frame panels. observe the following: and touch displays carefully with a dry, clean and O
e Do not use cleaning agents or other liquids in the e Use mild detergent for soiled seat belts. soft cloth (microfiber cloth). Do not exert too P
area of the airbags. e When drying, avoid direct sunlight. much pressure on the surface when cleaning.
e Only use suitable cleaning agents. e Remove finger prints with a slightly damp cloth Q
e Do not tint or bleach seat belts. The belt fabric or a mild cleaning agent. R
Cleaning fabric linings could be weakened and could therefore impair
safety. Storing the vehicle S
Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner, and sun blinds, etc.
must only be cleaned using suitable cleaning agents, If you intend to store your vehicle for a prolonged T
suitable dry foam and a soft brush. period: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. They
U
will be glad to give you information and advice about
Care instructions for Alcantara®/ the necessary measures, e.g. corrosion prevention, V
care, maintenance and storage.
Race-Tex/other textiles > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 257.
W
Do not use leather care products to clean microfiber X
For information on locking the vehicle when the
covers made of Alcantara®/Race-Tex/other textiles.
battery is disconnected: Y
For regular care, it is sufficient to brush off the cover
> Please see chapter "Central Locking" on page 85.
with a soft brush. Strong abrasion or rubbing when Z
cleaning will produce a lasting change in the surface.
83
Car Care
A Refrigerant Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)
B WARNING
Pressurised refrigerant
An authorised service technician is re-
C quired in order to service the mobile air
The air conditioning system contains pressurised conditioning system (MAC)
D
refrigerant R1234yf. Flammable refrigerants
E e The refrigerant system should only be serviced
F by trained and certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation (According to SAE Evaporator
G J2845 Technician Training for Safe Service and
The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall
H Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C
never be repaired or replaced with one removed
System).
from a used or salvaged vehicle. New replacement
I e Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche
MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as
J dealer, as they have trained technicians and the meeting SAE Standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and
necessary parts and tools. R744 Design Criteria and Certification for OEM Mo-
K
bile Air Conditioning Evaporator and Service
L Label for R1234yf Replacements.
M There´s a label located on the inside of the luggage
compartment lid.
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Fig. 31: Label for R1234yf
T
U Observe the safety symbols on the Label for
R1234yf
V
Caution
W
X Lubricant type
Y
Z
84
Central Locking
Central Locking A
B
Brief overview – opening and
C
locking doors from outside
D
E
hensive descriptions provided in the "Central Lock-
ing" section. Safety messages and warnings, in F
particular, are not replaced by this brief overview.
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 32: Vehicle key Fig. 33: Comfort Access
L
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where? M
Unlock (with the vehicle key) e Press button on the vehicle key The emergency flasher emits one > p. 87 N
once. flash. O
– or – The door handle extends. The driver's
P
Press the button on the vehicle door can be opened.
key twice (within approx. 2 or Q
seconds). The door handles extend. The doors R
can be opened.
S
Unlock (with Comfort Access) e Reach into the handle recess of The emergency flasher emits one > p. 87 T
the door handle. Do not touch flash.
proximity sensor A on the door U
The door handle extends.
handle when doing so. V
The relevant door can be opened.
As you approach the vehicle:
W
e Move towards the vehicle.
X
Y
Z
85
Central Locking
A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where?

B
Lock With the vehicle key: The emergency flasher flashes twice > p. 88
C
e Press the button on the vehicle and an acoustic signal sounds twice.
D key. The door handles retract.
E With Comfort Access: The doors are locked and can be
e Touch proximity sensor A at the opened from the inside by pulling the
F door handle. door opener.
G
Lock when persons/animals are re- With the vehicle key: The emergency flasher emits one long > p. 88
H maining in the vehicle e Press the button on the vehicle flash.
I e Switch off the alarm system's key twice (within approx. 2 The door handles retract.
passenger compartment monitor- seconds). The doors are locked and can be
J ing system.
With Comfort Access: opened from the inside by pulling the
K e Touch proximity sensor A on the door opener.
L door handle twice (within approx. If the door is opened from the inside,
2 seconds). the alarm system is triggered.
M
N Switch off the alarm system’s alarm e Press the button on the vehicle The alarm sound is switched off. > p. 61
sound key.
O – or –
P Switch on ignition.
Q
R Using the central locking system You can set whether only the driver’s door and filler Information
flap or also the passenger door is to be unlocked
S when unlocking the vehicle. This section describes the vehicle's factory settings.
Information
T
e Only use the vehicle key when the vehicle is in e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking e
U your sight. Door unlocking Comfort Access1
Vehicles with Comfort Access can be unlocked and
V Depending on equipment, the vehicle can be un-
Both doors can be unlocked irrespective of the se-
lected setting: locked without using the vehicle key. For this pur-
W locked and locked either with the vehicle key or pose, the vehicle key must always be carried, e.g. in
without a key by means of Comfort Access. e Press button on the vehicle key twice within 5 your trouser pocket.
X seconds.
Y
Z 1. The Comfort Access system represents state-of-the-art technology. However, we cannot entirely rule out the possibility of the key codes of the radio keys being intercepted and used
to open or steal the vehicle.
86
Central Locking
If the door handles are extremely dirty, the Comfort Unlocking doors with the vehicle key Unlocking doors with the proximity sensor in A
Access function may be restricted. the door handle
> Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 78. B
C
Deactivating Comfort Access using the ve-
hicle key D
To ensure that the vehicle cannot be unlocked and E
started by unauthorized third parties, the Comfort
Access functions can be temporarily deactivated
F
using the vehicle key. G
e Press the button and the button simulta- H
neously until the light indicator on the vehicle key
lights up continuously. I
Deactivation is confirmed when the light indica- J
tor on the vehicle key lights up continuously.
The Comfort Access functions are activated auto- K
matically when you press any button on the vehicle L
key again.
e Do not expose the vehicle key to a high level of Fig. 34: Unlocking the doors with the vehicle key
M
electromagnetic radiation. This can adversely af- Fig. 35: Unlocking the doors with Comfort Access N
fect Porsche Comfort Access. 1. Press button .
b Vehicle with Comfort Access O
The emergency flasher emits one flash.
b Function activated.
Unlocking doors The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- P
ting, and the door handle extends. e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking Q
2. Pull the door handle.
Information b The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g.
in the trouser pocket.
R
If the vehicle is unlocked and if a door or the luggage
compartment lid is not opened within 45 seconds, The door can be unlocked on the side of the vehicle S
the vehicle is locked again automatically. where the vehicle key is located. T
1. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle.
Do not touch the proximity sensor on the font of U
Information the door handle when doing so. V
In the event of an accident in which the airbag is The emergency flasher emits one flash.
The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- W
triggered, the entire vehicle is unlocked automati-
cally to facilitate fast access for helpers. The emer- ting, and the door handle extends. X
gency flasher is also activated automatically. 2. Pull the door handle.
Y
Z
87
Central Locking
A Information Unlocking doors from inside Information

B In order to prevent the battery from discharging, If the vehicle is de-energized (e.g. if the battery is
C unused comfort functions are progressively turned discharged) or if the door openers were pulled too
off. The vehicle can then be unlocked using the ve- quickly, the door openers may have to be pulled
D hicle key. twice.
E e Release door opener and pull it again.
F Unlocking doors as you approach the vehicle > Please see chapter "Warning and Information
The central locking system can be set so that the Messages" on page 280.
G
doors will unlock automatically as you approach the
H vehicle (distance of approx. 6.5 ft. (2 m)). Automatic unlocking
I The prerequisite for this is that the vehicle key was The vehicle is unlocked automatically:
at least approx. 19.5 ft. (6 m) away from the vehicle – When activating the P button on the selector
J since the last time you locked it. When parking the lever.
K vehicle and then locking it, keep the key a sufficient – or –
distance away. Otherwise, it may be unlocked unin- – When opening a door.
L tentionally within 45 seconds.
M b Vehicle with Comfort Access Unlocking with battery disconnected
b Function activated. Fig. 36: Pressing the central locking button in the door panel An originally unlocked door can only be opened from
N the outside with the emergency key after the battery
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking e Press button in the door panel. has been disconnected.
O – or –
b The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g. e Open the window before disconnecting the
P Pull door opener. battery.
in trouser pocket.
All doors are unlocked. The door handles extend. The door can be opened from inside and outside
Q 1. Move towards the vehicle.
The light indicator on the button goes out. by pulling the inside door handle twice. Pull the
The emergency flasher emits one flash.
R The vehicle is unlocked, depending on the set- inside door handle from the rest position to the
S ting, and the door handle extends. Information end stop for this purpose.
2. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. The doors cannot be opened from inside if the ve-
T Locking doors
Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of hicle was locked using the emergency key.
U the door handle when doing so.
3. Pull the door handle. NOTICE
V
W Extended door handles can be damaged in car
washes.
X
e Lock the vehicle before starting the car wash.
Y
Z
88
Central Locking
Locking the doors with the vehicle key Locking doors with the proximity sensor in The doors are locked but can be opened from the A
b Operating mode P selected. the door handle inside by pulling the door opener.
B
b All doors closed. e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that
e Press button once.
the alarm system will be triggered if the door is C
opened.
Two warning signals sound and the emergency D
flasher flashes twice.
Information E
The door handles retract.
If persons or animals remain in the vehicle: – The vehicle cannot be completely locked if the F
doors or luggage compartment lid are not fully
e Press button twice within 2 seconds. G
closed.
The emergency flasher emits one long flash. H
– The vehicle key must be outside the vehicle
The door handles retract. when locking, otherwise the vehicle cannot be
The doors are locked but can be opened from the
I
locked.
inside by pulling the door opener. J
e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that
the alarm system will be triggered if the door is
K
Locking doors from inside
opened. L
M
Information
Fig. 37: Locking doors with Comfort Access N
The vehicle cannot be completely locked if the doors
or luggage compartment lid are not fully closed. b Vehicle with Comfort Access O
b Operating mode P selected.
P
b The driver must be carrying the vehicle key, e.g.
Information in the trouser pocket. Q
If the key is inside the vehicle when you lock it, the b All doors closed.
R
vehicle will be unlocked again. Two warning signals e Touch proximity sensor A at the door handle.
sound and the emergency flasher flashes four times. Two warning signals sound and the emergency S
If a door or the luggage compartment lid is not flasher flashes twice. T
opened within approx. 45 seconds, the vehicle is The door handles retract.
locked and can only be unlocked using a second key. U
If persons or animals remain in the vehicle:
e Make sure that the vehicle key is not left inside e Touch proximity sensor A at the door handle V
the vehicle when locking it. twice within 2 seconds. W
The emergency flasher emits one long flash.
The door handles retract.
Fig. 38: Pressing the central locking button in the door panel X
b Doors closed. Y
e Press button in the door panel.
Z
All doors are locked. The filler flap is not locked.
89
Central Locking
A The door handles retract. Emergency unlocking of the doors > Please see chapter "Using the emergency
B
The light indicator on the button lights up. e Hold the vehicle key at the center of the wind- key" on page 268.
The doors can only be opened from inside by shield at the top and press the button. 2. Pull and hold the door handle.
C pulling the door opener. If the vehicle still cannot be unlocked: 3. Insert the emergency key into the door lock with
the round edge facing upward (right-hand drive:
D 1. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock) with the round edge facing downward).
> Please see chapter "Using the emergency
E b Function activated. key" on page 268.
4. With the driver's door open, turn the emergency
F > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on key clockwise to the first point of noticeable re-
2. Pull and hold the door handle. sistance and then forcefully turn it further to the
page 270.
G 3. Insert the emergency key into the door lock with stop.
The vehicle is locked automatically when a speed of
the round edge facing upward (right-hand drive: 5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi-
H approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.
with the round edge facing downward). tion and remove it.
I 4. Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to
Emergency unlocking and emer- the first point of noticeable resistance and then
6. Close the driver's door.
7. Check that the vehicle is locked.
J gency locking of doors turn it further to the stop using a certain amount
8. For emergency locking of the passenger's door,
of force.
K insert the emergency key in the door lock of the
5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi-
L driver's door again, turn 90° against the direction
tion and remove it.
of travel and remove the emergency key again.
M 6. To prevent the alarm system from triggering: The passenger's door is locked.
switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.
N
Information
O Information
In the event of a central locking fault, all functional
P The time it takes to trigger the alarm system differs locks in the central locking system can be locked via
from country to country. the lock in the driver's door.
Q
e Have faults in the central locking system
R repaired.
Emergency locking of the doors
S e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
T Information have trained technicians and the necessary parts
U Only emergency lock the doors when the vehicle is and tools.
V parked.
Fig. 39: Emergency unlocking/emergency locking e Unlock the doors before starting to drive.
W
If the vehicle key remote control does not work, the 1. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key.
X doors can also be unlocked and locked without the
Y remote control.
90
Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)
Child Restraint Systems DANGER

Improper use of Child Other systems have not been tested and could A
Restraint Systems
(Child Seats) e
present an increased risk of injury.
Infants and small children should never be held
B
Children could be endangered in a crash if their child
on the lap or share a seat belt with another oc- C
General safety instructions restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. cupant while the vehicle is in motion.
Porsche recommends that all infants and children be e Make sure that all child restraints are properly e Children too big for a group III child restraint
D
restrained in child restraint systems at all times secured. system must use regular seat belts. A child is too E
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with e Follow all child restraint instructions and warn- small for a seat belt if the shoulder belt crosses
applicable laws. ings in this manual. the face or the neck of the child. F
When possible, use only child restraint systems rec- e Choose a child restraint system according to the G
ommended by Porsche. These systems have been A statement by the seat manufacturer of compliance
weight of the child.
with U.S. Federal/Canadian standards can be found H
tested and adjusted to the interior of your Porsche
on the instruction label on the restraint and in the e Child restraint systems that are damaged or have
and the appropriate child weight groups. been heavily stressed in an accident must be re- I
Other systems have not been tested and could entail instruction manual provided with the restraint.
placed immediately.
J
an increased risk of injury.
DANGER
Child Restraint on the e Children could be endangered in a crash if their
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law Passenger’s Seat child restraints are not properly secured in the K
in all 50 US states and the Canadian provinces. The vehicle.
The use of a child restraint system in the passenger’s L
child restraint system should be one that complies e Do not affix objects to child restraint systems or
with U.S. Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety seat can result in serious personal injury or death to
cover them with other materials. M
Standards and should be secured by a lap belt por- the child from an airbag deployment.
e For maximum safety and protection, install the
tion of a lap-shoulder belt or for child seats equipped To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an N
child restraint system in the rear seat.
with the L.A.T.C.H. system (Lower Anchorage and accident, Porsche strongly recommends: O
Tether for Children, also known as ISOFIX) to the L.A.
e Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Installing child restraint systems
T.C.H. anchorages. P
indicator light lights up.
All child restraint systems are designed to be se- According to accident statistics, children are safer
Q
cured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lapbelt por- > Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of when properly restrained in the rear seating posi-
tion of a lap-shoulder belt. the passenger airbag" on page 52. tions than in the front seating positions. R
You can obtain child seats that are L.A.T.C.H. com- e Always observe the separate operating instruc- Under all normal circumstances, the forward facing
S
patible at your authorized Porsche dealer. tions for the child restraint system provided by child seat must be placed in the rear.
e Always observe the separate installation instruc- the manufacturer of the child restraint for in- e Do not use a child restraint system in the front T
tions for your child seat. stallation, use and proper securing of the child. passenger seat.
U
e Only use child restraint systems recommended
for your Porsche. These systems have been Children in group 0 and 0+: V
tested and adjusted to the interior of your Por- Up to 29 lbs. (13 kg)
W
sche and the appropriate child weight groups. Children of this weight must be transported in a re-
straint system facing rearward. X
Y
Z
91
A Children in group I: Do not use a child restraint system on the front Child Seat Detection
DANGER
20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) passenger seat. Fault
B
Children in this group are carried in child restraint
C > Please see chapter "Automatic locking retractor" When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old
systems facing forward. child is seated in the child restraint system on the
on page 94.
D
Children in group II: > Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of passenger seat the indicator light PASSENGER AIR
the passenger airbag" on page 52. BAG OFF must be on.
E 33 to 55 lbs. (15 to 25 kg)
However, there may be serious situations where it If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light does
F Children in this group are carried in child restraint
might be necessary to place a child in the front seat not light up, it could indicate a fault in the system or
systems facing forward.
G so that he/she can be kept under direct observation the child seat doesn‘t fit and the airbag could inflate
to prevent an immediate risk to the child (for exam- in a collision, placing the child at risk of death or se-
H Children in group III:
ple, while driving to the doctor or hospital). vere injury from the inflating airbag.
48 to 79 lbs.(22 to 36 kg)
I The following instructions are provided to you solely In this case:
Children in this group are carried in child restraint for that purpose.
systems facing forward. e Do not install a child restraint system on the
J e Seek appropriate advice from your authorized passenger‘s seat.
e Install child restraint system on the rear seats.
K Porsche dealer about the possible installation of
Using child restraint systems in a Porsche child restraint system.
e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author-
L the front passenger seat e If a child restraint system must be fastened to ized Porsche dealer immediatly.
M the front passenger seat, adjust the seat as far
Improper Use of Child
DANGER away from the airbag as possible and adjust the
N Restraint passenger seat backrest angle to ensure firm Child restraint system for children older than
O e Porsche does not recommend that child restraint contact between the passenger seat and the one year
systems be used on full bucket seats. You can child restraint system. Your vehicle is equipped with capacitance occupant
P recognize a full bucket seat by the fact that the e If emergency or other serious conditions require sensing for the passenger's seat in accordance with
backrest of a full bucket seat cannot be folded a child to be placed in the front seat, exercise U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Q
down. extreme caution and defensive driving of your Depending on the electrical capacitance acting on
R e Follow all child restraint instructions and warn- vehicle. the passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will au-
S ings in this manual. tomatically be switched on or off.
Child restraint system for up to one-year old e In case of doubt, fasten the child restraint sys-
T Child Restraint in Front children tem on a rear seat.
DANGER If the child restraint system must be fastened to the
U Seat
passenger’s seat in exceptional cases: Small adult passengers
V The use of a child restraint system in the front pas- e When an up to one-year old child is seated in the When an small adult passenger is seated on the
senger seat can result in serious personal injury or child restraint system, the front airbag is auto- passenger side, ensure the following:
W death to the child from an airbag deployment. matically deactivated on the passenger side. – PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light does
X To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an e Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF not light up.
Y accident, Porsche strongly recommends: indicator light lights up. – The knees are bend comfortably over the edge of
e Under all normal circumstances, the child seat e Adjust the passenger’s seat as far away from the the seat.
Z must be placed in the rear. airbag and adjacent car body parts as possible.
92
– The shoulder belt crosses between the small fact that the backrest of a full bucket seat cannot be A
adult passengers neck and arm. folded down.
B
– The lap part of the seat belt is as low as possible, If you chose to use a child seat on a front passenger
touching the small adult passengers thighs. full bucket seat: C
– The small adult passenger can stay seated for e Follow all child restraint instructions and warn- D
the whole trip.
ings in this manual.
Adult Use of Front Pas- e Make sure that the full bucket seat is in the
E
DANGER
senger Seat rearmost position. F
e Allow sufficient time to properly attach the Top
When the ignition is on and the small adult passen- Tether of the child seat to the anchor point lo-
G
ger is seated on the passenger seat, the indicator cated on the top of the rear shelf behind the front H
light PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be off. passenger seat.
I
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light e Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
lights up, it could indicate a fault in the system. indicator light is illuminated once the child seat is J
In this case: installed. If not contact your authorized Porsche
K
e Have the fault remedied at your nearest author- dealer.
ized Porsche dealer. L
Installing a child seat with Top Tether for ad- M
ditional safety
Vehicles with full bucket seats Top Tether child seats are the best option for N
mounting a child seat in your Porsche. O
Information Such Top Tether child seats have to be installed by
using the vehicle seatbelt system to securely fix the P
Vehicles with full bucket seats do not have rear child restraint system to the passenger seat and the
seats. Q
Top Tether attached and tightened to additionally
stabilize the child restraint system. Use only child R
An inproperly installed child seat could increase the
restraint systems with Top Tether recommended by S
risk of serious injury or death. Make sure that the
Porsche.
child seat is properly secured. T
These systems have been tested and adjusted to the
e Follow all child seat manufacturer's instructions
interior of your Porsche and the appropriate child U
on installation and use.
weight groups.
Other systems have not been tested and could entail V
Full bucket seat
an increased risk of injury. W
Improper Use of Child
DANGER e To ensure proper installation, see your authorized
Restraint Porsche dealer. X
Porsche does not recommend that child restraint e Always observe the separate installation instruc- Y
systems be used on front passenger full bucket tions for your child seat.
Z
seats. You can recognize a full bucket seat by the
93
A Misuse of Child Seat Re- Proper installation is necessary to provide optimal anchor. Make sure that the top tether strap is not
WARNING
straint Anchorages safety for the child. Do not rush the installation. twisted.
B
1. Adjust the passenger‘s seat in the front and up- 6. Adjust the passenger‘s seat to the upper rear
Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
C most position. Adjust the driver‘s seat in the rear position.
stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted and downmost position. 7. Tighten the tether strap in accordance with the
D child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
2. Make sure that the Top Tether length is as long child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Eliminate
be used for adults safety belts or harnesses.
E as possible. any slack in the tether.
e Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages. 3. Place the child seat on the full bucket seat. Make 8. Secure the child seat using the seatbelt. Once
F Only attach one child seat tether per anchorage. sure that the child restraint system is in full the child seat is installed, make sure that the full
G e They are not designed to withstand loads im- contact with the seat cushion. bucket seat must not be moved anymore.
posed by adults. 4. Enter the vehicle from the drivers side and knee > Please see chapter "Activating the automatic
H
on the driver seat in order to access the anchor locking retractor" on page 95.
I Installing Top Tether with full bucket seat point provided behind the passenger‘s seat on 9. Once the child seat is installed, ensure the PAS-
top of the rear shelf. SENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illumi-
J
nated in the overhead console. If not contact
K your authorized Porsche dealer.
L
Automatic locking retractor
M The seat belts for the front passenger and rear seats
N are equipped with an automatic locking retractor for
securing the child restraint system.
O When activated, this retractor allows you to securely
P fasten the child restraint system in place so that in-
advertent movements will not occur.
Q
Child Restraint in Front
DANGER
R Seat
S The use of a child restraint system in the front pas-
T senger seat can result in serious personal injury or
death to the child from an airbag deployment.
U To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in an
Fig. 40: Full Bucket seat anchor point - vehicles without rear Fig. 41: Fasten the Top Tether to the anchor point - vehicles accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
V
seat without rear seat
e Under all normal circumstances, the child seat
W When using a child restraint system with a Top 5. Fasten the child seat’s Top Tether to the anchor must be placed in the rear.
X Tether on a full bucket seat, the anchor point located point. Due to the location of the anchor point, Do not use a child restraint system on the front
behind the passenger seat on top of the rear shelf this may require additional effort in order to en-
Y passenger seat.
must be used to secure the Top Tether. Allow suffi- sure the tether strap is properly attached to the
Z cient time for proper installation of the child seat.
94
> Please see chapter "Automatic deactivation of instructions provided by the manufacturer when e Use only child restraint systems with the L.A.T.C. A
the passenger airbag" on page 52. installing on the car seat. H. system (Lower Anchorage and Tether for
Children) recommended by Porsche. B
If there are emergency reasons for transporting a 3. Pull the seat belt webbing completely out. At this
child in the front passenger seat, use a child restraint point the locking mechanism is activated. These systems have been tested and adjusted to C
seat and the automatic locking retractor function. 4. Insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle and the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
Follow the other safety instructions on the previous child weight groups. Other systems have not D
make certain that it is properly latched. Make no
pages in this section. more adjustments to the seat. been tested and could entail an increased risk of E
5. Allow the seat belt to retract until it is tight on injury.
the child restraint system. You may further e You can obtain child seats that are L.A.T.C.H.- F
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of it compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer. G
to retract. If you are able to pull the shoulder belt > Refer to the separate installation instructions for
out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull your child restraint system. H
the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 4 I
and 5.
6. Make sure not to move the passenger seat after
J
installing the child seat and activating the lock- K
Fig. 42: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator light ing retractor. Otherwise, the seat belt system or
the child seat might be damaged by the strongly L
Adjusting Child Restraint
DANGER fixed seat belt. M
after Fastening
Moving the seat could misadjust the seat belt Releasing the seat belt N
against the child restraint and cause the PASSEN- 1. Unbuckle the seat belt latch. O
GER AIR BAG OFF indicator light to go off and acti- 2. Then make certain that the belt has fully re-
vate the airbag system. tracted. At this point the automatic locking fea-
P
e After fastening the child restraint system, do not ture will be disengaged. Q
adjust the seat in any direction. e Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
R
e Check the condition of the passenger airbag Porsche dealer about the possible installation of
system shown by the indicator light in the over- a Porsche child restraint system. S
head console. T
Using the L.A.T.C.H. child restraint Fig. 43: Removing backrest lower section
system U
Activating the automatic locking retractor The retaining lugs A for the L.A.T.C.H. child seat an-
L.A.T.C.H. child restraint systems are the best option chorage can be found under the backrest lower V
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
for mounting a child seat in your Porsche. Such L.A.T. section.
the passenger seat, adjust the passenger seat as W
C.H. restraint systems can be installed only using the Markings on the right and left for the L.A.T.C.H. child
far away from the airbag as possible.
L.A.T.C.H. system in the rear seats. The rear seats are seat anchorage can be found on the backrest lower X
> Please see chapter "Seats" on page 232.
equipped with the L.A.T.C.H. system (lower anchor- section of the rear seats.
2. Position the child seat according to the child age and anchor points for tether straps on the back
Y
seat’s manufacturer instructions and follow all of the backrests). Z
95
A 1. Detach the backrest lower section at the top Coupé only: Upper anchorage points for child
center (Velcro strap) and disengage from the L.A. restraint systems with L.A.T.C.H. top tether
B T.C.H. retaining lugs A.
C Misuse of Child seat Re-
WARNING
D straint Anchorages
E Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly installed
F
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
G be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.
H e Do not misuse the child restraint anchorages or
connector. Only attach one child seat tether an-
I chor per anchorage.
J e They are not designed to withstand loads im-
posed by adults.
K
> Please see chapter "Automatic locking retractor"
L
on page 94.
M 2. Secure the child restraint system in retaining
lugs A as described in the instruction manual for
N Fig. 44: Installing L.A.T.C.H. child restraint system
the child restraint system.
O 3. Pull the child restraint system to check that both If your child restraint seat or seats require the use of
anchorage points are properly engaged. a tether strap, you will want to use the anchor points
P
provided behind the rear seat backrests.
Q 1. Secure the child restraint system to retaining
lugs A as described in the instruction manual for
R the child restraint system.
S 2. Pull on the child restraint system to check that
both anchorage points are properly engaged.
T
3. Fasten L.A.T.C.H. top tether B to the attachment
U point on the rear side of the backrest and tighten
the strap.
V
W
X
Y
Z
96
Convertible Top
Convertible Top Opening and closing the converti- Opening and closing the convertible top using A
> Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 78. ble top the button in the vehicle interior
B
Opening and closing the C
Messages" on page 280. WARNING
convertible top
D
NOTICE
When opening and closing the convertible top, parts
E
of the body can become trapped between the con-
Risk of damage to the convertible top and converti- vertible-top mechanism or convertible-top com- F
ble-top mechanism. partment lid and stationary vehicle parts.
e Do not operate the convertible top: G
e Make sure that nobody is at risk of injury from
– At temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C). the convertible-top mechanism or the converti- H
– When one side of the vehicle is on a curb, a ble-top compartment lid. I
lifting platform or a jack. e Do not operate the convertible top using the ve-
– When items of luggage or other objects (e.g. hicle key if the vehicle is not in your sight. J
behind the rear seats) hinder the movement e In order to interrupt convertible-top operation in K
of the convertible top. the event of danger, immediately release the
– With the roll-over bars extended. button in the vehicle or on the vehicle key. L
e Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top e Keep the lids of the vanity mirrors in the sun vi- M
with the engine off; the vehicle battery will rap- sors closed when closing the convertible top.
idly discharge. Fig. 45: Opening the convertible top using the button N
e Only drive with the convertible top fully open or The front and rear side windows are lowered auto-
O
matically when the convertible top is opened.
closed.
e When opening or closing the convertible top,
The front side windows close automatically if oper- P
ation of the convertible top is continued after it has
ensure that there is sufficient clearance above it
reached its final position. Q
(e.g. in the garage). The front and rear side windows are lowered auto-
e To prevent damp stains and abrasion damage, R
matically when the convertible top is closed. They
open the convertible top only when it is in a dry, close automatically if operation of the convertible S
clean state. top is continued after it has reached its final position. T
e Park the vehicle in the shade if possible, since
continuous exposure to the sun attacks textiles, U
rubber and paint.
V
e The convertible top may only be operated when
driving on a level surface. W
e Do not operate the convertible top in strong
X
winds or storms.
Y
Fig. 46: Closing the convertible top using the button Z
97
Convertible Top
A b Ignition is switched on. Emergency operation of the con-

b Maximum speed approx. 30 mph (50 km/h). vertible top and wind deflector
B
Opening/closing will be interrupted if this maxi-
C mum speed is exceeded. Moving convertible top
WARNING
e Pull and hold the button for opening or closing parts during emergency
D operation
the convertible top with no interruption until the
E convertible top has reached its final position or
e Always carry out emergency operation with the
the windows are in the desired position.
F greatest care.
The corresponding message on the multifunction
e Do not activate the convertible top and wind de-
G display goes out when the end position is
flector using the button or vehicle key during
reached.
H emergency operation.
In the event of danger:
I e Release the button.
Convertible top operation stops. NOTICE
J
K Raising and lowering the wind Risk of damage to the convertible top and converti-
ble-top mechanism.
L deflector Fig. 47: Raising and lowering the wind deflector
e Do not activate the convertible top and wind de-
M Raising the wind b Ignition is switched on. flector using the button or vehicle key during or
WARNING
deflector b Maximum speed approx. 75 mph (120 km/h) for after emergency operation.
N
Persons sitting on the rear seats may be trapped
lowering and approx. 124 mph (200 km/h) for e Drive slowly and carefully.
O
when raising the wind deflector.
raising. The wind deflector cannot be raised/ e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
lowered if this speed is exceeded.
e Ensure that no one can be injured when raising
P ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
e Press and hold the button until the final position have trained technicians and the necessary parts
Q the wind deflector. of the wind deflector is reached and the relevant and tools.
e In case of danger, release the button message on the instrument cluster goes out.
R immediately.
S Checking the convertible-top system
T NOTICE Before carrying out emergency operation, check:
– Was the ignition switched on during operation of
U Risk of damage to the wind deflector and seat the wind deflector and convertible top using the
V backrests. At extreme backrest angles, the wind de- button in the vehicle interior?
flector can collide with the seat backrests. e Switch off the ignition so that the wind deflector
W
e Before raising the wind deflector, always adjust and convertible top are not activated
X both seat backrests to the upright position. unintentionally.
Y
Z
98
Convertible Top
Removing the rear wall trim panel Emergency operation of the wind deflector A
1. Remove the screwdriver from the tool box in the B
luggage compartment.
> Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" C
on page 162. D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 49: Removing the emergency operation key L
4. Remove the emergency operation key A from the M
rear wall trim panel. Fig. 50: Emergency operation key
N
1. Remove plastic attachment B from emergency
Fig. 48: Folding the rear seat backrests and rear wall operation key A. O
trim panel forward 2. Swivel the metal insert upward out of plastic at-
P
2. Fold the rear seat backrests forward. tachment B through approx. 90° and pull out
3. Carefully lever the rear wall trim panel out of the
forward. Q
clip points using the screwdriver and fold R
forward.
– or – S
Depending on equipment, detach the rear wall T
trim panel at the two loops and fold forward.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
99
Convertible Top
A 4. Unscrew both screws D of the Rollover protec- De-tensioning the convertible-top

tion cover using the screwdriver. mechanism
B
5. Release Rollover protection cover E out of the
C clip points by pulling upward.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 51: Removing the Rollover protection trim panel
M 3. Fold both Rollover protection trim panels C for-

ward and unclip upward.
N Fig. 54: De-tensioning the convertible-top mechanism
O Fig. 53: Folding in the wind deflector

e Using the hexagon on plastic attachment B, turn
emergency hand screw H approx. 180° counter-
P 6. Remove screws F from the wind deflector motor clockwise.
using metal insert A (TORX®) of the emergency
Q
operation key. NOTICE
R 7. Pull retaining bracket G forward (lever out using
S a screwdriver if necessary) until the gears no e Only loosen emergency hand screw H, do not
longer engage. unscrew completely.
T 8. Remove the retaining bracket.
U 9. Fold in the wind deflector by hand.
V
W
X
Y
Z Fig. 52: Removing the Rollover protection cover
100
Convertible Top
Opening the convertible-top compartment lid A

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 56: Unlocking the convertible-top compartment lid Fig. 57: Unlocking the convertible-top compartment lid L
(step 1) (step 2)
M
Fig. 55: Inserting the emergency operation key 4. Turn the emergency operation key approx. 90° in 5. Insert the emergency operation key up to mark-
the direction of travel, so that plastic attachment ing 2 on plastic attachment B and turn a further N
1. Reassemble plastic attachment B and metal in-
sert A. B points upward. 90° in the direction of travel until a noticeable O
2. Insert the metal end of the emergency operation resistance is overcome.
6. Turn the emergency operation key approx. 90° P
key between the convertible-top compartment
lid and the convertible top. against the direction of travel and remove. Q
Ensure that the bend of plastic attachment B 7. Repeat the process (steps 2 to 6) on the oppo-
points toward the rear of the vehicle. site side. R
3. Guide the emergency operation key forward S
along the plastic trim, until it slides into opening
T
K up to marking 1 on plastic attachment B.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
101
Convertible Top
A Emergency operation of the rear side trim

panel flaps
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 58: Setting the convertible-top compartment lid to the Fig. 60: Removing screws M and pulling the motor-gear unit
upright position forward
M
8. Using both hands on the driver's and passenger's 2. Remove both screws M from the motor-gear unit
N side, firmly pull the convertible-top compart- Fig. 59: Disconnecting connector L using metal insert A (TORX®) of the emergency
O ment lid upward. 1. Disconnect both connectors L. operation key.
9. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid in 3. Pull motor-gear unit N forward (lever out using a
P the center from the rear and set to the upright screwdriver if necessary) until the gears no lon-
Q position. ger engage.
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
102
Convertible Top
Closing the convertible top – Keep your hands away from the range of A
movement of the convertible top during
closing. B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 61: Pressing the rear side flaps downward L
4. Press both rear side flaps downward until the fi- M
nal position is reached. Fig. 62: Pulling the convertible top out of the storage
compartment N
1. From the passenger compartment, grasp the Fig. 63: Detaching the plug
O
convertible top at the center and pull it out of the 2. Detach plug O at the access for convertible-top
storage compartment, until it is approximately P
lock emergency operation.
half closed. Q
Trapping or crushing
CAUTION R
during closing
S
If body parts are within the range of movement of
the convertible top or in the area of the convertible- T
top lock while it is being closed, they may become U
trapped or crushed.
V
e Pay attention to the following:
– Make sure that no persons are within the W
range of movement of the convertible top
X
during closing.
Y
Z
103
Convertible Top
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 64: Extending the latching hook Fig. 65: Closing the convertible top Fig. 66: Closing the convertible-top compartment lid
M 3. Remove plastic attachment B from the emer- 7. Pull the convertible top to the windshield frame. 1. Stand behind the vehicle.
gency operation key. 8. To fully close the convertible top, turn plastic 2. Grasp the convertible-top compartment lid
N
4. Swivel metal insert A upward out of plastic at- attachment B clockwise until the latching hook above the brake light and push forward against
O tachment B through approx. 90° and pull out fully engages in the catch (noticeable noticeable resistance until it is fully closed.
forward. resistance). 3. Push the convertible-top compartment lid into
P
5. Insert plastic attachment B into the access for the final position.
Q convertible-top lock emergency operation and Closing the convertible-top compartment lid The convertible-top compartment lid is not
turn clockwise or counter-clockwise until it Closing the convertible- locked.
R slides into the catch. WARNING
top compartment lid 4. Hand-tighten emergency hand screw H in the
S 6. Turn plastic attachment B counter-clockwise passenger compartment clockwise.
until the latching hook is fully extended (notice- Parts of the body may become trapped between the
T able resistance). convertible-top compartment lid and stationary ve-
U hicle parts when closing the convertible-top com-
partment lid.
V
e Place your hands on top of the convertible-top
W compartment lid when pushing.
X
Y
Z
104
Coolant
Coolant WARNING
Hot engine parts and hot can cause serious burns. A
coolant
Swallowing Engine B
DANGER
Coolant The engine and adjacent components, the exhaust NOTICE
system and the coolant become very hot when the C
Engine coolant is hazardous to your health and may
engine is running. If you continue to operate the vehicle when a warn- D
be fatal if swallowed.
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. The hot coolant ing appears, you risk damaging the engine.
e Keep engine coolant out of children's reach. E
e Keep engine coolant away from pets. They can
may suddenly escape if the coolant reservoir is not e Switch engine off and let it cool.
be attracted to it should there be a spill, or to
opened carefully. e Do not continue driving if the warning persists, F
used engine coolant left in an open container. e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts, even if the engine coolant level is correct. G
e If engine coolant gets on your skin or into your particularly the engine and exhaust system. e Have the fault rectified. Visit an authorized Por-
e Always turn off the engine and allow it to cool sche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized H
eye, immediately rinse the affected party of your
body with clean water for a few minutes. Then down before working in the engine Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians I
see a doctor immediately. compartment. and the necessary parts and tools.
e Always carry out work in the engine compart- J
e Note all the information on the refill container of > Please see chapter "Warning and Information
the engine coolant. ment with the greatest care. K
e Only top up coolant when the engine is stopped
and the ignition is switched off.
The coolant provides year-round corrosion and L
Engine compartment
freeze protection to –35 °F / –37 °C.
WARNING
blowers and other mov- e Do not open the cap of the coolant reservoir M
The coolant level is regularly checked as part of
ing parts in the area of when the engine is hot. Wait until the coolant
temperature gage displays a temperature below
servicing. N
the engine
e Only use freeze protection agents approved by
140 °F / 60 °C. O
When working in the engine compartment, hands, Porsche.
fingers, articles of clothing, necklaces or long hair Hot Exhaust System Porsche recommends Glysantin® G40® (alternatively P
CAUTION freeze protection agents in accordance with G12+
can become trapped by moving parts, e.g. engine Q
compartment blowers or drive belts. The engine +/VW TL 774 G).
The exhaust system is very hot when the engine is R
compartment blowers are installed under the hood.
running and for a while after the engine has been
After the engine is stopped, the engine compart- S
stopped. Risk of burns and fire!
ment temperature is still monitored. Depending on
temperature, the engine-compartment blowers may e Do not park your vehicle in places where com- T
continue to run or start to run. bustible materials, such as dry grass or leaves, U
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
e You should only work in this area with the utmost
system. V
care and the engine should always be stopped;
e To prevent injury, make a point of noting where W
make sure that body parts, articles of clothing or
your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing your
items of jewelry do not get trapped by radiator X
legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely supervise
fans, engine compartment fans or other moving
children around the vehicle during time when the Y
parts.
exhaust pipe could be hot. A hot exhaust pipe
Z
105
Coolant
A Checking the coolant level and distilled water. Do not fill beyond the max
B adding coolant marking.
6. Screw on the cap of the coolant reservoir until
C you feel it engage.
7. Significant coolant loss indicates leaks in or
D
overfilling of the cooling system or overfilling.
E Check the cooling system and have the cause of
the coolant leak rectified immediately. Visit an
F authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends
G an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have
trained technicians and the necessary parts and
H tools.
I
Information
J
If pure water has been used to refill the reservoir in
K
an emergency, the mix ratio must be corrected. Sig-
L nificant loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling
system or overfilling of the cooling system.
M
e Have the cause rectified immediately. Visit an
N Fig. 67: Coolant reservoir display authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends
an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have
O > Please see chapter "Instrument Cluster" on trained technicians and the necessary parts and
page 138. tools.
P
b Vehicle is level.
Q b Engine is cold and the coolant temperature gage
is below 140 °F/60 °C.
R
1. Read off the coolant level. The fluid level must
S always be between the min and max markings.
T 2. If the coolant level is below the min marking, add
coolant.
U 3. Carefully screw off the coolant reservoir cap and
V allow any excess pressure to escape.
4. Unscrew the cap completely.
W 5. Refill coolant. Only use a mixture consisting of
X equal parts of freeze protection agent and
Y
Z
106
Cruise control
Cruise control Controls Display elements A

Unsafe traffic situation B
WARNING Status display symbols
conditions C
Symbol Meaning D
Using cruise control can lead to an accident if the
prevailing traffic situation does not allow you to drive Cruise control is passive. E
at a sufficient distance to the car in front and at a
constant speed. F
e Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on G
windy stretches of road or in unfavorable road Cruise control is passive. Control is
H
conditions (e.g. wintery conditions, wet roads, interrupted and the desired speed is
varying road surfaces). still displayed. I
J
Cruise control is active with the set
Responding to warning symbols desired speed. K
Always heed any warning and information messages
displayed in the vehicle. L
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information M
Fig. 68: Control lever for driver assistance systems
Messages" on page 280. Switching on cruise control N
R Switch driver assistance systems on/off and open op-
Operating principle tions menu readiness O
S Open options menu (when driver assistance system is The driver assistance system that was selected last
Cruise control maintains the chosen speed in the switched on) is always switched on. The driver assistance system P
range between approx. 20 and 150 mph (30 and 1 Set/increase the desired speed is initially in passive mode when switched on. Cruise
240 km/h) without the driver having to press the 2 Reduce the desired speed Q
control must first be activated before the control
gas pedal. 3 RESUME: Resume control
4 CANCEL: Interrupt control function starts working. R
Switching on cruise control S
Information
Information b Vehicles without button S on the control lever.
T
– Vehicles with PDK: Active downshifting and e Press button R on the control lever.
braking intervention are carried out automatically Button S on the control lever and the options menu Cruise control is switched on and passive. U
to help maintain the pre-selected speed (espe- are available depending on equipment. The operating status appears gray in the status
cially when driving downhill). V
display. There is no speed stored.
– Vehicles with manual transmission: Cruise con- – or – W
trol is not interrupted when the clutch pedal is b Vehicles with button S on the control lever. X
pressed while changing gear. b A driver assistance system is not yet switched
on. Y
1. Press button R on the control lever. Z
107
Cruise control
A The options menu for the driver assistance sys- 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel- e Press the control lever down (position 4,
tems appears on the instrument cluster. erator pedal. CANCEL).
B – or –
2. If cruise control is not already selected, select CC 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position
C using the rotary push button on the steering 1) and release the accelerator pedal. e Press the brake pedal
wheel and press to confirm. Cruise control is active. – or –
D
e Press the clutch pedal for longer than approx.
Cruise control is switched on and passive. The current driving speed appears green in the
E The operating status appears gray in the status status display and is maintained automatically. 7 seconds (vehicles with manual transmission).
display. There is no speed stored.
F – or –
Switching from an already activated driver assis- Changing the desired speed e Move selector lever to operating mode N (ve-
G
tance system to cruise control The desired speed can be increased or decreased by hicles with PDK).
H b Vehicles with button S on the control lever. pressing the control lever.
Cruise control is passive. The set value for the
1. Press button S on the control lever. b Cruise control active. desired speed remains stored. The status display
I
The options menu for the driver assistance sys- Increasing the speed changes from green to gray.
J tems appears on the instrument cluster. e Press the control lever forward (position 1):
K 2. Select CC using the rotary push button on the – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments Cruise control operation is interrupted auto-
steering wheel and press to confirm. – Press and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h) matically in the following situations:
L Cruise control is switched on and passive. increments – The vehicle speed is above or below the set
M The operating status appears gray in the status speed for a certain time.
Reducing the speed
display. There is no speed stored. – Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is in con-
N e Pull the control lever (position 2):
trol mode.
– Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments
O Information – Pull and hold = 6 mph (10 km/h) increments
P An activated driver assistance system will be acti- The new desired speed is displayed on the instru- Resuming the stored speed –
Q vated again even after switching the ignition off and ment cluster. RESUME
on again. e Press the control lever up (position 3, RESUME).
R Information Cruise control accelerates or brakes the vehicle
S Switching off cruise control The speed can be increased using the accelerator to the stored speed.
e Press button R on the control lever. pedal. This does not change the stored value. The
T stored value is set again when you take your foot off
The memory is cleared and the readiness symbol
U disappears. the accelerator pedal.
V
Activating cruise control
W b Cruise control switched on.
Interrupt cruise control operation
X b Speed is higher than 20 mph (30 km/h). – CANCEL
Following deactivation, cruise control switches to
Y standby mode and remains in standby until it is ac-
Z tivated manually again.
108
Cup Holders
Cup Holders Inserting cup holder in the center console Removing the cup holder from the center A
console
B
Using cup holders
C
Objects in the center
WARNING D
console
If the storage compartment or cup holder is not in- E

serted in the center console, objects can obstruct or F
actuate the parking brake button. This may result in
inadvertent braking. G
e Always use the provided storage compartment H
to store objects in the center console.
I
e Only use cup holders for their intended purpose
of storing drinks. J
e Never store objects in the cup holder.
K
e Never operate the vehicle without the cup holder
or storage compartment inserted. L
Spilling hot cups

M
CAUTION Fig. 69: Inserting cup holder in the center console
Fig. 70: Removing the cup holder from the center console N
e Insert the cup holder and push it downward until
Hot cups can cause scalding if spilled. it clicks into place. e Press the button and remove the cup holder O
upward.
e Only use containers that fit. The cup holder can be used.
P
e Never put overfull containers in the cup holder. Depending on the equipment, an ashtray is available,
e Do not use hot cups. which can be inserted in the cup holder. Q
e Keep the cup holder on the passenger side > Please see chapter "Smoker's Package" on
page 239.
R
closed while driving.
S
NOTICE T
U
Risk of damage due to drinks being spilled.
V
e Only use containers that fit.
e Never put overfull containers in the drink holder. W
There is one cup holder in the center console and X
one below the outer air vent on the passenger side. Y
Z
109
Cup Holders
A Using cup holder on the passenger side e To open, press the panel below the outer air vent
on the passenger side.
B
The cup holder opens automatically.
C e To close, push in the cup holder until it clicks into
place.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 71: Cup holders
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Fig. 72: Opening the cup holder
Z
110
Device Manager
Device Manager Pairing a new device via cellphone) to the PCM via WiFi and to use a A
Bluetooth® WiFi hotspot.
B
Opening the Device Manager – Connected WiFi devices: List of all WiFi de-
1. Select or in the header (depending on vices which have been registered. C
The Device Manager provides an overview of the
available devices and of their connection status. the connection status) e Search for new – Search for WiFi hotspot: Search for new WiFi
hotspot and enter the access data for the D
device.
e Select or in the header (depending on 2. Select the device from the list.
external WiFi hotspot (user name and pass- E
the connection status). word). Be aware of upper and lower case
A 6-digit Bluetooth® code is generated and dis- when entering the data. F
played in the PCM and on the device. – Mobile data: G
Displaying connection status 3. Compare the Bluetooth® code in the PCM and – Switch Mobile data on or off.
on the device. – Share data connection: Enable data connec- H
Colors and meanings of the symbols tion for WiFi devices. I
– Green symbol: Connection is active. 4. If the Bluetooth® code in the PCM and on the – Roaming: Allow or block data connections in
device match, confirm. external networks. J
– White symbol: Connection is possible, not yet
active. If the cellphone has been successfully paired, it – Vehicle hotspot: Display PCM WiFi access data.
will appear in the list of devices.
K
– No symbol: Connection is not possible. – Delete paired devices
For information on operating the Porsche L
Available functions Communication Management system (PCM): M
– Phone: Cellphones connected via Bluetooth®. > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)" on page 197. N
Please see chapter "Phone" on page 188.
– Music: External media sources connected via O
Bluetooth®. Please see chapter "Media" on Device Manager settings P
page 168.
e Select or in the header (depending on Q
– Data: Data connection is established via the
SIM card. Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" the connection status) e Options . R
on page 204. – Telephone: Please see chapter "Phone" on S
– App: Porsche Connect App connected via page 188.
WiFi. Please see chapter "Apps" on page 64. – Bluetooth:
T
For further information on the Porsche Connect – Switch Bluetooth on or off. U
App: visit www.porsche.com/connect. – Permit Access to SIM card.
– Adapt Bluetooth name of the PCM. V
– Link: iPhone with access to Apple® CarPlay
connected via USB connection. Please see – WiFi: W
chapter "Apple® CarPlay" on page 62. – Switch WiFi on or off.
– Configure WiFi Hotspot in PCM: Display and X
– ParkPilot: Cellphone connected for remote set up the PCM WiFi access data. This data is Y
parking. Please see chapter "Remote parking" on required to be able to connect a device (e.g.
page 39. Z
111
Driving Programs
A Driving Programs e Press button for the required driving program. cooling air flaps are regulated within the system
Depending on equipment, the vehicle offers various The relevant button lights up red. The selected limits.
B
driving programs for a sportier overall setup and the driving program is shown on the instrument The SPORT Response mode and Sport suspension
C WET driving program with an overall setup for driv- cluster. setting are not available when the WET driving pro-
ing on wet and smooth roads. gram is activated. PSM is switched on and cannot be
D Selecting driving program using the mode deactivated. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) dis-
For information on the vehicle setup in the driving
E programs: switch tance that was set is changed to the medium setting
> Please see chapter "Overview of vehicle setup in b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package ("half speedometer distance") if the set distance
F was previously lower.
the selected driving program" on page 113.
G > Please see chapter "Displaying the distance from
the vehicle in front" on page 47.
H Selecting driving program System limits
I If the wetness sensor in the wheel well becomes
Information clogged with snow, the availability of the system
J may be restricted.
If no driving program is activated, the vehicle auto-
K matically returns to the NORMAL driving program. The automatic regulation and the notices in the in-
strument cluster are available up to a speed of
L After the ignition is switched off, the selected driv-
Fig. 74: Driving program on the steering wheel 156 mph (250 km/h).
ing program automatically switches back to the
M The detection of sufficient wetness on the road is
NORMAL driving program. e Turn the mode switch to the left or to the right to
dependent on the driving speed and the road
N the desired driving program.
surface.
The selected driving program (WET, NORMAL,
O Selecting driving program in PCM SPORT, SPORT PLUS or INDIVIDUAL) is dis-
Porsche WET Mode cannot detect or prevent
aquaplaning.
P played in the instrument cluster.
1. Select CAR e DRIVE . The system is not intended to indicate wet weather
Q 2. Select the required driving program in the PCM. Porsche WET Mode and does not activate the windshield wipers.
The notices on detection of wetness can be disabled.
R Porsche WET Mode can detect significant wetness
S Selecting driving program in the switch panel on the road and regulate the driving systems for e ASSIST e Options e Assistance
b Vehicles without Sport Chrono package
greater driving stability. system settings e Wet Detector
T If sufficient wetness is detected, the system will
automatically regulate the suspension systems
U within the system limits. Depending on the outside Configuring INDIVIDUAL driving
V temperature, the wet symbol or appears in program
W the instrument cluster along with a notice prompting b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package
the driver to activate the WET driving program. If the In the INDIVIDUAL driving program, the settings for
X driver activates the WET driving program, the sus- the chassis, sport exhaust system, rear spoiler and
pension systems are regulated even more strictly Auto Start Stop function can be combined on the
Y and the drive and the position of the spoiler and basis of the NORMAL, SPORT or SPORT PLUS driv-
Z Fig. 73: Buttons for driving program (example: SPORT) ing programs. The stored combination can be
112
Driving Programs
retrieved by turning the mode switch to INDIVIDUAL Activating SPORT Response mode A
or by using the PCM.
B
Selecting and storing settings under C
INDIVIDUAL
D
1. Select CAR e DRIVE .
E
2. Select the required settings in the PCM.
F
3. In order to save the settings, select in the G
header. Fig. 76: SPORT Response button on the steering wheel
H
e Press the SPORT Response button on the mode
Using SPORT Response mode switch. I
b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package The timer in the Car & Info display on the instru- J
ment cluster indicates how long the function is
still available. The previously selected driving K
Fig. 75: SPORT Response display timer
program is then reactivated. L
In SPORT Response mode, the engine and transmis- Deactivating SPORT Response mode M
sion are set to maximum response with timer- b SPORT Response mode active N
control.
e Press the SPORT Response button on the mode
switch again. O
The previously selected driving program is P
reactivated.
Q
Overview of vehicle setup in the selected driving program R
The table below shows only some of the available driving settings for the relevant driving programs.
S
e Please see the relevant section for further information on the individual vehicle functions.
T
Driving program WET NORMAL SPORT SPORT PLUS
U
Idle speed increase Not active Not active Active Active V
Throttle blip during downshifting Active Not active Active Active W
X
Optimized engine sound in the vehicle interior Not active Not active Active Active
Y
Backfire Not active Not active Active Not active
Z
113
Driving Programs
A Driving program WET NORMAL SPORT SPORT PLUS

B
Launch Control Cannot be activated Cannot be activated Cannot be activated Activatable
C
Auto Start Stop Active Active Not active Not active
D
E SPORT Response Cannot be activated Activatable Activatable Activatable
F Sport exhaust system Can be activated Can be activated Active Active
G
H WET
I The control systems are optimized for a wet and smooth surface.
J NORMAL
K During everyday driving, the control systems function in a balance between comfort and fuel economy.
L SPORT
M Adjusts the control systems more toward emotionality and dynamics during everyday driving.
N SPORT PLUS
O Maximum performance for racetrack-like operation.
P
Switching sport exhaust system Selecting sport exhaust system in the switch panel Switching sport exhaust system on and off using
Q on and off the PCM
R The sport exhaust system can be switched to a 1. Select CAR e DRIVE .
sound-optimized mode.
S 2. Select exhaust system.
T
U
V
W Fig. 77: Button for sport exhaust system
X e Press the button for sport exhaust system.
Y When the sport exhaust system is switched on,
the button lights up red.
Z
114
Electrical Socket
Electrical Socket A
B
Using 12-volt electrical socket
Electrical accessories can be connected to the 12- C
volt electrical socket. D
The 12-volt electrical socket is located in the pas-
senger's side footwell. E
F
Connecting charging adapter G
Information H
I
– The 12-volt electrical socket and thus the con-
nected electrical accessories function even if the J
ignition is switched off or the vehicle key is re-
moved. If the engine is not running and the ac-
K
cessories are switched on, the vehicle battery Fig. 78: Charging adapter for 12 volt electrical socket L
will be discharged. The power supply is interrup-
ted after about 30 minutes to protect the vehicle
A Suitable charging adapter M
B Unsuitable charging adapter
battery. If the electrical load is to be switched on N
again, the ignition must be switched on once.
NOTICE O
– The maximum load capacity of a 12-volt socket
is 20 amperes when only one electrical load is in P
operation. Do not exceed 10 A per 12-volt elec- Danger of damage to the electrical system.
trical socket if several electrical loads are oper- e Only use suitable charging adapters (A): Q
ating simultaneously. Distance X between the earth connection and R
– Unshielded devices and equipment can cause the upper edge of the charging adapter must be
interference to radio reception as well as vehicle less than approx. 0.63 in. (16 mm). S
electronics. e Unsuitable charging adapters (B) with a dis- T
tance X greater than 0.63 in. (16 mm) between
the ground connection and the upper edge can U
damage the 12-volt electrical sockets. V
W
X
Y
Z
115
Emergency Call Systems
A Emergency Call Systems system remains available for at least one hour for Information
Different emergency call systems may be used de- queries from the emergency call center.
B When ignition is switched off, the emergency call
pending on model, country and equipment. Help can
C be requested via the emergency call system in an Information cannot be triggered.
emergency or in dangerous situations.
D When the cover is open, the SOS button can be ac- 1. Open the cover plate by pressing on it.
Despite activated private mode, location information
E for the vehicle can be transmitted in the event of a cidentally pressed and therefore trigger an uninten- 2. Press SOS button A for at least 1 second. If the
breakdown or emergency call as well as theft. tional emergency call. SOS button is pressed again for at least 1 second
F e Always keep the SOS button cover closed when within 6 seconds, the emergency call is canceled.
driving. Light indicator B flashes green while the call to
G Emergency call e Only press the SOS button in an emergency. the emergency call center is being established.
H b Cellphone network available.
3. If conditions permit, wait in the vehicle until the
b Emergency call system is ready for operation connection to the emergency call center is
I
(approx. 20 seconds after switching on the Triggering an emergency call via SOS button established.
J ignition).
Light indicator B flashes green when the emer-
K gency call to the emergency call center has been
Information established.
L If queries from the emergency call center remain
The emergency call system does not require a cell-
M unanswered, rescue measures are initiated
phone registered in the vehicle as it has its own
automatically.
N cellphone module.
O Under unfavorable conditions, an emergency call to Information

an emergency call center cannot be ensured (e.g. no
P If the light indicator flashes, but the emergency call
cellphone network available).
center cannot be heard via the loudspeaker, the
Q Due to technical or organizational restrictions be-
loudspeaker may be defective, for example. How-
yond the control of Porsche (e.g. vehicle is in a ever, the emergency call center may be able to hear
R country where there is no emergency call system you.
S coverage), it may not always be possible to establish
an emergency call to the relevant emergency call
T center. If legally permitted, an emergency call can be Light indicator status display
U established to a public emergency call center in this
case. A public emergency call center may not be able Fig. 79: SOS button and light indicator
V to process the data transmitted by the emergency Light indicator Status
call system for determination of the necessary res- A SOS button
W
cue measures (e.g. the current position of the vehicle B Light indicator Off Emergency call system
X is not sent automatically). is off
Y If the vehicle battery is disconnected or defective, an
Lights up green Emergency call system
integral battery ensures that the emergency call
Z is ready for operation
116
Emergency Call Systems
Lights up or flashes Error – emergency call emergency call center, provided that this is available. Data transmission A
red not or only restrictedly This can include: During a breakdown call, data for determination of B
possible1 – Current vehicle position the required measures can be transmitted to Por-
– Position data of the route immediately before the sche Assistance, provided that this is available. This C
Flashes green Active emergency call emergency call is triggered can include:
D
– emergency call is – Vehicle identification number – Current vehicle position
established and data – Vehicle drive type – Vehicle identification number E
transmission to emer- – Severity of the accident – Vehicle type F
gency call center – Direction of the vehicle during the accident – Fault codes and other data for localizing the fault
– Menu language in the vehicle G
Lights up orange Active, automatic – Time of the triggered emergency call Triggering a breakdown call H
emergency call – – Manually or automatically triggered emergency b PHONE e KEYPAD is selected. I
emergency call is es- call
tablished and data – Number of persons in the vehicle J
transmission to the – Crash direction
emergency call center K
Breakdown call L
Automatic emergency call Help can be requested via the breakdown call in the M
case of breakdowns or accidents.
N
Information b Cellphone network available.
b Breakdown call system ready for operation (ap- Fig. 80: Breakdown call button
O
When ignition is switched off, no automatic emer- prox. 20 seconds after switching on the ignition).
gency call is possible. P
b Private mode is deactivated. 1. Select breakdown call A.
A connection to the emergency call center is estab- > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on To end the test emergency call, select in Q
page 204. the footer or the phone menu.
lished automatically immediately after triggering of R
the airbags. The automatic emergency call cannot be 2. If conditions permit, wait in the vehicle until the
prevented by pressing SOS button A. Information S
connection to the call center is established.
If queries from the emergency call center remain T
The breakdown call system does not require a cell-
unanswered, rescue measures are initiated
automatically. phone registered in the vehicle as it has its own U
cellphone module.
V
Data transmission
Due to technical or organizational restrictions out- W
During an emergency call, data for determination of side of Porsche control (e.g. no roaming or no active
the necessary rescue measures is transmitted to the data connection), it may not be possible to establish X
a breakdown call to Porsche Assistance. Y
Z
1. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools.
117
Emergency Starting
A Emergency Starting cable manufacturer. Performing emergency starting

Depending on the model, country and equipment, e The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current
B
the vehicle features either a lead-acid battery with may flow as soon as the positive terminals are
C AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology or a 12-volt connected.
lithium battery (LiFePO4). e Ensure that conductive jewelry (e.g. rings,
D
On vehicles with lithium batteries, the battery is chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
E marked with a sticker. with live parts of the vehicle.
e Never remove or deface stickers or render them e Never connect jumper cables directly to the bat-
F
illegible. tery. Only connect jumper cables to the emer-
G gency starting terminals.
H Emergency starting with a lead- Charging a frozen
I acid battery WARNING
battery
b Vehicle with lead-acid battery.
J If the battery is flat, the battery of another vehicle There is a risk of explosion and chemical burns when
K can be used for starting and as an external power charging a frozen battery.
supply with the help of jumper cables. Both batteries e It is important to thaw out a frozen battery be-
L must have a nominal voltage of 12 V. The capacity fore attaching jumper cables.
M (Ah) of the donor battery must not be substantially
less than that of the flat battery. The discharged Emergency starting a Fig. 81: Lead-acid battery terminals
N battery must be connected correctly to the vehicle's WARNING
frozen or damaged 1. Open the luggage compartment.
electrical system.
O battery > Please see chapter "Emergency unlocking of
> Please see chapter "Battery" on page 69.
the luggage compartment lid" on page 167.
P Repeated emergency starting under normal operat- When emergency starting a frozen or damaged bat-
2. Remove cover in luggage compartment.
ing conditions may indicate that the battery is tery, there is a danger of explosion and chemical
Q > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment"
damaged. burns.
on page 162.
R Unsuitable jumper ca- e Never emergency start a frozen or damaged 3. Connect the red positive cable to the positive
WARNING battery.
S bles and following incor- terminal for emergency starting +.
rect procedures 4. Connect the red positive cable to the positive
T Corrosive electrolyte
CAUTION terminal of the donor battery.
U Starting the vehicle using unsuitable jumper cables
5. Connect the black negative cable to the negative
or following incorrect procedures can cause short
V Lead-acid batteries contain highly corrosive battery
circuits. The short circuit can cause a fire.
acid that can injure the skin and damage clothing on
W e Use only standard jumper cables with sufficient contact.
cross section and completely insulated clamps.
X e Wear safety gloves and eye protection.
Follow the instructions provided by the jumper
Y e If battery acid gets into your eyes or on your skin:
rinse with cold water for several minutes.
Z
118
Emergency Starting
terminal of the donor battery. Never connect the be connected correctly to the vehicle's electrical handled incorrectly. A
black negative cable directly to the battery. system. e Avoid any inhalation of the vapors and any skin B
6. Connect the black negative cable to the ground > Please see chapter "Battery" on page 69. contact with the electrolyte fluid.
point –. Repeated emergency starting under normal operat- e Keep people away and on the side facing into the C
7. Let the engine of the donor vehicle run at a ing conditions may indicate that the battery is wind. D
higher engine speed. damaged. e Only charge lithium batteries in well-ventilated
8. Start the engine. An attempted start using Unsuitable jumper ca- spaces. E
jumper cables should not last more than 15 sec- WARNING
bles and following incor- F
onds. Then wait for at least one minute. rect procedures NOTICE
9. With engine running: G
First, disconnect the black negative cable from Starting the vehicle using unsuitable jumper cables
Risk of damage if emergency starting an exhaus- H
the ground point –, then from the negative ter- or following incorrect procedures can cause short
minal on the donor battery. tively discharged lithium battery. I
circuits. The short circuit can cause a fire.
e If you suspect that the lithium battery is ex-
10.With engine running: e Use only standard jumper cables with sufficient J
Disconnect the red positive cable from the pos- haustively discharged, do not start the vehicle
cross section and completely insulated clamps.
itive terminal of the donor battery first, then from
Follow the instructions provided by the jumper
using jumper cables. K
the positive terminal for emergency starting +.
cable manufacturer. L
e The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current Performing emergency starting
Emergency starting a lithium may flow as soon as the positive terminals are
M
battery connected. N
b Vehicle with lithium battery e Ensure that conductive jewelry (e.g. rings,
chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
O
The 12-volt lithium battery is automatically discon-
nected from the vehicle electrical system if the bat- with live parts of the vehicle. P
tery charge condition is low. The electrical system is e Never connect jumper cables directly to the bat-
Q
deactivated temporarily. When the battery is tery. Only connect jumper cables to the emer-
charged (for at least 10 minutes) or when emergency starting terminals. R
gency starting or connection to an external power
Escaping electrolyte fluid S
supply take place, the electrical system is automati- WARNING
cally reactivated. The 12-volt lithium battery is au- and toxic gas T
tomatically connected to the vehicle electrical
supply again. Risk of electrolyte fluid and toxic gases escaping in U
The battery of another vehicle can be used for exceptional cases if the battery is damaged or V
starting and as an external power supply with the
help of jumper cables. Both batteries must have a
W
nominal voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the X
donor battery must not be substantially less than
that of the flat battery. The discharged battery must Fig. 82: Lithium battery terminals Y
1. Open the luggage compartment. Z
119
Emergency Starting
A > Please see chapter "Emergency unlocking of

the luggage compartment lid" on page 167.
B
2. Remove cover in luggage compartment.
C > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment"
on page 162.
D
3. Connect the red positive cable to the positive
E terminal for emergency starting +.
F 4. Connect the red positive cable to the positive
terminal of the donor battery.
G 5. Connect the black negative cable to the negative
H terminal of the donor battery.
6. Connect the black negative cable to the ground
I point –.
J 7. Let the engine of the donor vehicle run at a
higher engine speed.
K 8. Start the engine. An attempted start using
L jumper cables should not last more than 15 sec-
onds. Then wait for at least one minute.
M 9. With engine running:
N First, disconnect the black negative cable from
the ground point –, then from the negative ter-
O minal on the donor battery.
P 10.With engine running:
Disconnect the red positive cable from the pos-
Q itive terminal of the donor battery first, then from
the positive terminal for emergency starting +.
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
120
Emission Control System
Emission Control System engine damage, this can result in a fire if excess to reach the outside atmosphere. These emissions A
raw fuel reaches the exhaust system. are recirculated from the crankcase to the air intake
B
In the interest of clean air e Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you system. From here the emissions mix with the intake
detect engine misfire or other unusual operating air and are later burned in the engine. C
Pollution of our environment has become a problem
that is of increasing concern to all of us. We urge you conditions.
D
to join us in our efforts for cleaner air in controlling Catalytic converters
the pollutants emitted from the automobile. How Emission Control Works The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up” de- E
Porsche has developed an emission control system When an automobile engine is running, it uses en- vices built into the exhaust system of the vehicle. F
that controls or reduces those parts of the emission ergy generated through the combustion of a mixture The catalytic converters burn the undesirable pollu-
that can be harmful to our environment. Your Por- of air and fuel. Depending on whether a vehicle is tants in the exhaust gas before it is released into the G
sche is equipped with such a system. driven fast or slowly or whether the engine is cold or atmosphere. H
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) may not be The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is critically im-
your new vehicle under the terms and conditions set burned completely, but may be discharged into the portant for the life of the catalytic converters. I
forth in the Warranty Booklet. engine crankcase or exhaust system. Additonal hy- Therefore, only unleaded fuel must be used. J
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the responsi- drocarbons may enter the atmosphere through The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
bility to provide regular maintenance service for the evaporation of fuel from the fuel tank. These hydro- – Push or tow starting the vehicle, K
vehicle and to keep a record of all maintenance work carbons (HC), when released into the air, contribute – Misfiring of the engine, L
performed. To facilitate record keeping, have the to undesirable pollution. – Turning off the ignition while the vehicle is
service performed by authorized Porsche dealers. In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of ni- moving, M
They have Porsche trained technicians and special trogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions. They, – Driving until the fuel tank is completely empty, N
tools to provide fast and efficient service. too, are formed during the combustion process and
– By other unusual operating conditions.
discharged into the exhaust system. To reduce these O
To assure efficient operation of the Emission pollutants, your Porsche is equipped with a precisely e Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
calibrated fuel injection system to assure a finely these conditions, since raw fuel might reach the P
Control System:
e Have your vehicle maintained properly and in balanced air/fuel mixture under all operating catalytic converters. This could result in over- Q
accordance with the recommendations de- conditions. heating of the converters. Federal law prohibits
use of leaded fuel in this vehicle. R
scribed in your Maintenance Booklet. Lack of
proper maintenance, as well as improper use of Oxygen sensor S
the vehicle, will impair the function of the emis- The oxygen sensors, installed in the exhaust pipe Fuel Economy T
sion control system and could lead to damage. continuously sense the oxygen content of the ex- Fuel economy will vary depending on where, when
e Do not alter or remove any component of the haust and signal the information to an electronic and how you drive, optional equipment installed, and U
emission control system. control unit. The control unit corrects the air/fuel the general condition of your vehicle.
V
e Do not alter or remove any device, such as heat ratio, so the engine always receives an accurately A vehicle tuned to specifications and correctly
shields, switches, ignition wires, valves, etc., metered air/fuel mixture. maintained, will help you to achieve optimal fuel W
which are designed to protect your vehicle's economy.
X
emission control system. In addition to serious Crankcase ventilation e Have your vehicle tuned to specifications.
– Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper Y
Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable emis-
engine “breathing”.
sions from the engine crankcase are not permitted Z
– Battery should be fully charged.
121
Emission Control System
A – Wheels should be properly aligned.

– Tires should be inflated to the correct
B pressure.
C e Always monitor your fuel consumption.
e Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed as
D
much as possible.
E e Avoid “jack rabbit” starts and sudden stops.
F e Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without
G lugging the engine will help save fuel.
H e Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start the
vehicle just before you are ready to drive. Accel-
I erate slowly and smoothly.
J e Switch off the engine if stationary for longer
periods.
K e Any additional weight carried in the vehicle re-
L duces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
M e Organize your trips to take in several errands in
N one trip.
e All electrical accessories contribute to increased
O fuel consumption.
P e Only switch on the air conditioning when
necessary.
Q e Do not drive with the Roof Transport System
R mounted unless you need it.
The EPA estimated miles per gallon (mpg) is to be
S used for comparison purposes, actual mileage may
T be different from the estimated mpg, depending on
your driving speed, weather conditions and trip
U length. Your actual highway mileage may be less
V than the estimated mpg.
e Please observe all local and national speed limits.
W
X
Y
Z
122
Engine Oil
Engine Oil The oil pressure warning light indicates serious en- b The engine is at operating temperature and has A
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in gine damage may be occuring when lit, if engine rpm been stopped for at least one minute.
is above idle speed. B
accordance with the intervals specified in your e Vehicle e Oil level
Maintenance Schedule. C
Checking engine oil level D
Engine oil consumption Depending on driving style and the conditions of use,
the oil consumption can be up to 0.84 quarts/620 E
It is normal for your engine to consume oil. The rate
of oil consumption depends on the quality and vis- mls. (0.8 liters/1,000 km). The oil level should be F
cosity of oil, the speed at which the engine is oper- checked at regular intervals (e.g. every time you
ated, the climate, road conditions as well as the refuel). G
amount of dilution and oxidation of the lubricant. H
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and Responding to oil level warning
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil If the oil level is too low, a warning message appears I
measurement may not show any drop in the oil level on the instrument cluster, indicating that the engine J
at all. This is because the oil is gradually becoming must be topped up with oil immediately.
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that K
the oil level has not changed. Measuring and displaying the oil level L
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the ve-
hicle is driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, NOTICE M
making it then appear that oil is excessively con- N
sumed after driving at high speeds. Risk of engine damage.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are dusty, If the oil level is below the minimum mark, the en- Fig. 83: Oil level display O
humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil change inter- gine will not be sufficiently lubricated A Oil level sufficient - maximum reached P
vals should be greater. e Check the oil level regularly. B Minimum oil level reached
Q
e Do not allow the oil level to drop below the min-
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed, cli- C Oil level below minimum
D Oil level above maximum
matic conditions are warm, and the load is high, the imum mark. R
E The difference quantity is around 1.4 quarts (1.3 liters)
oil should be checked more frequently, as driving (911 Carrera, 911 Targa) or around 1.0 quart (1.0 liter)
conditions will determine the rate of oil (911 Turbo S)
S
consumption. Information
T
– The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to lu- If the display is green A, the oil level has reached the
Under certain circumstances, the oil level cannot be
bricate and cool all of its moving parts. There- maximum mark and is sufficient. U
measured. The reasons for this include:
fore, the engine oil should be checked regularly If the lower segment of the display is yellow B, the oil V
– Engine is cold.
and kept at the required level. level has reached the minimum mark.
– Vehicle has been parked after full-load operation
– Make it a habit to have the engine oil level e Add the amount of engine oil displayed on the W
at high engine speeds.
checked with every refueling. instrument cluster at the next opportunity. X
– Engine oil temperature is too high. Never add more than the amount of engine oil
The oil pressure warning light is not an oil-level
displayed. The difference between the minimum Y
indicator. b Vehicle is level. and maximum mark is around
Z
123
Engine Oil
A 1.4 quarts (1.3 liters) (911 Carrera, 911 Targa) they have trained technicians and the necessary fans, engine compartment fans or other moving
or around 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) (911 Turbo S). parts and tools. parts.
B
If the lower segment of the display is red C, the oil
C level has dropped below the minimum mark. Choosing and topping up engine WARNING
Burning engine oil
1. Stop when it is safe to do so.
D oil
2. Add the amount of engine oil displayed on the Engine oil can ignite if it comes into contact with hot
E Swallowing engine oil
instrument cluster immediately. DANGER engine parts. Engine oil stored in non-ventilated
Never add more than the amount of engine oil
F areas or thrown-away cloths with engine oil residues
displayed. The difference between the minimum Engine oil is hazardous to your health and may be can self-combust and result in a fire.
G and maximum mark is around fatal if swallowed.
1.4 quarts (1.3 liters) (911 Carrera, 911 Targa) e Wipe up spilled engine oil with a cloth.
H e Keep engine oil out of children's reach. e Cloths soaked with engine oil must be stored in a
or around 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) (911 Turbo S).
I If the display is yellow right to the top D, the per- well-ventilated area until disposal.
missible max. engine filling level has been exceeded. WARNING
Engine oil cancer risk e Allow the engine to cool down before topping up
J This can result in damage to the vehicle. engine oil.
K Correct the oil level at the earliest opportunity. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
Hot engine parts
e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- cancer in laboratory animals. WARNING
L
ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they e Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly
M have trained technicians and the necessary parts with soap and water. The engine and adjacent components, and the ex-
and tools. haust system become very hot when the engine is
N
Engine compartment running.
O Driving on racetracks WARNING
blowers and other mov- e There is an acute risk of burns if these compo-
To reduce the increased loads when driving on ing parts in the area of
P nents are touched.
racetracks, Porsche recommends the following the engine e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts,
Q measures during racetrack operation:
particularly the engine and exhaust system.
e Check the oil level each time before driving on a When working in the engine compartment, hands,
R e Always turn off the engine and allow it to cool
racetrack. fingers, articles of clothing, necklaces or long hair
down before working in the engine
S e Ensure that the oil level displayed is between can become trapped by moving parts, e.g. engine
compartment.
medium and maximum. compartment blowers or drive belts. The engine
T e Always carry out work in the engine compart-
e If the oil level is below medium, add around compartment blowers are installed under the hood.
ment with the greatest care.
U 0.5 quarts (0.5 liters) of engine oil. After the engine is stopped, the engine compart-
e Only top up engine oil when the engine is stop-
V e If the oil level is between minimum and medium, ment temperature is still monitored. Depending on
ped and the ignition is switched off.
add around 0.5 quarts (0.5 liters) of engine oil. temperature, the engine-compartment blowers may
W e For regular racetrack operation, change the en- continue to run or start to run.
X gine oil and oil filter after at most e You should only work in this area with the utmost NOTICE
6,000 miles (10,000 km). care and the engine should always be stopped;
Y Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche make sure that body parts, articles of clothing or Too much or too little engine oil will damage the
recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as items of jewelry do not get trapped by radiator engine. Too much engine oil can result in blue smoke
Z
formation and cause damage to the emission control
124
Engine Oil
system in the long term. Adding engine oil > Please see chapter "Filler Openings" on page 28. A
e Do not allow the oil level to drop below the min- 1. Read the engine oil level on the multifunction
B
imum mark. display.
e Only add engine oil to the maximum mark. In the 2. Open the engine lid (Cabriolet: convertible top C
event of overfilling, correct this at the earliest compartment lid, Targa: glass rear screen)
D
opportunity. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. 3. Unscrew the cap of the oil filler opening.
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche 4. Add the amount of engine oil displayed on the E
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the multifunction display. Never add more than the F
necessary parts and tools. amount of engine oil indicated. The difference
between the minimum and maximum mark is G
Make sure to note the following points: around 1.4 quarts (911 Carrera, 911 Targa) or
H
– Use only engine oils approved by Porsche. Ob- around 1.1 quarts (911 Turbo S)
serve the service intervals. 5. Carefully close the cap of the oil filler opening. I
– Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed.
J
– Do not use oil additives.
– If you suspect an engine leak, have the engine K
checked immediately. Visit an authorized Por- L
sche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized
Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians Fig. 84: Oil filler opening M
and the necessary parts and tools.
N
Selecting engine oil O
Porsche recommends . P
If a sticker showing details of an approved engine
oil is affixed in the engine compartment, this spec- Q
ification has priority over the specifications in this
R
manual.
If in doubt and to find out the current approval sta- S
tus, please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. T
Vehicle Approval SAE viscosity U
class
V
All Porsche C40, SAE 0W-40 W
alternatively
VW 511 00 X
Y
Fig. 85: Engine oil filler opening, Cabriolet
1. Z
125
Flat Tire
A Flat Tire Sealing defective tires The tire sealant set (Tire Mobility System - TMS) is
B Depending on the model and vehicle equipment, the b Vehicle with tire sealant ( located in the luggage compartment.
vehicle comes with either a tire sealing compound Tire Mobility System - TMS) > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on
C kit (Tire Mobility System - TMS) or a collapsible Risk of accident due to
page 162.
spare wheel. WARNING
D sealed tires
Filling tire sealant (
E Responding to Tire Pressure Mon- Damaged tires that are sealed with tire sealant can Tire Mobility System - TMS)
lose pressure or burst in the event of inappropriate
F itoring System warning messages speed or continuous loading. WARNING
Flammable and harmful
sealant
If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System has detected
G
a severe pressure loss, a message appears on the e Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful to
H instrument cluster. This loss of pressure could indi- emergency solution enabling you to drive to the
health. Prolonged or repeated exposure can cause
cate tire damage. nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
I e Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
irritation, allergic reaction or organ damage.
e Stop in a suitable place and check the indicated
J punctures no larger than 0.16 in. (4 mm). e Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited
tire for damage.
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on e Never use tire sealant if the rim is damaged or if when handling tire sealant.
K you have driven with low tire pressure or deflated e Keep tire sealant away from children.
page 300.
L tires. e Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing.
e Do not use tire sealant at outside temperatures e If tire sealant gets on your skin or into your eyes,
M Parking the vehicle safely below -4 °F (-20 °C). thoroughly rinse the affected part of your body
N 1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving lane e Avoid rapid acceleration and high cornering immediately with plenty of water.
as possible. The vehicle must be parked on a firm speeds. e If you feel unwell or have an allergic reaction,
O and flat surface that is skid-proof. e Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). consult a doctor immediately.
P 2. Switch on the emergency flasher. e Check the tire pressure after driving for around e Change soiled clothing immediately.
3. Activate the electric parking brake. 10 minutes. If the tire pressure is less than e Do not inhale vapors.
Q 4. Activate the transmission parking lock using the 22 psi (1.5 bar), do not continue driving. e If tire sealant is swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
R P button on the selector lever. e Have sealed tires replaced by an authorized Por- your mouth immediately and drink plenty of
5. Straighten the front wheels. sche dealer as soon as possible. Inform the au- water. Do not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
S 6. Get all passengers to leave the vehicle. Pay at- thorized Porsche dealer that the tire contains tire immediately.
T tention to the traffic as they do so. sealant.
7. Set up the warning triangle at a suitable e Tire repairs are not permissible. Replace dam- WARNING
Failure to detect pres-
U distance. sure loss in the tire
aged tires.
V 8. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling e Observe the safety information and instructions A tire pressure sensor that is soiled with tire sealant
away, e.g. by means of wedges under the wheels for use in the separate operating instructions for cannot determine the tire pressure correctly.
W on the diagonally opposite side. the tire sealant and compressor.
e When the defective tire is changed, have the tire
X > Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Platform" on
In case of a flat tire, tire defects or tire damage can pressure sensor replaced as well.
page 147.
Y be sealed temporarily using the tire sealant provided
Z in the vehicle.
126
Flat Tire
Filling tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS) > Please see chapter "Checking tire pressure" on A
> Refer to the operating instructions for the tire page 300.
B
sealant.
1. Shake the filler bottle A.
Changing tires C
2. Screw the filler hose B onto the filler bottle. > Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on
D
page 300.
The filler bottle is now open.
E
3. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve F.
Updating the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
4. Remove the valve insert E from the tire valve us- tem tire settings after changing a wheel F
ing the valve turner D.
> Please see chapter "Tire Pressure Monitoring G
If a replacement valve insert is not available,
System (TPMS)" on page 301.
keep the valve insert in a clean, dry place. H
5. Remove the plug C from the filler hose B.
I
6. Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
7. Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the J
tire valve and squeeze it forcefully until the con- K
tents of the bottle are completely emptied into
Fig. 86: Filling tire sealant the tire. L
A Filler bottle 8. Detach the filler hose from the tire valve. M
B Filler hose 9. If available, screw the replacement valve insert or
C Filler hose plug alternatively valve insert E firmly into the tire N
D Valve turner valve using valve turner D.
E Valve insert O
F Tire valve Inflating the tire
P
> Comply with the operating instructions on the
Preparing to fill compressor. Q
1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in the
> Please see chapter "Inflating tires" on page 306. R
tire.
1. Connect the compressor to a socket in the ve-
2. Remove the tire sealant ( S
hicle and inflate the tire to at least
Tire Mobility System - TMS) and the supplied
37 psi (2.5 bar). If this tire pressure cannot be T
sticker from the luggage compartment. The tire
reached, the tire is too severely damaged. Do not
sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS) is located U
continue driving with that tire.
in the right-hand box in the luggage compart-
ment. The compressor is located under the cover 2. Screw valve cap onto the tire valve F. V
in the luggage compartment. W
Checking the pressure
> Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment"
on page 162. e Check the tire pressure after driving for X
3. Affix the sticker in the driver's field of vision. around 10 minutes. If the tire pressure is less
than 22 psi (1.5 bar), do not continue driving. Y
Z
127
Front Axle Lift System
A Front Axle Lift System b Engine is running. NOTICE

B With the front axle lift system, the front end can be e Press the button.
raised by around 1.57 in. (40 mm) (leading edge of The front end is raised. Risk of damage if the vehicle hits an obstacle.
C the front spoiler). This helps prevent damage to the The button flashes red and a message appears in e Do not lower the vehicle when positioned over an
bodywork, such as when entering underground
D the instrument cluster. obstacle.
parking garages or crossing speed bumps.
When the front end is fully raised:
E
– The button lights up red.
F Operational readiness and – A message appears on the instrument cluster. Malfunctions in the lift system
G behavior Malfunctions in the front axle lift system are indi-
– The front axle lift system can be activated when NOTICE cated in the instrument cluster.
H the engine is running and the vehicle is station- > Please see chapter "Warning and Information
ary or, within the system limits, when it is trav- There is a risk of damage if the front end is lowered Messages" on page 280.
I
eling at a speed of up to approx. 20 mph ( inadvertently.
J 35 km/h) (or up to approx. 40 mph (60 km/h), Because of the system design, the front end lowers Automatic lift function
depending on the country). automatically after a certain time when the engine is
K With the automatic lift function, the front end can be
– The vehicle is automatically lowered to the nor- stopped. raised automatically based on the location.
L mal level again at speeds above the system
e The vehicle must always be lowered before it is
limits. NOTICE
M switched off.
– When the vehicle is raised, the damping charac-
N teristics of the front axle change and noises can The system must not induce you to take risks with
O be heard coming from the front axle when the
steering wheel is turned.
Lowering the front end your safety. Responsibility when driving, such as
P b Doors are closed. choosing an appropriate speed, remains with the
– At temperatures below approx. 14 °F / -10 °C it
may take longer to fully raise the front end of the b Engine is running. driver. The automatic lift function is no substitute for
Q the driver's attentiveness.
vehicle. In addition, noise levels can be higher. e Press button .
R The front end is lowered. The button flashes red Even with the lift system fully extended, contact
with an obstacle cannot be prevented if the driving
S Raising the front end and a message appears on the instrument
speed is inappropriate.
cluster.
T When the front end is fully lowered: Situations may arise in which a saved location is not
– The red illumination of the button goes out. recognized and the automatic lift function is not
U
– A message appears on the instrument cluster. executed.
V If there is a fault in the lift system, the automatic lift
W Information function may not be executed.
e Make sure that the front end raises when ap-
X If a door is opened while the vehicle is being lowered, proaching taught locations.
Y the front end is raised again automatically. e Drive over the obstacle at an appropriate speed.
Z Fig. 87: Button for lift system
128
Front Axle Lift System
Teaching the automatic lift function Adjusting the automatic lift function A
When first approaching an obstacle, raising of the The function can be activated and deactivated on B
front end must be initiated manually and the location the PCM. Saved locations can be renamed or
saved. deleted. C
1. Press the button.
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Smart D
2. Tap Save on the touch display. Lift settings E
A message confirming that the save procedure has F
been completed appears on the PCM.
G
Information H
If there are several approach paths to an obstacle, I
such as on the outward and return route, it is nec-
essary to approach the obstacle and save the loca-
J
tion on both journeys. K
L
Executing the automatic lift function M
Raising the front end automatically
b Automatic lift function activated.
N
b Location for the automatic lift function taught. O
b Driving speed within the system limits.
P
When approaching a saved location, the front end is
raised automatically. A message appears on the in- Q
strument cluster.
R
Information S
If the button is pressed during automatic raising, T

the automatic lift function is aborted. A message U
appears on the touch display of the PCM.
V
Lowering the front end W
e Press the button. X
– or –
Y
Automatically at a speed above the system limits
of the lift system. Z
129
Fuses
A Fuses Checking and changing fuses Unassigned fuse slots are not listed in the following
Electrical shock To prevent short-circuits and overloading of the overviews.
B DANGER
electrical system, the individual circuits are pro- 1. If possible, switch off the load with the defective
C tected by fuses. fuse.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine running or Fuse boxes are located in the footwell on the driver's 2. Open the relevant fuse box cover.
D the ignition on could cause electrical shock. and passenger's side. 3. If necessary, carefully remove the purple plastic
E e Always switch off the engine and the ignition Depending on the equipment, further fuse boxes are strip over the fuses.
when working on the electrical system. located at various locations in the vehicle, which are 4. Remove the fuse from its slot using the yellow
F
only accessible to an authorized Porsche dealer. plastic gripper in order to check it. A blown fuse
G WARNING
Short circuit can be identified by the melted metal strip.
Fuse ratings 5. Insert a new fuse. The replacement fuse must
H
Working on the electrical system of the vehicle can have the same rated current as the one it is
I Color Amperage replacing.
result in a short circuit. The short circuit can cause a
J fire. rating 6. Fit the purple plastic strip back into place.
If the same fuse blows repeatedly, the cause of the
K e Always disconnect the negative terminal on the
Light brown 5A fault must be corrected immediately.
battery when working on the electrical system.
L e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
Improper intervention Brown 7.5 A ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
M WARNING have trained technicians and the necessary parts
and incorrect
N Red 10 A and tools.
accessories
O Improper intervention in the fuse box and the use of Blue 15 A
P the incorrect accessories can result in damage and
malfunctions in electrical and electronic systems. Yellow 20 A
Q
e Do not attempt to replace any electrical compo-
White / clear 25 A
R nents except the fuses listed here (e.g. relays).
e Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche
S Green 30 A
recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as
T they have trained technicians and the necessary Blue-green 35 A
parts and tools.
U
e Only use accessories that have been approved by Orange 40 A
V Porsche. For information on approved accesso-
ries: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
W Checking and changing fuses
X The numbering of the fuse slots is printed or em-
bossed on the inside of the cover of or on the fuse
Y
carrier.
Z
130
Fuses
Opening the fuse box in the driv- No. Load Row C A

er's footwell B
13 Diagnostic socket No. Load
C
14 BCM control unit 2 Radiator fan, left
D
15 Socket supply 3 Brake booster control unit E
16 Seat adjustment, front left 4 Seat ventilation, front left F
8 BCM control unit

G
Row B H
12 PVTS control unit
No. Load
I
14 Diagnostic socket
J
2 BCM control unit
K
3 Horn Opening the fuse box in the pas- L
4 Seat belt, front left
senger's footwell
M
Fig. 88: Fuse box in the driver's footwell 5 Seat heating N
O
Row A 6 Parking systems
P
No. Load 7 Air conditioning system Q
1 Ignition lock, light buttons, switch panel 8 Interior lighting R
in the center console S
9 Subwoofer
3 Steering control unit T
10 Electric steering column adjustment
4 Steering wheel heating control unit control unit U
V
5 Alarm system 11 Right and left door control unit
W
9 Parking brake, PSM control unit 12 Left headlight electronics X
10 Driver assistance control unit Fig. 89: Fuse box on the passenger's side Y
Z
12 PVTS control unit
131
Fuses
A Row A Row C
B
No. Load No. Load
C
5 Media interfaces 1 Air quality sensor
D
E 9 Tire pressure monitoring control unit 2 Radiator fan, right
F 11 Airbag control unit 4 Seat ventilation, front right

G
13 Garage door opener 5 Adaptive Cruise Control
H
14 BCM control unit 6 All-wheel drive control unit
I
J 15 BCM control unit 8 Ionizer
K 16 Seat adjustment, front right 9 Brake booster control unit
L
M Row B
N No. Load
O
4 Seat belt, front right
P
6 All-wheel drive control unit
Q
R 7 Fresh-air blower
S 8 Luggage compartment
T
9 PCM
U
10 PCM
V
W 11 Driver/passenger door control unit
X 12 Right headlight electronics

Y
Z
132
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Garage Door Opener Information Information A

(HomeLink®) e Before selling your vehicle, remember to delete If the signals cannot be stored despite having care- B
the garage door opener signals. fully read this chapter and the operating instructions C
General safety instructions for the original remote control:
e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. D
Pinching, crushing or
WARNING
impact through operated
Teaching garage door opener e Make sure that there is a new battery in the ga- E
equipment b The ignition is switched on. rage door opener remote control. Insufficient
b Engine is not running. battery power can cause malfunctions in signal F
If persons or animals are in the movement area of b Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with transmission. The system in the vehicle then G
the operated equipment, there is a risk of injury remote-controlled equipment and is within the learns an incorrect code, which cannot be reliably
while the garage door opener is being operated or receiver range (signal is transmitted). recognized. H
programmed. e Check the compatibility of the vehicle's I
e Make sure there are no persons, animals or ob-
Systems with remote control HomeLink® system with the original remote
control. J
jects in the movement area of the operated
1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e
K
equipment while the HomeLink® system is being HomeLink®Garage door opener e Configure
operated or programmed. new HomeLink® profile Systems without remote control (FixKit L
e Observe the safety instructions for the original receiver)
remote control. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen. During M
programming, aim the remote control at the 1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e
overhead console from the height of the center HomeLink®Garage door opener e Configure
N
Operating principle console. new HomeLink® profile e O
The HomeLink® system, can be used to operate up to Systems without rolling code system:
The profile is taught. 2. Select the desired option. P
eight radio-controlled devices (garage doors/prop-
erty gates, security systems, house lighting) can be – or – 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Q
operated from the vehicle via profiles in the PCM. Systems with rolling code system: The profile is taught.
R
> Observe the instructions for the original remote The profile is created. Manual synchronization
control. between the HomeLink® and vehicle is still re- S
quired to complete the teaching process: Using the garage door opener
T
Information 3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
Calling up configured HomeLink® profiles U
> Read and follow the instructions for the manually
For information on the compatibility of your vehicle’s
original remote control. V
HomeLink® system with the original remote control: b Ignition is switched on.
e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. The profile is taught. b Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with W
> Visit www.homelink.com or call the toll-free remote-controlled equipment and is within the
hotline on 1–800–355–3515. receiver range (signal is transmitted).
X
Y
1. CAR e CONTROL e HomeLink®
Z
2. Select the desired profile.
133
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
A If the existing HomeLink® profiles are assigned to > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on
GPS coordinates, the profiles are filtered based on page 270.
B the current vehicle position.
C Managing configured profiles
Displaying configured HomeLink® profiles
D automatically Deleting a configured profile
E Shortly before reaching HomeLink® systems with
assigned GPS coordinates, affected profiles will be 1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e
F displayed automatically. HomeLink®Garage door opener e Configured
G GPS coordinates can be assigned during the teach- HomeLink® profiles
ing process or afterward:
H > Please see chapter "Teaching garage door open- 2. Select the button for the relevant profile.
I er" on page 133. 3. Select Delete.
> Please see chapter "Managing configured pro-
J files" on page 134.
Deleting all configured profiles
K b GPS coordinates must be assigned to a
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e
HomeLink® profile.
L b Ignition switched on. HomeLink®Garage door opener e Configured
M b Vehicle is positioned to allow visual contact with
HomeLink® profiles e e Delete all
remote-controlled equipment and is within the
N receiver range (signal is transmitted).
O Renaming a taught profile, adding or deleting
e Select the desired profile. GPS coordinates for a taught profile
P
Q Information 1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e
HomeLink®Garage door opener e Configured
R When parking assistance systems are activated, the HomeLink® profiles
HomeLink® display may be hidden by the ParkAssist
S 2. Select the button for the relevant profile.
display.
T e Close the parking assistance system display if 3. Select the desired option.
necessary.
U
– or –
V e Assign the HomeLink® function to a quick access
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
W
center console switch panel and then press the
X button if required.
Y HomeLink® is displayed in the foreground.
Z For information on the quick access button:
134
HOLD Function
HOLD Function The vehicle is held on the gradient to enable Information A

As an assistance function, the HOLD function sup- driving off and prevent the vehicle from rolling
back. Under the following conditions, the HOLD function is B
ports the driver when stopping the vehicle and driv-
ing off on steep gradients. 5. Drive off in the usual way. not activated in vehicles with PDK: C
The vehicle is automatically secured against rolling – In the P and N operating modes.
– Vehicle not stationary.
D
backward. The light indicator on the instru- Information
ment cluster comes on when the HOLD function is – Engine stopped manually. E
active. Under the following conditions, the HOLD function is – On gradients of less than 5%.
not activated on vehicles with a manual F
If the driver's seat belt is unfastened and the driver's – If the driver’s door is opened and the driver’s seat
door is opened while the HOLD function is active, the transmission: belt is not fastened. G
vehicle is automatically prevented from rolling away. – Clutch not pressed.
– In operating mode N.
H
Loss of control over the
WARNING – Vehicle not stationary. Information I
vehicle
– Engine stopped manually.
Despite the HOLD function, responsibility for stop-
The HOLD function can be activated, irrespective of J
– On gradients of less than 5%. the gradient, by quickly flooring the pressed brake
ping and starting on gradients lies with the driver. – If the driver’s door is opened and the driver’s pedal while the vehicle is stationary. This keeps the K
When stopping and starting on slippery surfaces (e. seatbelt is not fastened. vehicle at a standstill without the brake pedal having L
g. icy or loose substrate), assistance from the HOLD to be pressed continuously. A drive position change
function is not always guaranteed. The vehicle can to the selector lever position does not deactivate the M
roll away. HOLD in conjunction with PDK HOLD function. N
e Always adjust your driving style to the road sur- The HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is
face and the vehicle load; use the footbrake if Slight rolling back on O
stationary. WARNING
necessary. The vehicle is held at a standstill and secured to uphill slopes P
If the HOLD function is not working, the driver prevent it from rolling backward even if the brake is
cannot be assisted when driving off on gradients: not actuated. If the vehicle comes to a standstill on steep gra- Q
e Hold the vehicle with the footbrake. When Adaptive Cruise Control is operating normally,
dients without the driver applying the footbrake, the
R
the HOLD function actively holds the vehicle at a vehicle can roll back until the HOLD function stops it.
standstill following automatic braking. In this situation it is possible to reduce the roll-back S
HOLD in conjunction with a man- When the vehicle is held by the HOLD function, you by applying the footbrake. T
ual transmission can drive off in the usual way. e Assist holding of the vehicle by increasing the
U
b Engine is running. braking force with the footbrake.
1. Hold the vehicle securely on the gradient using V
the footbrake. W
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully.
3. Select an appropriate gear for the intended driv- X
ing direction and gradient (1st gear or reverse). Y
4. Release the footbrake while still holding the
clutch pedal down. Z
135
HOLD Function
A Information
B When the HOLD function is active, the driver may
C feel a difference in the brake pedal and hydraulic
noises may be heard.
D This behavior is typical of the system. There is no
E fault.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
136
Hood
Hood b Ignition on (Targa) Targa: A

e Pull button B. e Pull and hold button B until the rear glass win-
B
Opening and closing the hood Coupé: The hood is released and can be lifted. dow is fully closed.
Cabriolet: The hood (convertible top compart- – or – C
Opening the hood ment lid) opens automatically as far as service Pull the button for closing the Targa roof and
D
position. hold it until the rear glass window is fully closed.
NOTICE Targa: The rear glass window opens automati- > Please see chapter "Targa Roof System" on E
cally to the service position. page 250.
F
When opening the Targa roof, the rear glass window If the Targa roof or the rear glass window is opened
projects beyond the contours of the vehicle. There is or closed using the button in the center console or G
a risk of damage to the rear glass window. using the engine compartment lid button, rear Par- H
e While opening and closing, make sure that no kAssist is activated at the same time1.
one is behind the vehicle. Make sure there is If the sensors detect an obstacle at a distance of I
sufficient clearance above and behind the vehicle approx. 20 in. (50 cm) or less, opening or closing is J
(e.g. in the garage). stopped.
A message appears on the instrument cluster. K
If there is no obstacle in the vicinity of the vehicle, L
the process can be continued manually.
e Pull the button twice within approx. 10 seconds. M
N
Closing the hood
O
Coupé:
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop into the lock. P
Press the hood closed with the flat of your hand
Q
over the lock area.
2. Check that the hood has correctly engaged in the R
lock.
S
If the hood is not closed properly, a message ap-
pears in the instrument cluster while driving. T
Cabriolet: U
e Pull button B.
V
The hood (convertible top compartment lid)
Fig. 90: Opening the hood closes automatically. W
A Luggage compartment lid button X
B Hood button
Y
Z
1. Not while active parking support is in use.
137
Instrument Cluster
A Instrument Cluster
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q Fig. 91: Instrument cluster
R
S A – Speed & Assist display B – Tachometer D – Car & Info display
Information on the time, outside temperature, speed, The start of the red zone on the tachometer scale is Information on the driving program, vehicle status,
T navigation and assistance systems is shown in tubes a visual warning of the maximum permissible engine navigation, assistance systems and driver assistance
U 1 and 2. speed. is displayed in tubes 4 and 5.
For information on the Speed & Assist display For information on the Car & Info display settings:
V settings: C – Digital speedometer > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on
W > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on Information on the speed, selector lever position and page 270.
page 270. engaged gear is displayed in the digital
X speedometer.
Y
Z
138
Instrument Cluster
E – Fuel gage cluster. The warning light lights up or flashes. engine is running or while driving. A
e If the red zone is reached, find a safe place to Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, B
NOTICE stop and switch off the engine. Do not continue as they have trained technicians and the necessary
driving. parts and tools. C
A lack of fuel can damage the emission control
D
system. Bar in left area – engine cold High beam warning light
e Never drive the tank dry. e Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine Dynamic high beam light indicator E
e If the remaining range warning has appeared, do loading. F
not take bends at high speed. Low beam light indicator
Bar in center area – normal operating temperature G
Light indicator for rear fog light
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. driving uphill e The bar may move up to the red area when the
or downhill), minor deviations may occur on the fuel engine is heavily loaded and the outside temper- Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus H
gage. ature is high. (PDLS Plus) warning light I
Fuel reserve warning Bar in red area – operating temperature is too high Lights warning light
J
If the fuel level falls below a model-dependent re- e If the coolant level is low, warning signals may Coolant temperature warning light
maining range, a warning message regarding the fuel appear if the vehicle tilts at an extreme angle (e. K
range is displayed. g. steep slopes) or generates high lateral accel- Engine control system warning light
L
e Refuel at the next opportunity. eration while negotiating long bends (e.g. circular Engine control system warning light
> Please see chapter "Refueling" on page 221. course driving). If the warnings do not disappear M
once the vehicle has assumed "normal" operating Distance warning light
N
Identification for location of filler flap state, check the coolant level.
Tire pressure warning light
The arrow is pointing toward the side of > Please see chapter "Coolant" on page 105. During the teach-in process for newly
O
the vehicle on which the filler flap is fitted wheels or tire pressure sensors, in P
located.
F – Boost pressure display the event of pressure loss in a tire, a fault
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the boost or a temporary malfunction of the Tire Q
F – Coolant temperature gage pressure may be displayed in the display. Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system, the R
warning light may flash or light up.
NOTICE Warning lights and light Allwheel warning light
S
indicators Porsche Active Safe warning light
T
Excessively high coolant temperature can cause en-
gine damage. NOTICE U
Electric parking brake warning light
If the coolant temperature is too high, the coolant (USA) V
temperature gage moves to the maximum mark. A Faults are indicated by the warning lights. The cor- Electric parking brake warning light W
warning message is displayed on the instrument responding warning light goes out only when the (Canada)
cause of the fault has been remedied. Porsche Active Suspension Management X
Consult a qualified repair shop in the following (PASM) warning light Y
cases: Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
– The warning light comes on or flashes when the light (USA) Z
139
Instrument Cluster
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
A grass or leaves, cannot come into contact with
light (Canada) the hot exhaust system.
B Power steering warning light e Note measures for emission control faults.
C Central warning light
D Left turn signal
Operating the instrument cluster
E Configuring settings and
Right turn signal WARNING
operating while driving
F Airbag warning light
Configuring settings and operating the multifunction
G Seat belt warning light steering wheel, infotainment system, etc. while
H Brake system warning light (USA) driving can distract you from the traffic. You may
lose control of the vehicle.
I Brake system warning light (Canada)
e Only operate these components while driving if
J Brake pad warning light (USA) the traffic situation allows.
K e If in doubt, stop in a safe place and only carry out
Brake pad warning light (Canada)
extensive operations and settings while the ve-
L hicle is at a standstill. Fig. 92: Operating instrument cluster with the multifunction
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) steering wheel
M warning light The instrument cluster is only ready to use when the
N Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ignition is switched on. For safety reasons, some A - Setting the volume and muting the audio
OFF warning light functions are only available when the vehicle is source
O Night Assist light indicator stationary. e Setting the volume: Turn rotary push button A up
P or down.
HOLD function light indicator
e Muting: Press rotary push button A.
Q Emission control warning light (Check
R Engine) B - Opening voice control
S
In the event of malfunctions (e.g. engine e Press button B.
misfiring) that could increase pollutant
T emissions or cause consequential dam- C - Opening a saved function
age, the warning light may flash or light
U up. Assigning quick access buttons
V If the emission control (Check Engine) warning e Press button C (◊ button). The button on the
light flashes or lights up steering wheel and in the switch panel can be
W
e Reduce engine speed and load immediately. assigned individually.
X e If necessary, stop when it is safe to do so. Make > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on
sure that combustible materials, such as dry page 270.
Y
Z
140
Instrument Cluster
D - Play next station/track Adapting view in the instrument cluster A

e Press button D. Four fields with different vehicle information can be B
populated using drag & drop. One item of vehicle in-
E - Scrolling to and selecting menus and formation cannot be assigned to several fields. C
functions in the Speed & Assist 1 and Car & D
Info 2 displays e CAR e CONTROL e Displays e
e Scrolling: Turn rotary push button E up or down. Instrument cluster display e Customized view E
e Select/Enter: Press rotary push button E. The customized view can then be selected in the in- F
strument cluster.
F - Switch between operating the Speed & G
Assist 1 display and Car & Info 2 display e Vehicle e View e Customized
H
e Press button F.
I
G - Skipping back one or several selection J
levels in the Car & Info 2 display
K
e Press button G.
L
H - Answering a phone call
M
e Press button H.
N
Selection of options and activa- O
tion of functions P
A preceding symbol indicates whether an option is
selected or a function is activated. Q
R
Selecting one of several options
Option is selected. S
T
Option is not selected.
U
Activating and deactivating function V
The function is activated.
W
The function is not activated.
X
Y
Z
141
Instrument Cluster
A Instrument cluster display

B contents
C Certain displays are only available when the vehicle
is stationary.
D
Not all functions are explained in detail in the Man-
E ual. The examples will help you understand the
F functions and clarify the menu structure.
G
H
I
Fig. 93: Instrument cluster display contents
J
Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where?
K
L 1 e Time, outside temperature, date Display digital or analog clock, outside > p. 270
temperature and date. The choice of
M display can be changed via the PCM.
N
1 e Compass Display compass.
O
P 2 e Speedometer Display the speedometer.
Q 2 e Mileage and trip mileage Display the odometer and trip coun-
R ter. The trip counter reverts to "0"
after exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999
S kilometers.
T Resetting the trip counter
U e Press and hold the right rotary
push button E (Fig. 92) on the
V multifunction steering wheel.
W The trip counter flashes. After the
third flash, the trip counter reverts
X to "0".
Y 2 e Traffic signs Display up to 3 current traffic signs. > p. 260
Z
142
Instrument Cluster
Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where? A

B
2 e Assistance screen Set and display Adaptive Cruise Con- > p. 43
trol (ACC). C
D
Set and display Porsche InnoDrive > p. 207
(PID). E
> p. 148
F
Display Lane Change Assist.
G
Display Lane Keep Assist. > p. 153
H
Display cruise control. > p. 107 I
2 e Speed limit Set and display a personal speed limit > p. 144 J
with speed warning. K
2 e Navigation Display navigation information (turn- > p. 175 L

ing-off messages, etc.). M
4 e Phone Use connected phone. > p. 188 N

O
4 e Vehicle Display vehicle information (informa- > p. 144
tion, messages, service intervals and
P
fill levels). Q
4 e Trip Display and reset trip information > p. 267 R
(average fuel consumption, range, S
driving time etc.).
T
4/5 e Map Display and adjust the map display. > p. 175 U
4 e Sport Chrono Measure times with the stopwatch. > p. 242 V
W
4 e G-Force Display the current and maximum
longitudinal and lateral acceleration X
forces in the form of a circular Y
diagram.
Z
143
Instrument Cluster
A Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where?

B
4 e All-wheel Display the current torque distribution
C between the front and rear axle in the
D form of bar charts.
E 4 e Tire pressure Display Tire Pressure Monitoring > p. 300

System.
F
G 4 e Night View Assist Display Night View Assist with ther- > p. 180
mal image detection.
H
I 4 e Performance Display power and torque.
J 4 e Gear shift assist Display Gear shift assist for perform- > p. 266
K ance-oriented driving.
L 4 e Media Display current media (e.g. radio). > p. 168
M
4 e Driving program Display selected driving program. > p. 112
N
O 5 e Fuel gage and range Display fuel level and range.
P 5 e Coolant temperature gage Display coolant temperature.

Q
5 e Mileage to destination Display mileage to destination (if
R route guidance is active).
S
T Setting a personal speed limit 1. Speed limit e Lim 1: or Lim 2: Displaying vehicle information
U with speed warning 2. Select the desired limit:
Displaying various vehicle information
If a personal speed limit with speed warning is set
V – Reset: Reset the speed limit.
and activated, a warning message appears and a e Vehicle e View e Vehicle
warning signal sounds if the limit is exceeded. – Current: Set the current driving speed.
W Select the desired view for the vehicle information.
– Manual: Set the value for the desired speed.
The function can be used as a reminder of the max-
X imum permitted speed for a particular type of tire – Active: Activate or deactivate the speed limit.
Displaying messages
Y that has been fitted. Speed limit activated.
e Vehicle e Messages
Z Speed limit deactivated.
144
Instrument Cluster
Existing warnings or vehicle messages are displayed. A

The warning symbol in the lower area indicates the
B
number of pending important warnings.
C
Displaying service intervals
D
e Vehicle e Inspections
E
Select the desired service interval.
F
The display contains information about when the
next service is due. G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
145
Interior lighting
A Interior lighting – Immediately after switching on the ignition. Setting the brightness in individual areas of the
– Immediately after locking the vehicle. vehicle interior
B
Adjusting brightness – Automatically approx. 10 minutes after switch-
1. CAR e CONTROL e Ambient lighting
C ing on.
D e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and The duration of fade-out of vehicle interior lighting 2. Select Doors, Center console, Rear or Footwell.
visibility e Interior lighting e Brightness can be set. 3. Set the desired brightness value.
E
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and
F Setting fade-out duration visibility e Interior lighting e Fade out
G
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and
H visibility e Interior lighting e Fade-out Adjusting ambient lighting
I
Switching ambient lighting on and off
J Adjusting interior lighting
1. CAR e CONTROL e Ambient lighting
K Switching the interior/reading light on and
L off 2. Select .
e Press button of respective light.
M
Setting ambient lighting color
N Adjusting the brightness (dimming)
e Press and hold the button for the relevant light 1. CAR e CONTROL e Ambient lighting
O for at least 1 second until the desired brightness
2. Select Color.
P is achieved.
3. Set the desired light color.
Q Switching interior lighting on and off
R automatically Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting
S e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and Setting the brightness for the entire vehicle interior
T visibility e Interior lighting e While opening
doors 1. CAR e CONTROL e Ambient lighting
U 2. Select Brightness.
When it is dark, the interior lighting is switched on in
V the following situations: 3. Set the desired brightness value.
– When the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened.
W
– After the ignition is switched off and the driver's
X seat belt is unfastened.
Y The interior lighting is switched off again in the fol-
lowing situations:
Z
– After all doors are closed.
146
Jack and Lifting Platform
Jack and Lifting Platform WARNING

Inadequate securing of A
vehicle
B
An unsecured or incorrectly secured vehicle can
move unintentionally or tip or fall off lifting equip- C
ment such as a jack or lifting platform. This can D
cause serious injuries and damage.
E
e Raise the vehicle using a jack on a solid and flat
surface only. F
e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking G
points on the vehicle underbody.
e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when H
working under the vehicle. I
e Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall. J
e When working on the vehicle while the engine is K
running, always apply the electric parking brake
and select the P operating mode. L
> Please see chapter "Changing a wheel" on M

Fig. 94: Front jacking point for jack or lifting platform
page 309. N
> Please see chapter "Changing wheels with a
central lock" on page 311. O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Fig. 95: Rear jacking point for jack or lifting platform
Z
147
Lane Change Assist (LCA)
A Lane Change Assist (LCA)1 Switching Lane Change Assist on approaching at high speed from behind or ve-
B Lane Change Assist warns the driver about vehicles and off hicles that are falling back.
that are approaching from the rear or are located in – Lane Change Assist does not work on tight
Lane Change Assist can be switched on and off in
C the blind spot. This applies when overtaking other the PCM.
bends.
vehicles and when being overtaken. Integrated – Lane Change Assist only alerts you to approach-
D
warning indicators A in both door mirrors light up as e ASSIST e Lane Change Assist ing vehicles or vehicles in the blind-spot above a
E soon as a dangerous situation is detected and driving speed of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h).
If the Lane Change Assist is activated, the warning
changing lanes seems essential. – In the case of the Rear Turn Assist, it may occur
F indicator on the door mirror comes on briefly when
At driving speeds below the operating range of the the ignition is switched on. that, owing to the small differences in speed be-
G Lane Change Assist, the additional Rear Turn Assist tween your vehicle and moving or stationary ob-
also supports the driver by monitoring the area be- Lack of attention jects, fixed objects (e.g. a metal post) trigger a
H WARNING
warning, or that slow-moving vehicles are not
hind the vehicle in turning-off situations. The Rear
I Turn Assist is always automatically activated to- detected.
gether with the Lane Change Assist. The Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist are not – Rear Turn Assist is activated when driving away.
J a substitute for the driver's attentiveness. The driver It may therefore occur that vehicles that are al-
is still responsible for taking due care when changing ready moving or are driving away will not be de-
K
lanes. tected or will only be detected late. Vehicles
L e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area already located immediately next to your vehicle,
M around the vehicle in view at all times. and therefore outside the detection range of the
sensor, may also not be detected.
N Restricted range of the – The rear collision warning does not respond to
WARNING
O radar sensor cross traffic, vehicles with a small cross-section,
narrow vehicles and objects that are not identi-
P The range of the radar sensor may be restricted fied as vehicles.
when driving round tight bends, over humps or in
Q – If, when turning-off, your vehicle is not facing in
bad weather conditions (rain, snow, ice, heavy
the direction of the driving lane, but is facing di-
R spray). Vehicles may not be adequately detected, or agonally or at right angles to it, approaching ve-
may not even be detected. hicles can no longer be detected by the sensors.
S
e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area e Observe the direction of travel and the relevant
T around the vehicle in view at all times. area around the vehicle closely at all times.
U
Undetected vehicles
Fig. 96: Warning indicator A on door mirror WARNING
V
W Vehicles cannot or may not be detected in time in
X the following situations:
– There is no indication in the case of vehicles
Y
Z
148
General information Information relation to your vehicle. The radar sensors cover an A
– The system provides support when driving at area of up to 230 ft. (70 m) to the rear (approach
To ensure that Lane Change Assist operates zone) and the blind spot. B
speeds above approx. 10 mph (15 km/h).
– At speeds below 10 mph (15 km/h), the driver is correctly: Whenever Lane Change Assist assesses the speed C
supported by Rear Turn Assist, but only when e Do not cover the radar sensors on the rear difference and distance as being critical for chang-
bumper (e.g. with stickers). Keep the area clean ing lanes, this is indicated on the respective door
D
driving off and on the vehicle side on which the
turn signal was actuated. and free of snow and ice. mirror. The two sides of the vehicle are shown sep- E
– Rear Turn Assist is active at speeds up to approx. e Do not cover the warning indicator on the door arately here. Therefore, for example, the indicator on
mirror (e.g. with stickers or stick-on blind spot the left door mirror assists the driver in changing to F
12 mph (20 km/h).
– Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist are not mirrors). the left lane. G
available if the system detects that the radar e Subsequent painting of the bumper may lead to a If a vehicle regarded as critical has switched on its
reduction in the sensor range owing to the turn signal, the respective warning indicator on the H
sensors are covered.
thicker coating layer. The electrical properties door mirror will flash brightly and briefly several I
– The radar sensors can sometimes detect other
objects (e.g. high or raised crash barriers), not may also differ from those of the approved times.
paints. If you overtake another vehicle slowly (with a speed J
only vehicles.
– The display is designed so that you notice it difference of less than approx. 10 mph (15 km/h), K
merely by glancing at the door mirror. the warning indicator lights up as soon as that ve-
hicle is in your blind spot and is detected by Lane L
Change Assist. If the speed difference is greater, no M
Information warning indicator will be activated on the door
mirror. N
If the position of the radar sensors was changed fol-
lowing an accident, for example, this can impair the The speed range of the Lane Change Assist is not O
function of Lane Change Assist. reached immediately after driving off. Until it is
P
e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- reached, the driver is supported by the Rear Turn
ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they Assist. Q
have trained technicians and the necessary parts When the turn signal is on, the Rear Turn Assist de-
and tools. tects objects located next to and behind your ve- R
hicle, but only at the side on which the turn signal S
has been activated. If a potential hazard is detected,
the respective warning indicator on the door mirror T
lights up. If your own calculated driving path crosses
U
that of a detected vehicle on the side of the vehicle
on which the turn signal has been activated, the re- V
Fig. 97: Radar sensors in rear bumper spective warning indicator on the door mirror will
flash brightly and briefly several times. W
Operating principle X
Using the radar sensors integrated in the rear Y
bumper, Lane Change Assist measures the distance
and speed difference of the detected vehicles in Z
149
A Information e ASSIST e e Assistance system Vehicles approaching fast

settings e Lane Change Assist
B The radar sensors cover the adjacent lane to the left
C and right. Other lanes are not covered by the radar
sensors. Information
D
– The faster a vehicle is approaching, the earlier
E the warning indicator on the door mirror lights
Information and warning stage up. You are always alerted when Lane Change
F Lane Change Assist has two indicator levels that are Assist detects a vehicle in the blind spot.
G activated as appropriate, depending on whether or – Changing lanes can already be critical for ve-
not the turn signal has been set. hicles approaching at speed if there is still no
H warning activated on the door mirror.
I Information stage – On vehicles with other assistance systems, the
While the turn signal is not on, Lane Change Assist warning indicator on the door mirror can flash on
J provides information about detected vehicles that it briefly several times even if the turn signal is not
K regards as critical in the event of a possible lane on. If Lane Keep Assist detects that your vehicle
change. The indicator on the respective mirror al- is veering out of your lane towards a vehicle on
L ways comes on dimly when the speed difference the adjacent lane, Lane Change Assist alerts you
and the distance of the detected vehicle are re- to the possible danger by flashing on briefly and
M
garded as critical by Lange Change Assist. brightly several times. Fig. 98: Vehicle approaching at speed
N
A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light
Warning stage
O up
P
If the turn signal is on and Lane Change Assist has
detected a vehicle on this side that it regards as
Driving situations The sensors have not detected a vehicle. There is no
The following driving situations describe possible indication on the door mirror.
critical, the warning indicator on the door mirror on
Q scenarios and the associated Lane Change Assist B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage
this side will start to flash brightly. When the warn-
and Rear Turn Assist warning indicators. The sensors detect a fast approaching vehicle. In the
R ing stage flashes brightly and briefly several times,
this is an indication for you to check the driving sit- example, the approaching vehicle is in the left lane.
S uation again by looking in the door mirror and looking This vehicle is already considered critical for chang-
T over your shoulder. ing lanes due to the significant speed difference,
even though it is still a good distance away. The
U Adjusting display brightness of Lane Change warning indicator on the door mirror lights up.
V Assist C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage
The brightness of the indicator for the information If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B,
W the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes
and warning stage is automatically adjusted ac-
X cording to the ambient brightness. The basic briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform-
brightness of the warning indicator on the door mir- ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle.
Y ror can also be adjusted.
Z
150
Vehicles approaching slowly briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform- Vehicles falling back quickly A
ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle.
B
Vehicles falling back slowly C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 99: Vehicle approaching slowly Fig. 101: Vehicle falling back fast
N
A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light A – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light
up up O
Fig. 100: Vehicle falling back slowly
The sensors detect a vehicle approaching at a slow Lane Change Assist has not yet detected the vehicle
P
speed. In the example, the approaching vehicle is in you have overtaken. There is no indication on the
the left lane. Due to the small speed difference and up door mirror. Q
the large distance, there is no indication on the door Lane Change Assist has not yet detected the vehicle B – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light
mirror. you have overtaken. There is no indication on the up
R
B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage door mirror. Lane Change Assist detects the vehicle falling back S
The distance from the slow approaching vehicle is B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage fast on the right (more than approx. T
now smaller. The warning indicator on the door mir- Lane Change Assist detects the vehicle that is falling 10 mph (15 km/h) speed difference), but it does not
ror lights up. Only when Lane Change Assist regards back slowly on the right (less than approx. consider it as critical for changing lanes owing to the U
the speed difference and distance as critical for 10 mph (15 km/h) speed difference). In the exam- speed with which it is falling behind. In the example,
ple, this vehicle is in the right lane. The warning in-
V
changing lanes will this be indicated on the door this vehicle is in the right lane. There is no indication
mirror. You are alerted to every vehicle detected by dicator on the door mirror lights up. on the door mirror. W
Lane Change Assist when they are in the blind spot. C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage C – Warning indicator on door mirror does not light
X
C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, up
If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes If the turn signal is switched on in driving situation B, Y
the warning indicator on the door mirror flashes briefly several times. Lane Change Assist is inform- the warning indicator is still not activated on the
ing you that you may have overlooked a vehicle.
Z
door mirror.
151
A Starting to turn off comes on. This warns you of a potential collision
with a vehicle that may have been overlooked.
B
C Cornering
D When driving around a bend, Lane Change Assist
may react to a vehicle driving in the next lane but
E one and the warning indicator in the door mirror may
F light up.
Lane Change Assist cannot detect vehicles in tight
G bends.
H e Take additional care when driving around bends
and where there are lanes with differing widths.
I
J Lane width
K The Lane Change Assist detection area covers the
two adjacent lanes (left and right) on lanes of
L standard width regardless of whether you are driving Fig. 103: Lane width and detection area
exactly in the center or at the edge of the lane.
M
Fig. 102: Starting to turn off When driving in narrow lanes, this area may cover
N additional lanes, particularly if you are driving at the
edge of your lane. In such situations, vehicles driving
O up
two lanes away may be detected and Lane Change
No turn signal has been actuated, therefore the Rear
P Assist may switch to the information or warning
Turn Assist is not active after starting to turn off and
stage.
Q the motorbike located in the blind spot is not de-
Likewise, when driving on very wide lanes, vehicles
tected. A fast approaching vehicle may also not be
R detected. There is no indication on the door mirror.
in the adjacent lane may not be detected as they are
outside the detection area.
S B – Warning indicator lights up in information stage
T If the relevant turn signal is switched on in driving
situation A, the warning indicator on the door mirror
U lights up. The Rear Turn Assist alerts you to the fact
that you may have overlooked a vehicle.
V
C – Warning indicator flashes in warning stage
W If, in driving situation B, the driver has initiated
X turning off by steering to the relevant side and this
results in their own calculated driving path crossing
Y that of a detected vehicle, the warning indicator on
the door mirror flashes briefly several times and then
Z
152
Lane Keep Assist
Lane Keep Assist1 intervention back into the correct lane when chang- be sufficient to keep the vehicle in the driving A
ing lanes in a potentially critical situation. This also lane in the case of track ruts, winding roads, in-
happens if the turn signal is activated for the rele- clined road surfaces or crosswind. The driver B
vant direction. At the same time, the relevant side on must actively steer in such situations. C
the status display is marked red during the steering e Never use Lane Keep Assist in the following
intervention and an acoustic warning (if activated) is D
situations:
emitted when the lane markings are crossed. – When increased attention is required on the E
Lack of attention part of the driver. F
WARNING
– During sporty driving.
– In adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow G
Fig. 104: Windshield camera The driver remains responsible at all times when
or heavy rain). H
driving, e.g. staying in lane, even if Lane Keep Assist
Using the front camera A and within the limits of the – Under unfavorable road conditions (including
is on. The system does not replace the driver's I
system, Lane Keep Assist detects the course of the bad roads, pot holes, dirty road surfaces).
attentiveness.
road ahead based on the lane markings. When the – In roadworks areas. J
vehicle approaches a detected lane marking and is in – The system can help to keep the vehicle in the
– When approaching humps and dips.
danger of leaving the driving lane, the system ini- lane within the limits of the system, but it does K
– In urban traffic.
tiates corrective steering intervention that helps to not drive it. Keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times order to always by ready to – On winding and narrow country roads. L
keep the vehicle in the lane. Steering intervention is
displayed visually to the driver in the status display. steer. If a warning appears on the instrument e Drive with extreme care. M
The driver can override the steering intervention at cluster, take over control of the vehicle e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and
immediately. the vehicle surroundings. N
any time.
If the vehicle crosses a lane marking without acti- – In the case of heavy braking, for example, the e Adapt your driving speed to road and weather O
vating a turn signal, the system alerts the driver corrective steering interventions may not take conditions.
place. e Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel. P
acoustically. For this purpose, the acoustic warning
– In the case of active steering by the driver, cor- Q
must be switched on in the ASSIST menu on
rective steering intervention can be reduced or Failure of camera to de-
the PCM. WARNING R
may not take place. tect the lane
The system is designed for driving on highways and
– It is possible that not all lane markings will be S
well-surfaced country roads and works in a speed The camera's view can be impaired by different in-
detected. Steering intervention can only take
range of approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) – 156 mph fluencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy water T
place on the side where a lane marking has been
(250 km/h). The operative system does not issue a spray, oncoming headlights or damage). Sometimes,
detected. U
warning or steer if the driver activates a turn signal the camera cannot detect the lane markings, or
before crossing a lane marking. In these situations, – Other road structures or objects may be incor-
rectly identified as lane markings. This can lead cannot detect them correctly. When this happens, V
the system interprets the lane change as intentional. no steering intervention or an unexpected steering
to unexpected or missing steering interventions/
b Vehicles with Lane Change Assist: W
acoustic warnings.
If the vehicle is equipped with Lane Change Assist, X
– Corrective steering intervention alone may not
the driver is warned through corrective steering
Y
Z
153
Lane Keep Assist
A intervention can occur. Information Bringing up and reading off Lane

B e Drive with extreme care. Keep Assist
e Keep the direction of travel and the lane lines in The driver's steering behavior is monitored when
C view at all times. Lane Keep Assist is active. If no further steering ac-
tivity is detected and the vehicle looks on several
D e Clean the camera lens regularly and keep free of
occasions like it is moving out of its lane, an acoustic
snow and ice.
and visual warning message is emitted by the in-
E e Do not cover the camera lens.
strument cluster and the driver is prompted to take
F e Check the windshield for damage in the area of
over steering.
the camera lens at regular intervals.
G If the driver does not respond to this, Lane Keep As-
sist switches to a passive mode (see status display).
H Information Steering intervention on the part of the driver re-
activates Lane Keep Assist.
I e If there is a fault in the system or if Lane Keep
If the Lane Keep Assist has to intervene for a pro-
J Assist does not function as described in this
longed period of time, an acoustic and visual warning
section, do not use Lane Keep Assist. Visit an
K message is emitted by the instrument cluster and
authorized Porsche dealer.
the driver is prompted to align the vehicle in the
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche
L center of the lane.
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the
M necessary parts and tools.
N
Failure of corrective Switching Lane Keep Assist on Fig. 105: Speed & Assist display
WARNING
O steering intervention and off A Lane Keep Assist display
P Lane Keep Assist can be switched on and off in the B Display of lane markings
On sharper bends and when the Lane Keep Assist is PCM. C Status display
Q active, corrective steering intervention is not enough
to keep the vehicle in the lane. It can also be the case e ASSIST e Lane Keep Assist
R Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
that the Lane Keep Assist is automatically deacti-
The Speed & Assist display in the ASSIST main
S vated before or in the bend and no corrective steer-
ing intervention takes place.
Setting acoustic warning menu shows the lane markings B and the status
T The acoustic warning can be switched on and off display C.
e Drive with extreme care.
individually. The warning tone volume can also be
U e Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. Vehicles without Adaptive Cruise Control
selected in 3 levels.
V (ACC)
e ASSIST e e Assistance system The lane markings are only shown on the status dis-
W settings e Lane Keep Assist play C.
X
Reading off the system states
Y
The table shows the system states of the Lane Keep
Z Assist and their display in the instrument cluster:
154
Lane Keep Assist
Lane Keep Status Meaning Information A

Assist display display B
When the system is switched on but passive, this
No display No Lane Keep Assist is may have the following causes: C
display switched off. – The vehicle speed is below the activation speed
of approx. 40 mph (65 km/h). D
Lane Keep Assist is – The lane markings of the currently driven lane are E
switched on but not detected, (e.g. snow, dirt, wet conditions,
oncoming headlights or driving close to the ve- F
passive.
hicle ahead.) G
– The quality of the lane markings is not suffi-
Lane Keep Assist is ciently good for activation of Lane Keep Assist. H
switched on and – The radius of a bend is too small. I
active on both – The distance to the nearest lane marking is too
sides. J
great.
– The lane markings are too close to the vehicle. K
The lane markings
– Temporarily in conjunction with an extremely
can be detected on L
dynamic driving style.
one side.
– The turn signal is on. M
– The system has detected that your hands are not N
Lane Keep Assist on the steering wheel.
performs a correc- O
tive steering inter- P
vention (to the Responding to warning message
right, for example). Deactivation in the case of a fault: Q
If a system fault occurs, Lane Keep Assist may R
switch off automatically. The light indicator goes out
and a message is displayed. S
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
155
Lights
A Lights
B
Brief overview – Lights
C
D This brief overview does not replace the compre-
hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn-
E ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief
F overview.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Fig. 106: Light control panel
P
Q
Switch on automatic headlights e Press AUTO button. > p. 157
R The AUTO button lights up red.
S Automatic headlights and the Porsche Dynamic
Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) are switched on.
T
U Switch on parking light e Press button . –
License plate light, instrument lighting, and parking
V
light are switched on.
W
Switch on low beam b Ignition is switched on. –
X
e Press button .
Y The low beam is switched on. Automatic headlights,
daytime running lights and the Porsche Dynamic
Z
Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) are switched off.
156
Lights
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A

B
Switch on rear fog light e Press button . –
C
Switch exterior lights off completely e Press button for approx. 2 seconds. > p. 157
D
The AUTO button goes out. The exterior lights re-
main completely switched off until a speed of 6 E
mph (10 km/h) or a distance of 330 ft. (100 m) has
F
been exceeded.
G
Switching automatic headlights/ Information The following lights can be switched on to allow you H
exterior lights on and off Fog is not automatically detected.
to get in and out of your vehicle with improved visi-
I
bility in darkness.
WARNING
Driving without lights e In the event of fog, switch on the low beams and The following lights are switched on when the last J
rear fog light manually. vehicle door is closed or after the vehicle has been
unlocked: K
If you drive without lights, this may significantly re-
strict your visibility and also the ability of other road Switch exterior lights off completely – Daytime running lights L
users to see your vehicle. e Press button for approx. 2 seconds. – Courtesy low beam (PDLS Plus)
M
– Courtesy lights in the folded-out door mirrors
e Carefully monitor the automatic headlights and The AUTO button goes out.
The automatic headlights are switched on again in – Front and rear position lights N
switch the low beams on manually if necessary.
e Observe country-specific laws for driving with the following situations (country-dependent): – License plate light O
low beams. – From a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). They are switched off again when the ignition is
– When a distance of more than 328 ft. (100 m) P
switched on or the automatic headlights are
Switching on automatic headlights has been driven after switching off the exterior switched off. Q
lights.
e Press AUTO button. The duration of fade-out can be set.
R
The AUTO button lights up red.
Information e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and S
The low beams are switched on automatically in the visibility e Exterior lights e Fade out
following situations: The vehicle exterior lights can mist up due to tem- T
– Dusk perature and humidity. This misting will dry off after
Porsche Dynamic Light System U
– Darkness a sufficient distance has been driven.
– Driving through tunnels Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED V
– Rain Headlights W
When the low beams are switched on, the light in- Adjusting Automatic Coming b Automatic headlights switched on.
Home lights X
dicator on the instrument cluster lights up.
b Automatic headlights switched on. Y
Z
157
Lights
A Dynamic cornering light is also switched to low beam when the camera de- Information
Above a speed of around 3 mph (5 km/h), the low tects street lighting.
B To avoid impairing the detection performance:
beam or high beam headlights are swiveled in the Lack of attention when
C direction of the curve to illuminate the road more WARNING
driving with high beam e Do not cover the camera area on the interior
clearly, depending on the speed of the vehicle and mirror with objects (e.g. stickers).
D assist
the extent to which the steering wheel is turned. e The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice
E Despite the high beam assist, responsibility for and snow.
Situational lighting control manually adjusting the high beam to the light, visi-
F bility and traffic conditions when driving, for exam-
Depending on the country, situational lighting con-
G trol adapts the light distribution of the low and high- ple, remains with the driver. The system is not a Porsche Dynamic Light System
H
beam headlights to urban, country-road or highway substitute for careful attention on the part of the Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED matrix
driving. driver. Manual intervention may be required in the headlights
I following situations:
b Automatic headlights switched on.
Adverse weather lights – In unfavorable weather conditions, such as rain,
J PDLS Plus with LED matrix headlights also includes
The distribution characteristics of the driving lights fog, snow, ice or heavy spray. the functions of PDLS Plus with LED headlights.
K change when the rear fog light is switched on at a – On roads where oncoming traffic is party hidden, > Please see chapter "Porsche Dynamic Light Sys-
vehicle speed below approx. 37 mph (60 km/h). The such as on highways.
L tem Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED Headlights" on
light beam becomes wider and glare is reduced. – Where there are poorly lit road users, such as page 157.
M cyclists.
High beam assist – On narrow curves, steep crests or hollows. High beam assist (USA only)
N
– In poorly lit areas.
O – Where there are strong reflectors, such as road
P signs.
– If the windshield is obscured by mist, dirt, ice or
Q stickers in the area of the camera.
R e Drive with extreme care.
S e Always check the traffic situation and the area
around the vehicle.
T e If necessary, manually adjust the high beam ac-
Fig. 107: Windshield camera
U cording to the light, visibility and traffic Fig. 108: Windshield camera
Light sources and other road users can be detected conditions. Light sources and other road users can be detected
V by means of a camera A in the area of the interior
by means of a camera A in the area of the interior
mirror. Depending on the position of other vehicles,
W mirror. Depending on the position of other vehicles,
the speed and other environmental and traffic con-
X ditions, the system switches from low beam to high
ditions, the system switches from low beam to high
beam and back again.
Y beam and back again.
High beam is available from approx. 20 mph (30 km/
High beam is available from approx. 20 mph (30 km/
Z h) and up to approx. 40 mph (60 km/h). High beam
h) and up to approx. 40 mph (60 km/h). High beam
158
Lights
is also switched to low beam when the camera de- Information such as on highways. A
tects street lighting. – Where there are poorly lit road users, such as
To avoid impairing the detection performance: B
Lack of attention when cyclists.
WARNING
driving with high beam e Do not cover the camera area on the interior – On narrow bends, steep crests or hollows. C
mirror with objects (e.g. stickers). – In poorly lit areas.
assist D
e The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice – Where there are strong reflectors, such as road
Despite the high beam assist, responsibility for and snow. signs. E
manually adjusting the high beam to the light, visi- – If the windshield is obscured by mist, dirt, ice or
bility and traffic conditions when driving, for exam-
F
Dynamic high beam (Canada only) stickers in the area of the camera.
ple, remains with the driver. The system is not a
e Drive with extreme care.
G
substitute for careful attention on the part of the Light sources and other road users can be detected
by means of a camera A in the area of the interior e Always check the traffic situation and the area H
driver. Manual intervention may be required in the
mirror. Depending on the position of other vehicles, around the vehicle.
following situations:
e If necessary, manually adjust the high beam ac-
I
– In unfavorable weather conditions, such as rain, cording to the light, visibility and traffic J
ditions, the individual LED segments of the high
fog, snow, ice or heavy spray. conditions.
beam headlights are activated or deactivated. The K
– On roads where oncoming traffic is party hidden, beam in the relevant area in front of the vehicle is
such as on highways. low, the rest remains high. This ensures that the en- L
– Where there are poorly lit road users, such as vironment is lit to best effect without dazzling other
Encounter lights (Canada only)
cyclists. road users. b No vehicle ahead. M
– On narrow curves, steep crests or hollows. Dynamic high beam is switched on or off between b Oncoming traffic with detected headlights. N
– In poorly lit areas. 20 mph (30 km/h) and 37 mph (60 km/h) accord- The light distribution is briefly changed so that the
– Where there are strong reflectors, such as road lane being driven on is illuminated brightly. This O
ing to the navigation data. High beam is also
signs. switched from full high beam illumination to low draws the direction of vision onto the lane being P
– If the windshield is obscured by mist, dirt, ice or beam when the camera detects street lighting. driven on. The driver is less dazzled by the oncoming
stickers in the area of the camera. traffic. Q
Lack of attention when
e Drive with extreme care. WARNING
driving with High Beam R
e Always check the traffic situation and the area
Signage glare reduction (Canada only)
Assistant S
around the vehicle. b Dynamic high beam switched on.
e If necessary, manually adjust the high beam ac- Despite High Beam Assistant, the responsibility The glare of reflective traffic signs and other signage T
cording to the light, visibility and traffic during driving remains with the driver, such as for can – particularly when driving with high beams –
manually adjusting the high beam according to the cause the driver to be dazzled. U
conditions.
light, visibility and traffic conditions. The system is The signage glare reduction briefly dims individual V
not a substitute for careful attention on the part of LED segments of the vehicle's low or high beam
the driver. Manual intervention may be required in headlights in a targeted manner. The driver is W
the following situations: dazzled less due to reflecting traffic signs and other X
– In unfavorable weather conditions, such as rain, signage.
Y
fog, snow, ice or heavy spray.
– On roads where oncoming traffic is party hidden, Z
159
Lights
A Automatic headlight calibration (Canada only) Operating turn signal and high Switching high beam on and off
B b No objects in the immediate vicinity of the beam lever b Vehicles without PDLS Plus
vehicle. – or –
C b Vehicle positioned as straight as possible in front High beam assist/Dynamic high beam
D of a projection surface, e.g. wall (distance > 16.4 deactivated.
ft. (5 m)).
Switching on
E b Low beam active during reference run while
e Press lever once at pressure point 3.
F stationary.
Automatic headlight calibration starts automatically The light indicator comes on.
G provided the conditions are right (ambient lighting, Switching off
H good projection surface). The LED segments of the e Press lever once at pressure point 4.
headlight are automatically activated and deacti-
I vated repeatedly from right to left during calibration The light indicator goes out.
and are detected by the camera A.
J Activating and deactivating high beam assist
Calibration is used to check headlight alignment and
K does not replace manual headlight adjustment. (USA only)
b Vehicles with PDLS Plus
L b Automatic headlights switched on.
M b High beam assist is activated.
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on
N Fig. 109: Actuate turn signals, high beam and flasher page 270.
O 1 Left turn signal/parking light Activating
2 Right turn signal/parking light
P 3 High beam/Dynamic high beam e Press lever once at pressure point 3.
Q 4 Flasher The light indicator comes on. Depending on
various positions such as the position of other
R Activating the turn signals vehicles and the speed, the system switches
S e Push the lever to the pressure point 1 or 2. The from low beam to high beam and back again. If
turn signal remains active until the lever is re- high beam is activated, the light indicator
T turned to the home position either manually or lights up.
U automatically when the steering wheel is turned.
Deactivating
V Comfort turn signals e Press lever once at pressure point 4.
e Press lever once at pressure point 1 or 2. High beam assist can only be deactivated when
W
The turn signal lights flash three times. the light indicator lights up.
X e In order to interrupt comfort turn signals, press If the prerequisites for the high beam assist have not
the lever in the opposite direction. been met, high beam can be switched on and off
Y
manually.
Z
160
Lights
Switching on manually Switching off manually Switching the emergency flasher on and off A
e Press lever twice at pressure point 3. e Press lever once to pressure point 4. e Press the button on the switch panel. B
The light indicator comes on. The light indicator goes out. All turn signal lights and the switch flash.
C
Switching off manually Emergency stopping
Activating the flasher DANGER
e Press lever once at pressure point 4. D
e Press lever once briefly at pressure point 4.
The light indicator goes out. Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you E
The light indicator comes on briefly. are parked in a dangerous position. In this case: F
Activating and deactivating dynamic high
Switching the parking light on and off e Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency re-
beam (Canada only) pairs, move the car well off the road. Switch on G
b Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) b Ignition switched off.
the emergency flasher and mark the car with H
with LED matrix headlights e Press the lever past pressure point 2 or 1 to
road flares or other warning devices.
b Automatic headlights switched on. switch on the right or left parking light
e Do not remain in the car. Someone approaching
I
respectively.
b Dynamic high beam is activated. from the rear may not realize your vehicle is J
If the parking light is on, a message appears on
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on stopped and cause a collision.
page 270.
the instrument cluster after the ignition is K
switched off and the door is opened.
Activating L
e Press lever once to pressure point 3.
Changing bulbs
Switching the emergency flasher The vehicle lighting as well as the interior lights are
M
The light indicator comes on. Depending on on and off equipped with light-emitting diodes and long-life N
various factors such as the position of other ve- LEDs. The LEDs cannot be changed individually.
hicles and the speed, the individual LED seg- O
Removing and installing lamps involves a great deal
ments of the high beam headlights are activated of effort. P
or deactivated. If high beam is partly or fully ac-
e Always have faulty bulbs and lamps replaced or
tivated, the light indicator lights up. Q
repaired by an authorized Porsche dealer. Por-
Deactivating sche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, R
e Press lever once to pressure point 4. as they have trained technicians and the neces-
S
sary parts and tools.
Dynamic high beam can only be deactivated
T
when the light indicator is on. NOTICE
If the prerequisites for dynamic high beam have not U
been met, high beam can be switched on and off The headlights can be damaged as a result of abra- V
manually. sion and excessive temperatures.
W
Switching on manually e Do not install any coverings (e. g. stone guards or
e Press lever twice to pressure point 3. films) in the headlight area. X
The light indicator comes on. Y
Fig. 110: Switching the emergency flasher on and off

Z
161
Luggage Compartment
A Luggage Compartment WARNING

Incorrect tire pressure
B
Stowing loads An incorrect tire pressure can impair driving safety.
C
Changed vehicle han- e Adapt the tire pressure to the load.
WARNING
D dling when loaded e After changing the tire pressure, you must also
update the setting for the Tire Pressure Moni-
E The handling changes depending on the load toring System.
F condition.
G e Adapt your driving style to the altered vehicle
handling. Opening and closing the luggage
H e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight or axle compartment
I load. > Please see chapter "Opening and closing the
luggage compartment lid" on page 165.
J Unsecured, incorrectly
WARNING
secured or incorrectly
K
positioned loads
Removing and stowing tire seal-
L ant (Tire Mobility System - TMS) Fig. 112: Plastic box with tool box
An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly
M positioned load can slip out of place and endanger
and tool box B Tire sealant (Tire Mobility System - TMS)
C Adapter
N the vehicle occupants during braking, direction D Towing lug
changes or in accidents. E Open-ended wrench
O
e Never transport objects that are not secured F Screwdriver
P (accidents, braking, corners).
Q e Always transport loads in the luggage compart- Removing tire sealant (
ment, never in the passenger compartment (e.g. Tire Mobility System - TMS) and tool box
R on or in front of the seats). e Grasp the plastic cover at the handle recess and
S e Do not transport heavy objects in open storage remove it.
compartments.
T e Always keep the covers of the lockable storage Stowing tire sealant (
compartments closed while driving. Tire Mobility System - TMS) and tool box
U
1. Insert the tabs at the bottom.
V 2. Snap in the plastic cover at the top.
W
X
Y Fig. 111: Plastic box A with tire sealant
Z
162
Luggage Compartment
Removing and stowing the tire A

filling compressor B
Removing the tire filling compressor C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 114: Attaching the plastic cover Fig. 115: Opening storage compartment for tire filling L
compressor
3. Disengage retaining strap B on the underside of M
the plastic cover and attach it to the luggage 4. Open the cover of the storage compartment for
compartment lid. the tire filling compressor. N
5. Remove the tire filling compressor from the O
Fig. 113: Releasing and lifting the plastic cover storage compartment.
P
1. Lift plastic cover A at the handle recesses (ar-
rows) until the catch audibly disengages. Q
2. Pull the plastic cover forward slightly and lift it at R
the front.
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
163
Luggage Compartment
A Stowing the tire filling compressor

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 117: Closing the plastic cover
M 3. Detach retaining strap B and engage it on the

Fig. 116: Replacing the tire filling compressor plastic cover.
N
1. Place the tire filling compressor in the storage 4. Insert plastic cover A with the guides at the rear
O compartment. edge and place it on the holders. Lower the cover
2. Close the cover of the storage compartment. at the front.
P
5. Ensure that the centering pins on the underside
Q of the cover engage in the appropriate guides.
Press the cover downward at the handle re-
R cesses until the catch audibly engages.
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
164
Luggage Compartment Lid
Luggage Compartment Lid A

B
Opening and closing the luggage
C
compartment lid
Unsecured Luggage
D
DANGER
Compartment Lid E
If the luggage compartment lid is not secured prop- F
erly, it could fly up, blocking your vision and causing G
loss of control.
H
e Should you notice at any time while driving that
the lid is not secured properly, stop immediately I
in a suitable place and close it.
J
K
Opening luggage compartment lid with the
button in the vehicle interior Fig. 118: Opening the luggage compartment lid Fig. 119: Unlocking luggage compartment lid L
NOTICE A Luggage compartment lid button 2. Lift the lid slightly and open the lid safety catch M
B Hood button (arrow).
N
1. Pull button A. 3. Open the lid completely.
Risk of damage to the luggage compartment lid and
windshield wipers. The lid is unlocked. When the lid is open, the luggage compartment O
light comes on.
e Make sure that the windshield wipers are not P
pulled out forward when opening the luggage Q
compartment lid.
e Always switch off windshield wipers before R
opening the luggage compartment lid (wiper S
lever in position 0).
T
> Please see chapter "Windshield Wipers" on
page 322. U
V
W
X
Y
Z
165
A Opening luggage compartment lid with the Opening luggage compartment lid with Com- Closing luggage compartment lid
vehicle key fort Access (without a key) Heavy luggage compart-
B CAUTION
ment lid
C
When closing the luggage compartment lid, it can
D
fall into the lock by its own weight from the half-way
E open position.
F e Make sure that no objects or limbs are located
within range of the moving parts (hinges) or
G under the luggage compartment lid.
H
1. Lower the lid and allow it to fall into the lock.
I Press the lid closed with the flat of your hand
over the lock area.
J
2. Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
K lock.
If the lid is not correctly locked, a message ap-
L
pears on the instrument cluster while driving.
M
N Fig. 120: Opening luggage compartment lid with the vehicle Fig. 121: Opening luggage compartment lid with Comfort
Trunk entrapment
key Access Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk re-
O lease mechanism.
1. Press the button. b Vehicles with Comfort Access
P A person trapped in the luggage compartment can
2. Lift the lid slightly and open the lid safety catch. b The vehicle key is at the front of the vehicle.
release the lid from the inside using the unlocking
Q 3. Open the lid completely. 1. Move your hand between the Porsche crest and button.
When the lid is open, the luggage compartment license plate. Use either a back-and-forth
R The unlocking button is equipped with a light indi-
light comes on. movement or a swipe motion.
cator. The light indicator keeps flashing for 60 mi-
S The lid is unlocked. nutes after locking of the luggage compartment lid.
T Information 2. Lift the lid slightly and open the lid safety catch.
Unsecured Luggage
3. Open the lid completely. WARNING
U When the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with When the lid is open, the luggage compartment
the vehicle key, the vehicle doors are also unlocked. light comes on.
V When loading the luggage compartment, make sure
that items of luggage or other objects cannot be-
W come caught on the handle. This could cause the
X luggage compartment to open unintentionally.
Y
Z
166
Function A
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked by using B
the internal trunk release mechanism, the latch
striker pops into the catch-hook position and the lid C
can be opened from the inside immediately.
D
A warning message in the instrument cluster lights
up when unlocking button is operated. E
1. Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning F
message lights up.
2. Check the luggage compartment. G
3. Close the lid. H
Unsecured luggage
DANGER
compartment lid
I
J
If the warning message lights up when the vehicle is
moving, the lid may impact the front of the wind- K
shield and can tear off. Fig. 122: Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment Fig. 123: Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment L
e Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning lid - connecting the positive terminal lid - connecting the negative terminal
M
message lights up. 1. Unlock the vehicle at the door lock with the 5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the neg-
e Check the luggage compartment. emergency key. ative terminal of the external battery to the joint N
e Close the lid. 2. Remove the plastic cover of the left-hand fuse of door arrester B. O
box. 6. Press and hold the button of the vehicle key
Empty Battery for 2 seconds. The luggage compartment lid is P
WARNING 3. Pull out the positive terminal A (red) in the fuse
box. unlocked and the alarm system is deactivated. Q
The internal trunk release mechanism will not work if 4. Use the red jumper cable to connect the positive 7. First disconnect the negative cable, then the
the vehicle does not have battery power. terminal of the external battery to the positive positive cable. R
terminal A in the fuse box. 8. Insert positive terminal A in the fuse box and at- S
tach the plastic cover of the fuse box.
Emergency unlocking of the lug- Information T
gage compartment lid If the vehicle was locked, the alarm system signal
U
If the battery is discharged, the luggage compart- will sound when the negative terminal is connected. V
ment lid can be unlocked by connecting an external
battery. W
> Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on X
page 118.
Y
Z
167
Media
A Media
B
Brief Overview – Media
C
D
overview.
F
For information on operating the Porsche
G Communication Management system (PCM):
H > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)" on page 197.
I
J
K
Fig. 124: Playing media
L
M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?
N Load a media source – Insert an SD card. > p. 202

– Connect an external device via USB.
O
P – Connect an external device via Bluetooth®. > p. 111
Q Find station/track/album (search relates to the e MEDIA e Call up media sources (see A) e –
R currently selected media source) Enter the desired station/track.
S Select media source/reception range e MEDIA e PLAY e Open media sources –
T (see B) e Select media source (e. g. FM).
U
Add favorite content for tracking e MEDIA e PLAY e Call up media sources –
V
(see B) e SiriusXM e Add
W
X Tag current track e MEDIA e PLAY e Call up media sources –
Y (see B) e SiriusXM/FM e Tag

Z
168
Media

B
Play/pause music e Select MEDIA e PLAY e or (see C) –
. C
D
Play next/previous station/track e Select MEDIA e PLAY e or . –
E
Save station/track/album as favorite e MEDIA e > p. 169
(see D) F
G
Display station/track list e MEDIA e LIST –
Depending on the selected media source, further H
subfolders such as Playlists, Artists are available. I
J
Tune to stations using the frequency band or e Select MEDIA e TUNE e or . –
number entry K
L
Activate Online Station tracking e MEDIA e DAB/FM e Options e Tuner –
settings e Online station tracking1. M
N
Playing media – Activating random playback: Select (see F) O
– Replay track: Select (see G)
Available radio and media sources P
– Have similar music suggested: Select Play More
The radio supports FM, AM (country-dependent), Technical data of supported media and file formats: Like This. Q
HD Radio™ Technology, SiriusXM® and digital radio > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
stations. R
Depending on the equipment, the following media
Management (PCM)" on page 197. Storing and editing a favorite
S
sources are available: HD Radio™, DVD changer, SD Other functions during media playback Storing a favorite T
cards, external devices via USB or Bluetooth®, online
b MEDIA e PLAY is selected.
media services.
In addition to the functions from the brief overview, 1. MEDIA e FAV U
The PCM additionally receives digital programs from
HD Radio™ stations in the FM/AM band provided that the following functions are available (Fig. 124): 2. Select the desired station/track from the V
the function HD Radio™2 content is switched on. – Display current playback list: Select (see E) Recently played area and move to the Favorites
area via drag & drop.
W
X
1. Prerequisite: Data connection is established. Porsche Connect services are activated. Y

2. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://patents.dts.com. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, Z
and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
169
Media
A Adding favorite content from band SiriusXM®

to favorite list
B
C e MEDIA e PLAY e Call up media sources
e SiriusXM e Select Add .
D
The icon is displayed when the favorite content is
E
played.
F
Organizing favorites
G
H 1. MEDIA e FAV
I 2. Press on the desired station/track and move to

the desired position (drag & drop).
J
K Deleting a favorite
L 1. MEDIA e FAV
M 2. Select the desired station/track and move up-
N ward from the Favorites area via drag & drop.
– or –
O
If available, select the icon under MEDIA
P e PLAY /LIST in order to delete a pre-
Q viously saved favorite from the Favorites area.
R
Changing media settings
S
T e MEDIA e Options e Select desired set-
ting.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
170
Mirrors
Mirrors NOTICE Adjusting door mirrors A

B
Using door mirrors Risk of damage to the door mirrors when washing
the vehicle in car washes. C
Incorrect assessment of
WARNING
traffic situation due to e Fold in door mirrors before using the car wash. D
distorted representation E
of surroundings in door
mirrors F
Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex mirrors G
and further away than they are in reality. This may H
lead to incorrect assessment of the driving situation
and an accident. I
e Take account of distortion when estimating the J
distance of vehicles behind you and when
K
parking.
e Use the interior mirror for judging distance as L
well.
M
Fig. 126: Adjusting door mirrors
Escaping electrolyte fluid N
CAUTION b Ignition is switched on.
– or – O
Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror. Ignition switched off, driver or passenger door P
This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes. Fig. 125: Operation of door mirror not yet opened (maximum 10 minutes).
e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, A Selecting the door mirror on the left-hand side 1. Press button A to select the left door mirror or Q
immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using B Selecting the door mirror on the right-hand side button B to select the right door mirror.
C Adjusting door mirrors
R
clean water. While the symbol on the selected button
e Seek medical attention from a doctor if S
D Folding door mirrors in and out (depending on lights up red, the relevant door mirror glass can
equipment)
necessary. be adjusted. T
2. Move the glass of the door mirrors to the correct
position by pressing the adjustment button C. U
NOTICE
If the electric function fails V
Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com- e Adjust the mirrors by pressing on the mirror W
ponents and clothing. surface.
X
Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still
wet. Y
e Clean affected parts with water. Z
171
Mirrors
A Folding door mirrors in and out Folding door mirrors in and out from outside Information
the vehicle
B After switching on the ignition, the door mirrors do
The door mirrors can be folded in when the vehicle is
C locked. not fold out automatically if they have previously
been folded in manually using button D (Fig. 125).
D e Press and hold the button on the vehicle key
for at least 1 second.
E On vehicles with Comfort Access: Touch the
proximity sensor on the driver’s door handle for Storing door mirror settings
F
at least 1 second. In vehicles with the memory package, individual
G The door mirrors fold in. settings for the door mirrors can be saved to the
memory buttons in the driver's door and on the ve-
H Folding door mirrors out automatically hicle key.
I e Switch on ignition. > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on
The door mirrors fold out automatically. page 186.
J
Folding door mirrors in and out automatically
K
(depending on equipment)
Switching automatic dimming of
L The automatic folding in and out function of the door door mirrors on and off
M mirrors can be set in the PCM. The door mirrors are dimmed automatically, together
Fig. 127: Folding door mirrors in and out with the interior mirror.
Activating the function
N > Please see chapter "Switching automatic interior
O Folding in door mirror manually e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking e
mirror dimming on and off" on page 174.
e With your hand, swivel the mirror housing diag- Folding in mirrors
P onally upward as far as possible. Swiveling mirror glass downward
Q Folding door mirrors in automatically as a parking aid
Folding out door mirror manually b Function activated.
In vehicles with the memory package, the mirror
R e With your hand, swivel the mirror housing diag- e Lock the vehicle. glass on the passenger's side swivels slightly down-
S onally downward as far as possible. The door mirrors fold in automatically. ward when reverse gear is engaged, so that the area
T Folding door mirrors out automatically around the curb comes into view.
Folding door mirrors in and out electrically
(depending on equipment) b Function activated.
U
b Maximum speed approx. 30 mph (50 km/h). e Switch on ignition.
V
e Press button D (Fig. 125). The door mirrors fold out automatically.
W Both door mirrors fold out/in.
X If the electric folding function fails
e Fold mirrors in/out manually.
Y
Z
172
Mirrors
The mirror glass on the passenger's side swivels Dimming interior mirror manually A
downward.
B
Making individual adjustments to the position of
the lowered mirror glass: C
e Move the glass of the door mirror into the ap- D
propriate position by pressing the adjustment
button C. E
In vehicles with the memory package, this setting is F
saved to the memory buttons in the driver's door or
on the vehicle key. G
For information on storing and retrieving the vehicle H
settings:
> Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on I
page 186. J
Moving mirror glass to the initial position K
Fig. 128: Swiveling mirror glass downward as a parking aid The mirror glass swivels back into its initial position: L
– after a time delay when reverse gear is disen-
M
Swiveling mirror glass downward gaged, or Fig. 129: Dimming interior mirror manually
automatically – immediately when the vehicle has reached a N
speed of more than 9 mph (15 km/h). When setting the mirror, the dimming lever A must
The downward swiveling of the mirror glass on the O
point toward the vehicle interior.
passenger's side can be adjusted in the instrument Manually moving the mirror glass on the passeng- e Initial position – swivel lever in the direction of P
cluster. er's side to the initial position: the vehicle interior.
Activating the function e Press button A for the door mirror on the driver's e Dimmed position – swivel lever toward the Q
side. windshield.
e Vehicle e Settings e Light & Visibility e R
Revers. opt. e Lower mirror
S
b Ignition is switched on.
T
b Reverse gear engaged.
b Function activated. U
V
Swiveling mirror glass downward manually
1. Engage reverse gear. W
Light indicator B on button A for adjusting the X
door mirror on the driver’s side lights up.
2. Press button D for adjustment of the door mirror Y
on the passenger's side. Z
173
Mirrors
A Switching automatic interior mir- CAUTION

Escaping electrolyte fluid
B ror dimming on and off

Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror.
C This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes.
D e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using
E
clean water.
F e Seek medical attention from a doctor if
G necessary.
H
NOTICE
I
J Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com-
ponents and clothing.
K Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still
L wet.
e Clean affected parts with water.
M
N
Fig. 130: Automatic dimming of the interior mirror
O
Switching automatic dimming on
P
e Press button B.
Q Light indicator A lights up.
R Depending on the light intensity, the interior
mirror automatically dims or returns to the initial
S position.
T
Information
U
The interior mirror does not dim when reverse gear is
V
engaged or the passenger compartment lighting is
W switched on.
X
Y Switching automatic dimming off
e Press button B.
Z
The light indicator A goes off.
174
Navigation
Navigation A
B
Brief overview – Navigation
C
This brief overview does not replace the compre- D
ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief E
overview. F
G
Communication Management system (PCM):
> Please see chapter "Porsche Communication H
I
J
Fig. 131: Entering/finding a destination Fig. 132: Search options on the keyboard K
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? L
M
Find a destination/enter a destination address e Select NAV e in the header (see A). –
– or – N
NAV e DEST e Destination input (see O
A)
– Voice input (see E) P
– Integrated search: Search in PCM memory and Q
online content (see F)
– Online search (availability dependent on coun- R
try)1: Internet search (see G) S
T
Select previous destination e NAV e DEST /FAV e Recent –
destinations (see B)/My Destinations U
V
Enter POI e NAV e DEST e Points of interest (see –
C) W
X
Y
Z
1. Prerequisite: Data connection established. Online navigation and Porsche Connect services activated.
175
Navigation

B Enter GPS coordinates e NAV e DEST e Options (see D) e –
C Enter GPS coordinates
D Start/End route guidance e Select NAV e Enter destination e Start route –
E guidance or Stop .
F
Select a stored destination e NAV e FAV e My Destinations –
G
H Select a destination from contacts e NAV e FAV e Contacts –
I
Access map view e NAV e MAP –
J
Display list of traffic information b Route guidance active. > p. 178
K
e NAV e TRAFFIC
L
M Activate online navigation e NAV e Options e Navigation settings e –
Online navigation services e Online navigation1
N
O Activate intelligent detour b Route guidance active. > p. 178
P e NAV e Options e Activate Intelligent
detour.
Q
Use Porsche Connect services (e.g. online map b Data connection is established. Porsche Con- > p. 204
R
update) nect services are activated. Further information
S on Porsche Connect can be found at
T > www.porsche.com/connect.
U Risk of accident through in the country of use always apply. The driver always Risk of accident owing to
WARNING WARNING
disregarding road traffic bears responsibility for road safety. system-related inaccur-
V
laws acies and malfunctions
e Always pay attention to the traffic situation.
W e Adapt your speed and driving style in line with
If a recommended driving instruction contradicts the Incorrect directions and malfunctions cannot be
X road traffic laws in force, the road traffic regulations the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ruled out during satellite-based navigation. The
Y
Z
1. Data connection is established. Porsche Connect Services and online navigations services must be activated.
176
Navigation
driver always bears responsibility for guiding the 1. NAV e FAV e My Destinations Information A
vehicle.
2. My Destinations e Saved tours e Select the B
e Always pay attention to the terrain. – Up to three destinations are created and up to
desired tour. three routes are available for each destination. C
Suggested routes are prioritized according to
D
Adopting a destination from a Editing a tour how frequently an identical route is traveled.
– The traffic situation for available smart routes is E
map You can reorganize the stopovers at a later time.
displayed depending on the current vehicle
b Tour started. F
position.
1. Select NAV e MAP .
e Under NAV e DEST e Options e Edit – The PCM identifies whether the route is traveled G
2. Press and hold the destination on the map. route then press and hold the relevant stopover during the week or at the weekend. Recorded
and move it to the desired position (drag & smart routes are only displayed at the appropri- H
3. Select to start route guidance. drop). ate time - either at the weekend or on weekdays. I
– Opening Smart routes stops active route
guidance. J
Planning a tour (Entering a Smart routing K
stopover) A smart route is created automatically as soon as an
A tour consists of one destination and between one identical route is traveled twice. Accessing Smart routes L
and eight stopovers. b Smart routes activated. M
Activating smart routing
Entering and starting a tour 1. NAV e MAP N
1. NAV e Options e Navigation settings
1. NAV e Enter destination e Start route 2. in the lower right corner of the map O
2. Activate Smart routes under the Smart
guidance . routes function. 3. Select the desired smart route from the list of P
suggestions.
2. Options e Edit route e Add stopover . The symbol is displayed in the lower right Q
corner of the map. 4. Select Start .
3. Enter or select a stopover. R
4. Add as stopover e Start tour. S
Deleting Smart routes
Stored Smart routes remain stored after the function T
Saving a tour is deactivated and must be deleted. U
b Tour started. e NAV e MAP e Options e Navigation
settings e Smart routes
V
e Options e Edit Route e Options e Save
tour W
X
Retrieving a tour Y
b Tour is saved.
Z
177
Navigation
A Configuring map contents The numbers displayed in the TRAFFIC icon Displaying/configuring the map view
show the number of traffic notices on the se- 1. Select the map display in the Car & Info display in
B 1. NAV e MAP e (in the header) lected route. the instrument cluster.
C 2. Activate or deactivate the desired map content 2. Select traffic notice. > Please see chapter "D – Car & Info display"
D (availability dependent on country): – or – on page 138.
Select Show all traffic notices to display all 2. Select the desired view using the multifunction
E – 3D map: Show or hide 3D map view (otherwise steering wheel:
traffic notices.
2D view).
F – Man. Zoom: Adjust the magnification factor of
– Auto zoom: Activate or deactivate Auto zoom the map display.
G function in the map. Avoiding traffic disruptions
– Auto Zoom: Map scale is set automatically.
– Satellite Map: Show or hide satellite view on the Traffic disruptions can be automatically avoided or
H – 3D Map: Three-dimensional map display.
map. displayed in route guidance.
– North up: The map always faces north.
I – Weather1: Show or hide weather information on
the map. e Activate NAV e Options e Route – Map info: If no map view is selected in the Car &
J
– Show points of interest: Show or hide points of options e Dynamic reroute/Refer to traffic Info display on the instrument cluster, the map is
notices. displayed automatically in the event of a naviga-
K interest on the map.
tion event.
– Compass: Show or hide compass on the map. Traffic announcements are the responsibility of the
L – Arrow info: If the Navigation menu is not se-
broadcasting companies. We therefore cannot as- lected in the Speed & Assist display in the in-
M Displaying traffic information sume any responsibility for the completeness or ac- strument cluster, the menu is displayed
curacy of the information. automatically in the event of a navigation event.
N
Displaying traffic information on the map1
O You can display the following traffic information on Activating intelligent detour Displaying navigation information on the in-
the current location or on the selected route on the b Route guidance active. strument cluster
P
map: e Select the Navigation menu in the Car & Info
Q – Hatched areas: Indication of the length of the e NAV e Options Activate e Intelligent
display in the instrument cluster.
detour.
R traffic disruption. > Please see chapter "A – Speed & Assist dis-
– Colored warning symbols: Imminent traffic dis- The section of the route ahead is avoided.
play" on page 138.
S ruption on the selected route. If route guidance is
T not active, all current traffic disruptions are Displaying map display and navi- Changing navigation settings
highlighted in color.
U gation information on the instru-
– Grayed-out warning symbols: Traffic disruption e NAV e Options e Navigation settings e
V which is not on the selected route. ment cluster Select the desired setting.
For information on operating the instrument cluster:
W Displaying list of traffic information > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument
X cluster" on page 140.
1. NAV e TRAFFIC
Y
Z
1. Prerequisite: Data connection established. Porsche Connect services are activated.
178
Navigation
Toll devices A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Fig. 133: Attaching toll devices
H
Attach the toll device at the marked position on the
inside of the windshield in order to guarantee opti-
I
mum reception. J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
179
Night View Assist
A Night View Assist1 perceived by the human eye. Night View Assist de- Pedestrian warning
tects persons and animals when it is sufficiently dark If the system detects a possible collision with a pe-
B WARNING
Lack of attention and
and at an ambient temperature below 82 °F (28 °C).
failure to detect objects destrian, it can warn the driver by means of a warn-
C An impending collision or driving dangerously close ing tone and an appropriate display in the instrument
via Night View Assist
past persons will trigger a warning within the system cluster.
D limits. In this case, the system warns the driver vis-
Night View Assist is a support system and cannot
E alert the driver of a collision under all circumstances. ually and acoustically. On vehicles with Porsche Dy-
namic Light System Plus, the endangered person
F There is a risk of accident.
flashes in order to enhance detection.
Responsibility for braking in time and for appropriate Prior to an impending collision with wild animals
G
vehicle lighting always lies with the driver. outside urban areas, a warning is also issued within
H e Drive with extreme care. the limits of the system. In this case, the system
I e Always check the traffic situation and the area warns the driver visually and acoustically.
around the vehicle.
J
Night View Assist un-
K CAUTION
available or only available
L to a limited extent
M Shocks or damage to the bumper, e.g. through
N parking collisions, can displace the camera. This may
impair the performance of the system.
O
e Visit an qualified specialist repair shop. Porsche
P recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as Fig. 135: Pedestrian warning on instrument cluster
they have trained technicians and the necessary The pedestrian warning is output if a pedestrian is
Q
parts and tools. standing or moving onto the driving lane. On vehicles
R with LED matrix headlights, the endangered person
The thermal imaging camera of the Night View As- flashes in order to enhance detection. Even with this
S sist in the front of the vehicle provides a thermal warning, the driver may still have to swerve or brake
T image of the surroundings that can be displayed in sharply in order to avoid a collision. The warning time
the Car & Info display in the instrument cluster. The varies according to the traffic situation and the driv-
U system can detect persons and animals beyond the Fig. 134: Night View Assist thermal image er's behavior.
area illuminated by the headlights and highlight
V The Porsche Night View Assist has the following
these in the camera image. Animal warning
functions:
W Because the thermal imaging camera is only sensi- The animal warning reacts to hazards caused by
– Display of a thermal image.
tive in the heat radiation range, the image in the large wild animals, e.g. deer, outside of built-up
X – Pedestrian and animal warning.
camera may differ significantly from the image as areas. The animal warning is triggered if an animal is
Y
Z
1. Availability dependent on country
180
Night View Assist
in the projected driving lane or is dangerously close. Cleaning Night View Assist camera A
The animal warning is deactivated automatically in b Low beam or high beam activated. B
urban areas in order to prevent it from being trig- After the ignition is switched on, the Night View As-
gered by on-leash dogs, for example. sist camera is cleaned automatically at each first and C
tenth activation of the windshield wiper system. D
Switching Night View Assist on > Please see chapter "Operating windshield
and off wipers" on page 323. E
F
e ASSIST e Night View Assist
G
Adjusting collision warning and image H
adaptation
I
The warning time for the collision warning and the
image parameters of the Night View Assist can be J
adjusted on the PCM.
K
e ASSIST e e Assistance system L
settings e Night View Assist
M
Night View Assist status display N
O
Symbol Instrument Meaning
cluster
P
Q
Car & Info When the camera im-
display age is displayed, it in- R
dicates that the S
system cannot reliably
detect persons or ani- T
mals, owing to the U
prevailing ambient
conditions (outside V
temperature and W
brightness). The warn-
ing function is cur- X
rently not available. Y
Z
181
ParkAssist
A ParkAssist System limitations Distance measurement

B External ultrasound waves (e.g. air brakes from other
General safety instructions vehicles, road sweeping machines, pneumatic ham-
C mers) can interfere with obstacle detection.
Lack of attention
D WARNING The system cannot detect the following:
– Sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. wintery condi-
E The system must not induce you to take risks with tions, powder snow, clothing made from fabric,
F your safety. The driver is always responsible for tak- hide or fur).
ing due care. The system is no substitute for the – Sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfaces,
G driver's attentiveness. flat enameled surfaces).
H e Make sure that no persons, animals, or obstacles – Very thin obstacles (e.g. thin posts).
are within maneuvering range of the vehicle. – Obstacles, if the sensors or cameras are very
I
e When maneuvering, stop the vehicle if there are dirty or covered, e.g. by dust, dirt, snow or ice.
J persons or animals in the red area.
K
Functions
Restricted detection ParkAssist visually and audibly indicates to the driver
WARNING
L ranges of sensors the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle
M during parking and maneuvering.
Sensors do not cover all parts of the surrounding Fig. 136: Ultrasound sensors for distance measurement
Obstacles located in front of and behind the vehicle
N area. Persons, animals and obstacles may not be
are indicated by means of different colored fields in The ultrasound sensors A in the rear and front
detected in this area or may only be detected to a
O the PCM. These fields show the contour of the ob- bumpers measure the distance to the nearest ob-
limited extent. There is a risk of injury and damage. stacles as well as their distance from the vehicle. stacle. A detected obstacle is reported by an inter-
P e Always check the traffic situation and the area mittent tone. The intervals shorten as the vehicle
around the vehicle. approaches the obstacle. When the distance is less
Q
than approx. 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone
R Adverse environmental sounds.
CAUTION
conditions
S Obstacles above and below the sensors cannot be
In the event of adverse environmental conditions, detected.
T the system will be restricted or not available: There is You can adjust the volume of the warning tones in
U a risk of injuries and damage. the PCM.
V e Only use the system in suitable environmental
page 270.
conditions.
W e Adapt your driving style to the visibility, weather,
road and traffic conditions. Activating ParkAssist
X
Y Activating automatically (up to a speed of
approx. 9 mph (15 km/h))
Z
182
ParkAssist
b Reverse gear engaged. Color Front Rear distance Warnings on Targa models A
– or – distance B
b Distance in front is less than approx. NOTICE
32 in. (80 cm). White There are no obstacles in the C
– or – path of the vehicle and the dis- When opening the Targa roof, the rear glass window
D
b Rolling backward is detected. tance is > 12 in. (30 cm). projects beyond the contours of the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to the rear glass window. E
Activating manually Orange < < e While opening and closing, make sure that no F
47 in. (120 71 in. (180 one is behind the vehicle. Make sure there is
e ASSIST e ParkAssist cm) cm) sufficient clearance above and behind the vehicle G
(e.g. in the garage). H
Red < <
Display in PCM
16 in. (40 cm) 16 in. (40 cm) If the Targa roof or the rear glass window is opened I
or closed using the button in the center console or
Red plus con- < < using the engine compartment lid button, rear Par- J
tinuous tone 12 in. (30 cm) 12 in. (30 cm) kAssist is activated at the same time1. K
If the sensors detect an obstacle at a distance of
approx. 20 in. (50 cm) or less, opening or closing is L
Symbol Meaning
stopped. M
Deactivate ParkAssist for the current A message appears on the instrument cluster.
parking procedure. It will be reacti- If there is no obstacle in the vicinity of the vehicle, N
vated again at a speed of more than the process can be continued manually. O
9 mph (15 km/h) or if transmission e Pull the button twice within approx. 10 seconds.
range R is selected again. > Please see chapter "Warning and Information P
Messages" on page 280. Q
Switch off the acoustic warning.
Deactivating ParkAssist R
S
Deactivating manually
T
Fig. 137: ParkAssist display Communication Management system (PCM): e Tap in the PCM. U
> Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
Management (PCM)" on page 197. V
Deactivating automatically
b P button on selector lever activated. W
X
Y
Z
1. Not while active parking support is in use.
183
ParkAssist
A Switching automatic activation on/off Activating the rear view camera exact position of the vehicle are detected. When
Automatically Surround View is active, the courtesy lights are
B e ASSIST e e Assistance system b Ignition switched on and reverse gear engaged. switched on for better illumination.
C settings e ParkAssist e Auto activate
– or –
D b Rolling backward is detected.
Setting the ParkAssist volume
E Manually
e ASSIST e e Assistance system
F
settings e ParkAssist e Volume e ASSIST e ParkAssist
G
Automatically deactivating rear view camera
H Rear view camera b Speed is higher than 9 mph (15 km/h).
I – or –
General safety instructions
J b P button on selector lever activated.
Risk of injury due to dis-
WARNING
K torted display
Surround View
L The objects shown by the camera appear distorted.
The red marking corresponds to the rear of the ve- General safety instructions
M
hicle. The image from the rear view camera does not Risk of injury due to dis-
N WARNING
show the entire area behind the vehicle. torted display Fig. 138: Position of Surround View cameras
O e Always check the entire area around the vehicle.
A Camera in the center of the front bumper
e Ensure that there are no people, animals or ob- The objects shown by the cameras appear distorted.
B Camera in both door mirrors
P stacles in the red area of the rear view camera Many of the screen windows do not show the entire
C Camera between the license plate lights in the tailgate.
area around the vehicle.
Q image.
e Always check the entire area around the vehicle.
Activating Surround View
R e Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles
System limitations are within the maneuvering range of the vehicle. Automatically
S b ParkAssist is active.
The system cannot be used or can only be used to a
T limited extent if the camera is heavily soiled or cov- – or –
ered by dust, dirt, snow or ice, for example. System limitations b Reverse gear engaged.
U
The system cannot be used or can only be used to a – or –
V Functions limited extent if the cameras are heavily soiled or b Rolling backward is detected.
The rear view camera facilitates monitoring of the covered by dust, dirt, snow or ice, for example. Manually
W
area behind the vehicle during parking maneuvers.
X The picture from the rear view camera is displayed Functions e ASSIST e ParkAssist
on the PCM. Surround View provides a bird's eye view of the ve-
Y Use the relevant symbol to select the desired view
hicle and covers the area around the vehicle. Using
(e.g. Rear). The symbol for the active view is high-
Z the cameras, obstacles or markings as well as the
lighted in red.
184
ParkAssist
Symbol View Deactivating Surround View A

Automatically B
Parking (change front b Speed is higher than 9 mph (15 km/h).
and rear view by C
Manually
tapping)
e Press the P button on the selector lever. D
Panorama (change E
front and rear view by F
tapping)
G
Side H
3D view
I
– Switch perspective J
by touching one of
the side camera
K
symbols. L
– Select all-round
view by touching
M
the camera symbol N
at the bottom of
the screen and by O
turning the per- P
spective 360° by
swiping the camera Q
image. R
S
Information
T
Guide lines are superimposed on the front and rear
U
camera views.
These guide lines indicate the direction the vehicle V
can follow with the steering wheel in the current W
position. The guide lines change as the position of
the front wheels changes. X
Y
Z
185
Personal Settings
A Personal Settings Information Managing driver profile

B Ergonomic settings can be stored and retrieved Up to 6 driver profiles and 1 guest profile can be
manually using the memory buttons in the driver's Individual functions cannot be personalized, to avoid created and managed.
C door. In addition, individual driver profiles can be damage to the vehicle (e.g. the function for auto- When you start the PCM for the first time, the Set-
created via the PCM that automatically store and matically activating the rear wiper when reverse gear up wizard is displayed and guides you through im-
D is engaged).
retrieve ergonomic and comfort settings. Both portant steps for configuring the PCM. We recom-
E functions can be used independently of one another. mend that you run the Set-up wizard fully to
Retrieving the automatic correctly create the first driver profile.
F CAUTION
Storing and retrieving personal seat, door mirror, and
steering wheel settings
It is only possible to switch between the created
G driver profiles via the instrument cluster immediately
settings after the ignition has been switched on and, when
H If the ignition is switched off, the previously actu- Parts of the body may be pinched or crushed if the
the ignition is on, at any time via the PCM.
I ated settings are automatically stored in the se- settings are activated in an uncontrolled manner.
Driver detection occurs automatically via the vehicle
lected driver profile by the PCM and linked to the e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. key. A vehicle key is always automatically assigned
J vehicle key used. The settings are automatically re- e Automatic retrieval of the ergonomic settings to an active profile.
trieved via the vehicle key when the door is unlocked. can be cancelled if necessary by pressing a
K Managing driver profiles
If two or more people use the vehicle, it is advanta- memory button or a seat adjustment button.
L geous to use one driver profile and vehicle key per Driver profiles can be managed in the PCM.
person. The driver profiles can be changed manually
M e SET e Driver
if required. Storing and retrieving comfort
N Additionally, up to three ergonomic settings can be
manually stored and retrieved via the memory but- settings – Add driver
O – Edit driver
tons in the driver's door.
Storing comfort settings – Change driver
P Ergonomic settings affect:
seat, door mirror and steering wheel settings. e When the ignition is switched off, the settings – Delete driver (via the Edit driver menu item)
Q previously made are automatically saved to the – Activate driver
Additionally, up to three ergonomic settings can be
driver profile in the PCM. – Activate personalization
R manually stored and retrieved via the memory but-
tons in the driver's door. – Deactivate automatic saving
S Retrieving comfort settings
Comfort settings affect: If the activated personalization settings do not
T Ergonomic, air conditioning, light, vision, assistance- 1. Unlock the vehicle. match the current driver, it is recommended to
system, instrument cluster and infotainment The driver profile settings are retrieved. switch to another created driver profile. If necessary,
U settings. – or – a new driver profile can be created and the vehicle
V b Vehicle is stationary. settings can then be adapted. This prevents the ve-
1. Changing driver profile using the PCM. hicle settings of the driver profile first selected from
W 2. Wait until all settings have been applied. being inadvertently changed.
X If loading of the settings is interrupted:
e Select Activate driver via the PCM.
Y
Z
186
Personal Settings
Storing and retrieving ergonomic A

settings B
Storing ergonomic settings on the memory C
buttons D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Fig. 139: Memory buttons, driver’s door
K
1. Press the SET button.
The lettering on the button is illuminated. L
2. Press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or 3 M
within 10 seconds.
The settings are stored. N
Storage is acknowledged acoustically (driver’s door O
only) and the illumination of the SET button goes
out. P
Q
Retrieving ergonomic settings with memory
buttons R
e Press and hold the relevant memory button 1, 2 S
or 3 until all settings are retrieved.
– or – T
b Ignition switched off. U
b Driver’s door open.
e Briefly press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or
V
3. W
The settings will be automatically adjusted.
X
Y
Z
187
Phone
A Phone
B
Brief Overview – Phone
C
D
overview.
F
G Communication Management system (PCM):
H > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
I
J
K
Fig. 140: Dialing number (keypad)
L
M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?
N Connect phone via Bluetooth® (cellphone e Select PHONE e Search for new phone or an > p. 189
O preparation) already known phone.
P e Select the currently connected cellphone at the

top right in the header. The two devices already
Q Switch between two connected cellphones > p. 190
connected are displayed e Select the desired
R cellphone.
S e Open armrest e Insert a SIM card in the SIM
T Use PCM with an external SIM card for data card slot (missing corner front left, chip facing > p. 190
connection downward) e Enter PIN if necessary e Confirm
U data connection.
V
Dial number e Select PHONE e KEYPAD (see A) e –
W (see G)
X
b Private mode deactivated.
Y Select breakdown call e PHONE e KEYPAD (see A) e Breakdown > p. 117
Z Call
188
Phone

B
Select emergency call e PHONE e KEYPAD (see A) e Emergency > p. 116
call C
D
e PHONE e FAV (see B) e Add favorite e > p. 191
Store contact as favorite E
Select desired contact from list e .
F
Display call list e PHONE e CALLS (see C) –
G
Display a contact e PHONE e CONTACT (see D) – H
I
Display messages e PHONE e MESSAGE (see E) e Select the > p. 191 J
desired folder e.g. Text messages.
K
e PHONE e KEYPAD e Keep button 1 (see – L
Check voicemail
F) pressed for a long time.
M
Accept/reject a call e Select Accept or Reject . – N
O
End call e Select in the footer or phone menu. –
P
Various use options are available depending on WARNING
Risk of injury Connecting a cellphone via Q
model, country and equipment. The features de- Bluetooth® R
scribed here are therefore not available in all models,
Cellphones must be switched off in certain danger
countries and equipment versions. Connecting a new cellphone S
areas, e.g. near service stations, fuel depots, chem-
WARNING
Risk of accident through ical plants or during blasting work. They can disrupt b The Bluetooth® function of the cellphone is acti- T
the use of cellphones technical equipment. vated and is visible for other devices.
e Observe warnings, as well as statutory regula- b PCM Bluetooth® function activated. U
Using cellphones while driving can distract the driver
tions and local restrictions. > Please see chapter "Device Manager" on V
from what is happening with the traffic and result in
page 111.
the driver losing control of the vehicle. W
e Only make or receive calls using hands-free 1. PHONE e KEYPAD e Search for new X
equipment. phone
Y
2. Select a cellphone from the device list.
Z
189
Phone
A A 6-digit Bluetooth® code is generated and dis- The Bluetooth® device name of the PCM can be PHONE e Options e Select phone e
played in the PCM and on the cellphone. displayed in the Device Manager under Options Select the desired device.
B
3. Compare the Bluetooth® code in the PCM and e Bluetooth e Bluetooth name.
C on the cellphone.
Connecting to a known cellphone
Using the PCM with a SIM card
D 4. If the Bluetooth® code in the PCM and on the The SIM card can only be used for establishing a
b The Bluetooth® function of the cellphone is
E cellphone match, confirm. data connection. For information about the data
activated.
When the phone is successfully connected, the connection:
b PCM Bluetooth® function activated.
F > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on
numeric input (KEYPAD menu ) is displayed > Please see chapter "Device Manager" on page 204.
G in the PCM. page 111.
H Inserting and removing an external SIM card
Information 1. Select or in the header (depending on
I the connection status). NOTICE
J – Depending on the Bluetooth® capability of the A list with a maximum of 20 known cellphones
cellphone, it is possible to access the content of is displayed.
K If you are using a SIM card adapter, the SIM card
the phone book, call lists and messages. It is also
2. Select a cellphone from the list. may fall out of the adapter due to vibrations and
possible to transfer an ongoing conversation to
L The cellphone is connected via Bluetooth®. components of the card may get stuck in the drive.
the cellphone after parking the vehicle and con-
M tinue it outside the vehicle if the cellphone sup- e Do not use a SIM card adapter.
ports this function. Connecting and using a second cellphone
N
– You will find an overview of compatible cell- b A cellphone is already connected to the PCM.
O phones on the Porsche website for your country
under: Models e Your model (e.g. 911 Carrera) e 1. Select or in the header (depending on
P
Download Brochures e Via Bluetooth® the connection status).
Q
2. Select a cellphone from the list or connect a
R Connecting a cellphone (Windows® and iOS® new cellphone.
S operating system) > Please see chapter "Connecting a new cell-
For cellphones with Windows® and iOS® operating phone" on page 189. Fig. 141: External SIM card in the armrest
T Both connected cellphones can receive calls,
systems, it is recommended to start connection
but only the active cellphone can make calls. b PCM phone switched on (SET e Porsche
U from the cellphone:
Connect e Turn on phone features).
1. Search for available devices in the Bluetooth® 3. Select the currently connected device at the
V
menu of the cellphone. Press or in the top right in the headline in order to switch be- 1. Insert SIM card B (mini-SIM, dimensions: 0.98 x
W header (depending on the connection status) to tween the two connected cellphones. 0.59 in. (25 x 15 mm)). The missing corner
make the PCM visible. The two devices already connected are must be pointing front left with the chip facing
X down.
2. Select the PCM from the list of available devices. displayed.
Y – or – 2. SIM card with PIN:
Z
190
Phone
a. Enter the PIN code of the SIM card and Organizing favorites 1. e Add new call (enter number or select A
confirm with OK. contact) e B
b. Select Store PIN. 1. PHONE e FAV
2. Select , to activate the conference call. C
3. To remove the SIM card, press on the inserted 2. Select the desired contact and move it to the
card and remove it. desired position via drag & drop. 3. Select to end the conference call. D
E
Displaying the connection status Deleting a favorite Switching (toggling) between two calls
F
b First phone call is active.
Depending on the model, country and equipment, 1. PHONE e FAV
the following displays are possible in the header: b Second phone call is on hold. G
No phone connected. 2. Select the desired contact and via drag & drop
move it out of the Favorites area and upward e Select to activate the call on hold, and put
H
No data connection available (possible out of the display area the previously active call on hold. I
causes: no connection, poor network – or –
quality, interruption of the data connec- J
If present, select icon .
tion during a voice connection). Displaying phone information in K
Data connection via the LTE cellphone the instrument cluster
network. Functions available during a e Select the desired function in the Car & Info dis-
L
Data connection via the UMTS/HSPA phone call play on the instrument cluster: M
cellphone network (3G). > Please see chapter "D – Car & Info display"
b PHONE e KEYPAD selected. N
Data connection via the EDGE cellphone on page 138.
network (GSM). Muting the microphone – Incoming call: Accept or Reject the incoming call O
using the phone buttons on the steering wheel.
Reception field strength of the cellphone b Active phone call. P
network for the phone function. – Last call: Display a list of the last numbers dialed
Data connection via external WiFi e Select to mute the microphone. using the phone button and rotary push button Q
hotspot. on the steering wheel.
R
– Conference: Make other calls or add the partici-
Holding a call S
Storing and editing a favorite b Active phone call.
pants to a conference call during an active phone
call using the rotary push button and phone but-
T
Storing a favorite ton on the steering wheel.
e Select . U
For information on operating the instrument cluster:
1. PHONE e FAV e To resume the call, select . > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument V
2. Select contact from the area Last contacted cluster" on page 140.
W
and move it into the Favorites area via drag & Starting a conference call
drop. b Active phone call. Displaying and editing messages X
You can read text messages (SMS) and e-mails, Y
have the messages read out to you or use the num-
bers contained in the messages for making phone Z
191
Phone
A calls if the cellphone supports this function. It is Stowing a cellphone (availability

B
possible that the cellphone supports the text mes- dependent on country)
sage function but not the e-mail function. For fur-
C ther information on these settings, see the operating FCC/ISED Notice
instructions for your cellphone. This is a CONSUMER device.
D
– BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DEVICE
E Information with your wireless provider and have your pro-
F – If the cellphone only supports display of the text vider´s consent. Most wireless providers con-
messages stored in the device memory, the text sent to the use of Compensators. Some Fig. 142: Storage compartment in the armrest
G providers may not consent to the use of this de-
messages received in the vehicle may not appear Depending on the equipment, the storage compart-
H in the cellphone message list. Otherwise, re- vice on their network. If you are unsure, contact ment in the armrest has various interfaces. The USB
ceived text messages are stored on the SIM card. your provider. ports (type A) can be used to charge cellphones and
I – BEFORE USE, you must meet all requirements connect to the PCM.
– The PCM does not support the Multimedia Mes-
J saging Service (MMS). set out in CPC-2-1-05. b Keypad/code lock on the cellphone is activated.
– You MUST operate this device with approved e Place the cellphone in the storage compartment
K antennas and cables as specified by the manu- with the display facing upward.
L Writing a text message/e-mail facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20
cm (8 inches) from any person.
M Changing phone settings
1. PHONE e MESSAGE e Text messages/ – You MUST cease operating this device immedi-
N Email ately if requested by the FCC / ISED or a licensed
General settings
wireless service provider.
O 2. Select . – WARNING E911 location information may not be e PHONE e Options e Phone settings e
P 3. Adding a new recipient (enter number or select provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by Select the desired setting.
contact). using this device.
Q
4. Enter text using the input field and confirm with FCC RF Exposure Statement Managing contacts
R OK.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation expo-
S e PHONE e CONTACT e Options e
5. Select Send. sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
Select the desired setting.
T End users must follow the specific operating in-
struction for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
U Replying to or forwarding a text message/e- Editing messages
transmitter must not be colocated or operating in
mail
V conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
e PHONE e MESSAGE e Text message/e-
1. PHONE e MESSAGE e Text messages/
W Email FCC ID / IC ID mail folder e Options e Select the desired
X FCC ID: RK7MBC-NAR setting.
2. Select the text message/e-mail that you want
IC 4774A-MBCNAR
Y to reply to/forward.
Z 3. Select e Reply/Forward.
192
Porsche Active Safe (Warn and Brake Assist)
Porsche Active Safe (Warn approx. 53 mph (85 km/h). It can react to vehicles The camera behind the windshield detects the area A
and Brake Assist)1 up to a speed of 156 mph (250 km/h).
The system does not react to animals, cross traffic,
ahead of the vehicle. An impending frontal collision
with other road users can be detected. The system B
oncoming vehicles and objects such as poles, fen- warns the driver visually, acoustically and if neces- C
General safety instructions ces, rail vehicles. sary through a braking jolt. Where required, the sys-
tem can support the driver's braking or initiate D
System unavailable or
WARNING The function is not available partial or full deceleration in order to reduce the E
only available to a limited
extent – When reversing. collision speed or prevent the collision in some
circumstances. F
– If brake lights are defective.
The system supports the driver within the system G
– In the event of a fault in the PSM and if PSM is
limits but cannot prevent an accident under all switched off. Switching Porsche Active Safe on H
circumstances.
– In the event of a malfunction of the airbag con- and off
The driver is ultimately responsible for reacting ap- trol unit. I
propriately to prevent an accident. NOTICE
J
e Drive with extreme care. The function may be restricted or unavailable
e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and – Up to 10 seconds after switching on the ignition. e Switch off Porsche Active Safe in the following K
the vehicle surroundings. – If the seat belts are not fastened. situations:
L
e Always be prepared to take control of the vehicle – On sharp bends. – When towing.
if the system becomes unavailable or does not – When driving on other than public roads. M
– On encountering reflective objects such as crash
function as expected. barriers or entering a tunnel. – When being transported on a car transporter, N
– In heavy rain, snowfall, fog and ice. train or ferry, for example.
O
– In the event of damage to the windshield.
System limitations – If the windshield is dirty. P
Within the system limits, the system can warn e ASSIST e Porsche Active Safe
against impending frontal collisions and initiate the Q
appropriate braking maneuvers.2 Not all road users
Operating principle When Porsche Active Safe is switched off or not
available, a display appears on the instrument
Porsche Active Safe (PAS – Warning assistant and
R
and dangerous situations can be detected correctly cluster.
and in time. BrakeAssist) can in certain dangerous situations ini- S
The side areas of the vehicle and the rear are not tiate measures to protect occupants and other road > Please see chapter "Instrument Cluster" on
users.
T
monitored. page 138.
In complex driving situations, the system may issue Porsche Active Safe has the following functions2: Porsche Active Safe is activated automatically when U
undesired warnings and perform undesired braking – Distance warning (depending on equipment). the ignition is switched on.
V
interventions. – Warning and braking functions.
The system is available from walking speed and can – Preventive occupant protection functions (de- W
react to pedestrians or cyclists up to a speed of pending on equipment). X
Y
1. Availability dependent on country Z
2. Not available in some country versions.
193
A Distance warning Collision warning Through the braking jolt, the system draws attention
If Porsche Active Safe detects a safety hazard due to to the increasing risk of a collision.
B
driving too close to the vehicle in front, the driver will Even with this warning, the driver may still have to
C be warned through the symbol in the instrument swerve or brake sharply in order to avoid a collision.
D cluster1
Automatic braking and braking assistance
Detection can take place within a driving speed
E range from approx. If the driver does not respond to the acute warning
40 mph to 156 mph (65 km/h to 250 km/h). or does not brake sufficiently, the warning assistant
F
and BrakeAssist can assist the driver with braking by
G Setting the distance warning progressively increasing braking force or braking the
vehicle to a standstill.
H
e ASSIST e e Assistance system Additionally, a warning tone is emitted and a symbol
I settings e Porsche Active Safe e Distance appears on the instrument cluster.
warning Reducing the vehicle speed can help to mitigate the
J
consequences of a potential accident.
K
Warning and braking functions1 Information
L The warning and braking functions can be activated
M in three stages. Automatic braking interventions can be aborted with
– Collision warning (visual and acoustic signal). Fig. 143: Collision warning on the instrument cluster the following measures:
N – Acute warning (braking jolt). e Press the brake pedal.
The collision warning warns the driver with a warn-
O – Automatic braking and braking assistance. ing tone and a display in the instrument cluster. e Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
e Actively steer.
P Setting the collision warning
Q The collision warning can be switched off and on. Information
The warning time can also be set.
R
Once the vehicle has reached a standstill, it is not
S e ASSIST e e Assistance system held constantly by the brake system.
settings e Porsche Active Safe e Collision e Actuate the brake as necessary and resume
T warning control of the vehicle.
U
V Acute warning
If the driver does not respond to the collision warn-
W ing, there is a braking jolt in addition to the warning
X tone and the display in the instrument cluster.
Y
Z
1. Not available in some country versions.
194
Preventive occupant protection The seat-belt pretensioner may be damaged follow- A

function ing an accident. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer.
B
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer,
Seat belt system optimization as they have trained technicians and the necessary C
parts and tools.
When driving off, the front seat belts are gently D
In the event of restricted or switched-off PSM func-
tightened in order to ensure an optimal position with
tionality, the preventive occupant protection func- E
regard to the occupants. Activation is performed
tions of the warning assistant and BrakeAssist are
when reaching a driving speed of approx. 20 mph F
deactivated.
(30 km/h) or when the seat belts are fastened again.
G
Preconditioning of the seat belt and passen- H
ger compartment
If a potentially hazardous accident situation is de- I
tected, the warning assistant and BrakeAssist can J
initiate measures to prepare for a possible collision in
order to support the effectiveness of the passive K
occupant protection system. For this purpose, de- L
pending on the situation, the front seat belts are re-
versibly pretensioned, windows are opened and M
(depending on equipment) the roof system is closed N
and the adaptive front seat side bolsters are inflated.
Within the system limits, the preventive occupant O
protection measures can be activated both during P
emergency braking initiated by the driver above a
speed of approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or through an Q
automatic brake intervention initiated by the vehicle.
As soon as the detected collision hazard has passed R
and a stable driving condition is achieved, the pre- S
conditioning measures are ended and existing seat
belt tension is released again. T
U
System limitations
V
In the case of repeated activation (e.g. in the context
of driver safety training), the belt tension increases W
progressively so that it may no longer be possible to
reliably release the belt tensioning. In this case, un- X
fasten and refasten the seat belt or deactivate Por- Y
sche Active Safe.
Z
195
Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
A Porsche Active Suspension Select PASM mode

B Management (PASM)
Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) is
C
a system for the active adjustment of shock ab-
D sorbers. The variable shock absorber system indi-
vidually selects the relevant shock absorber stiffness
E for each wheel depending on the driving situation
F and driving conditions. Driving safety, agility, and
comfort are optimized.
G Two different chassis setups can be selected by
H pressing a button:
– "Normal Chassis"
I
– "Sport Chassis"
J In normal mode, the vehicle is in a comfortable
K sporty setting.
The "Sport Chassis" setting offers a distinctly sporty
L shock absorber setting for use on race circuits, for
M example.
Fig. 144: PASM button on the switch panel
Apart from the manual mode selection, the PASM
N also adjusts the shock absorber setting toward more 1. Switch on ignition.
O sporty or more comfortable depending on the driv- 2. Press button (repeatedly).
ing situation. – The button does not light up red: "Normal
P
Chassis" (standard setting).
Q – The button lights up red: selection of "Sport
Chassis".
R
S Information
T The last selected chassis setting remains effective
U even after the ignition is switched off.
V
Responding to warning message
W
Malfunctions of the PASM are displayed on the in-
X strument cluster.
Y
Z
196
Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
Porsche Communication A
Management (PCM) B
C
Brief overview - PCM
D
This brief overview does not replace the complete
information provided in this section.
E
Safety messages and warnings, in particular, are not F
replaced by this brief overview. G
H
I
J
Fig. 145: Volume control and rotary push button Fig. 146: Areas of the touch display
K
L
Switch on PCM e Switch on the ignition or press volume control A. – M
Switch off PCM e Switch off the ignition or press and hold volume – N
control A.
O
Adjust the volume e Turn volume control A. Mute: Press volume – P
control A briefly.
Q
Operate PCM e Operate the PCM with the rotary push button B. > p. 200
R
Call up and use content from main and submenus e Use menu area C and interaction area E. > p. 199 S
e Use D status area. > p. 200 T

Use context-dependent search function and op-
tions, display connection and status symbol, navi- U
gate back
V
Call up home screen e Select D in the status area. > p. 199 W
e Open and use the Info widget F in all menus. > p. 200
X
Call up and use the Info widget
Y
Z
197

B Configure home screen/Info widget e e Options e Configure Home/Configure > p. 202
C Info Widget
D
Call up Set-up wizard When you start the PCM for the first time, the Set- –
E up wizard is displayed and guides you through im-
portant steps for configuring the PCM.
F
e SET e Set-up wizard
G
H Activate/deactivate Private mode e SET e Porsche Connect e Private mode > p. 206
I > p. 270
Change system and vehicle settings e CAR e CONTROL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
198
Touch display in dashboard A

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Fig. 147: Touch display controls in dashboard
R
A – Main menu C – Home screen D – Back S
> Please see chapter "Opening menus" on Factory set and individually set functions are T
page 200. displayed. E – Context dependent search
Content from different categories can be individually
U
B – Submenu grouped in tiles. A tile contains either a direct jump F – Header with quick selection V
Depending on the setting, the submenu is hidden to the relevant menu or direct access to a function. e.g. display of selected media source. Tap to open
and appears when your hand approaches the touch Several different layouts can be configured. Please the quick selection. W
display. see chapter "Home screen and Info widget" on X
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on page 202.
page 270. Y
Z
199
A G – Options and most important settings for Operating the touch display F – Zoom
each menu item Move two fingers further apart or closer together.
B
Tap the touch display twice to zoom in on a section.
C H – Connection and status symbols
D e.g. display of different functions as well as temper- Operate the PCM with rotary push
ature or time. Tap to open the quick selection.
E button and buttons.
I – Info widget
F
When is opened, the factory set and individually
G set functions are displayed. Swipe vertically to
H change Info widget.
Content from different categories can be individually
I grouped in tiles. A tile contains either a direct jump Fig. 148: Operating the touch display
J to the relevant menu or direct access to a function.

Several different layouts can be configured. Please A – Tap (select)
K see chapter "Home screen and Info widget" on Briefly press the touch display with your finger. Ex-
ample: select function or activate/deactivate Fig. 149: Operating the rotary push button
L page 202.
checkbox. e Turn the rotary push button A until the desired
M
Important information for users function is highlighted.
N
B – Long press e Press the rotary push button A to activate the
The Porsche Communication Management system
Press the touch display with your finger for longer. highlighted function.
(PCM) is the central control unit. To protect the
O
battery, the PCM switches off automatically a few
Example: Save station as a favorite in the Media e Using button B, jump back one level.
P minutes after the ignition is switched off.
main menu. e Using button OPT C, call up most important set-
For safety reasons, some functions are only available tings for each menu item.
Q C – Horizontal swipe
when the vehicle is stationary.
R Configuring settings and
Swipe the touch display horizontally with your finger. Opening menus
WARNING Example: Scroll favorites horizontally.
S operating while driving Open main menu
D – Vertical swipe (scroll and switch)
T Configuring settings and operating the multifunction e Select menu (e.g. NAV ) in the touch display.
Swipe over the touch display vertically with one fin-
U steering wheel, infotainment system, etc. while
ger. Example: search through lists manually or Calling up submenu
driving can distract you from the traffic. You may switch the Info widget.
V lose control of the vehicle.
e Select menu item (e.g. MAP ) in the touch
W e Only operate these components while driving if E – Vertical swipe (scroll) display.
the traffic situation allows. Swipe the touch display vertically using two fingers
X
e If in doubt, stop in a safe place and only carry out to tilt the map in the Navigation main menu. Opening settings for each menu item
Y extensive operations and settings while the ve- b Desired menu is selected.
hicle is at a standstill.
Z e Select options .
200
Settings and further functions of the relevant Entry via the rotary push button A
menu are displayed. 1. Turn rotary push button (Fig. 149) until the de- B
sired letter or character is highlighted.
C
Setting display of time or 2. Press rotary push button to apply the highlighted
letter or character.
temperature D
3. Use the button to jump from character
input to results list. E
e Select Time or Temperature in the head-
4. Use the button to jump from the results F
line to adapt the display.
list to the input field.
To adjust the PCM and the display brightness: G
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on Entry via freehand writing H
page 270. Fig. 150: Touch display keyboard Entry via freehand writing
I
The freehand writing feature has handwriting rec-
Entering text and characters A
B
Current cursor position
Change between letters, numbers and special ognition and enables you to write text and charac- J
As soon as text or characters need to be entered, an characters ters directly with your finger.
K
input field appears, e.g. for entering a destination or C Show and hide the keyboard
search term. D Freehand entry (enter letters or characters using the L
touch display)
You can set the keyboard language in the PCM. M
F Insert space
G Confirm entry
H Delete entry N
I Results list
O
J Voice input
K Integrated search (search in PCM memory and online P
content)
L Online search (availability dependent on country)
Fig. 151: Freehand writing
Q
There are various options for entering text and R
characters: 1. Select to open the freehand text field.
S
2. Write the desired characters with your finger.
Entry via the keyboard T
3. To enter a space, swipe your finger from left to
1. Select input field. right. U
The touch display keyboard appears. V
4. To delete an entry, swipe your finger from right
2. Enter desired text or characters. to left. W
3. Press the desired letters for longer to enter ac-
Entry via voice control X
cents umlauts etc.
A window then opens containing accents, um- Text and numbers can also be entered using voice Y
lauts etc. for these letters. control (e.g. for dialing a phone number or entering a
Z
navigation destination).
201
A > Please see chapter "Voice Control" on page 272. Configuring Info widget not available on the medium in question, an
available Internet database is used. Nonetheless,
B e Options e Configure Info Widget
Home screen and Info widget 1. in certain cases it may not be possible to display
C the individual additional information.
2. Select, hold and move the desired category into
any tile in the left-hand layout via drag & drop. – Do not use USB extension cables or adapters.
D These impairing the functionality.
E 3. Swipe in the tile to select the desired contents. – USB hubs are not supported.
4. If you wish to remove a tile from the left-hand – Porsche will not assume any liability for damaged
F
layout, move the relevant tile upwards using or lost files or media.
G drag & drop or replace it with another tile. Technical data on supported media and file formats:
H The Info widget layout can be changed under Switch > Please see chapter "Porsche Communication
layout. Management (PCM)" on page 197.
I
Fig. 152: Configuring Home screen
J Information Interfaces
Configuring Home screen
K A tile can also be moved to any other tile (drag & Using interfaces in the armrest
L 1. e Options e Configure Home drop).
M 2. Select, hold and move the desired category into
any tile in the left-hand layout via drag & drop. Deleting a tile in Info widget
N
3. Swipe in the tile to select the desired contents. e e Options e Configure Info Widget e
O
4. If you wish to remove a tile from the left-hand Options e Activate delete mode
P layout, move the relevant tile upwards using
Q drag & drop or replace it with another tile.
Calling up Manual in PCM
The Home screen layout can be changed under
R b Vehicle is stationary. Fig. 153: Interfaces in the armrest
Switch layout.
S e CAR e CONTROL e Manual A SIM card reader
Information B SD card reader
T C USB ports (type A)
U A tile can also be moved to any other tile (drag & Notes on interfaces and externally
drop).
V connected devices
– If a storage device contains a large number of
W Deleting a tile in Home screen files, folders or playlists, it may take longer to
X load media tracks for the first time.
e e Options e Activate delete mode
– During playback, audio files are automatically
Y
displayed with additional saved information (e.g.,
Z artist, track, album cover). If this information is
202
Inserting an SD card A
NOTICE B
C
Risk of damage to the PCM due to incorrect use of
D
SD cards.
If you are using SD multi-component cards, there is E
a risk of the SD card falling out of the adapter due to F
vibration, so that the individual components of the
card may remain stuck in the SD card reader. G
e Only use single-component SD cards. H
1. Insert SD card B into the SD card reader with the I
printed side facing upward until it engages. J
2. Under MEDIA e PLAY e (in the head-
K
er) select media source.
L
Removing an SD card
M
e Press on the inserted SD card and remove it.
N
Connecting an external device via USB
O
1. Open the armrest.
2. Connect an external device (e.g. iPod, USB stor- P
age medium) to the USB port (type A) C. Q
3. Under MEDIA e PLAY e (in the head-
er) select media source. R
4. Adjust the volume on the external device and on S
the PCM as required.
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
203
Porsche Connect
A Porsche Connect Information about the booked data package is b. Select Store PIN.
Various use options are available depending on displayed in some markets.
B 3. Confirm the prompt for establishing the data
model, country and equipment. The features de- connection.
C scribed here are therefore not available in all models,
countries and equipment versions.
Establishing data connection via The data connection is established.
D external SIM card 4. To remove the external SIM card, press on the
Depending on the country, the data connection can
E be established using the integrated SIM card, an ex- An inserted external SIM card deactivates the func- inserted card and remove.
ternal SIM card or an external WiFi hotspot. The tion of the embedded SIM card (availability depend-
F
currently active data connection is displayed in the ent on country). Additional costs may be incurred for
Information
G status line of the PCM and in the Device Manager. the data connection (e.g. due to data roaming).
> Please see chapter "Porsche Communication If a data connection cannot be established, check
H NOTICE
Management (PCM)" on page 197. the following:
I > Please see chapter "Device Manager" on – PCM phone is switched on.
page 111. If you are using a SIM card adapter, the SIM card – External SIM card has sufficient data volume and
J may fall out of the adapter due to vibrations and is inserted correctly.
K Establishing data connection via components of the card may get stuck in the drive. – External SIM card is not damaged and is working
e Do not use a SIM card adapter. properly.
L integrated SIM card (availability – APN settings (Internet access) are correct. The
M dependent on country) APN settings can be checked by contacting the
b There is no SIM card in the SIM card reader. network provider.
N
b PCM phone switched on (SET e Porsche – In foreign countries: Data roaming is allowed on
O Connect e Turn on phone features). the external SIM card and enabled in the PCM.
P The data connection is established immediately – The vehicle is in an area with sufficient network
when the ignition is switched on. reception (not a coverage blackspot).
Q e Restart the PCM if necessary.
R Information
Fig. 154: SIM card in the armrest
S If a data connection cannot be established, check Selecting access point for external SIM card
the following: b PCM phone switched on (SET e Porsche If several access points are available, the message
T
– PCM phone is switched on. Connect e Turn on phone features). Several access points (APN) are available. Please
U – The vehicle is in an area with sufficient network 1. Insert external SIM card B (mini SIM, dimen- select one appears. A list of available access points
reception (not a coverage blackspot). sions: 0.98 x 0.59 in. (25 x 15 mm)). The (APNs) is displayed.
V
e Restart the PCM if necessary. missing corner must be pointing front left with 1. Select the desired access point (APN).
W the chip facing down.
2. If there is no access point configured, you
X Displaying data packages 2. SIM card with PIN: should contact the service provider to obtain
Y a. Enter the PIN for the external SIM card and the APN settings. To configure the APN set-
e APPS e Data packages confirm with OK.
Z tings, in the header or (depending on
204
Porsche Connect
the connection status) select e Options e 1. In the header or (depending on con- – Real-time traffic provides information on acci- A
Data Connections e Reset access point nection status) select e Options e Vehicle dents, road works, traffic flow information and
configuration. other incidents from the Internet. B
hotspot.
The WiFi access data of the PCM (device name – Dictate online language search as well as C
messages.
Establishing data connection via and WiFi password) are displayed. D
external WiFi hotspot (availability 2. Enter the WiFi access data of the PCM in the Using services in the APPS menu E
device WiFi settings.
dependent on country) e Select APPS . F
A connection is established to the PCM's wire-
b There is no SIM card in the SIM card reader.
less Internet access. Available services are displayed. G
b Vehicles with embedded SIM card (availability
dependent on country): PCM phone switched off H
(SET e Porsche Connect e Turn off phone Using Porsche Connect Logging Porsche Connect user (Porsche ID)
into the PCM I
features). A data connection is required in order to use Porsche
Connect services. The Porsche ID is linked to the PCM using a pairing J
1. Select or in the header (depending on > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on code. This is required for using some Connect serv-
ices in order to retrieve personal settings from My K
the connection status) e Options e WiFi e page 204.
Porsche. L
Search for WiFi Hotspot
2. Select a WiFi hotspot (e.g. public hotspot or the Information 1. APPS e Options e Porsche ID settings e M
cellphone’s personal hotspot) and enter WiFi Link new Porsche ID
Further information about Porsche Connect (Help N
access data in the PCM. Be aware of upper and videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and 2. Enter the pairing code that is displayed under
lower case when entering the data. Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por- My Porsche after successful activation of the O
A connection is established to the external WiFi sche.com/connect.. services. P
hotspot. User is logged in and the symbol appears in
the header. Q
Activating Porsche Connect services
Activating the PCM WiFi hotspot Activation is required before using Porsche Connect
R
(wireless Internet access) services for the first time.
Managing Porsche Connect user (Porsche ID) S
in the PCM
Up to eight WiFi devices can be connected to the e Activate Porsche Connect services at www.por- T
vehicle hotspot. sche.com/connect. b A Porsche Connect user has been created and
b Data connection is successfully established via logged in. U
the integrated SIM card or external SIM card. Using services in the navigation system and
e APPS e Options e Porsche ID Settings V
b Data connection via integrated SIM card (avail- voice control system
e Select desired action: W
ability dependent on country): corresponding – Online search when entering navigation destina-
data package is booked. tions and loading Portal List POIs or other point – Link ID X
of interest categories from My Porsche. – Remove
– Additional map display. – Settings Y
Z
205
Porsche Connect
A – Log out Porsche ID: The currently logged in user Changing Porsche Connect e Please inform all persons using the vehicle that
B
is logged out. settings communication may be disabled.
C Displaying service overview e SET e Porsche Connect e Select the de-

sired setting:
D e APPS e Options e Service information
E Information about the services purchased and – Porsche ID settings
the contract duration is displayed. – Remote access authorization: Prerequisite for
F using service control programs (My Porsche,
G Porsche Connect App or Porsche Car Connect
Using Porsche apps
App (availability depends on the country)) and to
H > Please see chapter "Apps" on page 64. activate private mode.
I – Activate or deactivate private mode for all serv-
Information ices or for individual services.
J Please see chapter "Private mode" on page 206.
– The Porsche Connect services (including the Car
K – Turn on phone features/Turn off phone
Connect services, but not the Safety and Secur-
features: Switch PCM phone on or off.
ity services) offer a free inclusive period, which
L
varies in length for each services package and
M country, but is always at least 3 months. Further Private mode
information about the free inclusive periods as When private mode is active, communication be-
N well as subsequent costs and information about tween the vehicle and Porsche Connect App as well
O the availability of individual services for your as My Porsche is suppressed. No vehicle-specific
country is available online at www.porsche.com/ information is transmitted. This means that no ve-
P connect or from your authorized Porsche dealer. hicle settings can be configured using the app or My
Q – Depending on the country, the Porsche Connect Porsche.
services can be used via the embedded SIM card
R Activating private mode
or a data-enabled external SIM card. A separate,
S fee-based contract with a cellphone service b Remote access authorization granted (SET e
provider is required for the external SIM card. Porsche Connect e Remote access
T – Additional costs may be incurred for receiving authorization).
U data from the Internet, depending on the cell-
e SET e Porsche Connect e Private mode
phone rate plan, particularly when the system is
V used in foreign countries. We recommend a data > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect App" on
W flat rate. page 64.
– Service availability and scope, as well as service If there is no active contract for the vehicle, the Por-
X providers, may vary from country to country, sche Connect menu item is grayed out. Despite ac-
Y model year, device and tariff. tivated private mode, location information for the
vehicle can be transmitted in the event of a break-
Z down or emergency call as well as theft.
206
Porsche InnoDrive (PID)
Porsche InnoDrive (PID)1 can therefore lead to undesired driving situations. A

The vehicle can accelerate to the set speed when B
General safety instructions driving in areas with road construction.
e Do not use the system in heavy traffic, where C
Lack of attention
WARNING there is road construction and in built-up areas. D
e When making turns and taking exits with the
The increased comfort offered by the system should system activated, use the turn signal in a timely
E
not induce you to risk your safety. The driver remains manner, be especially careful and take over con- F
responsible when driving, such as by keeping a safe trol of the vehicle if needed.
distance or driving at an appropriate speed, even G
when the system is activated. The system cannot Covered front camera or H
WARNING
replace the driver's attentiveness. radar sensor
I
e Drive with extreme care. Covering the front camera or radar sensor can impair
e If the system-induced deceleration is insuffi- the function of the system or prevent it from
J
cient, slow the vehicle down immediately using working. K
the footbrake.
e Always keep the radar sensor and camera area A
e Make sure that you can take control of the ve- Fig. 155: Radar sensor position L
on the rearview mirror free of dirt, ice and snow.
hicle at any time.
e Do not cover the camera area on rearview mirror M
Unsafe traffic situation A with objects (e.g. stickers). N
WARNING
O
conditions
P
If the prevailing situation does not allow you to drive
safely at a sufficient distance and constant speed, Q
using the system can cause accidents.
R
The system assists the driver when making turns Fig. 156: Windshield camera
and taking exits. Especially unfavorable conditions S
Radiofrequency Radia-
WARNING T
tion Exposure
U
This equipment complies with the specified FCC ra-
diation exposure limits for an uncontrolled environ- V
ment. This equipment should be installed and
W
operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm)
X
Y
Z
207
A between the radiator and your body. Foot on the accelerator The system is switched
WARNING WARNING
off.
B e This transmitter must not be co-located or op-
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or The system does not brake automatically when your The system is shut off when the following conditions
C transmitter. foot is on the accelerator pedal. Placing the foot on occur:
D the accelerator pedal may override the cruise and – PSM is deactivated.
Damage to the radar distance control.
WARNING – The driver’s door is open.
E sensor and camera
e Take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the – The driver’s seatbelt is open.
F Shocks or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or system is activated. – Drive position N or R is selected.
G underbody, such as through parking collisions, can – The parking lock is activated.
displace the sensors. Stone damage in the area of Braking behavior at Stop – When driving on private lanes or field tracks or in
WARNING
H the camera on the rearview mirror can impair the and Yield signs traffic-calmed streets (e.g. play streets).
I camera view. This can adversely affect the system. – In the case of an ambiguous vehicle position.
The system assists the driver when approaching
e Go to an qualified specialized repair shop. Por- Stop and Yield signs as long as these traffic signs are – In a country which is not enabled.
J sche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, stored in the navigation data. The vehicle will only be – With a speed limit below 20 mph (30 km/h).
K as they have trained technicians and the neces- slowed but not be braked to a standstill. e Take over control of the vehicle in this case.
sary parts and tools.
L e When approaching a Stop sign and if required by
Support on turn-offs and the traffic situation, brake the vehicle independ- Information
M WARNING
highway exits ently to a standstill when approaching a Yield
N sign. Porsche InnoDrive offers assisted driving. It is the
responsibility of the driver at all times to monitor the
O The system assists the driver when making turns
Recognizing traffic lights system, assess the traffic situation and intervene if
and taking exits. Particularly unfavorable conditions WARNING
P necessary. In some cases, the system automatically
can therefore lead to undesired driving situations.
determines that driver intervention is necessary. In
Q e When making turns and taking exits with the The system does not recognize traffic lights. such cases, an appropriate message appears in the
R
system activated, be especially careful and take e Take over control of the vehicle at traffic lights instrument cluster.
over control of the vehicle if necessary. that require braking and stopping of the vehicle.
S
T WARNING
Driving in areas with
WARNING
Inadequate braking System limitations
roadworks power during automatic
Unfavorable road condi-
U The vehicle can accelerate to the set speed when braking WARNING
tions and poor weather
V driving in areas with roadworks. conditions
If braking assistance is required on the part of the
W e Switch off the system temporarily when driving driver, a warning signal sounds and a warning mes- Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain, snow,
in areas with roadworks. sage appears on the instrument cluster. In this case,
X ice, fog, loose gravel or spray. Vehicles up ahead may
the system braking power will be insufficient to not be adequately detected, or may not be detected
Y prevent a collision.
Z e Brake immediately in such cases.
208
at all. Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and Vehicles entering and exiting curves and sta- A
Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, crash bar- out and narrow vehicles tionary vehicles
B
riers or tunnel entrances may impair the functional-
ity of the radar sensor. A message indicating that the C
system is not available appears on the instrument D
cluster.
e Do not use the system under such conditions.
E
F
Undetected vehicles or
WARNING G
objects
H
The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped
area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or I
objects may not be detected in time or cannot be J
detected in the following situations:
– Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out K
– Vehicles with a small cross-section or narrow L
vehicles
– Vehicles entering and exiting curves M
– Stationary vehicles Fig. 157: Vehicles driving erratically or weaving in and out Fig. 158: Vehicles entering and exiting curves (C) and sta- N
– Vehicles with large projecting loads (A) and narrow vehicles (B) tionary vehicles (D)
O
– Pedestrians, cyclists and animals Vehicles will only be detected if they are traveling Vehicles entering and exiting curves may not be de-
– Objects on the road entirely in the same lane and within the detection tected or may not be detected in time or the radar P
– Oncoming vehicles and cross-traffic range of the sensors. sensor may react to vehicles in adjacent lanes. Q
e Intervene and brake yourself if necessary. A stationary vehicle or obstacle that suddenly ap-
e Drive with extreme care and always pay attention pears in the radar sensor's range, such as after a ve- R
to the traffic conditions and vehicle hicle ahead changes lanes or at the end of a traffic S
surroundings. jam, may only be detected to a limited extent by
adaptive cruise control. T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
209
A Vehicles with large projecting loads braking until your vehicle is stationary and starts Speed limits detected in advance are displayed on
driving again automatically as soon as the vehicle in the instrument cluster, and the speed of the vehicle
B front drives off again. A detected vehicle and the fact is reduced in good time. If a speed limit is not de-
C that the vehicle has started driving again will be in- tected in advance, the speed is not reduced until the
dicated on the instrument cluster. vehicle is driving past the detected traffic sign.
D Consideration of speed limits is active automatically
E In bends when PID is activated.
Navigation data and vehicle information is used to
F adapt the speed to the road ahead. At Stop and Yield signs
G Tight bends detected in advance are displayed on When approaching Stop and Yield signs, a message
the instrument cluster and the speed of the vehicle appears on the instrument cluster and the speed is
H Fig. 159: Vehicles with large projecting loads
is reduced in good time. The speed calculated for the reduced if the traffic signs are stored in the naviga-
I In the case of vehicles ahead with long projecting bend is also indicated by the speed prediction sys- tion data. It is up to the driver, however, to brake the
loads (e.g. a lumber truck), the radar sensor may not tem. If no bend ahead warning is displayed, the vehicle to a standstill.
J detect the end of the vehicle or may detect the end speed will only be reduced slightly or will not be re- If the driver accidentally continues driving at a Stop
of the vehicle incorrectly. duced at all. Vehicle handling in bends is also influ- sign, PID switches to passive mode and can be acti-
K
enced by the selected drive mode. vated again afterward by the driver.
L Responding to warning symbols If the driver continues driving at a Yield sign, PID re-
M Always heed any warning and information messages At rotary intersections, junctions and on up- mains active, passes the Yield sign at a reduced
displayed in the vehicle. hill and downhill slopes speed and accelerates again to the previously set
N > Please see chapter "Warning and Information When navigation is active or when the driver indi- speed as soon as the traffic situation allows it. The
Messages" on page 280. cates in good time, PID reduces the speed before the previously set speed can be resumed again immedi-
O
vehicle starts to change direction. A corresponding ately by pressing RESUME.
P Operating principle display appears on the instrument cluster.
Q Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is a driver assistance sys-
tem that assists the driver when driving on well- Information
R surfaced country roads and highways.
When route guidance is active in the navigation
S Using navigation data as well as data from radars
and cameras, PID detects both the area directly system, PID always orients itself according to the
T around the vehicle and the route ahead, determines proposed route. If route guidance is not active, it
the best possible driving strategy in advance and adapts to the most plausible route.
U
adapts the speed accordingly.
V PID can assist the driver in the following situations: On roads with speed limits
W PID uses navigation data and data from cameras
Vehicle driving ahead
X (traffic sign recognition) to automatically detect the
If a vehicle was detected ahead, PID brakes if the speed limit within the system limits and changes the
Y vehicle is driving slower than the set desired speed
desired speed accordingly.
and keeps the distance from the vehicle ahead con-
Z stant in the preselected range. PID can continue
210
Controls Display elements Symbol Meaning A

B
PID is active with the desired speed
set. C
D
PID is active. A speed limit was de- E

tected ahead or the set desired speed F
has not yet been reached.
G
A vehicle was detected ahead while H
the desired speed was set. A vehicle
I
symbol is displayed instead of the
speedometer symbol. J
K
Operating modes L
Passive M
Fig. 160: Control lever for driver assistance systems Fig. 161: PID display
R Switch driver assistance systems on/off and open op- This status is active after switching on, when PID is N
A Own speed
tions menu active after pressing the brake pedal and after
B Event up ahead: Display on the speedometer and via O
S Open options menu (when driver assistance system is symbols (or one of the symbols) pressing down the control lever (CANCEL).
switched on) C Set speed – The status display is gray. P
1 Set/increase the desired speed D Status display – There is no control. Q
2 Reduce the desired speed
3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed/confirm speed – The stored speed setting and the selected dis-
limit Status display symbols tance are retained. R
4 CANCEL: Interrupt control
S
Symbol Meaning Active
This status is active after setting the desired speed, T
PID is passive. after resuming control (RESUME) and after tempo- U
rarily overriding control by pressing the accelerator
pedal. V
– The status display is green or blue. W
PID is passive with the desired speed – Speed and distance to the vehicle ahead are
regulated in line with the detected speed limit (if X
set.
activated) and the road features. Y
Z
211
A Temporarily passive Information Information

B This status is active while pressing the accelerator
pedal when PID is active. An activated driver assistance system will be acti- – Speed limits are only considered when PID is
C – A message indicating that PID is passive appears vated again even after switching off and restoring activated.
in the instrument cluster. operational readiness. – On roads with no speed limit, the set maximum
D speed is used.
– The status display is gray.
E – There is no control. Switching off PID – The driver assistance system can be switched
F – The stored target speed and the selected target e Press button R on the control lever. using the S button even when the system is ac-
The set desired speed is deleted. tive. The newly selected system is in passive
distance are retained.
G mode after you switch systems.
– Control becomes active again when the acceler- The desired distance is stored.
H ator pedal is released.
I
Activating PID Changing the desired speed
Switching PID on and off b PID switched on. The set desired speed or the recognized speed limit
J The system that was selected last is always can be changed by pressing the control lever.
Setting the current driving speed as the desired
K switched on. The system is initially in passive mode speed b PID is active.
when switched on. It must first be activated before
L 1. Accelerate to the desired speed using the accel- Increasing the speed
the control function will start working.
erator pedal. e Press the control lever forward (position 1).
M Switching on PID 2. Briefly press the control lever forward (position – Brief press = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments
N b A driver assistance system is not yet switched 1) and release the accelerator pedal. – Press and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h)
on. PID is active. The current driving speed is set as the increments
O 1. Press button R on the control lever. desired speed in the status display and is automati-
cally maintained unless a slower vehicle is detected Reducing the speed
P The options menu for the driver assistance sys-
tems appears on the instrument cluster. ahead. e Pull the control lever (position 2).
Q – Brief pull = 1 mph (1 km/h) increments
2. If PID is not already selected, select PID using Setting the detected speed limit as the desired – Pull and hold = 5 mph (10 km/h) increments
R the rotary push button on the steering wheel and speed
press to confirm.
S b Consider speed limits activated. Resetting the changed desired speed to the
PID is switched on and passive.
e Press the control lever upward (RESUME) and detected speed limit
T Switching from an already activated driver assis- release the accelerator pedal. e Briefly press the control lever up (RESUME).
U tance system to PID PID is active. The currently detected speed limit The currently detected speed limit is confirmed.
1. Press button S on the control lever. is set as the desired speed in the status display
V The options menu for the driver assistance sys- and is automatically maintained unless a slower Discarding an automatically accepted speed
W tems appears on the instrument cluster. vehicle is detected ahead. limit
2. Select PID using the rotary push button on the e Long-press the control lever up for longer
X steering wheel and press to confirm. (RESUME).
Y PID is switched on and passive. The set speed limit is discarded and the previ-
ously set desired speed is retained.
Z
212
Changing the desired distance The set speed limit is displayed in blue in the Consider speed limits activated A
> Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control status display.
B
(ACC)" on page 43.
Setting the maximum speed C
Overriding speed and distance On roads with no speed limit or if no speed limit has D
control temporarily been detected, the maximum preset speed is used
E
as the desired speed. If a speed limit is detected, the
> Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control
following applies: F
(ACC)" on page 43.
– If the maximum speed is above the speed limit,
the speed limit is adopted as the new desired G
Interrupting and resuming speed speed. H
and distance control – If the maximum speed is below the speed limit,
I
> Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control the maximum speed is adopted as the new de-
(ACC)" on page 43. sired speed. J
Setting the maximum speed K
Braking to a standstill and driving
e ASSIST e e Assistance system L
off again settings e Porsche InnoDrive e Max speed
> Please see chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control M
The set maximum speed remains active until it is Fig. 162: Example of driving with Consider speed limits
(ACC)" on page 43. N
activated
reset, even with a change of driver or when the ve-
hicle is restarted. O
Activating and deactivating con- A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de-
tected speed limit of 60 mph (100 km/h).
sideration of speed limits Additional information P
The driver sets the desired speed Q
e ASSIST e e Assistance system B
Example of how Porsche InnoDrive works
settings e Porsche InnoDrive e Consider speed
3 mph (5 km/h) higher based on the de-
R
limits The example below compares two scenarios when tected speed limit. The vehicle regulates the
driving into a city with a 30 mph (50 km/h) speed speed to 63 mph (105 km/h). S
limit - one scenario with consideration of speed lim- T
Manually considering a detected speed limit its activated and the other with consideration of
If the Consider speed limits function is deactivated, speed limits deactivated. U
PID still displays detected events such as bends, in-
clines and vehicles driving ahead. A detected speed
V
limit can be accepted manually by the driver. W
b Consider speed limits deactivated.
X
b The speed limit is detected and appears gray in
the status display. Y
e Press the control lever up (RESUME).
Z
213
A C An imminent speed limit of A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de-
B 30 mph (50 km/h) has been detected (e.g. sired speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) set by
boundary to a built-up area). The vehicle the driver.
C progressively reduces the speed until it rea-
ches the built-up area boundary. B The driver sets the desired speed higher by
D
3 mph (5 km/h). The vehicle regulates the
The detected speed limit is displayed in
E blue.
speed to 63 mph (105 km/h).
F
D When the built-up area boundary is reached, C After driving past a 30 mph (50 km/h)
G PID regulates the speed to the new speed speed limit sign, the vehicle regulates the
limit of 30 mph (50 km/h). speed to the desired speed of
H
63 mph (105 km/h) set by the driver.
I While regulating to the new speed limit, the
Consider speed limits deactivated speed limit of 30 mph (50 km/h) is dis-
J
played in gray on the instrument cluster.
K
L D The driver acknowledges the currently de-
tected speed limit of 30 mph (50 km/h) by
M pressing up the control lever (RESUME). The
N vehicle regulates the speed to
30 mph (50 km/h) and the set desired
O speed appears green in the status display.
P If the speed is set again before reaching the
traffic sign, the set desired speed will be
Q
displayed in blue.
R
S
T
U
V Fig. 163: Example of driving with Consider speed limits
deactivated
W
X
Y
Z
214
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
Porsche Stability Automatic brake differential (ABD) The PSM OFF warning light on the instrument A
Management (PSM) If one wheel on a driven axle starts to spin, it is cluster lights up. The button lights up red.
A message stating that PSM Sport is activated
B
braked so that the other wheel on the same axle can
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is an active
be driven. appears on the instrument cluster. C
control system which helps to stabilize the vehicle in
extreme driving situations. It is automatically en- D
abled when the engine starts. PSM makes use of the
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Switching off PSM
automatic brake differential (ABD) and the anti-slip Anti-slip regulation prevents wheels from spinning E
regulation (ASR) as well as the functions of the anti- through targeted adjustment of engine power, F
lock braking system (ABS) and the engine drag tor- thereby ensuring good lane-holding and stable
que control (EDC). handling. G
Loss of control over the H
WARNING Engine drag torque control (EDC)
vehicle I
In the event of excessive slip, engine drag torque
The PSM cannot reduce the risk of accidents due to control prevents all the driven wheels from locking J
inappropriate speed. up during overrun. This also applies to downshifts on
slippery road surfaces. K
The increased safety that is provided should not in-
duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The L
Steering torque pulse
limits set by the laws of driving physics cannot be
Steering torque pulse provides the driver with M
overridden by PSM.
steering assistance when braking on roads with
e Despite the advantages of PSM, drivers remain varying friction levels.
N
responsible for adapting their driving style and Additional steering forces also assist the driver dur- O
maneuvers to the road and weather conditions, ing countersteering.
as well as the traffic situation. P
PSM Activating Sport Fig. 164: PSM OFF button on the switch panel Q
The events below inform the driver of the PSM con-
trol operations: b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package WARNING
Absent PSM support R
– PSM warning light on the instrument cluster In sport PSM mode, the system operates in a par-
S
flashes. ticularly sporty mode. When PSM is switched off, the support provided by
– Hydraulic noises are audible. Restricted PSM support PSM is absent in critical driving situations outside
T
WARNING
– Vehicle decelerations and modification of steer- the ABS control range. U
ing wheel forces through targeted brake
In PSM Sport mode, the support provided by PSM is e Always leave PSM switched on during "normal" V
intervention. driving operation.
– Engine power is reduced. restricted in critical driving situations outside the
W
e Press button briefly (vehicles with Sport Chro-
ABS control range.
– Pulsing brake pedal and changes in brake pedal
position when braking. To achieve full vehicle e Always leave PSM Sport switched off during no package: Press button for at least X
deceleration, the foot pressure must be in- "normal" driving operation. two seconds). Y
creased after the brake pedal starts to pulse. PSM is switched off after a brief delay.
e Press button briefly. Z
215
A The PSM OFF warning light on the instrument ABS brake system (anti-lock The driver is warned to adapt the driving speed to
B
cluster lights up. The button lights up red. braking system) the road conditions by a pulsing brake pedal and a
A warning that PSM is switched off appears on "juddering noise".
C the instrument cluster. Loss of control over the If full braking is necessary:
WARNING
vehicle e Fully depress the brake pedal during the entire
D
Information The ABS cannot reduce the risk of accidents due to braking operation, despite the pulsing pedal. Do
E inappropriate speed. not reduce the braking pressure.
When braking in the ABS control range, the vehicle is
F stabilized even when PSM is switched off. One-sided The increased safety that is provided should not in- Responding to warning message
spinning of the wheels is prevented even when PSM duce you to take greater risks with your safety. The
G ABS warning light USA
is switched off. limits set by the laws of driving physics cannot be
H overridden by ABS. ABS warning light Canada
I
However, in exceptional situations it can be advan- e Despite the advantages of ABS, drivers remain
tageous to temporarily switch off PSM: For information on the ABS warning light:
responsible for adapting their driving style and
J – On loose ground and deep snow. > Please see chapter "Warning and Information
maneuvers to the road and weather conditions,
– When "rocking the vehicle free". Messages" on page 280.
K as well as the traffic situation.
If the slide/tilt sunroof is open and PSM is disabled,
L PSM is switched on again when a speed of approx. ABS ensures: Multi-collision braking
100 mph (160 km/h) is reached. – Full steering control: Vehicle remains steerable. During an accident, multi-collision braking can help
M
– Good driving stability: No skidding due to locked the driver reduce the risk of skidding and further
N wheels. collisions during the accident through automatically
Information
– Optimal braking distance: Shortening of braking initiated braking.
O
When PSM Sport mode is active, it is only possible distance in most cases.
P to switch to PSM OFF mode if PSM was activated – Prevention of wheel locking: No flat spots on the Prerequisites
Q beforehand. tires. Multi-collision braking works exclusively:
– During front, side, and rear-end collisions.
R Function – When the airbag control unit detects an appro-
S Switching PSM on again The decisive advantage of ABS lies in the driving priate activation threshold during an accident.
e Press button . stability and maneuverability of the vehicle in haz- – During an accident at a driving speed above ap-
T The PSM is immediately active. ardous situations. prox. 6 mph (10 km/h).
U ABS prevents the wheels from locking during full
The PSM OFF warning light in the instrument
braking on virtually all road surfaces until just before Information
V cluster and the red illumination of the button
the vehicle comes to a standstill.
go out.
W ABS begins to take control as soon as one wheel The vehicle is braked automatically by the PSM sys-
A message that PSM is switched on appears in tem, provided the hydraulic brake system, PSM and
shows a tendency to lock.
X the instrument cluster. the electrical system remain undamaged and opera-
The controlled braking process is comparable to ca-
dence braking in very rapid succession. tional during the accident.
Y
Z
216
Exceptions A
The following activities prevent automatic braking in B
the event of an accident:
– When the driver significantly depresses the ac- C
celerator pedal. D
– When the braking pressure exerted by the driver
on the brake pedal is stronger than the brake E
pressure applied by the system. F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
217
Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)
A Porsche Vehicle Tracking The following alarms can be set: Operating PVTS without Driver
B System (PVTS) – Unauthorized movement of the vehicle: The ve-
hicle is moved with the ignition switched off. On
Card
PVTS is a GSM/GPS-based tracking system that al- When PVTS is operated normally, no intervention on
C vehicles with Driver Card: The vehicle is moved
your part is required.
lows a Security Operating Center (SOC) to locate the
without a Driver Card.
D vehicle if it is stolen. It can then be found by the
– Sabotage: PVTS was used without authorization.
E
authorities.
– Intrusion alarm: The alarm system was triggered
Transport
and has been active for more than 15 seconds. If a vehicle is transported with the ignition switched
F Information off (e.g. on a ferry), activate transport mode.
G On vehicles with the smartphone app or Car Connect Information If the vehicle is not transported in transport mode,
(depending on country), certain settings can be im- the system may trigger a false alarm, which is also
H – There is no guarantee that a theft will be de- subject to charge (further information is available at
plemented directly using the app.
I tected under all circumstances. www.porsche.com/connect).
Detailed information on installation, the functions
and management of the contract can be found at: – The PVTS alarm can be triggered even if the ve-
J hicle battery is flat. Activating and deactivating transport mode
www.porsche.com/connect.
K e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC)
before transporting the vehicle and when you
L Information
Scope of supply and initial have finished transporting the vehicle.
– or –
M Note for Belgium / Luxembourg:
activation e Via the Porsche Connect smartphone app, Car
N If the Driver Card remains in the shut-off vehicle for
PVTS is tested by the authorized Porsche dealer and Connect (depending on country) or at www.por-
more than 30 minutes, it will become invalid. In or-
O activated together with the vehicle owner. sche.com/connect before transporting the ve-
der to reactivate the card, the disarming mode must
After activation, the vehicle owner will receive im- be accessed via the app, customer portal, or Service hicle and when transporting has ended.
P portant documents such as the phone number of the Operating Center (SOC).
Q local Security Operating Center (SOC) and your Service
service provider.
PVTS Plus must be set to service mode in the fol-
R Detailed activation information is available from Information
lowing situations:
S www.porsche.com/connect or from an authorized
– The Security Operating Center (SOC) can pre- – During customer service (e.g. for regular
Porsche dealer.
T vent the engine from starting if the vehicle has servicing).
been stolen. – When the vehicle battery is disconnected.
U Functions – On vehicles with Porsche Connect or Car If the vehicle is not serviced in service mode, the
The vehicle will only be located in the event of theft. Connect smartphone app (depending on coun-
V system may trigger a false alarm that you will be
In this event, a notification is sent to the cellphone try), access to the vehicle using the app or via My billed for (for further information, please visit www.
W number provided. For security reasons, the position Porsche is blocked in the event of theft. porsche.com/connect).
of the vehicle is not communicated in the
X notification.
Y e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC) if
your vehicle is stolen. In addition, report the theft
Z to the relevant police authority.
218
Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)
Activating and deactivating service mode A

e Contact the Security Operating Center (SOC) B
before having the vehicle serviced and after the
vehicle has been serviced. C
e When your vehicle is being serviced, please in- D
form the relevant employee at the authorized
Porsche dealer that your vehicle is equipped with E
PVTS.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
219
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
A Rear Cross Traffic Alert

B
General safety instructions
C
Inattentive maneuvering
D WARNING
or pulling out
E The system must not induce you to take risks with Fig. 165: Rear Cross Traffic Alert display
F your safety. The driver is still responsible for taking The system is available subject to the following
due care when pulling out and when assessing ob- prerequisites:
G stacles. The system is no substitute for the driver's b Rear Cross Traffic Alert switched on.
H attentiveness. b Porsche Stability Management (PSM) switched
I e Drive with extreme care. on.
e Always check the traffic situation and the area b Transmission range R selected.
J around the vehicle. b Vehicle speed is less than approx.
K 10 mph (15 km/h).
Information on further assistance systems: When reverse gear is engaged, arrows appear on the
L > Please see chapter "ParkAssist" on page 182. PCM to make the driver aware of approaching road
> Please see chapter "Active Parking Support" on users crossing the vehicle's path. Visual and acoustic
M
page 37. signals warn of the potential hazardous situation. If
N the driver does not respond to the warning, the sys-
O System limitations tem performs a brief warning jolt to alert the driver
Vehicles cannot or may not be detected in time in to the impending collision hazard.
P the following situations:
Q – The vehicle is parked next to vehicles that pro- Switching Rear Cross Traffic Alert
R
trude out very far toward the rear. on and off
– Crossing road users approach extremely quickly.
S e ASSIST e R. Cr. Traffic Alert
– If the rear bumper is dirty.
T After the vehicle is switched off, the status of the
U
Functions system is stored in the selected account and paired
with the vehicle key used.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert monitors the area behind the
V > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on
vehicle and warns of any road users (e.g. passenger
page 186.
W vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians) cross-
ing behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out.
X
Y
Z
220
Refueling
Refueling Information NOTICE A

B
General information In some cases, fuels have a high sulfur content. As a
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
result, under certain driving conditions, combustion C
Refueling Fires Phones continental U.S. and Canada.
DANGER in the engine can lead to output of unpleasant odors
(known as the "odor of rotten eggs"). Porsche is not e Do not take your car to areas or countries where D
responsible for this circumstance and it does not unleaded fuel may not be available.
The RF energy from a cellphone can cause sparking E
on bare metal, much like aluminum foil in a micro- indicate a vehicle fault.
F
wave oven. The spark could ignite gasoline fumes Information
When the ignition is on, the fuel level is displayed on
present while refueling. G
the instrument cluster. Information regarding fuel quality can normally be
e Do not use a cellphone while pumping gas. If a model-dependent remaining quantity is not found on the fuel pump. Service station employees H
reached, a warning message will appear on the in- can also provide information.
Refueling Fires Static I
DANGER strument cluster.
Electricity
e Refuel at the next opportunity. The engine is optimally designed for unleaded fuels J
Static discharge from your body can ignite gasoline > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on without metallic additives.
K
fumes present when you get back out of the vehicle page 327.
Model Recommended Alternative fuel
and touch the fuel nozzle.
L
fuel
e Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping gas. Selecting suitable fuel M
Octane rating of at least:
NOTICE N
Risk of fire during
WARNING All 98 RON/ 95 RON/
refueling O
Unsuitable fuels may damage the engine as well as 88 MON 85 MON
Fuel is highly flammable, can deflagrate or explode. the fuel and exhaust system. P
(93 CLC or AKI) (90 CLC or AKI)
e Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited e Only use fuel according to the specification Q
when handling fuel. below. The engine is designed for operation with fuel con-
R
e Do not use any fuels containing methanol. taining up to 15% ethanol. The use of fuels contain-
WARNING
Fuel vapors and skin ing ethanol may lead to an increase in fuel S
contact with fuel consumption.
Information T
Fuel and fuel vapors are harmful to health.
Information regarding fuel quality can normally be U
e Do not inhale fuel vapors. found on the fuel pump. Service station employees
e Avoid contact with skin and clothing. can also provide information.
V
W
X
Y
Z
221
Refueling
A Information b Vehicle unlocked.

1. To open the filler flap, press on the rear part of
B If the recommended fuel is not available, in an the flap. The fuel type to be used for the vehicle
C emergency, the vehicle can also be fueled using un- is printed on a sticker on the inside of the filler
leaded fuel without metallic additives, with octane flap.
D levels of 91 RON/82.5 MON (86 CLC or AKI). How- 2. Slowly unscrew and remove the gas cap.
E ever, this may reduce performance and increase fuel 3. Place the gas cap in the holder.
consumption.
4. Insert the pump nozzle fully into the filler neck
F e Refueling with unleaded fuel without metallic with the handle pointing downward.
G additives, with octane levels of at least 91 RON/
5. Operate the pump nozzle and refuel the vehicle.
82.5 MON (86 CLC or AKI).
After the automatic pump nozzle switches off, do
H e Do not floor the accelerator pedal when driving not continue to add fuel. The fuel could splash
I with unleaded fuel with octane levels of 91 RON/ back or overflow when heated.
82.5 MON (86 CLC or AKI).
J > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on
page 327.
K Filling with fuel 6. Immediately after refueling, replace the gas cap
L Fig. 166: Opening the filler flap
and turn it until it is heard and felt to engage.
NOTICE 7. Close the filler flap and press on the rear part of
M the flap until it is heard to engage.
N Contact with fuels may bleach decorative films.
O e Immediately wipe fuel off decorative films. Information
If you lose the gas cap, you must replace it only with
P
an original part.
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X Fig. 167: Opening the gas cap
Y b Engine switched off.
Z b Ignition switched off.
222
Refueling
Emergency release of filler flap Fuel Evaporation Control A
Fuel tank venting B

The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister C
prevent fuel vapors from escaping to the atmos-
D
phere at extreme high outside temperatures, when
driving abruptly around curves and when the car is E
parked at an incline or in any other non level position.
F
Vapor control system and storage G
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
H
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are stored I
as long as the engine does not run.
J
Purge system K
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from the
L
canister will be mixed with fresh air from the ambi-
Fig. 168: Emergency operation of the filler flap ent air of the canister. This mixture will be directed M
to the intake air housing by the tank vent line, mixed
In the case of a fault with the electrical release, the with the intake air and burned during normal N
filler flap can be opened manually: combustion. O
1. Open the passenger’s door.
2. Reach into the door opening between the driver P
door and fender. Pull the button to the point of Q
resistance.
The filler flap is unlocked mechanically. R
3. To open the filler flap, press on the rear part of S
the flap.
4. If the flap cannot be opened, repeat steps 2 and T
3. U
5. Once emergency release is complete, engage the
button in the catch provided. Visit a workshop. V
W
X
Y
Z
223
Rollover Bar System (Cabriolet)
A Rollover Bar System convertible top.

B (Cabriolet) The rollover bar system will disrupt the movement
sequence of the convertible top when extended.
C e Do not open or close the convertible top when
Function
D The rollover bar system is installed behind the rear the rollover bar system is extended.
E seats and is extended within fractions of a second in
conditions where there is a risk of rollover. This Information
F generates a loud noise. If necessary, the safetybelt
pretensioners for the front seats are activated. The rollover bar system may break the rear window if
G
> Please see chapter "Seat Belts" on page 229. it deploys when the convertible top is closed.
H The rollover bar system consists of two extendable
I assemblies which, together with the windshield
frame, help maintain the space around all occupants Reacting to the warning light
J if the vehicle rolls over. Faults in the rollover bar system are indicated by the
K Malfunctions caused by red airbag warning light in the instrument clus-
DANGER
tampering with the roll- ter. The functionality of the rollover bar system is not
L over bar system guaranteed.
M e Have faults rectified immediately.
Tampering with the rollover bar system or impeding e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
N its movement can cause malfunctions resulting in ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
O serious injury or death. A rollover bar system that has have trained technicians and the necessary parts
been tampered with offers no protection. It may not and tools.
P deploy, or may deploy in an uncontrolled manner.
Q e Do not make any changes to the cabling and Deployed rollover bar system
R
components of the rollover bar system. e Never push the extendable assemblies back into
e Do not place body parts or objects in the move- their initial position yourself. Extendible cas-
S ment space of the extendable assemblies. settes do not stay in the lower position and
e Do not open the covers of the extendable spring back.
T
assemblies. e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec-
U e Make sure that no water or cleaning agents get ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
into the rollover bar system during cleaning of have trained technicians and the necessary parts
V
the vehicle. and tools.
W
X NOTICE
Y
Risk of damage to the convertible top and rollover
Z bar system when opening and closing the
224
Roof transport system
Roof transport system WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly Various objects, such as a ski/snowboard rack, roof A
secured loads box or bicycle rack, can be transported safely and
B
Transporting objects on the roof An unsecured or incorrectly secured load can be-
securely using the roof transport system and addi-
tional attachments. C
come detached from the roof transport system while
WARNING
Unsecured or incorrectly e Only use roof transport systems that have been
secured roof transport driving and cause serious accidents. D
tested and approved by Porsche. It is not possi-
system or individual e Secure the load so that it cannot move during the ble to mount other commercially available roof E
load-carrying devices journey. rack systems.
e Load the roof transport system so that the load For more information on the roof transport system: F
An unsecured or incorrectly secured roof transport does not protrude over the sides of the roof e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. G
system can become detached from the vehicle while transport system. Never exceed the width of the
driving and cause serious accidents. vehicle. H
e Individual attachment modules such as ski/ e Do not use elastic tensioners.
Mounting the roof transport
I
snowboard holders or roof boxes must be posi- e Position the center of gravity of the load as low system
tioned as centrally as possible relative to the leg as possible with respect to the roof transport J
supports. system and distribute the load evenly over the K
e Check the roof transport system and load-carry- load area.
ing devices before each trip and at regular inter- L
vals during longer trips to ensure that they are NOTICE M
mounted correctly and securely.
e Re-tighten all fastening screws. N
Washing the vehicle in a car wash or failure to ob-
serve the overall vehicle height or the maximum O
Changed vehicle
WARNING permitted gross weight can damage the vehicle or P
handling
roof transport system.
Vehicle handling changes when the roof transport e Remove the complete roof transport system be-
Q
system is mounted and loaded. fore washing the vehicle in a car wash. R
e Adapt your driving style. e Check the overall vehicle height with the roof
S
e Do not drive at a speed of more than transport system fitted before driving into areas
81 mph (130 km/h) when the roof transport with limited headroom (e.g. parking garages). T
system is loaded. e Do not exceed the maximum permitted roof load,
U
e Do not drive at a speed of more than gross weight or maximum axle loads.
Fig. 169: Components of the roof transport system V
110 mph (180 km/h) when the roof transport
system is mounted but not loaded. Information A Front carrier (long)
W
B Rear carrier (short)
e When you are not using the roof transport sys- C Cover trims X
tem, remove it completely from the vehicle in D Torque wrench
order to save fuel and reduce noise. E Key Y
When mounting for the first time: Z
225
A e Adjust the front and rear carriers to fit the width 3. Unlock the cover flaps H using the key and fold
of the vehicle. them upward as far as possible.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 171: Folding out rotary holders
M 2. Fold out all 8 rotary holders G using the hook of

Fig. 170: Removing seals from the roof rail the torque wrench. Fig. 173: Loosening screws on the underside of the carriers
N
1. Lift the seals F on the roof rail using the hook of 4. When mounting for the first time:
O the torque wrench and remove them. a. Remove the handle from the torque wrench.
P Loosen the screws on the underside of the
carriers using the short side of the torque
Q wrench.
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z Fig. 172: Unlocking and folding up the cover flaps
226
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 174: Adjusting the length of the carriers Fig. 175: Tightening screws on the underside of the carriers Fig. 176: Tightening the carrier fastening screws L
b. Place long carrier A in the front and short d. Remove the carriers and tighten the screws
NOTICE M
carrier B in the rear on the rotary holders G on the underside of the carriers by hand using
and, at the same time, adapt to the vehicle the short side of the torque wrench. N
width using the moveable carrier supports. e. Attach the handle of the torque wrench. Risk of damage to the seals through pinching be-
O
5. Place the carriers on rotary holders G (Fig. 174). tween roof and supports.
Make sure that the carriers are mounted in e Insert seals F in the supports. P
accordance with the stickers on the under-
side of the carriers. Q
6. Screw in all 8 fastening screws on the carriers
using the torque wrench until flush with the sur- R
c. Tighten the screws on the underside of the
face. Then tighten all 8 screws until the arrow
carriers slightly. S
markings on the torque wrench are exactly
aligned. T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
227
A carriers from above to protect against dirt and

moisture and to prevent wind noise.
B
9. Close the cover flaps and lock them using the
C key.
D
Information
E
After driving 30 miles (50 km), retighten all screws
F on the carriers and load-carrying devices.
G
H
I
J
K Fig. 177: Pushing the load-carrying device into place
L 7. Fold cover flaps H on the carriers fully downward
M and push the desired load-carrying device (e.g.
for roof box, bicycle rack) into the carriers.
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Fig. 178: Cutting cover trims to size and mounting them
Y
8. Cut cover trims C to size and push them side-
Z ways into the carriers or press them into the
228
Seat Belts
Seat Belts serious personal injury in case of an accident. parts and tools. A
e The shoulder belt should always rest on your e The seatbelt pretensioner system can be trig-
B
Correct use of seat belts upper body. The shoulder belt should never be gered only once. Triggered belt tensioner sys-
Unfastened or incor- worn behind your back or under your arm. tems must be replaced. C
DANGER e For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt should e Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
rectly used seatbelts D
be worn low across the hips. may prevent secure locking.
A seatbelt that is not fastened will not provide any e Pregnant women should position the seatbelt as e If the seatbelts show damage to webbing, bind- E
protection in the event of an accident. A seatbelt low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it is ings, buckles or retractors, they should be re-
F
that is not fastened correctly can increase the risk of not pressing against the abdomen. placed to ensure safe operation.
injury in the event of an accident. e Seatbelts must not rub against sharp objects or e Do not modify or disassemble the seatbelts in G
e All occupants must always fasten their seatbelts damage may occur to the belt. your vehicle.
H
before the start of a journey. e Never bleach or dye seatbelts.
e Never allow two people to use the same seatbelt DANGER
Using damaged e Do not allow seatbelts to retract until they are I
seatbelts completely dry after cleaning or this may cause
at the same time. J
e Remove any loose articles of clothing (e.g. jack- Damaged or heavily worn seatbelts will not provide
damage to the belt.
K
et), as they can interfere with the correct posi- adequate protection in the event of an accident. > Please see chapter "Cleaning the seat belts" on
tion of the seatbelt and restrict your freedom of The seatbelt pretensioner system may only be trig- page 83. L
movement. gered once; it must then be replaced. M
e Do not position seatbelts across hard or fragile Seat-belt pretensioners
e Regularly check all seatbelts for fabric damage
objects (e.g. glasses, ball-point pen, cellphone, Whether the seat-belt pretensioner system is trig- N
and check that the belt buckle and attachment
etc.). gered or not depends on the severity of the accident.
points are in good working order. O
Objects of this kind pose an additional risk of
e The seatbelts must be kept clean or the retrac- The seat-belt pretensioners can be triggered during:
injury. – Frontal and rear collisions.
P
tors may not work properly.
e Make sure that the seatbelts are not twisted or
e Immediately replace any seatbelts that are dam- – Side impacts. Q
loose.
aged or have been subjected to heavy strain – Vehicle rollover.
e Also provide your passengers with all the infor- R
during an accident along with triggered seatbelt
mation in this section.
pretensioner systems and force limiters. Information S
e Use appropriate child restraint systems for all
e In addition, you should have the anchorage
children. Smoke may be released when the seatbelt preten- T
points of the seatbelts checked.
e Seatbelts must be positioned on the body as to sioners are triggered. This does not necessarily mean
Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche U
restrain the upper body and lap from sliding for- that the vehicle is on fire.
ward. Improperly positioned seatbelts can cause recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as V
they have trained technicians and the necessary
W
X
Y
Z
229
Seat Belts
A Observe the seat belt warning sounds and the red warning symbol C in the in- 1. Assume a comfortable seating position.
B light and warning message strument cluster flashes if the driver's seat belt or 2. Adjust the backrest so that the shoulder belt
passenger seat belt, if occupied, is not fastened. passes over the center of your shoulder and is
C positioned on your upper body.
Rear seats 3. Grasp the seat belt by the belt latch and pull it
D
When the vehicle drives off, a seatbelt status display slowly and evenly over your chest and hip.
E for the rear seats appears for about 60 seconds on
the instrument cluster. Information
F
The green symbol A indicates that the person
G sitting on this seat has fastened their seat belt. The seat belt can jam in the following situations:
– Vehicle is at an angle.
H The red symbol B indicates that the person sitting
on this seat has not fastened their seatbelt, or no one – Seat belt is pulled out abruptly.
I is sitting on this seat. If a seatbelt on the rear seats is – When accelerating or decelerating, when nego-
opened while driving, an acoustic warning signal tiating bends or on inclines.
J
sounds and the relevant symbol flashes red for
K 4. Insert the belt latch into the relevant seat-belt
around 60 seconds.
buckle on the inner side of the seat until it locks
L
with an audible click.
M Fastening seat belt 5. Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped or
twisted and that it is not rubbing against sharp
N
Fig. 179: Seat belt status display on the instrument cluster edges.
O A Seat belt status display for the left rear seat 6. Ensure that the lap belt fits tautly across the lap.
P B Seat belt status display for the right rear seat After fastening the seat belt, tension the lap belt
C Warning symbol: Driver’s or passenger seatbelt not by pulling the shoulder belt up.
Q fastened For pregnant women: Position the lap belt so that
it is as far down on the lap as possible and not
R pressing against the abdomen.
Front seats
S When the ignition is switched on, a warning signal 7. During the journey, pull on the shoulder belt oc-
casionally to ensure that the lap belt remains
T sounds and the red warning symbol C on the in-
under tension.
strument cluster flashes for 6 seconds if the driver's
U or passenger seatbelt has not been fastened. The red
V warning symbol on the instrument cluster stays on
after 6 seconds until the driver's seatbelt and, if oc-
W cupied, the passenger's seatbelt have been fastened.
X A warning message is also displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Y When the speed of the vehicle reaches approxi- Fig. 180: Fastening seat belt
Z mately 15 mph (24 km/h), a warning signal also
230
Seat Belts
Opening the belt buckle and re- A

moving the seat belt B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Fig. 181: Unfastening the seat belt
1. Hold the belt latch.
O
2. Press the red button on the seat-belt buckle. P
3. Move the belt latch to approximately 3 in. (7 cm)
Q
below the belt outlet and slide the plastic slider
underneath the belt latch. R
The function of the plastic slider is to ensure that
the belt latch is easily accessible.
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
231
Seats
A Seats restraints are not adjustable. The rear seats do not Adjusting sports seat/sports seat plus
provide head restraints.
B
Selecting the correct seat position WARNING
Failure to adjust
C A correct sitting position is important to ensure safe backrests
D and fatigue-free driving. To adjust the position of the
driver's seat, proceed as follows: All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
E 1. Adjust the seat height to ensure that you have
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the backr-
ests are placed in their proper positions so that the
F enough headroom and a good overview of the
vehicle. risk of neck injuries is minimized in the event of a
G 2. Move the seat in the fore-and-aft direction so
crash.
H that you can reach and press the pedals without e Adjust the backrest's inclination such that the
stretching your legs out completely. Your foot headrest is in an upright position.
I should cover the entire surface of the pedal. e Driver and passengers should be seated upright
J 3. Grip the upper part of the steering wheel. Set the and in the center of their seats.
backrest angle and the steering wheel position
K so that your arms are almost outstretched. Your Seat adjustment
CAUTION
L shoulders must still be touching the backrest.
4. Correct the fore-and-aft position of the seat if If persons or animals are in the movement range of
M necessary. the seat during seat adjustment, there is a risk of Fig. 182: Adjusting partially electric sports seat/sports seat
N parts of the body being pinched or crushed. plus
O
Head restraints e Ensure that no one is put at risk when adjusting 1 Adjusting seat height
The driver seat and the front passenger seat provide the seat. 2 Adjusting backrest angle
P integrated head restraints in the backrests. The head e Do not activate the memory button if anything or 3 Adjusting fore-and-aft position
restraints of the driver seat and the front passenger
Q anyone is in the way. e Press the relevant control in the direction of the
seat are not adjustable. e Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any of arrow until the desired setting or final position is
R the seat adjustment buttons. reached.
S Adjusting seat e Lift the locking lever 3, move the seat to the de-
T Adjusting the seat while NOTICE sired position and then release the lever.
WARNING
driving Ensure that the seat engages properly.
U
Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, wind de-
The seat can move further than intended if adjusted
V flector, etc. when the seat is adjusted or folded back
while driving. You may lose control of the vehicle.
or forward.
W e Do not adjust the seat while driving. The back-
e Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not in
X rest locks must be engaged at all times while the
contact with any other object.
vehicle is in motion.
Y
The driver and front passenger seats provide inte-
Z grated head restraints in the backrests. The head
232
Seats
Adjusting full bucket seat Fully electric sport seat/adaptive sport seat > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on A
plus page 186.
B
Folding down backrest C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 183: Adjusting full bucket seat
Fig. 184: Adjusting fully electric sport seat/adaptive sport N
1 Adjusting the fore-and-aft position
seat plus
2 Adjusting the seat height O
1 Adjusting the seat angle Fig. 185: Folding down backrest
DANGER
Use of child restraint 2 Adjusting the seat height P
systems 3 Adjusting the seat cushion Folding down backrest
4 Adjusting seat cushion side bolsters (adaptive sport
Q
Danger of serious or fatal injury resulting from the seat plus only) e Pull loop on the side of the backrest upwards and
fold the backrest forwards. R
use of child restraint systems on full bucket seats. 5 Adjusting backrest side bolsters (adaptive sport seat
Child restraint systems on full bucket seats do not
plus only) S
6 Adjusting the fore-and-aft position Folding up backrest
provide protection in the event of an accident. 7 Adjusting the backrest angle T
e Do not use child restraint systems on full bucket 8 Adjusting the lumbar support WARNING
Backrest not latched in
U
seats. position
e Press the respective control in the direction of V
e Lift the locking lever 1, move the seat to the de- the arrow until the desired setting or final posi- Risk of injury due to backrests that are not properly
sired position and then release the lever. tion is reached. engaged. W
Ensure that the seat engages properly. e When folding back the backrest, check that it is X
e Press the control 2 in the direction of the arrow Storing seat settings engaged.
For information on storing and retrieving the seat
Y
until the desired setting or final position is
settings: e Fold up the backrest until it locks with an audible
reached. Z
click.
233
Seats
A Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped. Information Switching seat heating/seat ventilation off
B e Press button A (seat ventilation) or B (seat heat-
Using the Easy Entry function When the key is changed, the seat and steering ing), repeatedly if necessary, until all the light
C wheel move to the entry position stored on the ve- indicators go out.
The Easy Entry function makes it easier for you to
hicle key.
D get in and out of the vehicle.
Automatic adjustment of Information
E CAUTION Information
the driver’s seat Heated seats are not available when the interior
F Altering the seat setting manually interrupts the temperature is high.
If persons are behind the seat when the driver’s seat
G is automatically adjusted, they may become trapped.
Easy Entry function. Seat ventilation is not available when the interior
e Set the seat position manually. temperature is below 60 °F (15 °C).
H e Switch off the Comfort access function if some-
If the battery voltage is too low, seat heating/seat
body is sitting behind the driver’s seat.
I ventilation is restricted initially and then turned off.
Switching seat heating/seat ven-
J
Activating the function tilation on and off
K The seat heating and seat ventilation are operated Adjusting seat heating/seat ventilation
The Easy Entry function can be set via the PCM.
electrically. The seat heating warms heating ele- For seat heating and seat ventilation, the balance
L
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking ments in the seat surface and backrest. The seat between the seat cushion and backrest can be set.
M ventilation cools and dries the seat. Integrated fans
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on 1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Seat
direct air through the seat surface and backrest.
N page 270. settings e Driver seat heating balance/
Passenger seat heating balance/Driver seat
O When exiting the vehicle ventilation balance/Pass. seat ventilation
P b Function activated. balance
Q e Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door. 2. Setting the balance.
The steering wheel moves upward.
R The driver's seat moves backward.
S
Adjusting passenger seat from the
When entering the vehicle driver’s cockpit
T b Function activated. Fig. 186: Switching seat heating on and off
U b The driver's seat and steering wheel are in their 1. CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Seat
Easy Entry positions. Switching seat heating/seat ventilation on settings e Passenger seat position e Adjust
V
e Close the driver’s door and switch on the ignition. b Engine is running. front passenger seat
W The driver's seat and steering wheel move to the e Press button A (seat ventilation) or B (seat heat- 2. Set the passenger seat position using the con-
stored position. ing), repeatedly if necessary. trols on the driver’s seat.
X
The number of illuminated light indicators shows
Y the selected heating or ventilation setting. To end the adjustment:
Z e Select Finish seat adjustment.
234
Seats
Folding down rear seat backrest A

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 187: Folding down rear seat backrests
N
Folding down rear seat backrests O
e Pull the lever forward and fold the backrest
forward. P
Q
Folding up rear seat backrests
R
Backrest not latched in
WARNING
position S
Risk of injury due to backrests that are not properly T

engaged. U
e When folding back the backrest, check that it is V
engaged.
W
e Fold up the backrest until it locks with an audible
click. X
Make sure that the seat belts are not trapped. Y
Z
235
Slide/Tilt Sunroof
A Slide/Tilt Sunroof Information Opening steel slide/tilt sunroof

B
Opening and closing the slide/tilt – The slide/tilt sunroof and sunblind are fitted with
C a force limiter. If an obstacle prevents them from
sunroof closing, they immediately re-open.
D Opening and closing the – The slide/tilt sunroof does not function at ex-
WARNING
E slide/tilt sunroof and tremely high driving speeds or extremely low
sunblind temperatures.
F
When opening or closing the slide/tilt sunroof and
G sunblind, particularly in automatic mode, body parts Operating the slide/tilt sunroof or sunblind
H can become trapped between moving and stationary
vehicle parts.
I – or –
e Make sure that no one can be injured when op- Ignition is switched off, but not more than 10
J erating the slide/tilt sunroof or sunblind. minutes ago and driver's or passenger's door not
e Always switch off the ignition when leaving the yet open.
K
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when The buttons for opening and closing the slide/tilt
L leaving the vehicle. Uninformed persons (e.g. sunroof and sunblind feature a 2-stage function.
M children) can be injured when operating the When the buttons are actuated, both stages can be
slide/tilt sunroof or sunblind. clearly felt due to a resistance when pushed or Fig. 188: Operating steel slide/tilt sunroof
N e In case of danger, press the slide/tilt sunroof and pulled. A Open slide/tilt sunroof
O sunblind buttons. B Raise/lower slide/tilt sunroof
C Close slide/tilt sunroof
P
NOTICE Stage one – manual operation
Q e Press and hold button A in the first setting until
Damage to the roof or load if the slide/tilt sunroof is the required position is reached.
R
opened or lifted when a roof transport system is The process stops when the button is released.
S fitted.
Stage two – automatic operation
T e Do not open or lift the slide/tilt sunroof when a
e Briefly pull button A to the second setting.
roof transport system is fitted.
U The slide/tilt sunroof opens automatically to the
final position.
V
e To interrupt the process, pull button A or C again.
W
X
Y
Z
236
Slide/Tilt Sunroof
Opening glass slide/tilt sunroof The slide/tilt sunroof is raised or lowered to the Opening and closing sunblind A
final position.
Stage one – manual operation B
e To interrupt the process, press button B again.
e Press and hold button C in the first setting until
the required position is reached.
C
Closing slide/tilt sunroof
The process stops when the button is released. D
Stage one – manual operation
Stage two – automatic operation E
e Pull and hold button A or C (only steel slide/tilt
e Briefly pull or press button C to the second
sunroof) in the first setting until the desired po- F
sition has been reached. setting.
The process stops when the button is released.
The sunblind opens or closes automatically to G
the final position.
H
Stage two – automatic operation e To interrupt the process, press button C again.
e Briefly pull button A or C (only steel slide/tilt If the slide/tilt sunroof is partly or fully opened, the I
sunroof) to the second setting. sunblind can only be closed up to the front edge of
The slide/tilt sunroof closes automatically to the
J
the slide/tilt sunroof.
final position. If the sunblind is closed, it will be automatically K
e To interrupt the process, press button A or C opened together with the slide/tilt sunroof
again.
L
(coupled).
Raising or lowering the slide/tilt sunroof does not M
Fig. 189: Operating glass slide/tilt sunroof Closing the slide/tilt sunroof after repeated affect the position of the sunblind.
intervention of the force limiter N
A Open/close slide/tilt sunroof
B Raise/lower slide/tilt sunroof Anti-pinch protection Closing the sunblind after repeated interven- O
C Open/close sunblind WARNING
deactivated tion of the force limiter
P
Stage one – manual operation Anti-pinch protection
Slide/tilt sunroof and sunblind close with their full WARNING Q
e Press and hold button A in the first setting until closing force. Parts of the body that become trapped
deactivated
the required position is reached. between the moving and stationary vehicle parts R
Slide/tilt sunroof and sunblind close with their full
The process stops when the button is released. may be crushed. closing force. Parts of the body that become trapped S
Stage two – automatic operation e Make sure that no parts of the body become between the moving and stationary vehicle parts
T
e Briefly press button A to the second setting. trapped between moving and stationary vehicle may be crushed.
The slide/tilt sunroof opens automatically to the parts when closing. e Make sure that no parts of the body become U
final position. trapped between moving and stationary vehicle
If the closing process is impaired by an obstruction, V
e To interrupt the process, press button A again. parts when closing.
the slide/tilt sunroof can be manually closed using
W
increased force. If the closing process is impaired by an obstruction,
Raising or lowering slide/tilt sunroof
1. Remove the obstruction. the sunblind can be closed manually using increased X
e Press button B.
2. Pull button A or C (only steel slide/tilt sunroof) force. Y
until the slide/tilt sunroof comes to a standstill in
the closed position. Z
237
Slide/Tilt Sunroof
A 1. Remove the obstruction. If the button is released before the slide/tilt sunroof
2. Pull button C until the sunblind has come to a has come to a complete stop:
B
standstill in the closing position. e Start the save procedure again.
C
D Closing the slide/tilt sunroof in Cleaning wind deflector
E
the event of failure of the roof Clean the wind deflector with the slide/tilt
mechanism sunroof open.
F
To have the slide/tilt sunroof repaired: 1. Switch on the ignition and fully open the slide/
G e Go to an qualified specialized repair shop. Por- tilt sunroof. If the wind deflector is not fully ex-
sche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, tended, drive a short distance with the slide/tilt
H
as they have trained technicians and the neces- sunroof open until the wind deflector is fully
I sary parts and tools. extended.
J 2. Clean the wind deflector and mesh using a damp
Saving the final position of the sponge.
K
slide/tilt sunroof and sunblind
L After emergency activation, the end positions of the Cleaning the sunblind
M slide/tilt sunroof and sunblind are lost. b Vehicle is stationary.
Saving final position b Ignition is switched on.
N WARNING
1. Open the slide/tilt sunroof fully.
O 2. Close the sunblind as far as possible.
When saving the final position, close the slide/tilt
3. Press button C of the sunblind
P sunroof and the sunblind with their full closing force.
The sunblind starts to close after 10 seconds.
Q e Make sure that no one can be injured when stor- 4. Press the button until the sunblind is fully closed.
ing the final position.
5. Remove any dirt.
R
b Vehicle is stationary. Exiting the cleaning function
S 1. Switch on ignition. e Drive off.
T 2. Pull and hold button C until the slide/tilt sunroof – or –
has come to a standstill in the closed position. Operate the slide/tilt sunroof.
U
3. Release button C and pull and hold it again. – or –
V Saving of the final position starts after approx. Operate the sunblind.
10 seconds. The slide/tilt sunroof automatically
W
opens and closes once.
X Saving is completed.
Y e Repeat steps 1–3 for the sunblind using button
A.
Z
238
Smoker's Package
Smoker's Package Opening and closing the ashtray A

B
Using the ashtray
C
Fire hazard due to flam-
WARNING D
mable objects
Paper in the ashtray can catch fire.

E
e Do not put any flammable objects into the F
ashtray. G
H
Inserting the ashtray
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 191: Opening and closing the ashtray
N
e Open and close the ashtray by lifting and closing
the lid. O
Removing the ashtray P

e Grasp the ashtray and pull it out. Q
R
S
T
Fig. 190: Inserting the ashtray U
Depending on the equipment, an ashtray is available V
in the cup holder in the center console.
> Please see chapter "Cup Holders" on page 109. W
e Insert the ashtray into the cup holder and push it X
down to the stop.
Y
Z
239
Spoilers
A Spoilers NOTICE Manual retraction

B 1. Select CAR e DRIVE e Spoiler.
Extendable rear spoiler When the rear spoiler is extended, the supply of air
C b 911 Carrera, 911 Targa to the charge air cooler can be obstructed as foreign 2. Current speed < 9 mph (15 km/h): Press and
bodies can get trapped inside. hold Spoiler button until the rear spoiler has
D Failure of the extendible reached its final position.
WARNING
rear spoiler e Never park the vehicle with the rear spoiler
E – or –
extended.
Current speed > 9 mph (15 km/h): Press
F Driving stability is impaired at higher speeds by the
The rear spoiler improves driving stability at high Spoiler button briefly.
increased uplift on the rear axle.
G speeds. Using automatic mode is recommended. The rear spoiler is in automatic mode.
e Adapt your driving style and speed to the altered
H A warning message appears on the instrument clus-
vehicle handling.
ter in the event of a failure of the spoiler control.
I e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche Extendable front and rear spoilers
dealer.
Messages" on page 280. b 911 Turbo S
J Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche Failure of the extendible
K dealer, as they have trained technicians and the WARNING
Automatic mode spoilers
necessary parts and tools.
L The rear spoiler extends and retracts automatically
The appearance of the warning indicates failure of
depending on the speed and the driving program
M Retracting and extending the extendible spoilers.
CAUTION selected.
N
the rear spoiler e Adapt your driving style and speed to the altered
Manual mode vehicle handling.
When the rear spoiler is manually extended or re-
O When the ignition is switched on, the rear spoiler can e Have the error rectified at a qualified specialist
tracted while the vehicle is stationary, body parts
P be extended and retracted manually using the PCM. repair shop.
can become trapped between the moving spoiler
and stationary vehicle parts. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche
Q dealer, as they have trained technicians and the
e Make sure that no persons or animals are within Information
R necessary parts and tools.
the range of movement of the rear spoiler.
The selected spoiler position can be stored in
S INDIVIDUAL mode. Retracting and extending
CAUTION
T NOTICE the spoilers
Manual extension
U Risk of damage to the rear spoiler. When the spoilers are extended or retracted man-
V e Never pull or push the vehicle by the rear spoiler. e Select CAR e DRIVE e Spoiler. ually while the vehicle is stationary, body parts can
become trapped between the moving spoilers and
e Retract the rear spoiler before using an auto- The rear spoiler is extended. The current spoiler
W position is indicated in the vehicle model. stationary vehicle parts.
matic car wash.
X e Make sure that no persons or animals are within
the range of movement of the spoilers.
Y
Z
240
Spoilers
NOTICE program selected. A warning appears on the instru- A

ment cluster if automatic control fails.
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information B
Risk of damage to the front and rear spoilers.
Messages" on page 280. C
e Never pull or push the vehicle by the rear spoiler.
e Reduced chassis clearance when the front spoil- Manual mode D
er is extended. When the ignition is switched on, the spoilers can be E
e Retract all spoilers before using an automatic car extended and retracted manually via the PCM.
wash. F
Information G
NOTICE
The selected spoiler position can be stored in H
If the spoilers are extended to the performance po- INDIVIDUAL mode. I
sition manually or through SPORT PLUS mode, the J
spoilers do not retract when the vehicle comes to a Extending and retracting manually
stop. K
1. Select CAR e DRIVE e Spoiler.
e Take the reduced ground clearance into account L
when parking or in parking garages, for example. 2. Current speed < 9 mph (15 km/h): Press and
hold the Spoiler button until the spoilers have M
The extendable spoilers improve driving stability at reached their final position. N
high speeds. The front and rear spoilers can be – or –
moved to a total of four positions: Current speed > 9 mph (15 km/h): Press the O
– Start position: The front and rear spoilers are Spoiler button briefly. P
fully retracted for a high degree of day-to-day The spoilers enter automatic mode following
usability, such as when driving on ramps and retraction. Q
garage entrances.
– Speed position: The front and rear spoilers are R
partially extended for high driving stability, low Linkage to SPORT PLUS mode S
air resistance and a high final speed. In SPORT PLUS mode, the spoilers are extended to
the Performance position at speeds above T
– Performance position: The front and rear spoilers
are extended and the rear spoiler is tilted for 9 mph (15 km/h). The maximum speed cannot be U
maximum performance, such as for on a achieved in this position.
racetrack. The spoilers are not retracted automatically. V
– Wet position: Rear spoiler fully retracted, rear W
spoiler extended for maximum driving stability.
X
Automatic mode Y
The spoilers extend and retract automatically de-
Z
pending on the vehicle speed and the driving
241
Sport Chrono Stopwatch
A Sport Chrono Stopwatch Stopwatch on the dashboard Stopwatch in PCM

B With the Sport Chrono stopwatch, times can be
measured and evaluated and displayed in the PCM
C and instrument cluster.
D The following information can be recorded and
evaluated:
E – Lap number.
F – Completed lap distance.
– Lap time. Fig. 193: Stopwatch in PCM
G – Optional: Various other data (such as vehicle po- A Information on recording e.g. lap times, number of laps
H sition or speed). and residual range that can be driven with the current
fuel level.
I During a recording the following can be displayed: B Distance traveled or circle diagram with lap counter:
– Number of the current lap. Distance traveled compared to a reference lap. Color
J – Fastest lap time and the current lap time in color rating to indicate whether the current lap time is faster
K comparison. than (green), identical to (yellow) or slower than (red)
the reference lap.
– How much of the lap has been completed in re-
L lation to a reference lap.
M – Color rating to indicate whether the current lap Starting timing
time is quicker than, slower than or identical to Fig. 192: Sport Chrono stopwatch
N the current fastest lap or selected lap. e CAR e CHRONO e Start
The total time is displayed in the stopwatch on the
O – Remaining fuel range and the number of laps that Recording of the data begins. If a reference lap
dashboard.
can be completed with the fuel left in the tank. has not been loaded, the first lap is used as the
P The analog pointer shows the seconds. The digital
reference lap.
– Remaining recording time. display shows 1/100 seconds up to the first minute.
Q – The track progress of the current lap and of the Subsequently, the display is in second steps.
reference lap. Stopping timing
R Setting the time display and illumination of b Timing has been started.
Up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59.99 seconds can
S be recorded and displayed. the stopwatch on the dashboard
> Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on e CAR e CHRONO e Stop
T
page 270.
U Continuing timing
V b Timing has been stopped.
W e CAR e CHRONO e Continue
X
Y Ending lap/starting new lap
A maximum of 99 laps can be stored for each
Z recording.
242
b Timing has been started. Displaying and editing recordings and re- e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport A
cording statistics Chrono settings e Deviation in distance
e CAR e CHRONO e New lap A maximum of 99 laps can be recorded during each allowed B
The lap counter is incremented by one. The session. If a reference lap has not been stored yet, C
time of the fastest lap driven is recorded as the the first lap in the recording is used as a reference Setting maximum time difference for evaluation
fastest lap time if the duration is within the set Indicates the maximum time difference within which D
lap. The system can record up to 10 hours of data.
difference in distance. recorded laps are flagged 'as fast as' (yellow). E
e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport
Chrono view e Evaluation e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport F
Taking intermediate time
Chrono settings e Max. eval. delta time
b Timing has been started. G
Renaming, deleting, importing and exporting Displaying the vehicle position for the fastest lap H
e CAR e CHRONO e Interim time recordings and reference laps (ghost car)
The intermediate time is displayed briefly and I
b Under Options e Sport Chrono
not saved. Timing continues to run in the
evaluation selected. e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport J
background. Chrono settings e Display reference lap
b For importing/exporting, SD card inserted or K
USB data carrier connected. Data is stored on
Resetting stopwatch time the storage medium in the "SportChrono” folder. Stopwatch in the instrument L
b Timing has been stopped.
e CAR e CHRONO e Options cluster M
e CAR e CHRONO e Reset The stopwatch is displayed on the "Car & Info" N
All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero display.
Setting Sport Chrono O
and the running recording is ended.
Activating Record additional data option and dis- P
playing track progress
Loading reference lap Q
In addition to lap length and times, additional driv-
ing-related data (e.g. speed) can be recorded at in-
e CAR e CHRONO e Load lap R
tervals of 1 second. The track progress can also be
shown on the map. S
Saving reference lap
T
e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport
e CAR e CHRONO e Options e Sport Chrono settings e Record additional data U
Chrono view e Evaluation e Select the desired
recording e Save as reference Setting difference in distance allowed V
Indicates by how much the length of a lap may de- W
Resetting reference lap viate from the length of the reference lap. Laps with
larger length deviations are not included in the X
e CAR e CHRONO e Reset evaluation. Y
Z
243
A e Sport Chrono e Cont. Analog Clock on the Dashboard

B
Ending lap/starting new lap
C When the stopwatch is running, the current stop-
D watch time is stored as the lap time.
A maximum of 99 laps can be stored for each
E recording.
F b Timing has been started.
G e Sport Chrono e Lap
H The lap counter A is incremented by one lap.
The time of the fastest completed lap is stored
I as the fastest lap time.
J
Taking intermediate time
K
b Timing has been started.
L Fig. 194: Stopwatch in the instrument cluster
e Sport Chrono e Interim time
M A Lap counter The interim time is displayed briefly and is not
B Circle diagram: how much of the lap has been com- Fig. 195: Analog clock on the dashboard
N pleted compared to a reference lap.
stored. Timing continues to run in the
C Control commands background. The time and the brightness of the lighting of the
O D Reference lap time A number in the circle diagram B shows the set analog clock can be set via the touch display in the
E Current lap time interim time. dashboard:
P
Q Starting timing page 270.
Resetting stopwatch time
R e Sport Chrono e Start b Timing has been stopped.
S Recording of the data begins. If a reference lap e Sport Chrono e Reset
has not been loaded, the first lap is used as the
T All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero.
reference lap.
U
V Stopping timing
b Timing has been started.
W
e Sport Chrono e Stop
X
Y Continuing timing
Z b Timing has been stopped.
244
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Starting and Stopping the Information Switching off the engine A

Engine If no electrical equipment is switched on for 10 mi- NOTICE B
nutes after the ignition is switched on, the ignition C
Ignition lock has to be switched on again. The operating device An unattended vehicle with a running engine is po-
The vehicle key is replaced by an operating device in must first be turned to ignition lock position 0 (initial D
tentially hazardous. If warning lights come on to in-
the ignition lock. The vehicle key only needs to be position). dicate improper operation, no one would be present E
carried on your person. to observe the light and turn off the engine.
F
2 – Start engine e Never leave the engine idling unattended.
G
After the engine is started, the operating device au-
Inactive power steering H
tomatically returns from position 2 to position 1. WARNING
and brake booster
I
Starting the engine The steering assistance and brake booster are only
operative when the engine is running. Consequently, J
1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Vehicles with manual transmission: Press the much greater force needs to be applied for steering K
clutch pedal down fully and keep it pressed. and braking when the engine is stopped.
L
3. Vehicles with manual transmission: Move the e Only switch off the ignition once the vehicle has
gear lever to neutral. come to a standstill. M
4. Vehicles with PDK: Press the P button on the N
selector lever or select operating mode N. 1. Stop the vehicle.
5. Do not press the accelerator pedal. 2. Press the brake pedal. O
6. Turn the operating device back to ignition lock 3. Turn the operating device back to ignition lock
position 0. P
position 2. Do not use the starter for more than
approx. 10 seconds. e When leaving the vehicle, apply the electric Q
Fig. 196: Ignition lock settings The starting process is carried out and com- parking brake and, in the case of vehicles with
PDK, press button P or, in the case of vehicles R
0 Initial position pleted automatically as soon as ignition lock po-
1 Ignition on sition 2 (start engine) is reached. with manual transmission, engage 1st gear or S
reverse.
2 Start engine e If necessary, wait for about 10 seconds and then T
repeat the starting process. First turn the oper-
0 – Ignition off (initial position) ating device back to ignition lock position 0 (ini- U
In ignition lock setting 0 the engine and ignition are tial position). V
off. Do not warm up the engine when stationary.
Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds W
1 – Ignition on and full throttle until the engine has reached op-
X
All electrical equipment can be switched on. The erating temperature.
warning lights in the instrument cluster come on as Y
a lamp check. Z
245
Steering Wheel
A Steering Wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically Operating instrument cluster with
B Uncontrolled retrieval of the multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel CAUTION
the memory settings For further information on operating the instrument
C cluster:
Steering wheel adjust-
D WARNING
ment while driving
If persons or animals are within the range of move- > Please see chapter "Operating the instrument
ment of the steering wheel, there is a risk of parts of cluster" on page 140.
E The steering wheel can move further than intended the body being pinched or crushed when you adjust
the steering wheel.
F if adjusted while driving. You may lose control of the Switching the heated steering
vehicle. e Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
G wheel on and off
e Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
H
I Adjusting the steering wheel manually
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S Fig. 198: Control lever for steering wheel adjustment Fig. 199: Heated steering wheel button
T e Move the control lever under the steering column b Engine is running.
in the relevant direction until the desired position
e Press the button on the central steering wheel
U is reached.
spoke until either the message Steering wheel
Fig. 197: Steering wheel adjustment lever
V heating turned on or Steering wheel heating
1. Turn the lever downward, away from the driver. Storing steering wheel settings turned off appears briefly on the instrument
W 2. Move the steering wheel vertically and horizon- cluster.
In vehicles with the memory package, the steering
X tally in order to adjust the steering wheel posi- wheel settings can be stored to the memory buttons
tion to the tilt of the backrest and seat position. in the driver's door and on the vehicle key.
Y 3. Turn back the lever to the original position, to- > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on
Z ward the driver, until you feel it engage. page 186.
246
Storage
Storage NOTICE Opening and closing the glove A

compartment B
Stowing objects Risk of damage to the cargo net.
C
Unsecured or incorrectly e Do not place heavy and bulky objects in the car-
WARNING D
positioned objects go net.
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can slide

E
NOTICE
out of place and endanger the vehicle occupants F
during braking, extreme acceleration, changes of di-
rection, or in an accident. There is a risk of damage when opening the conver- G
tible top/roof system if any objects are located in the
e Do not transport items of luggage or objects un- H
area behind the rear seats.
secured in the vehicle interior.
e Do not transport heavy objects in open storage e Remove any objects from the area behind the I
compartments. rear seats when opening the convertible top/roof J
e Always keep lockable storage compartments system.
K
closed while driving. Depending on its equipment, the vehicle has the
e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and following storage options:
L
the axle load. – 2 cup holders M
e Adapt the tire pressure to the load. Update the – Glove compartment
setting for Tire Pressure Monitoring System N
– Door storage compartments with bottle rack Fig. 200: Opening the glove compartment
when changing the tire pressure. O
– Storage net in the passenger’s footwell Opening the glove compartment
Objects in the center – Storage compartment in the center console e Pull the handle. P
WARNING – Storage compartment in the armrest
console The glove compartment opens automatically.
– Parcel shelf behind the rear seats
Q
If the storage compartment or cup holder is not in- Closing the glove compartment
R
serted in the center console, objects can obstruct or e Close the cover by pressing on it.
actuate the parking brake button. This may result in The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked S
inadvertent braking. using the emergency key. T
e Always use the provided storage compartment
Inserting and removing the stor- U
e Only use cup holders for their intended purpose age compartment V
of storing drinks.
Objects in the center W
e Never store objects in the cup holder. WARNING
console
e Never operate the vehicle without the cup holder X
or storage compartment inserted. If the storage compartment or cup holder is not in- Y
serted in the center console, objects can obstruct or
actuate the parking brake button. This may result in Z
247
Storage
A inadvertent braking. Opening the storage compartment

B e Always use the provided storage compartment in the armrest
C e Only use cup holders for their intended purpose
D of storing drinks.
e Never store objects in the cup holder.
E e Never operate the vehicle without the cup holder
F or storage compartment inserted.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N Fig. 202: Opening the storage compartment in the armrest
O Opening the storage compartment

e Press the button on the right-hand side of the
P armrest.
Q The lid pops up automatically.
R Fig. 201: Inserting and removing the storage compartment

S Inserting the storage compartment
T A storage compartment is supplied with the vehicle
that can be inserted in the center console.
U
e Insert the storage compartment into the opening
V in front of the center console and push down as
far as it will go.
W
Removing the storage compartment
X
e Grip the storage compartment and remove.
Y
Z
248
Sun visors
Sun visors Opening vanity mirror A

B
Adjusting sun visor
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 204: Opening vanity mirror
N
e Open the cover of the vanity mirror on the inside
Fig. 203: Adjusting sun visor of the sun visor. O
e Swivel the sun visor downward to prevent glare The vanity mirror lighting is switched on. P
from the front.
Glare from the side: NOTICE Q
e Disengage the sun visor from the inner retainer R
and swivel it round to in front of the side window. Risk of damage to the vanity mirror cover.
e Do not attempt to push the cover past its limit S
position. T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
249
Targa Roof System
A Targa Roof System screen and stationary vehicle parts.

B e When opening and closing the Targa roof, ensure
NOTICE that no one is injured by the Targa roof mecha-
C nism or convertible-top element and glass rear
Danger of damage to the Targa roof and roof screen.
D
mechanism. e In order to interrupt roof operation in the event of
E e Do not operate the Targa roof: danger, immediately release the button in the
F – At temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C). vehicle or on the vehicle key.
– When one side of the vehicle is on a curb, a e Keep the lids of the vanity mirrors in the sun vi-
G lifting platform or a jack. sors closed when closing the Targa roof.
H – When items of luggage or other objects hin-
When opening and closing the Targa roof, the side
der the movement of the roof.
I windows are slightly lowered and close automati-
e Avoid frequent operation of the roof with the cally if the roof operation is not interrupted after
J engine off; the vehicle battery will rapidly reaching the final roof position.
K discharge.
e Only drive with the Targa roof fully open or Opening and closing the Targa roof using the
L closed. button in the vehicle interior Fig. 206: Closing the Targa roof with the button
M e To prevent damp stains and abrasion damage, b Ignition is switched on.

open the Targa roof only when it is in a dry, clean b Vehicle is stationary.
N state. e Pull and hold the button for opening or closing
O e Park the vehicle in the shade if possible, since the Targa roof with no interruption until the
continuous exposure to the sun attacks textiles, Targa roof has reached its final position or the
P rubber and paint. windows are in the desired position.
Q The corresponding message on the multifunction
> Please see chapter "Car Care" on page 78.
display goes out.
R
In the event of danger:
S Opening and closing the Targa e Release the button.
T roof Operation of the roof stops.
Opening and closing the
U WARNING
Targa roof
V
When opening and closing the Targa roof, parts of
W the body can become trapped between the roof
mechanism or convertible-top element, glass rear
X
Fig. 205: Opening the Targa roof with the button
Y
Z
250
Targa Roof System
Extending and retracting the air Information e Turn off the ignition so that the Targa roof is not A
deflector Depending on speed (e.g. during urban driving),
activated unintentionally.
B
there may be a "humming" noise. In this case, extend Removing the rear wall trim panel C
the air deflector. At higher speeds (e.g. driving on
highway), louder wind noises may develop. The air D
deflector can therefore be retracted at higher E
speeds. The air deflector is not used to reduce the
draft in the passenger compartment. F
G
Emergency operation of the Targa H
roof I
Moving roof system J
WARNING
components during
emergency operation K
L
e Only carry out emergency operation with ex-
treme caution. M
e Do not operate the Targa roof during emergency
Fig. 207: Extending and retracting the air deflector N
operation.
O
Extending the air deflector Fig. 208: Removing the rear wall trim panel
e When the Targa roof is opened, press F on the air
NOTICE
1. Fold the front seat backrests forward.
P
deflector. 2. Fold the rear seat backrests forward. Q
Danger of damage to the roof and roof mechanism.
3. Carefully pull the rear wall trim panel A forward
Retracting the air deflector e Do not operate the Targa roof during emergency out of the clip points and remove upward.
R
e When the Targa roof is opened, press F on the air operation. 4. Remove the emergency operation key from the S
deflector until the air deflector engages in the e Go to a qualified specialized repair shop. Porsche reverse side of the rear wall trim panel A.
windshield frame. recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as T
they have trained technicians and the necessary U
parts and tools.
V
Checking the roof system W

Before carrying out emergency operation, check the X
following:
Y
– Was the ignition switched on while operating the
roof with the button? Z
251
Targa Roof System
A De-tensioning the roof mechanism Unlocking the glass rear screen Opening the glass rear screen
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M Fig. 209: De-tensioning the roof mechanism
Fig. 210: Unlocking the glass rear screen Fig. 211: Opening the glass rear screen
N
e With the aid of the emergency operation key, pull e On the glass rear screen, reach into the lower
1. Using the hexagon on emergency operation key
O B, turn emergency hand screw C approx. one half both release loops D consecutively approx. edge of the ventilation grille from above with
turn counter-clockwise. 4 inches (10 cm) forward. both hands.
P First lift the cover, and then pull it backward as
NOTICE
Q far as the final position.
R e Only loosen emergency hand screw C, do not

unscrew completely.
S
T 2. Remove the emergency operation key.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
252
Targa Roof System
Removing the visual screen Locking the air deflector Closing the convertible top element A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 212: Removing the visual screen Fig. 213: Locking the air deflector Fig. 214: Closing the convertible top element
N
e Release visual screen E on the underside and re- 1. Stand behind the front seats; face the rear of the
NOTICE
move it upward. vehicle. O
2. Take hold of the convertible top element at the
Risk of damage to the air deflector. P
front edge and guide it forward until it is vertical
e Lock the air deflector before closing the Targa above the Targa roll bar. Q
roof. Do not guide the convertible top element any
further forward (risk of damage to the roof R
e If the air deflector F is extended, press the air lining). S
deflector downward until it engages in the 3. Hold the convertible top element in this position.
windshield frame. T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
253
Targa Roof System
A Locking the convertible top element

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K Fig. 216: Extending the latching hook Fig. 217: Pulling the convertible top element forward
L 2. Insert emergency operation key B into the access 4. Pull the convertible top element forward to the
M for the roof lock emergency operation and turn windshield frame.
Fig. 215: Detach the plug at the access for the roof lock clockwise or counter-clockwise until it slides in-
N emergency operation to the catch.
O 1. Detach plug O at the access for the roof lock 3. Turn plastic attachment B counter-clockwise
emergency operation. until the latching hook is fully extended (notice-
P able resistance).
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X Fig. 218: Locking the convertible top element
Y 5. To fully close the convertible top element, turn

emergency operation key B clockwise until the
Z
254
Targa Roof System
latching hook fully engages in the catch (notice- Closing the glass rear screen A
able resistance).
B
Installing the visual screen C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 220: Closing the glass rear screen
N
Closing the glass rear
WARNING
screen O
Fig. 219: Installing the visual screen
1. Insert the visual screen on the right-hand side of Hands may become trapped between the glass rear P
the vehicle. screen and stationary vehicle parts when closing the Q
2. Press the visual screen down on the left-hand glass rear screen.
side of the vehicle and lock it. e When closing, do not take hold of the glass rear R
screen by the rear edge. S
1. On the glass rear screen, reach into the upper T
part of the ventilation grille. Press the glass rear U
screen forward and close it slowly.
2. Turn emergency hand screw C clockwise using V
the emergency release key (noticeable W
resistance)
3. Installing the rear wall trim panel. X
Y
Z
255
Test Stand Measurement
A Test Stand Measurement Carrying out brake tests

B e Brake tests must only be performed on roller-
Carrying out test stand type test stands.
C
measurements The following limits must not be exceeded:
D – Test speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)
Inhalation of toxic ex-
WARNING – Test duration 20 seconds
E haust gases
F Risk of serious or fatal injury due to inhalation of Carrying out electric parking brake tests
toxic exhaust gases. e Electric parking brake tests on the brake test
G stand must only be performed with the ignition
Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless carbon
H monoxide, which is toxic even in low concentrations. switched on and with the manual gearshift lever
in neutral or with the double clutch transmis-
I e Perform work with the engine running only out- sion (PDK) in operating mode N (transmission
doors or with suitable extraction systems for the parking brake not activated).
J exhaust gases. The vehicle switches automatically to the brake test
K stand mode in which the electric parking brake can
Inadequate securing of
L WARNING be tested. A message appears on the instrument
vehicle cluster.
M
An unsecured or incorrectly secured vehicle can
N move unintentionally or tip or fall off lifting equip-
ment such as a jack or lifting platform. This can
O
cause serious injuries and damage.
P e Raise the vehicle using a jack on a solid and flat
Q surface only.
e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking
R points on the vehicle underbody.
S e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when
working under the vehicle. The vehicle jack is not
T suitable for this purpose.
U e Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall.
V
W Power measurement
X Porsche does not authorize power measurements on
roller-type test stands.
Y
Z
256
Towing
Towing NOTICE Special note for vehicles with a faulty or fully dis- A
charged battery
B
Information Danger of significant damage to the vehicle. e If the battery is faulty or completely discharged,
the only way to start the engine is to replace the C
e Always observe the legal requirements relating e Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Never
battery or through emergency starting with
to the towing and tow starting of vehicles. attach tension straps to the towing hook. jumper cables.
D
e Vehicles should only be towed with great care. > Please see chapter "Battery" on page 69. E
e Vehicles with manual transmissions may only be
Before driving, both drivers should familiarize > Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on
tow-started or push-started when the engine is F
themselves with the special conditions that ap- page 118.
cold. If the engine is warm, unburnt fuel could
ply to tow-starting and towing. damage the catalytic converter. Information for towing a vehicle on all four wheels G
e In the event of a power failure or faults in the If the battery is faulty or completely discharged, the e Switch on the ignition so that the brake lights
electrical system, it may be necessary to connect
H
only way to start the engine is to replace the battery and turn signals are working and the steering
an external power supply in order to release the or through emergency starting with jumper cables. wheel lock is not locked. I
electric parking brake or the steering column
> Please see chapter "Battery" on page 69. Information for towing a vehicle on one axle (rear- J
lock.
> Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on wheel drive vehicles only) K
page 118. e Switch ignition off. Leave the vehicle key in the
Tow-starting and push-starting ignition lock to prevent the steering wheel lock L
the vehicle Towing the vehicle with manual from locking. M
transmission1 e Make sure that the vehicle is sufficiently
NOTICE illuminated. N
Increased steering and
WARNING
braking forces due to no O
Danger of significant damage to the vehicle and
power assistance
Towing the vehicle
transmission from tow-starting or push-starting ve- e Vehicles with manual transmission: Move the P
hicles with PDK. There is no power steering on the towed vehicle gear lever to neutral. Q
e Never tow-start or push-start the vehicles. when the engine is not running. This means that e Do not exceed the maximum speed of
e Do not attempt to tow the vehicle. greater force is required for braking and steering. 30 mph (50 km/h). A vehicle should not be R
e Call a roadside assistance or breakdown recovery e Vehicles should only be towed with great care. towed for more than 30 miles (50 km). If a ve- S
service. hicle needs to be towed for longer distances, it
e Have the vehicle transported with both axles on a must be transported on a car transporter or T
Special note for vehicles with all-wheel drive/Por-
recovery vehicle, transport truck or trailer. trailer. U
sche Traction Management (PTM)
> Please see chapter "Transporting the vehicle on
e The vehicle must be transported on a car trans- V
car trains, ferries and vehicle transporters" on
porter or trailer, or must have all four wheels on
page 259. W
the ground when being towed. It is not permis-
sible to lift the vehicle and tow it on one axle (ir- X
respective of whether it is the front or rear axle).
Y
Z
257
Towing
A Pulling out a vehicle that has become stuck Special note for vehicles with a faulty or fully dis- Using a towing hook
B e Always pull out the vehicle with the greatest charged battery
care. e If the battery is faulty or completely discharged,
C e Never pull out a vehicle abruptly or at an angle. the only way to start the engine is to replace the
D e If possible, pull the vehicle backward, following battery or through emergency starting with
the track previously made. jumper cables.
E > Please see chapter "Battery" on page 69.
> Please see chapter "Emergency Starting" on
F Towing a vehicle with double page 118.
G clutch transmission (PDK) > Please see chapter "Transporting the vehicle on
car trains, ferries and vehicle transporters" on
H page 259.
I
J Using tow rope or tow bar
e Data and installation instructions can be found in
K the accessory manufacturer's manual. Follow the
L manufacturer's safety and operating
instructions.
M e Always observe the permissible towing force of Fig. 223: Towing hook
Fig. 221: Permissible towing the towing rope or towing bar. The towing rope
N
or towing bar must be approved for the vehicle Attaching the towing hook
O weight. Never exceed the manufacturer's The towing hook is stored in the tool box.
P specifications. > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on
e The towed vehicle must not be heavier than the page 162.
Q towing vehicle. 1. Push the plastic cover into the bumper at the
e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be bottom until it disengages or carefully disengage
R
towed. the plastic cover using a suitable object (e.g.
S e When towing, first screw the towing hook into screwdriver).
T the vehicle before attaching the towing rope or 2. Pull the plastic cover out of the bumper and let it
towing bar to the towing hook. hang by its thread.
U > Please see chapter "Using a towing hook" on 3. Screw in the towing hook A as far as possible
V page 258. counterclockwise (left-hand thread) and tighten
Using a towing rope by hand.
W
e Always keep the towing rope taut when towing.
X Avoid jerky and sudden loading.
Y Using a towing bar
Z Fig. 222: Impermissible towing e Do not attach the towing bar diagonally between
the vehicles.
258
Towing
Removing the towing hook Tying down vehicle on flat bed Transporting the vehicle on car A
1. Unscrew the towing hook A (turn it to the right, trains, ferries and vehicle B
left hand thread).
2. Insert the plastic cover at the lower edge of the
transporters C
opening. 1. Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Never
attach tension straps to the towing hook. D
3. Fold up the plastic cover and press at the top
until it engages in the bumper. 2. Deactivate the passenger compartment moni- E
toring system and inclination sensor.
4. Store the towing hook in the tool box. F
> Please see chapter "Alarm system" on page 61.
3. Activate Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus G
Using flat bed (PTVS Plus) transport mode.
> Please see chapter "Transport" on page 218.
H
Pulling vehicle onto flat bed
I
J
K
L
M
Fig. 225: Tying down vehicle on flat bed
N
1. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening
in the rear wheels. Make sure metal parts of O
straps do not damage rim. Make sure the strap is
flat over the rim bead. Make sure brake backing
P
plate is not damaged. Q
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension tie-
R
down straps. S
4. Carefully feed towing straps through the opening T
in the front wheels. Make sure metal parts of
Fig. 224: Pulling vehicle onto flat bed straps do not damage rim. Make sure the strap is U
flat over the rim bead. Make sure brake backing
1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat V
plate is not damaged.
bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed. W
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
of the vehicle for any interference. 6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not X
disconnect.
Y
Z
259
Traffic sign recognition
A Traffic sign recognition1 If a speed limit is restricted to a wet road, fog or a Information
certain time, the detected additional sign is com-
B WARNING
Lack of attention
pared with the information provided by the vehicle To avoid impairing the detection performance of the
C (e.g. rain sensor, navigation data and time). camera:
Responsibility while driving, e.g. choosing an appro- The bend ahead warning is issued approx. 500 ft. – Do not cover the camera area on the rearview
D (150 m) before a bend that is significant for the mirror A with objects (e.g. stickers).
priate speed, remains with the driver even when us-
E ing traffic sign recognition. The system does not driver and continues until the relevant bend has been – The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice
replace the driver's attentiveness. passed. and snow.
F Traffic sign detection is country-dependent and is
Traffic sign recognition does not adjust the speed of
G the vehicle to specified speed limits. not available for all countries.
Information
H e Drive with extreme care. When driving in a country in which traffic sign de-
e Always check the traffic situation and the area
tection is not available, the driver is alerted to this If the camera does not detect a traffic sign, the
I fact by a message on the instrument cluster. speed limit stored in the navigation system will be
around the vehicle.
J e Adjust driving speed to road conditions. automatically displayed.
K Failure of camera to de-

WARNING
L tect traffic signs
M The camera’s view can be reduced by different in-

fluencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy spray
N
and oncoming headlights). In some circumstances,
O the camera may not detect traffic signs or may de-
tect them incorrectly, which will result in a speed Fig. 226: Windshield camera
P
limit or bend ahead warning not being displayed or
Q being displayed incorrectly. Traffic signs always take Information
precedence.
R Traffic sign detection is available in restricted form
e Always pay attention to traffic signs. in the following situations, for example:
S e Drive with extreme care. – Camera heavily soiled, iced-up or covered (e.g.
T e Always keep your eyes on the road ahead. stickers).
U Traffic sign detection detects speed restrictions, the – Unfavorable weather conditions (e.g. heavy rain)
start and end of no overtaking zones and bend ahead – Traffic signs covered or damaged.
V signs using camera A. The traffic signs are evaluated
W in combination with the map data stored in the nav-
igation system and appear in the instrument cluster.
X
Y
Z
260
Traffic sign recognition
Displaying speed limits and bend Information A

ahead warning – In traffic-calmed areas or play streets, the dis- B
play shows "3 mph (5 km/h)". C
– On unsigned highway and highway on and off-
ramps, the respective speed limit for surface D
roads (out of town) is displayed. E
F
Speed limit warning G
A speed limit warning with a warning threshold of H
0 – 12 mph (0 – 20 km/h) can be activated in the
PCM. When this threshold is exceeded, the relevant I
traffic sign starts to "glow". The displayed traffic J
sign also flashes the first time the threshold is
exceeded. K
L
Activating speed limit warning
M
e ASSIST e Options e Assistance
Fig. 227: Traffic sign display in instrument cluster system settings e Speed limits N
A Main traffic sign

O
B Bend ahead warning P
Up to three main traffic signs A including additional Q
signs can be displayed in the Speed & Assist display
in the instrument cluster. The traffic sign with the R
highest priority is on the left. S
The most recently valid speed limit appears in the
instrument cluster after the ignition is switched on. T
If no speed limit was detected or if traffic sign de- U
tection is not available in the current area, a notifi-
cation will appear in the instrument cluster. V
> Please see chapter "Warning and Information W
X
Y
Z
261
Transmission
A Transmission switched off, the transmission parking lock is auto- Reading the indicator for the mode and en-
matically engaged in the D, M or R operating modes. gaged gear
B
Driving with Porsche Doppelkup-
C Starting the engine
plung (PDK) The engine can only be started if the brake pedal is
D The 8-speed Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a pressed and mode P or N is activated.
E transmission featuring an automatic and a manual
shifting mode. Driving off
F
e Only select the desired operating mode for driv-
In automatic shifting mode (operating mode D),
G gear changing is automatic. You can change tempo- ing off (D, M or R) when the engine is idling and
rarily from automatic to manual shifting mode using keep the brake pedal pressed while doing so.
H the shift paddles on the steering wheel.
e Because the vehicle moves (creeps) when a gear
I In manual shifting mode (operating mode M), you is engaged, you should only release the brake
can change gear using the shift paddles on the
when you want to drive off.
J steering wheel. You can switch between the D and M
Driving off on hills
modes as required while driving.
K > Please see chapter "HOLD Function" on
e Make sure that the gearshift paddles on the page 135.
L steering wheel are not accidentally operated in
automatic and manual shifting mode, triggering Stopping the vehicle
M
unintended gearshifts.
N e For a brief stop (e.g. at traffic lights), leave the
Fig. 228: Operating mode and engaged gear display
Changing operating mode selector lever in operating mode D or M and hold
O the vehicle with the brake pedal. When the engine is running, the operating mode A
Operating mode P is active when the ignition is
P e Do not use the accelerator pedal to hold the ve- and the engaged gear B are displayed.
switched off.
hicle on gradients. but use the brake pedal or If you accidentally change to a different operating
Q The brake pedal must be pressed to switch from the electric parking brake instead. mode from P or N without pressing the brake, the
P operating mode to the N, D or R operating mode.
e Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the operating mode will not be engaged. A message ap-
R The brake pedal must be pressed to switch from the pears on the instrument cluster.
electric parking brake and activate operating
D to R operating mode or from the R to D operating
S mode P. e To drive off, press the brake pedal and engage
mode.
the desired operating mode again from P or N.
T It is only possible to switch to the M operating mode Parking the vehicle Operating mode R or D flashes in the instrument
from the D operating mode. In order to switch to the
U e Press gently on the accelerator pedal! cluster
P operating mode, either the P button on the selec-
V tor lever has to be pressed or the ignition has to be e When parking or maneuvering in a small space, An attempt was made to select operating mode R
control the speed by careful use of the brake above the permissible speed limit.
switched off.
W pedal. e Brake the vehicle to a standstill and engage the
X P button desired operating mode again from P or N with
the brake pedal pressed.
Y The P button on the selector lever activates the
transmission parking lock. When the ignition is
Z
262
Transmission
Operating modes Information A

P – Parking lock B
If the vehicle is parked in operating mode N, operat-
You should only engage the parking lock when the ing mode P will be engaged after a few minutes. A
vehicle is stationary.
C
message appears on the instrument cluster.
D
D – Automatic shifting mode E
e Engage operating mode D for “normal” driving. F
The gears are automatically selected according
to the accelerator pedal position and vehicle G
speed. H
Information I
J
Shifting gears on the steering wheel allows you to
switch temporarily from automatic shifting mode D K
to manual shifting mode M.
Fig. 230: Manual shifting mode L
For example in the following cases:
– Downshifting before bends or when entering e Press button M. M
built-up areas. The currently engaged gear is retained when you
N
– Downshifting when driving downhill (engine change from D to M.
braking effect). When switching from M to D, the appropriate O
Fig. 229: Engaging the parking lock gearshift map for the present driving style is se-
– Downshifting for short bursts of speed. P
e Press button P. Manual shifting mode remains engaged in the fol- lected and the corresponding gear is selected.
If operating mode P flashes, the parking lock is lowing cases: Q
not engaged. The vehicle can roll away. – In overrun mode.
R
e Select operating mode P again from R. – When the vehicle is stationary, e.g. at an
intersection. S
R – Reverse gear
e Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is – If the shifting logic of the vehicle were to be T
stationary and the brake is applied. downshifted by more than one gear.
Manual shifting mode is deactivated again in the U
N – Neutral following cases: V
Operating mode N must be selected, e.g. when the – Automatically after approx. 6 seconds.
vehicle is being towed or in car washes. W
e Only select the desired drive setting for driving X
off (D, M or R) when the engine is idling and keep M - Manual shifting mode
the brake pedal pressed. The gearshift paddles on the steering wheel allow Y
the eight forward gears to be engaged. Z
263
Transmission
A Information b Select D or M operating mode.

b Porsche Stability Management (PSM) active.
B The clutch will not be closed again below a certain b Cruise control not activated.
C speed threshold. The desired operating mode must b Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) not activated.
then be engaged again from N while pressing the
D b Porsche InnoDrive (PID) not activated.
brake pedal.
1. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
E completely.
Upshift indicator for fuel consumption-optimized 2. Use the gearshift paddle to manually shift up
F
driving beyond the highest possible gear.
G The fuel economy-oriented upshift indicator makes Coasting mode is initiated.
it easier for you to save fuel while driving. The up-
H Exiting coasting mode
shift indicator lights up depending on the se-
I e Press the accelerator pedal.
lected gear, engine speed and accelerator pedal
– or –
J position, prompting you to shift to a higher gear.
Shift with the shift paddle.
e Shift to the next-higher gear when the upshift
K The engine is engaged again and coasting mode
indicator lights up. is exited.
L Fig. 231: Steering wheel with gearshift paddles
Actuating the kick-down function Driving off with Launch Control
M Upshifting with right "+" gearshift paddle
e Pull right shift paddle The kickdown function is active in operating mode D. b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package.
N e For optimum acceleration, e.g. when overtaking,
Downshifting with left "-" gearshift paddle depress the accelerator pedal quickly as far as it Loss of control over the
O WARNING
e Pull left shift paddle. will go (kickdown). vehicle or endangering
P Shifting to N – Neutral with the gearshift paddles Depending on the driving speed and the engine other road users
Q e Pull both gearshift paddles simultaneously, then speed, the transmission will downshift. In some situations (poor road conditions, driver in-
release them immediately. Upshifting takes place at the highest possible attention, etc.) control over the vehicle may be lost
R The transmission shifts to N - Neutral The ve- engine speeds. or other road users may be endangered as a result.
S hicle then rolls in neutral with the engine disen- e Only use Launch Control on public roads if the
gaged and without engine braking. The number Driving in coasting mode
T road and traffic conditions permit.
In coasting mode, the engaged gear is automatically
in the gear display flashes for the last activated e Do not endanger other road users when using
U operating mode D or M. disengaged and the engine braking effect avoided.
Launch Control.
Pulling a gearshift paddle or selecting D, R or M will The vehicle rolls in neutral.
V reengage a drive position. Manual coasting mode can be initiated by the driver.
W Automatic coasting mode (not for 911 Turbo, Information
911 Turbo S) is initiated automatically by the sys- Stresses on components increase significantly when
X tem if necessary. driving off at maximum acceleration compared to
Y Initiating manual coasting mode normal driving off.
Z b NORMAL or WET driving program activated.
264
Transmission
Launch Control is used to achieve maximum accel- Obstructed pedals Shifting from 7th to 6th gear A
WARNING
eration from a standstill. e Gently press the gear lever to the right in order to B
b Transmission is at operating temperature. Unsuitable or incorrectly secured floor mats and shift from 7th to 6th gear.
b Slight uphill gradient. other objects can restrict the movement of the ped- C
b Activate the SPORT PLUS driving program. als or interfere with operation of the pedals. Shifting from 7th to 5th gear
D
b Steering wheel in straight-ahead position. e Ensure the floor mats or other objects do not in- e Recommendation: First shift from 7th gear to
1. Press the brake pedal with your left foot. neutral N (gearshift lock active) and then to 5th E
terfere with the movement of the pedals.
2. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully and gear. F
hold it down. e When shifting gears, always make sure that the
Engine speed levels off automatically. clutch pedal is fully depressed and that the gear Displaying current gear G
A message appears on the instrument cluster. is correctly engaged. The gear display on the instrument cluster shows H
3. Release brake pedal within one second. e Always use an appropriately low gear upward and the currently engaged gear.
downward slopes. I
Engaging reverse gear
Driving with manual transmission1 This ensures optimum engine power and braking
e You should only engage reverse gear when the
J
effect.
vehicle is stationary. K
Information e You can shift to reverse gear after overriding the L
shifting lock by pressing the lever to the left.
Gears 1 to 6 are designed for normal and perform- The reversing lights come on when reverse gear M
ance-oriented operation (maximum speed is is engaged and the ignition is switched on. N
reached in 6th gear).
Seventh gear is designed to reduce the engine Driving with the upshift indicator O
speed, so that comfort levels are enhanced at higher The fuel economy-oriented upshift indicator on the P
speeds, while also reducing fuel consumption. instrument clusters helps you to develop a fuel-sav-
ing driving style. Q
Depending on the selected gear, engine speed and R
Shifting the transmission to neutral
accelerator pedal position, the upshift indicator
The neutral position N of the transmission is be- S
lights up, prompting you to shift to a higher gear.
tween 3rd and 4th gear.
e Shift to the next-higher gear when the upshift T
Shifting to 7th gear indicator lights up. U
A sequential gearshift lock is installed to prevent an
Observing the permitted engine speed V
accidental shift to 7th gear when a sporty driving
Fig. 232: Shift diagram on the gear lever
style is adopted. e Before the red zone on the tachometer scale is W
It is only possible to shift to 7th gear from 5th or reached, shift to the next higher gear or take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. X
6th gear (see (Fig. 232), white and yellow line).
Y
Z
1. Equipment may be available for use only at a later time or may only be available in certain markets.
265
Transmission
A If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel

feed is interrupted.
B
C NOTICE
D Risk of damage to the engine (over revving) when

E shifting to a lower gear.
F e Make sure not to exceed the maximum permis-
sible engine speed when shifting down.
G
H Driving with Gear shift assist
I
J
K
L Fig. 234: Example of the next gear
M When all the segments are filled in red, a + sign ap-

pears next to the engaged gear in the display as a
N prompt to shift to the next-higher gear.
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Fig. 233: Example of gear shift assist
U
e Gear shift assist
V
An upshift indicator is displayed to help with per-
W
formance-oriented driving. The gear shift assist vis-
X ualizes a prompt to the driver to upshift to the next
highest gear with a pre-indication as the segments
Y fill up. The segment color changes in sequence from
Z white to yellow to red.
266
Trip Information Display
Trip Information Display Customizing trip A

A large range of trip data, such as the trip time, the
distance traveled, the average speed or the average 1. CAR e Trip e Options e Customize B
fuel consumption, can be displayed in the PCM and trip C
in the instrument cluster. 2. Four fields can be populated from large vol- D
For information on operation of the PCM and instru- umes of trip data using drag & drop. One trip
ment cluster: data value cannot be assigned to several fields. E
> Please see chapter "Operating the instrument F
cluster" on page 140. Resetting trip data
> Please see chapter "Operating the touch display" G
on page 200. e CAR e Trip e e Reset trip data
H
Trip data display on the instru- I

ment cluster J
Displaying trip data in the Car & Info display K
1. Select Trip menu. L
2. Select a display from the list. M
Resetting the trip data

N
O
1. Trip e Reset
P
2. Select a display from the list.
Q
Trip data display in the PCM R
Displaying trip data S
1. CAR e Trip T
2. Scroll to the desired display. U

V
W
X
Y
Z
267
Vehicle Key
A Vehicle Key To stop the alarm

e Press the red button D again.
B
Using the vehicle key The horn becomes silent and the emergency flasher
C goes out.
D Information
Using the emergency key
E e Only use the vehicle key when the vehicle is in
F your sight. Removing emergency key
G The Porsche Crest on the vehicle key lights up when

the buttons are pressed. The Crest may also light up
H when driving without any of the buttons being
I pressed on the vehicle key.
Data of relevance for servicing and maintenance is
J stored on the vehicle key while driving. The Porsche
K Crest on the vehicle key may therefore light up
without actuation. For further information on storing
L and reading out the data on the vehicle key: Fig. 235: Vehicle key (NAR)
M e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. A Unlock vehicle

The remote control may not work for the following B Lock vehicle
N reasons: C Unlock luggage compartment lid
D Panic button
O – Radio waves can interfere with transmission
E Emergency key
(even radio contact between the vehicle key and
P vehicle in the case of Comfort Access). There is an emergency key E integrated in every ve-
Q – The remote control is malfunctioning due to a hicle key. The vehicle keys can be used to operate all
fault. the vehicle locks.
R e Take care of your vehicle keys: do not part with
Fig. 236: Removing emergency key
– The vehicle key battery is discharged.
e Push the emergency key upward out of the ve-
S e Never store the vehicle key together with elec- them except under exceptional circumstances.
tronic devices that are switched on (e.g. cell- e Never leave the vehicle key in the vehicle. hicle key.
T
phone, notebook, charging cable). Change where
Inserting emergency key
U you store the vehicle key if necessary. Using the panic button
e Push the emergency key into the vehicle key until
V In dangerous situations or when one's own safety is
it engages audibly.
threatened, it is possible to draw attention to the
W situation by triggering an alarm.
X To trigger an alarm
Y e Press the red button D once.
The horn sounds and the emergency flasher flashes.
Z
268
Vehicle Key
Replacing the vehicle key battery Changing the battery (CR 2032, 3V) Ordering a replacement key and A
Risk of internal burns or 1. Remove the emergency key. keeping in a safe place B
WARNING 2. Unclip the vehicle key housing to the right and
death from swallowing Vehicle keys can only be ordered from an authorized
the lithium coin cell left. Porsche dealer. This can take a long time.
C
(button battery) 3. Unscrew the battery cover counter-clockwise e Always have a replacement key available. D
and remove it.
e Keep the replacement key in a safe place, but
The vehicle key contains a lithium coin cell (battery). 4. Change the battery (check polarity). E
under no circumstances in or on the vehicle.
Swallowing the battery can cause internal burns 5. Re-fit the battery cover and screw it back on To teach new vehicle keys for the vehicle: F
firmly clockwise.
within two hours and this can result in death. e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- G
e Keep removed or new batteries out of children's Ensure that the emergency key can be pushed in ommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they
reach. again. have trained technicians and the necessary parts H
e Keep vehicle keys out of children's reach. Chil- 6. Push the vehicle key housing upwards from be- and tools.
I
dren could open the vehicle key and remove the low and clip into place. e Teach all vehicle keys belonging to the vehicle
battery. 7. Insert the emergency key. again. J
e If the battery is swallowed or inserted into a body K
orifice, seek medical attention from a doctor Starting vehicle when vehicle key Information
immediately. battery is discharged or there is L
A total of eight vehicle keys can be taught.
radio interference M
Information Malfunctions of wireless communication between N
Information
e Observe the disposal instructions for batteries. the vehicle and the vehicle key, or a discharged ve-
O
hicle key battery can disable detection of the vehicle e If a vehicle key is lost or stolen, have an author-
If the battery in the vehicle key needs to be replaced, key. ized Porsche dealer disable this vehicle key in the P
a message appears on the instrument display. The Then when starting the vehicle, observe the vehicle and change the mechanical locks if
Porsche Crest on the vehicle key no longer lights up following: Q
necessary.
when buttons are pressed on the vehicle key. 1. Open the storage compartment in the armrest on e You should notify your insurance company of the R
the center console. loss or theft of vehicle keys or of the production
> Please see chapter "Opening the storage
S
of additional or replacement keys.
compartment in the armrest" on page 248. T
2. Hold the vehicle key on the center console – in
the area between the lower control panel and
U
storage compartment in the armrest. V
3. Turn the operating device to ignition lock posi-
tion 2 and then back to position 0.
W
4. Turn the operating device to ignition lock posi- X
tion 2 again.
Y
Fig. 237: Changing battery
> Please see chapter "Starting and Stopping
the Engine" on page 245. Z
269
Vehicle Settings
A Vehicle Settings
B Different vehicle settings can be made depending on model, country and equipment. The vehicle settings listed here are therefore not available in all models,
countries and equipment versions. For safety reasons, some functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.
C
The vehicle settings are saved even when the ignition is switched off.
D > Please see chapter "Personal Settings" on page 186.
E What do I want to do? What should I select? Where?
F
Set locking and unlocking options e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Locking
G
H Adjust the lights, windshield wiper and door mirrors e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Light and visibility
I
Adjust seat heating, seat ventilation and seat position e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Seat settings
J
K Set Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Tire pressure monitoring > p. 300
L
Set the quick access buttons (◊ buttons) of the multifunction steering e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Steering wheel button/Quick
M wheel and on the center console switch panel access buttons
N
Program the garage door opener (HomeLink®) e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e HomeLink®Garage door > p. 133
O
opener
P
Q Display service history (electronic service record) e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Service history
The servicing performed and the service scope are displayed.
R
S Adjust automatic lift function e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e Smart Lift settings
T
Adapt the PCM display e CAR e CONTROL e Displays e PCM display
U
V Adapt instrument cluster display e CAR e CONTROL e Displays e Instrument cluster display
W
Adapt customized view in the instrument cluster e CAR e CONTROL e Displays e Instrument cluster display e
X
Content e Customized view
Y Four fields with different vehicle information can be populated using
Z drag & drop. One item of vehicle information cannot be assigned to
several fields.
270
Vehicle Settings
What do I want to do? What should I select? Where? A

B
Adapt additional instrument display e CAR e CONTROL e Displays e Additional instrument
C
Set the date and time e CAR e CONTROL e System e Date and time D
E
Set units e CAR e CONTROL e System e Units
F
Set voice control system e CAR e CONTROL e System e Voice control G
H
Set the language e CAR e CONTROL e System e Language
I
Adjust volume of warning signals and ParkAssist e CAR e CONTROL e System e Warning signals J
K
Perform software updates e CAR e CONTROL e System e Software update
L
Reset to factory settings e CAR e CONTROL e System e Factory settings M
Resetting to the factory settings deletes all settings made. N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
271
Voice Control
A Voice Control Starting voice control Information

B Impaired speech b Ignition is switched on.
WARNING
recognition b There must be no active phone call. – Navigation and traffic notices are not issued
during a dialog.
C b ParkAssist not active.
Your voice can change in stressful situations. This – With voice control active, list entries can be se-
D 1. Briefly press the button on the steering lected using voice control, the rotary push button
could prevent the desired telephone connection
wheel. or the touch display.
E from being established or from being established
A rising acoustic signal is heard and the symbol – If the spoken voice command is not understood
fast enough.
F for voice control appears on the PCM.
e Do not use voice control in an emergency. or if it cannot be interpreted, voice control re-
e Enter the emergency number via the touch
G 2. Say the voice command. sponds with the question Excuse me? and the
voice command can be repeated after that.
H display.
Ending voice control
I Numerous Media, Phone, Navigation functions, A/C b Voice control is active.
settings as well as and Apps can be activated via e Press the button on the steering wheel. Interrupting voice control
J voice commands. The voice control function adapts Voice control can be interrupted in order to say other
A descending signal tone sounds.
K to the speaker and learns from the very first dialog. voice commands. Activating/deactivating voice
On-board and Online voice recognition functions1 control interruption in the PCM:
L are linked seamlessly in the voice control system.
Information
M The voice control function does not support all sys- The dialog can be paused by tapping on the micro- e Select SET e System settings e Voice
tem languages. control e Interrupt voice control.
N phone symbol and started again by tapping
For information on operating the Porsche again.
O Communication Management system (PCM): Using Porsche Connect services in the voice
> Please see chapter "Porsche Communication control system
P Management (PCM)" on page 197. Further voice control button functions b Data connection is established successfully.
Q The button on the steering wheel can activate > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on
R
Opening voice control different functions, depending on the application: page 204.
– Skips a running announcement when pressed – Online search when entering navigation destina-
S briefly. tions and Portal List POIs or other point of inter-
– Interrupts the current dialog when pressed est categories from My Porsche.
T
briefly. – Dictate online language search as well as text
U – Activated by pressing and holding Siri voice messages/e-mails.
V recognition.
Notes on communication using voice control
W > Please see chapter "Switching between Ap-
Note the following points when using voice control:
ple CarPlay and use of the iPhone as an iPod" on
X page 63. – Speak clearly and at a normal volume.
Fig. 238: Voice control button on the steering wheel
Y
Z
1. Prerequisite: Data connection established.
272
Voice Control
– Stress voice commands evenly, without long – New input Navigating lists via voice control A
pauses in your speech. – Correction: If, for example, a phone number
was input in several blocks (e.g. 0711 911), Scrolling through a list B
– Reduce disruptive noises by closing the doors,
windows and sunroof, for example. the block last input is deleted. C
– Pause: Pauses voice control, e.g. when dic- e To scroll forward/backward in a list in the PCM,
– Only the driver should issue voice commands, as
tating a message. The voice control can be say Next page/previous page. D
the hands-free microphone is pointed toward the – or –
driver's side. paused for a maximum of 5 minutes. When E
this time elapses, the dialog is automatically Navigate a list via touch display or rotary push
terminated. button. F
Adjusting voice control – Help: Input help with possible voice com- G
1. CAR e CONTROL e System e Voice
mands is displayed. Saying a list item
– Cancel List entries and line numbers marked in blue in the
H
control
– Dialog-related voice commands are needed as touch display in the dashboard can be spoken. I
2. Select the desired setting. soon as a dialog is conducted with the PCM, e.g. e Say the voice command Line 1.
Line 1, Next page/Previous page, Yes/No – or –
J
Speaking voice commands Say a list entry marked in blue. K
Information
There are three types of voice commands: L
– Global voice commands can always be used. If, Further information about Porsche Connect (Help
videos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and
M
for example, the main menu NAV is active
and the voice command Station XY is spoken, Questions & Answers) can be found at www.por- N
the station mentioned is called up. sche.com/connect..
O
– General voice commands may be spoken at any
point in the dialog: P
Q
Global voice commands for radio
R
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note S
Change the reception range (Set/switch on) Tuner e.g. FM/SiriusXM/online radio/AM T
(country-dependent) U
Select station Select station Only stations that can currently be received can be V
spoken. W
X
Y
Z
273
Voice Control
A What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note

B
Set a station that can currently be (Switch on) Station e.g. Station XY Only stations that can currently be received can be
C received spoken.
D
Enter frequency (Play) Frequency e.g. 91.1 FM Directly selecting a frequency may cause the reception
E range to change.
F
G Global voice commands for media
H What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note
I Use natural voice commands Examples: Play something from the SD card. As an alternative to actual commands, the PCM can
J I want to hear rock music. detect natural voice commands (not available in all
languages).
K
L Change the media source Play e.g. SD card/USB/Bluetooth®
M Select artist/album/track/genre Play (artist) e.g. Allan Taylor Only artists/albums/tracks/genres that are available
N Play (album) e.g. Songs For The Road in the active media source can be spoken.
O Play (track) e.g. Let the Music Flow

Play (genre) e.g. Rock
P
Play e.g. Let The Music Flow from Songs for the Road
Q
Play e.g. Let The Music Flow by Allan Taylor
R Play e.g. Songs For The Road by Allan Taylor
S
Play music similar to current track Play similar music
T
U Global voice commands for Phone
V b Phone connected to the PCM.
> Please see chapter "Phone" on page 188.
W
X
Y
Z
274
Voice Control
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note A

B
Use natural voice commands Examples: I would like to call John Doe. As an alternative to actual commands, the PCM can
Call John Doe on his cell phone. detect natural voice commands (not available in all C
Show me my call list. languages).
D
Redial the last number.
E
Open the redial feature Redial
F
Enter phone number Dial number/Number e. g. 00800123456 In the next step, the system asks for the telephone G
number./The number you entered is called.
H
Call voicemail Call voicemail I
Call contact Call contact/Show contacts In the next step, the system asks for the name of the J
contact.
K
Call stored contact Calling e. g. Doe (private/work/general) If the contact is not clear, the command leads to the L
dialog. The first name, last name or both can be spo-
ken. A specific phone number can also be selected. M
N
Open call list Call list/missed calls/received calls/dialed numbers These voice commands lead to a global call list, from
which an entry can be selected or called. O
P
Read out e-mails/text messages Read out Email/Text message b The connected cellphone supports the function.
Q
Dictate messages Dictate (new) Email/(new) text message b The connected cellphone supports the function. R
The service is not available in all languages and mar-
kets. Service cannot be used with Apple devices.
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
275
Voice Control
A Global voice commands for

B Navigation
C What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note
D
Use natural voice commands Examples: Take me to e.g. San Francisco 250 Main Street. As an alternative to actual commands, the PCM can
E Take me to the next restaurant. detect natural voice commands (not available in all
F Where is the next gas station? languages).
I need gas.
G Show me the map.
H Are there traffic delays on the route?
I Enter new destination Take me to e.g. San Francisco 250 Main Street/Enter ad- To start navigation, say the whole address (house
J dress/Enter new destination number, street, city, state) in a sentence or step by
step.
K
L Select previous destination Last destinations/stored destinations
M Enter a stopover Enter stopover
N
Select home/work as destination Take me home/Take me to work Starts navigation to the stored address.
O
P Drive to the address of a stored Take me to e.g. John Doe In the next step, the system asks for the name of the
contact contact.
Q
Search for destination or point of Search (point of interest) e.g. Porsche Service Brand names or point of interest categories may be
R
interest Search e.g. an Italian restaurant nearby/along the route/at a spoken (e.g. search for point of interest, airport).
S stopover/at the destination
T
Search for a destination online Online Search/Internet search for e.g. a baker’s shop The service is not available in all languages and
U markets.
V > Please see chapter "Porsche Connect" on
page 204.
W
X Select country Enter country/change country
Y Select state Enter state/Change state
Z
276
Voice Control
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note A

B
Select town/city Enter city
C
Find restaurant/rest area/restroom/ Next restaurant/rest area/restroom/ATM/gas station Shows the respective search criterion nearby.
D
ATM/gas station
E
Start/stop route guidance Start/stop route guidance
F
Determine amount of fuel remaining Range/remaining range G
Call up traffic information Traffic Info b Route guidance active. H

I
Request arrival time When will I arrive? b Route guidance active.
J
Calculate alternative route/Avoid Calculate alternative routes/Dynamic diversions After alternative routes are calculated, you can make a K
traffic jams choice, e.g. via Route 2 or via the color of the alterna-
tive route in the map view, e.g. green. L
M
Global voice commands for air N
conditioning O
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note P

Q
Use natural voice commands Examples: I'm cold. As an alternative to actual commands, the PCM can
It's too hot. detect natural voice commands (not available in all R
languages). S
Switch on air conditioning Switch on air conditioning T
U
Set temperature Set air conditioning to e.g. 19 degrees
V
Increase/reduce temperature Increase the temperature by e.g. 2 degrees W
Seat heating Turn on seat heating X
Set seat heating to level e.g. 1 Y
Z
277
Voice Control
A What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note

B
Seat ventilation Switch seat ventilation on/off
C Switch seat ventilation to e.g. level 1
D
Switch defrost mode on Switch defrost mode on/off
E
Switch on Eco mode Switch Eco mode on/off
F
G Switch on air circulation Switch air circulation on/off
H Switch ionizer on Switch ionizer on/off

I Switch on climate synchronisation Switch climate synchronisation on/off
J
K Global voice commands for apps
L
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note
M
Use natural voice commands Examples: What's the latest in news headlines? As an alternative to actual commands, the PCM can
N
Read out the news headlines. detect natural voice commands (not available in all
O I like to see the weather report. languages).
P
Get news Show me the news
Q Show me the news from Fox News
R Get weather report Show me the weather
S How's the weather in e.g. New York
Will it rain tomorrow?
T
U Global voice commands for online
V music services
W
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note
X
Play content from Napster® Play e.g. Allan Taylor at Napster
Y
Play e.g. Jazz at Napster
Z Play e.g. Songs For The Road by Allan Taylor at Napster
278
Voice Control
Global voice commands for A

calendar B
What do I want to do? What do I have to say? Note C
D
Display appointments Show me my appointments e.g. today
What appointments do I have e.g. tomorrow after 4 pm E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
279
Warning and Information Messages
A Warning and Information

B Messages
If a warning message appears, refer to the corre-
C
sponding sections in this manual.
D When certain warning lights appear, an additional
acoustic signal sounds.
E
Warning messages are only possible if all measure-
F ment conditions are satisfied – therefore check all
fluid levels regularly.
G
The following tables are an extract from the main
H warning and information messages.
I
Safety
J
K Display Message Meaning and action required
L Airbag system error Airbag system is faulty.
M Driving permitted e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Service necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
N
O Steering assistance Power steering has failed, is restricted or is faulty.
P failure Possible to drive on.
Increased steering force e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Q Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
R
The brake fluid level is too low.
S Brake fluid level e Stop when it is safe to do so.
T (Canada)
lights up
(Canada) low e Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
U
(USA) safely
V (USA)
W Power steering has failed or is faulty.
X (Canada) Brake booster e Stop when it is safe to do so.
(Canada) failure e Do not continue driving.
Y
e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Z (USA)
280
Display Message Meaning and action required A

B
(USA)
C
The brake force distribution is faulty. D
Brake force e Stop when it is safe to do so.
(Canada)
lights up
(Canada) distribution error e Do not continue driving. E
Park vehicle e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* F
(USA) safely
(USA) G
H
ABS or Porsche Stability Management (PSM) has failed.
ABS/PSM Possible to drive on.
I
(Canada) lights up
(Canada) failure e Adapt your driving style to the situation. J
Adapted driving e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
permitted K
(USA)
(USA) L
Brake pads are worn. M
Brake pads e Have the brake pads replaced immediately. N
(Canada)
lights up
(Canada) worn e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Change brake pads O
Driving permitted P
(USA) (USA)
Q
Parking brake is in service mode. R
(Canada) Parking brake in S
service mode T
(USA) U
V
Vehicles with PDK: Transmission parking brake P not available.
P not available e Select P operating mode. W
(Canada) Vehicle can > Please see chapter "Transmission" on page 262. X
roll away Apply electric
parking brake
Y
(USA) Z
281
A Display Message Meaning and action required

B
Rain or light Rain/light sensor is defective.
C sensor error e Switch on the windshield wipers and lights manually.
D Service necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
E Example: The indicated cornering light is faulty.

F Left static cornering light e Check relevant light.
flashes defective e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
G
Check static e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
H cornering light
I
Driving light control Driving light control is faulty.
J error e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
lights up
K Status temporary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Driving permitted
L
M Example: Indicated light is defective.
Rear left turn e Check relevant light.
N
signal error e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
O Check indicator
P
High beam assist Full beam assistant is temporarily unavailable.
Q not available e Operate the high beam manually.
R Driving permitted If the fault persists:
Activate high beam e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
S manually
T
High beam assist High beam assist temporarily unavailable due to camera fault.
U not available e Clean the windshield if necessary.
V No camera view If the fault persists:
W Clean windshield e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
if necessary
X
Headlight beam Headlight leveling is faulty.
Y
adjust error e Adapt your speed to the changed conditions.
Z Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
282

B
Service necessary
C
Wiper defective Windshield wiper is defective.
D
e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Service necessary
e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* E
Significant loss of pressure on one or more tires. F

e Stop when it is safe to do so. G
e Check the relevant tire for damage.
H
lights up Check tires e Fill in sealant if necessary.
e Set the correct tire pressure at the next opportunity. I
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 300. J
K
Loss of pressure at one or more tires. L
lights up Refill tire e Set the correct tire pressure at the next opportunity.
M
N
Tire pressure monitor Fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Tire pressure is not O
flashes or
error being monitored.
lights up
Service necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* P
Q
System briefly Temporary fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
flashes or not available Tire pressure is not being monitored.
R
lights up Status temporary If the fault persists: S
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* T
Tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) requires a certain time to U
flashes or not monitored learn the wheels. V
lights up System learns over No current tire pressures are displayed during this time.
xx mph e Perform tire pressure monitoring again later.
W
X
Tire change The tire settings must be updated after a wheel change.
flashes or Y
detected e Update tire settings.
lights up
Update selection > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on page 270. Z
283

B
Tire pressure too Speed for set tire pressure has been exceeded.
C low e Reduce speed.
D or e Top off the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
lights up
E Comfort pressure
Reduce
F speed
G
Pedestrian warning The pedestrian warning is temporarily unavailable.
H not available If the fault persists:
I Service necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
J
* Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and the necessary parts and tools.
K
L Engine
M
Display Message Meaning and action required
N
O Oil level below minimum.
e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so and switch off the engine.
P e Check whether there is an obvious oil leak in or under the vehicle. Do not
Oil level critical
Q continue driving if there is an obvious oil leak.
Add up to e Call up oil measurement in instrument cluster:
R xx l
e Add oil if necessary.
S > Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123.
T e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
U Oil level too high Oil level above maximum.

Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
V
Service necessary
W
X Oil level measurement Oil level measurement is faulty.
error e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Y Driving permitted
Z Visit workshop
284

B
Oil level low Minimum oil level reached.
Add up to e Top up oil. C
xx l > Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123. D
Oil pressure is too low. E
e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so and switch off the engine. F
e Do not continue driving.
G
Oil pressure low e Check whether there is an obvious oil leak in or under the vehicle.
e Call up oil measurement in instrument cluster: H
Park vehicle
e Add oil if necessary. I
safely
> Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123.
e Do not continue driving if the warning message is displayed even when J
the oil level is correct. K
L
Oil pressure Oil pressure measurement is faulty. M
measurement error Possible to drive on.
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* N
Visit workshop O
Oil temperature is too high. P
e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so, switch off the engine and let it Q
Oil temperature too cool down.
high e Do not continue driving. R
Reduce load e Call up oil measurement in instrument cluster: S
e Add oil if necessary.
T
> Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123.
U
Oil temperature Oil temperature gage is faulty. V
display error Possible to drive on.
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* W
Visit workshop X
Coolant temperature gage Coolant Engine coolant level is too low. Y
at maximum mark level too low Z
285

B
e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so, switch off the engine and let it
C cool down.
e Check engine coolant level:
D Park vehicle > Please see chapter "Coolant" on page 105.
safely
E e Add engine coolant if necessary.
F If the fault persists:
G
H Coolant temperature Coolant temperature gage is faulty.
gauge error e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
I
Driving permitted
J Visit workshop
K Coolant or engine oil temperature is too high.
L e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so, switch off the engine and let it
cool down.
M
Engine temperature e Check radiators and air guides in and on the vehicle for obstructions.
N Coolant or oil temperature too high e Checking coolant and engine oil level
O gage at maximum mark Park vehicle and allow > Please see chapter "Engine Oil" on page 123.
engine to cool e Add coolant if necessary.
P > Please see chapter "Coolant" on page 105.
Q If the fault persists:
R
S Coolant pump is faulty.
Coolant pump
T Possible to drive on.
error
U
Reduced Engine power is reduced.
V
flashes or engine power Possible to drive on.
W lights up Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
X Visit workshop
Y flashes or Engine control Engine control system is faulty.

Z lights up error
286

B
e Stop when it is safe to do so and switch off the engine.
Park vehicle
e Do not continue driving. C
safely
e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* D
Engine control Engine control system is faulty. E
error Possible to drive on. F
Visit workshop G
H
I
Vehicle J
K
L
Vehicle electrical system is faulty. M
Vehicle electrical system error
e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so.
e Do not continue driving. N
Park vehicle safely
e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* O
Engine run req. Vehicle electrical system is faulty. P
for electricity e Stop when it is safe to do so. Q
Vehicle electrical system e Do not continue driving.
error Park vehicle e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* R
safely S
Vehicle electrical system error Vehicle electrical system fault or battery is low.
T
or Possible to drive on. U
Battery low e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* V
Service necessary
W
The Start Stop function is not available at present. X
Start/stop failure If the fault persists: Y
Z
287

B
Vehicles with PDK: Transmission failure.
C Transmission The vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop.
D failure Not possible to drive on.
E Park vehicle e Immediately stop when it is safe to do so.
safely e Have the vehicle towed to an authorized Porsche dealer.
F > Please see chapter "Towing" on page 257.
G
Transmission overheated Vehicles with PDK: Transmission temperature is too high.
H e Immediately stop when safe to do so and let the transmission cool down.
Park vehicle
I safely Allow e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
transmission to cool
J
K Vehicles with PDK: Transmission temperature is too high.
Possible to drive on. A "warning jerk" can be felt when driving off. Engine
L
power may be restricted.
Transmission tem-
M e Stop when it is safe to do so.
perature too high
N e Reduce engine load.
Reduce load
e Do not hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, but rather using the
O brake.
P e Allow the engine to run in mode P or N until the warning disappears.
Q Transmission error Vehicles with PDK: Transmission error.

R Possibly no Reverse gear may not be available.
reverse Possible to drive on with restricted gearshift comfort.
S
gear e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
T
Vehicles with PDK: Additional transmission service is required.
U
Service notification transmission Possible to drive on.
V e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
W
Vehicles with manual transmission: The clutch pedal must be pressed in
X Press clutch order to start the vehicle.
Y e Press the clutch pedal when starting.
288

B
Emergency call Emergency call function is faulty.
function error e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* C
Service necessary D
Service reminder E
Inspection in xx e Have the next service performed at the latest after the indicated number F
days of miles or days. However the intervals in the Maintenance booklet are
binding. G
H
Vehicle key battery is discharged.
e Place the key at the front left in the storage compartment in the center I
Key not found console to start the vehicle. J
or key error e Replace the battery.
K
Hold key back > Please see chapter "Vehicle Key" on page 268.
toward marked or L
or area Key faulty, not found or not recognized. M
or Key position faulty. N
Change key e Switch off possible interference sources.
position e Carry the vehicle key with you. O
– or – P
Change key position in vehicle.
Q
Spoiler failure Driving stability is impaired. R
Reduce e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
S
speed e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
T
Spoiler error Driving stability is impaired.
U
or e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
If the fault persists after the engine has been re-started: V
Spoiler control
or error e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* W
Adapted driving X
permitted
Y
Lift system fault. Z
Lift system error
289

B
Service necessary
C
D Lift system is not available.
Lift system currently unavailable The vehicle may not be lowered or raised as a result of thermal protection of
E Temp. protection active the system or child protection. If the fault persists:
F e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
G Lowering not possible. Door open The vehicle cannot be lowered with the door open.
H Close door e Close the door.
I Front end not lowered Speed "X mph" was exceeded. Vehicle is not lowered.
J Reduce speed e Reduce the speed to "X mph".
K To open, let go of door handle and pull The door opener was actuated too quickly or vehicle is de-energized.
L again e Release door opener and pull it again
M
N
O
P Driving systems
Q
R
S The chassis system is faulty.
Chassis system error
The vehicle handling may change.
T Adapted driving
Possible to drive on.
permitted. See owner's
U e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
manual.
V e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
W The chassis system is faulty.

Chassis system error
X The vehicle handling may change.
Visit workshop
Possible to drive on.
Y Adapted driving
permitted e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Z e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
290

B
Chassis system The chassis system has failed.
failed e Stop when it is safe to do so. C
Park vehicle e Do not continue driving. D
safely e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
E
PSM failure Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is not available. F
lights up Visit workshop Possible to drive on. G
Adapted driving e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* H
I
ABS/PSM Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is not available.
failure Possible to drive on. J
lights up
Adapted driving e Adapt your driving style to the situation. K
permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
L
PSM activated Porsche Stability Management (PSM) was switched on automatically. M
lights up
automatically
N
Vehicle stability system is only available to a restricted extent when Porsche O
PSM Sport Stability Management (PSM) is active.
Vehicle stability system Possible to drive on.
P
restricted
e Adapt your driving style to the situation. Q
All-wheel distribution Porsche Traction Management (PTM) fault.

R
system error e Reduce load. S
Adapted driving If the fault persists: T
permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
U
Drive distribution system Porsche Traction Management (PTM) is temporarily unavailable. V
failure e Reduce load.
or W
If the fault persists:
Drive distribution e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* X
system overloaded Y
Rear-wheel drive only
Adapted driving Z
291

B
permitted
C
Porsche Traction Management (PTM) is overloaded.
D Drive distribution system
e Reduce load.
temp. limit
E If the fault persists:
Reduce load
F e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
G Rear differential lock Porsche Traction Management (PTM) is overloaded.

H overloaded e Reduce load.
Adapted driving If the fault persists:
I permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
J
Rear differential Porsche Torque Vectoring Plus (PTV Plus) has failed or is faulty.
K lock failure Possible to drive on.
L or e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
M Rear differential e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
lock error
N
Adapted driving
O permitted
P Rear axle steering Rear axle steering has failed or is faulty.
Q failure Possible to drive on.
R
or e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Rear axle steering
S error
T Adapted driving
permitted
U
V Camera system Cameras are faulty.
W fault e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Service necessary
X
Y Camera system Assistance systems or cameras are faulty.
not available e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
Z Status temporary
292

B
Driving permitted
C
Camera system Assistance systems or cameras are temporarily unavailable due to weather
D
restricted conditions or dirt on the windshield.
No camera view e Clean the windshield if necessary. E
Clean windshield If the fault persists: F
if necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
G
System error One or more electrical systems may not be available. H
Driving permitted e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Service necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* I
J
ParkAssist Acoustic warning and distance measurements (e.g. with ParkAssist) are not
sound failure available. K
or e Adapt your driving style to the situation. L
Instrument cluster e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
M
sound failure
N
Driving permitted
Service necessary O
Front ParkAssist ParkAssist is not available.

P
failed e Adapt your driving style to the situation. Q
or e Note the fault when parking.
R
Rear ParkAssist e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
failed S
Driving permitted T
Service necessary
U
Parking Support Active Parking Support is restricted or faulty. V
not available Adapted driving permitted. W
Sensors restricted e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
e Have the fault rectified by an authorized Porsche dealer.* X
See owner's manual
Y
Rear Cross Traffic Alert restricted Rear Cross Traffic Alert is restricted.
Z
293

B
To use the full scope of functions of the system:
C Warning jerk not available e Switch on PSM.
D PSM inactive > Please see chapter "Porsche Stability Management (PSM)" on
page 215.
E
F Porsche Active Safe (warning assistant and BrakeAssist) is faulty.
PAS error Possible to drive on.
G Service necessary e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
H e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
I Porsche Active Safe (warning assistant and BrakeAssist) is restricted or
J faulty.
PAS restricted Possible to drive on.
K
See owner's manual e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
L If the fault persists:
M e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
N Porsche Active Safe (warning assistant and BrakeAssist) may be impaired

O due to weather conditions or dirt on the sensor in the vehicle.
PAS restricted
P Sensor dirty,
e Clean the windshield if necessary.
please clean sensor
Q If the fault persists:
R
S ACC not Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not available.
available e Take over control of the vehicle.
T
Driver takeover
U necessary
V
ACC not Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not available during ABS or PSM
W available intervention.
X ABS/PSM intervention e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
Y ACC not Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system error.

Z available Possible to drive on.
294

B
If the fault persists: C
e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* D
ACC not Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is only possible in the D or M operating E
available modes. F
Engage gear e Select D or M operating mode (transmission range).
D or M G
H
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) temporarily unavailable due to poor weather
ACC not I
conditions or dirt on the sensor.
available
e Clean the sensor. J
Sensor dirty,
please clean sensor If the fault persists:
K
L
Active Lane Keeping Active lane keeping is faulty.
error e Have the fault rectified by an authorized Porsche dealer.* M
Service required N
Active lane keeping temporarily unavailable due to poor weather conditions

O
Active Lane Keeping
or dirt on the front camera or ACC sensor. P
error
e Clean front camera and ACC sensor.
Sensor dirty, Q
If the fault persists:
please clean sensor
e Have the fault rectified by an authorized Porsche dealer.* R
S
Speed limit display Speed limit display is temporarily unavailable due to weather conditions or
currently limited dirt on the windshield. T
No camera view e Clean the windshield if necessary. U
Clean windshield If the fault persists:
V
if necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
W
Speed limit display No navigation data being received for the time being.
X
not available Possible to drive on.
Status temporary If the fault persists: Y
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* Z
295

B
or
C You are outside
D of the service
area
E
or
F No navigation data
G available
H LCA not Lane Change Assist (LCA) is temporarily unavailable due to weather
I available conditions.
Status temporary e Activate Lane Change Assist (LCA) by pressing the button.
J Driving permitted > Please see chapter "Lane Change Assist (LCA)" on page 148.
K
Lane Change Assist (LCA) sensors are covered, e.g. by stickers, dirt or a
L LCA not
build-up of ice.
available
M e Have the sensor fault corrected.
Sensor dirty,
e Activate Lane Change Assist (LCA) by pressing the button.
N please clean sensor
> Please see chapter "Lane Change Assist (LCA)" on page 148.
O
Lane Keep Assist has to intervene for a prolonged period of time.
P Please drive in the
e Align vehicle in the center of the lane or increase the distance from the
Q center of the lane lane markings.
R Lane Keep Assist detects excessively weak or no steering wheel movements
Please take over
S if the vehicle threatens to leave the lane several times.
steering
e Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times and actively steer.
T
U Lane Keep Assist Lane Keep Assist is not available.
V not available e Adapt your driving style to the situation.
W Service necessary
X
Lane Keep Assist Lane Keep Assist is temporarily unavailable due to weather conditions or dirt
Y restricted on the windshield.
Z No camera view e Clean the windshield if necessary.
296

B
Clean windshield If the fault persists:
if necessary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* C
D
Lane Keep Assist Lane Keep Assist is temporarily unavailable.
restricted If the fault persists: E
Status temporary e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.* F
Driving permitted
G
Night View Assist Night View Assist is not available. H
not available e Have the fault rectified at an authorized Porsche dealer.*
I
Night View Pedestrian detection is not available.
J
Assist Pedestrians or large wild animals will not be detected.
Pedestrian detection Possible to drive on.
K
not available e Adapt your driving style to the situation. L
Porsche InnoDrive Porsche InnoDrive is not available.

M
not available Possible to keep driving. N
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified by an authorized Porsche dealer.* O
Service necessary
P
Porsche InnoDrive Porsche InnoDrive is not available. Q
Driver control e Take over control of the vehicle.
required
R
S
Porsche InnoDrive Porsche InnoDrive is temporarily unavailable.
T
not available Possible to keep driving.
Status temporary If the fault persists:
U
Driving permitted e Have the fault rectified by an authorized Porsche dealer.* V
or
W
No map data
available X
Y
Z
297
A PCM Message Meaning and action

B required
Message Meaning and action
C required e Do not use vehicle
during the soft-
D ware update.
A software update
E has failed.
Some of the displays * Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche
F dealer, as they have trained technicians and the
and comfort func-
G tions (e.g. ParkAssist) necessary parts and tools.
H may not work.
Critical e Check the dis-
I fault plays and comfort
J Please functions (e.g.
contact ParkAssist) for
K an au- functionality be-
L thorized fore using the
Porsche vehicle.
M dealer. e Adapt your driving
N style to the
situation.
O e Have the fault
P rectified at an au-
thorized Porsche
Q dealer.*
R A software update is
S being installed.
T Some of the displays
Update in
and comfort func-
progress
U tions (e.g. ParkAssist)
Avoid us- may not work.
V ing the
e Stop when it is
W vehicle
safe to do so.
X e Do not continue
driving.
Y
Z
298
Washer fluid
Washer fluid If the washer fluid level is too low, a warning symbol A
appears on the instrument cluster.
B
Refilling the washer fluid C
D
NOTICE
E
Risk of damage to the headlights. F
e Do not lean on the headlight when topping up
the screenwash.
G
H
1. Open the cap of the washer fluid reservoir.
2. Top up the washer fluid. I
> Please see chapter "Technical Data" on J
page 327.
3. Carefully close the cap. K
L
Fig. 239: Washer fluid reservoir for windshield M
Note the following points: N
e Depending on the time of year, add appropriate
O
additives (window cleaner concentrate, freeze
protection) to the water. Note the correct mixing P
ratio as well as all warnings on the containers of
the additives used. Q
– Summer: Fill with water and window cleaner R
concentrate.
S
– Winter: Fill with water, freeze protection and
window cleaner concentrate. T
Only use window cleaner concentrates that meet the U
following requirements:
– Dilutability 1:100. V
– Phosphate-free. W
– Suitable for plastic headlights.
X
For information on window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche: Contact an authorized Porsche Y
dealer. Z
299
Wheels and Tires
A Wheels and Tires from temperature influence.

In addition to correct tire inflation pressure and cor- e Check the tire pressure at least monthly when
B
rect wheel alignment, the service life of the tires also the tires are cold.
C depends on your driving style. Abrupt acceleration, e Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
high cornering speeds and heavy braking increase and thus from leakage. Always screw caps tightly
D
tire wear. Tread wear is also increased at high out- down. Replace missing caps immediately.
E side temperatures and on rough road surfaces. e Use only plastic valve caps.
e For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating
F
Complying with load and speed bottles.
G
requirements
H e Drive at an appropriate speed. NOTICE
I e Do not overload the vehicle and pay attention to
the roof load. Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to overheat
J and thus be damaged – even invisibly
K Checking tire pressure e Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
quently correcting the tire pressure.
L DANGER
Low Tire Pressure e Never let air out of hot tires. When tires are Fig. 240: Tire pressure plate
M warm, the tire pressure is increased. This could The tire pressure must match the prescribed value.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases cause the tire pressure to fall below the pre- The tire pressure is specified on the plate at the door
N scribed value. sill area on the driver’s side and in the "Technical
risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control.
O Furthermore, low tire pressure increases rate of wear Data". The values apply to cold tires (68 °F (20 °C)).
of the affected tires and causes damage. e Check the tire pressure at least monthly when
P page 327.
e Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge when When tires are warm, the tire pressure is increased.
the tires are cold.
Q checking inflation pressures. e Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause the
R e Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure listed tire pressure to fall below the prescribed value.
Checking tire pressure with a
on the tire sidewall. Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to overheat pressure gauge
S e Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires must and thus be damaged – even invisibly. Hidden tire 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
T be cold, ambient temperature maximum 68 °F damage is not eliminated by subsequently correct- 2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.
(20 °C), when adjusting the inflation pressure. ing the tire pressure.
U 3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measuring compare it to the permissible tire pressure. This
V cold pressures, since the pressures would rise information can be found on the tire pressure
W plate or in the chapter “Technical Data”.
X page 327.
Y 4. Remove the pressure gauge.
300
Wheels and Tires
and tools. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for A
e Do not drive with tires that repeatedly lose pres- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if B
sure in a short space of time. If in doubt, have the
tire checked by an authorized Porsche dealer. under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger C
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire Pres- D
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the
necessary parts and tools. sure Monitoring System take place on the multi- E
function display. However, the tires still have to be
Fig. 241: Example of a tire pressure plate High speed at comfort inflated manually. F
WARNING
pressure. > Please see chapter "Technical Data" on G
A Seating capacity
Maximum number of vehicle occupants, including the
page 327.
Excessive speed when comfort pressure is set dam- The tire pressure monitoring system offers the fol- H
driver.
B Vehicle load limit ages the tires and wheels. lowing functionalities: I
Is the maximum total weight limit specified of the load e Reduce speed to below the maximum speed – Permanent monitoring of tire pressure and tire
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the max-
displayed in the instrument cluster. temperature. J
imum weight of passengers and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. e For higher speeds, fill the tires to the standard – Displays the actual tire pressure (actual pres- K
C Vehicle load limit inflation pressure. sure) while driving.
Size of tires mounted at the factory. – Tire pressure warnings in two stages (yellow and
L
D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be red warning). M
These values are for cold tires (68 °F (20 °C)). checked monthly when cold and inflated to the in- – Vehicle stationary: Display of pressure difference
flation pressure recommended by the vehicle man- in relation to the set pressure.
N
ufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different The tire pressure warning light and a corre-
O
(TPMS) size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or sponding message on the instrument cluster warn P
Defective tires tire inflation pressure label, you should determine against loss of pressure in two stages (yellow and
WARNING the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) Q
red tire pressure warning, depending on the extent
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been of the pressure loss). R
Driving with defective tires can result in serious equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure warning light only goes out when
accidents. (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale S
the tire pressure has been corrected to the set
e When a red tire pressure warning appears on the when one or more of your tires is significantly under- pressure. T
instrument cluster: Stop immediately in a suit- inflated. Accordingly, when the tire pressure warning The yellow tire pressure warning is displayed for
light comes on, you should stop, check your tires as U
able place and check the tires for damage. If around 10 seconds after the vehicle comes to a
necessary, remedy the damage with tire sealant soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper standstill and the ignition has been switched off or V
or mount the spare wheel. pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated when the ignition is switched on again. The yellow
W
e Do not continue to drive with defective tires.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire tire pressure warning can be acknowledged when
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency the ignition is switched on. The red tire pressure X
Have defective tires replaced immediately. Con-
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han- warning also appears while driving and can be
sult an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- Y
dling and stopping ability. acknowledged.
have trained technicians and the necessary parts Z
301
Wheels and Tires
A e If the tire pressure warning light comes on and a – Missing wheel sensors for the Tire Pressure e Tire pressure e Pressure deviation
tire pressure warning is displayed even with a Monitoring System.
B correct tire pressure: Visit an authorized Porsche
The pressure deviation from the set pressure on the
– In the learning phase after the tire settings have relevant wheel is displayed. Example:
C dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized Por- been updated.
If the reading for the rear right tire is shown as
sche dealer, as they have trained technicians and – After the wheels have been changed without
D –0.1 bar, this tire needs to be inflated by
the necessary parts and tools. updating the tire settings. 1.4 psi (0.1 bar). The tire temperature has already
E – If the tire temperatures are too high. been taken into account in the pressures shown.
F Information > Please see chapter "Warning and Information e You should only use the pressure difference from
The tire pressure monitoring system issues warnings Messages" on page 280. the display or the corresponding tire pressure
G warning to correct the tire pressure.
relating to loss of pressure due to natural diffusion
H and gradual loss of pressure caused by foreign Retrieving the tire pressure
bodies. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System cannot The individual tire pressures are only displayed Setting the tires
I Settings for the tire type and tire size, load and
warn you about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e. above a speed of approx 16 mph (25 km/h) or if the
J g. a flat tire due to unexpected external effects). tire is filled to at least 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). When the comfort/standard pressure can be made via the
ignition is switched on after the vehicle has been touch display in the dashboard:
K stationary for more than approx. 10 minutes, lines > Please see chapter "Setting the Tire Pressure
L Malfunctions in the tire pressure monitoring (-.-) are shown in place of the tire pressures. Monitoring System (TPMS) in the PCM" on
system page 303.
M e Tire pressure e Current pressure
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
N malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is The actual pressures are displayed for information Displaying the tire temperature
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi- purposes only. The tire pressures change according Loss of control over the
O cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. to the temperature. WARNING
vehicle
P When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale e Never change the tire pressures on the basis of
will flash for approximately one minute and then re- this display. Despite the advantages of the tire temperature dis-
Q main continuously illuminated. This sequence will play, drivers remain responsible for adapting their
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long Displaying pressure difference driving style and maneuvers to the road and weather
R
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction in- conditions and to the traffic situation.
S dicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to The tire temperature display cannot reduce the risk
T detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS of accidents due to inappropriate speed.
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, in-
e Adapt your driving style and maneuvers to the
U cluding the installation of replacement or alternate
road and weather conditions and to the traffic
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
V situation.
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
W malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package
X
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re- b Summer or ultra high performance tires (UHP
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the tires) mounted and selected in the TPMS.
TPMS to continue to function properly. Fig. 242: Example pressure difference
Y The tire temperature display assists the driver in as-
Monitoring is interrupted in the following cases: b Vehicle is stationary. sessing the current operating range of the tires.
Z
– Fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
302
Wheels and Tires
It allows conclusions to be drawn regarding the level Information Calling up pressure deviation and inflation A
of grip and the rigidity of the tires. information
B
The summer and UHP tires approved by Porsche b Vehicle is stationary.
Information ensure safe vehicle handling over a wide tempera- C
ture range, including with cold tires. e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e TPMS e
The tire temperature is calculated based on several e Adapt your driving style and maneuvers to the D
Pressure deviation
variables (e.g. acceleration, wheel speed, ambient road and weather conditions and to the traffic E
temperature, etc.). The tire temperature display situation. The required pressure, the pressure difference from
the required pressure at the relevant wheel as well F
shows a mean value of the temperatures of the tire e Bring the tires to operating temperature for driv-
tread surface, the belt core and the interior of the as the setting for load, tire type and size are
ing with the maximum dynamics experience or G
tire. It is therefore not possible to measure the dis- displayed.
for driving on racetracks.
played tire temperature at any specific point of the Example: If the reading for the right rear tire is H
tire. shown as –0.1 bar, this tire needs to be inflated by
I
Setting the Tire Pressure Monitor- 1.4 psi (0.1 bar). The tire temperature has already
been taken into account in the pressures shown.
Display ing System (TPMS) in the PCM e You should only use the pressure difference from
J
The tire temperature is displayed as a colored bar
next to the tire pressure (actual pressure) for each Incorrect settings the display or the corresponding tire pressure K
WARNING
wheel on the instrument cluster. warning to correct the tire pressure. L
A cold tire is indicated by a blue bar. During the In the case of tires that have not yet been taught-in,
Tire pressure that is too low or too high destroys the M
transition period, the color of the bar changes from the new target pressures are displayed instead of
tire and wheel, extends the braking distance and
blue to white. When the tire is at operating temper- the actual pressure differences. N
significantly increases the risk of an accident.
ature, the bar is white. The larger the bar appears,
the warmer the tire is. Although the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is Setting the tire type and tire size O
available, it is the driver's responsibility to ensure
P
that the tires are inflated to the correct tire pressure
Cold Information
and that the vehicle settings are correct. Incomplete Q
or incorrect settings can affect the output of warn- The options available depend on the model and tire
R
ings and notices. type. It is therefore possible that not all the options
Transition period S
e Adjust tire pressure to suit your tires and the shown here are available.
load. e Before fitting tires and wheels with dimensions T
e Ensure that the settings in the TPMS menu cor- that are not available for selection in the Tire
Operating temperature Pressure Monitoring System menu, the missing U
respond to the tires fitted on the vehicle and the
current load of the vehicle (especially after a information should be added. Visit an authorized
V
wheel change or changes in vehicle loading). Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an author-
e Select tire type and size in the Tire Pressure
ized Porsche dealer, as they have trained techni- W
cians and the necessary parts and tools.
Monitoring menu again, even if a newly mounted X
wheel set corresponds to the settings of the e Only use tires and wheels approved by Porsche.
predecessor. Y
Z
303
Wheels and Tires
A e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e TPMS e Learning the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire selection After the tires have been changed, the wheel sensor
B
has been replaced, or the tire settings have been
C Selecting full load or partial load updated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System starts
learning the tires. The tire pressure control system
D
e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e TPMS e recognizes the wheels and their installation position.
E Full load The position and pressure data is available as soon
as the Tire Pressure Monitoring System has assigned
F Full load the recognized wheels to the correct wheel position.
G Full load is activated. During this process, the required pressures for cold
Full load tires (68 °F (20 °C)) are displayed in the PCM and a
H Partial load is activated. message appears on the instrument cluster.
I e Adapt the tire pressures to the selected load The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
type. cluster remains lit until all the wheels have been
J
learned.
K Information
L If the option Full load is not displayed, the specified
Uniform Tire Quality Grading and Fig. 243: Treadwear, Traction and Temperature of the Tire
M tire pressures are valid for all types of vehicle load. Glossary of Tire Terminology Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
Tire Abuse tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
N WARNING section width. All passenger vehicle tires must con-
O Selecting comfort pressure or standard form to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
pressure The temperature grade for this tire is established for these grades. Quality grades can be found where
P The tire pressures can be reduced to enhance a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. applicable.
Q comfort. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
With comfort pressure, the Tire Pressure Monitoring ing, either separately or in combination, can cause Treadwear
R System automatically uses lower target pressures heat buildup and possible tire failure. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
S for tire pressure monitoring. e Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed for on the wear rate of the tire when tested under con-
the tires fitted to the vehicle. trolled conditions on a specific government test
T e CAR e CONTROL e Vehicle e TPMS e e Ensure that the tires are set to the correct infla- course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
U Comfort pressure one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-
tion pressure.
Comfort pressure e Observe the maximum load for the vehicle. ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative per-
V formance of tires depends upon the actual
Comfort pressure is activated. conditions of their use, however, and may depart
W Comfort pressure significantly from the norm due to variations in driv-
X Standard pressure is activated. ing habits, service practices and differences in road
e Adjust tire pressures to comfort pressure or characteristics and climate.
Y
standard pressure. > Please see chapter "Checking tire tread" on
Z page 309.
304
Wheels and Tires
Traction AA, A, B, C Ply Cold inflation pressure A

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords. The tire pressure of a cold tire with ambient tem- B
A, B, and C and they represent the tire's ability to perature maximum 68 °F / 20 °C and the vehicle out
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled Cord of direct sunlight exposure. C
conditions on specified government test surfaces of The strands forming the plies in the tire. D
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor Maximum permissible inflation pressure
traction performance. Rim The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire E
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly may be inflated. F
Information upon which the tire beads are seated.
Recommended inflation pressure G
The traction grade assigned to this is based on Bead The cold inflation pressure found on the tire pressure
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does not H
The part of the tire made of steel wires, wrapped or plate.
include cornering (turned) traction, acceleration, hy- I
reinforced by ply cords, that is shaped to fit the rim.
droplaning or peak traction characteristics. kPa (Kilopascal) J
Sidewall A metric unit for tire pressure.
The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
K
Temperature A, B, C
PSI (Pounds per square inch) L
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation Tread A standard unit for tire pressure.
> Please see chapter "Loading information" on M
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested The portion of the tire that comes in contact with
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor the road. page 328. N
laboratory test wheel.
O
Sustained high temperatures can cause the material Tire pressure plate Overloading
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and A label in the door sill area at the driver’s door pro- P
Overloading
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire viding information about seating capacity, vehicle DANGER
Q
failure. load limit, original tire size and recommended infla-
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance tion pressure. Overloading can lead to dangerous vehicle reactions R
which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under and long braking distances.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) S
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. e Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about
Grades B and A represent higher levels of perform- An identification number on radial tires providing in- the roof load. T
ance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum formation about the manufacturer, tire size, tire type e If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the U
required by law. and date of manufacture. tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can
be found on the tire pressure plate and in the V
Glossary of tire terminology Inflation pressure chapter technical data. W
A measure of the amount of air in the tire. The tire e Never exceed the specified axle load.
Radial ply tire pressure is measured in kilopascals (kPa), pounds X
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords which extend per square inch (psi) or bar.
Y
to the beads are laid at substantially 90° to the cen-
terline of the tread. Z
305
Wheels and Tires
A NOTICE The tire is inflated. – 101 – Load capacity coefficient.

3. Check inflation pressure using the pressure gage – Y – Speed code letter.
B
Risk of damage to the vehicle and to the tires. Dam- and reduce tire pressure or continue filling as – XL (Extra Load) – Tire with increased load rating.
C age due to overloading is not covered by the vehicle required. Check the inflation pressure again.
warranty. 4. Switch off the compressor. B – TIN (Tire Identification Number)
D
5. Unscrew the compressor filler hose. Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
Tire damage may also be caused by overloading, and
E The DOT symbol indicates that the tires comply with
this damage is not covered by your tire warranty.
Information the requirements of the US Department of Trans-
F e Do not overload your vehicle. Be careful about portation and provides information about:
G the roof load. You can also check the tire pressure and inflate your – First two-digit code indicates the manufacturer’s
e If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the tires at service stations.
H identification mark.
tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can
– Second two-digit code indicates the tire size.
I be found on the tire pressure plate and in the Reducing inflation pressure – Third four-digit code indicates the tire type code.
chapter “Technical Data”.
J 1. Switch off the compressor.
e Never exceed the specified axle load.
– Fourth four-digit code indicates the date of
2. Open air bleed screw on the filler hose until the manufacture. If, for example, the last four num-
K correct inflation pressure is achieved. bers read 0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd
week of 2004.
L Inflating tires
M
Reading off inscription on tires
Hot filler hose C – Tire ply composition and material
CAUTION
N The number of layers in the tread and side walls and
their material composition.
O The compressor filler hose can become hot during
filling and cause burns.
P D – Maximum permissible inflation pressure
e Wear gloves.
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure to
Q which a tire can be inflated.
The compressor is located under the cover in the
R luggage compartment. e Do not exceed the permissible inflation pressure.
S > Please see chapter "Luggage Compartment" on
page 162. Fig. 244: Inscription on radial tires E – Maximum load rating
T > Comply with the operating instructions on the The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can be
compressor. A – Tire size carried by the tire. If you replace tires always use a
U
Example: P 265/40R18 (101Y) tire that has the same maximum load rating as the
1. Screw the compressor filler hose onto the tire
V – P – The tire is designed for Passenger vehicles. factory installed tire.
valve.
W This information is not included on all tires.
2. Connect the compressor to a socket in the ve- F – Radial
hicle and switch on the compressor. – 265 – Indication of tire width in mm.
X – 40 – Indication of tire height to tire width ratio in The identification indicates if the tire has a radial
percent. structure.
Y
– R – Belt type code letter for radial.
Z – 18 – Indication of rim diameter in inches.
306
Wheels and Tires
G – Term of tubeless or tube tire heavily or at an acute angle. A

Identification for tubeless tires. e If in doubt, have the tire, especially the inner side,
B
checked by an expert. Go to a qualified special-
Speed code letter ized repair shop. Porsche recommends an au- C
The speed code letter indicates the maximum per- thorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained
D
mitted speed for the tire. This rating is indicated on technicians and the necessary parts and tools.
the tire side wall. e Tire repairs are not permissible under any cir- E
cumstances. Sealing a tire with tire sealant is
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) F
only an emergency solution so that you can drive
to the nearest workshop. G
H up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
For safety reasons, tires must be replaced in the H
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h) event of the following types of damage: I
– If the possibility of a fracture in the ply cannot be
W up to 167 mph (270 km/h) ruled out. J
– If the tire was thermally or mechanically over- K
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) loaded as a result of pressure loss or other prior
Fig. 245: Inscription on wheel damage. L
(Y) up to 186 mph (300 km/h) as for Y A Rim width in inches M
tires. Speeds of more than 185 mph B Rim-flange contour code letter Replacing tires and wheels N
C Symbol for drop-center rim
(300 km/h) are also possible at a
D Rim diameter in inches e Switch off the ignition when changing a wheel.
maximum tire load capacity of 85% E Double hump O
Lack of grip
(confirmation from tire manufacturer F Rim offset in mm WARNING
required for speeds of more than
P
185 mph (300 km/h)). Initially, new tires do not provide their full grip. Q
Identifying tire damage
e You should therefore drive at moderate speeds R
Hidden tire damage and during the first 125 mls (200 km) to extend the
Reading off inscription on wheels WARNING
damage to the rim flange service life of the tires and achieve full perform- S
The information is inscribed on the back of the ance capability.
Hidden tire damage can cause the tire to burst. You T
spokes near the tire valve.
may lose control of the vehicle. e Only tires from the same manufacturer and with U
e Check tires, including the sidewalls, regularly for the same specification code (e.g. "NA...") may be
V
embedded foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and mounted on the vehicle.
bulges. e Before mounting new tires, inquire about their W
e Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
X
possible. Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs
or objects with sharp edges (such as stones) Y
Z
307
Wheels and Tires
A current approval status: Contact an authorized Information M+S designation or the snowflake symbol, de-
Porsche dealer. pending on the country, on the tire sidewall. Ob-
B
e Use only tire makes tested and approved by If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice- serve country-specific regulations.
C Porsche. able change in handling occurs due to the different e Affix the sticker with the maximum permitted
e The difference in tread depths on one axle must tread depth of the other tires. This is especially the speed in the driver's field of vision. Observe
D case if only the rear tires are replaced. However, this
not exceed 30%. country-specific regulations.
E e Only use second-hand tires if their prior usage is effect is reduced continuously as the new tires are e Set the maximum permitted speed as the speed
known. broken in. limit.
F
e Always replace both tires on one axle to avoid
G any unnecessary effect on driving behavior due e Install snow tires in a timely manner before the
to varying tread depths. Checking and replacing valves and cold season begins.
H e Use only tire makes tested and approved by
e Only authorized Porsche dealers may mount valve caps
Porsche.
I tires. Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche e Use only genuine Porsche valves for the Tire
recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). e Before mounting new tires, inquire about their
J current approval status: Contact an authorized
they have trained technicians and the necessary e Have the valves checked and replaced if neces-
K parts and tools. Porsche dealer.
sary whenever the tires are changed. Porsche
e Adjust your driving style to the altered handling recommends an authorized Porsche dealer, as
L Information
behavior. they have trained technicians and the necessary
M e Only use tires with tire pressure sensors for the parts and tools. At low temperatures, juddering noises caused by the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the absence of valve caps the valve is unprotected
N tires can occur during maneuvering or accelerating
e Make sure the wheels are compatible with the from dust and dirt, resulting in leaks. out of curves on both dry and wet road surfaces.
O TPMS on your vehicle. For information on suit- e Always screw on valve caps tightly to protect The driving performance and comfort of summer
able wheels and on the TPMS on your vehicle: valve inserts from dirt. Dirty valve inserts can
P tires are impaired at low temperatures below 45 °F/
Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. cause creeping air loss. 7 °C. Porsche therefore recommends that you fit
Q e Check the battery level of the tire pressure sen- e Replace missing valve caps immediately. snow tires on the vehicle at temperatures below 45 °
R
sors when changing tires. Visit an authorized e Use only plastic valve caps. F/7 °C.
Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an author-
Extremely low temperatures below 5 °F (-15 °C) can
S ized Porsche dealer, as they have trained techni-
cians and the necessary parts and tools.
Using snow tires cause permanent damage to summer tires.
T Snow tires are no longer suitable if their tread depth
> Please see chapter "Technical Data" on Exceeding the maximum
WARNING is less than 0.16 in. (4 mm).
U page 327. permitted speed
V Exceeding the maximum permitted speed can cause
W tires to burst. Using snow chains
e Observe the maximum permitted speed for the Install snow chains only on the rear wheels and only
X with the tire/rim combinations designated for use
tire.
Y e Snow tires with a maximum permitted speed with snow chains listed in the Technical Data.
rating that is lower than the specified maximum
Z
vehicle speed may only be fitted if they bear the
308
Wheels and Tires
e Only use snow chains approved by Porsche so Information Changing a wheel A

that sufficient clearance between the wheel well
Working under the B
and chain is assured. Unevenly worn tires indicate a fault in the vehicle: WARNING
vehicle
e Remove ice and snow deposits in the wheel well e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer, as they have C
before installing the chains. trained technicians and the necessary parts and The vehicle can slip off the jack.
D
e Observe the different national regulations re- tools. e Make sure that there is no one inside the vehicle
garding maximum speeds. when jacking it up and changing the wheel. E
Storing wheels e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking F
Checking tire tread Do not use tires that are more than 6 years old.
e Check tire tread regularly, particularly before and Chemical additives, which make the tire rubber e Never jack up the vehicle on a surface that slopes G
after long journeys. elastic, lose their effectiveness over the course of up, down or to the side. H
e The original equipment tires on your Porsche time and the rubber becomes brittle. The age of the e Only use the jack to raise the vehicle for chang-
have built-in tire wear indicators. They are ing a wheel. I
tire can be seen from the "DOT" code number shown
molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and on the tire sidewall. If, for example, the last four e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when J
will appear as approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) numbers are 3016, then the tire was produced in the working under the vehicle.
bands when the tire tread depth is down to 1/16 K
30th week of 2016.
of an in (1.6 mm). e Always store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place. Information L
e When the indicators appear in two or more adja- Store tires without rims vertically.
M
cent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. We e Do not store summer tires or park vehicles with The tools needed for changing wheels (jack, wheel
recommend, however, that you do not let the summer tires mounted at ambient temperatures bolt wrench, mounting aids, etc.) are not included in N
tires wear down to this extent. under 5 °F (-15 °C). the standard scope of supply for the vehicle.
e Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly e Avoid contact with gas, oil or grease. e For information on the tool required: Contact an O
and are even less effective on wet roads. authorized Porsche dealer. P
e For safety reasons, replace the tires before the
wear indicators appear. Snow tires are no longer
Balancing wheels Q
As a precaution, have wheels balanced in spring Information
suitable when their tread depth falls below 5/32 R
in. (4 mm). (summer tires) and before winter (M+S tires) by an The tire and wheel sizes on both axles are different.
e In the United States, state laws may govern the authorized Porsche dealer. When removing the wheels, mark the direction of S
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all e Visit an authorized Porsche dealer. Porsche rec- rotation and position on each wheel and carry out
T
such laws. the installation according to these markings.
have trained technicians and the necessary parts e Only use wheels/tires with approved dimensions U
Measuring tire tread depth and tools. for the relevant axle. V
e Insert a commercially available tread depth > Please refer to the vehicle registration docu-
gauge or caliper in the tire tread and measure the ments or the "Technical data" section of this W
tire tread depth. manual. X
Y
Z
309
Wheels and Tires
A Caring for wheel attachment faces model or wheel bolts of similar quality that have Changing wheels
been manufactured according to Porsche speci-
B fications and production requirements. Preparing the vehicle
C e Tighten wheel bolts with a tightening torque of 1. Activate the transmission parking lock using the
118 ftlb. (160 Nm). P button on the selector lever.
D
e Do not use any power tools such as impact 2. Activate the electric parking brake.
E wrenches. 3. Switch ignition off.
F 4. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
Using security wheel bolts away, e.g. by placing wedges at the wheels on
G the opposite side.
H 5. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts or wheel nuts on
the wheel to be changed.
I 6. Raise the vehicle only at the specified jacking
J points.
> Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat-
K form" on page 147.
L 7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the
ground.
M
Fig. 246: Wheel attachment faces
N
NOTICE
O
P Risk of damage to the wheel and wheel attachment
Q face.
e The wheel attachment face B on the brake disk,
R wheel hub and on the wheel itself must not be Fig. 247: Adapter for security wheel bolts
S greased.
e Only the areas A may be greased. Grease these The adapter for the security wheel bolts is located in
T areas very thinly with Optimoly® TA: Contact an the tool box.
U authorized Porsche dealer. Do not use any other e To loosen and tighten the wheel bolt with anti-
grease or paste. theft protection, the adapter must be used be-
V tween the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench.
W e When positioning the adapter ensure that it en-
Care of wheel bolts gages fully in the teeth of the wheel bolt.
X e Clean the wheel bolts before installation.
Y e Wheel bolts must not be greased.
e Replace damaged wheel bolts. Only use genuine
Z Porsche wheel bolts assigned especially to this
310
Wheels and Tires
Changing wheels 1. For vehicles without PCCB: Remove one wheel > Please see chapter "Setting the Tire Pressure A
bolt and screw in an assembly aid. Monitoring System (TPMS) in the PCM" on
– or – page 303. B
1. For vehicles with PCCB: Remove two wheel bolts C
and screw in two assembly aids A and B. Changing wheels with a central D
NOTICE lock E
Special features of the
WARNING F
The brake disks can become damaged if wheels are central lock
not changed properly, especially on vehicles with Changing a wheel with a central lock is very different G
PCCB. from changing a wheel with standard bolts. H
e When changing a wheel, screw in the assembly Performing the wheel change incorrectly or using
aids. I
unsuitable tools can result in damage or malfunc-
2. Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
tions; the wheel may even come loose. J
> Please see chapter "Care of wheel bolts" on e Follow the procedure described below exactly K
page 310. when changing a wheel.
3. Remove the wheel. e Only use the original socket when loosening or L
> Please see chapter "Caring for wheel attach- tightening the central bolt. M
Fig. 248: Screw in an assembly aid for vehicles without
ment faces" on page 310. e Use a torque wrench suitable for the high-tight-
PCCB ening torque of 442 ft lb (600 Nm) with a max- N
4. Fit a new wheel.
imum tolerance of 15% of the target value. O
5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten in diagonally op-
posite sequence. P
Working under the
6. Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining WARNING
vehicle Q
wheel bolts. Initially tighten bolts only slightly in
a diagonally opposite sequence so that the wheel Owing to the high mounting forces, the vehicle can R
is centered. roll away and slide off the jack.
S
7. Inflate the tires if necessary. e Whenever available, always use a lifting platform.
8. Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack. e Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling T
9. Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonally opposite away.
U
sequence. Do not use any power tools such as e Make sure that there is no one inside the vehicle
impact wrenches. when jacking it up and changing the wheel. V
10.After changing a wheel, immediately use a tor- e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking
que wrench to check the specified tightening W
torque of the wheel bolts (118 ftlb. (160 Nm)). e Never jack up the vehicle on a surface that slopes X
11.Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System up, down or to the side.
(TPMS) settings. Y
Fig. 249: Screw in two assembly aids for vehicles with PCCB Z
311
Wheels and Tires
A Defective bolted con-

WARNING Information
nection through use of
B unauthorized compo- The tools and greases needed for changing wheels
C nents and wheels (e.g. jack, torque wrench, aluminum paste, etc.) are
not included in the standard scope of supply for the
D Unsuitable wheel sizes or incorrectly dimensioned vehicle.
components in the hub area of accessory wheels can
E For information on this topic: Contact an authorized
cause components to break or become damaged. Porsche dealer.
F The use of additional spacers can also impair the
overall function of the wheel mounting.
G
e Only use components that have been approved Information
H by Porsche. The tire and wheel sizes on both axles are different.
I e Never use spacers. When removing the wheels, mark the direction of
rotation and position on each wheel and carry out
J the installation according to these markings.
NOTICE
K e Only use wheels/tires with approved dimensions
The heavy impacts caused by an impact wrench for the relevant axle.
L Fig. 250: Socket in the luggage compartment
damage the central bolt and retainer.
M The reaction arm of a cordless impact wrench can
1. Open the luggage compartment and open the
Preparing a wheel plastic cover A.
N damage the rims.
The Porsche central lock is a matched, complete 2. Remove the socket. The central bolt may only be
When using a cordless impact wrench without a re- system comprising:
O unscrewed using this original socket. Always
action arm, the high torque may be too high to – Wheel. keep the socket in the luggage compartment so
P counterhold, resulting in a risk of tilting. – Central bolt with retainer. that it is available in case of a breakdown.
Q e Do not use an impact wrench. – Brake disk.
e Do not use an impact wrench. – Wheel bolt.
R
– Wheel hub.
S NOTICE – Lock cover.
T Have wheel changes performed by an authorized
The wheel must not be resting on the ground when Porsche dealer. Porsche recommends an authorized
U installing or removing the bolt and must be able to Porsche dealer, as they have trained technicians and
V turn freely. The weight of the vehicle will otherwise the necessary parts and tools.
lead to stresses and imbalance in the bolted
W connection.
X e Ensure that the vehicle is not resting on the
wheel being secured during the fitting process.
Y
e Only use suitable torque wrenches.
Z
312
Wheels and Tires
> Please see chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat- A

form" on page 147.
B
7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts fully off the
ground. Do not lower the vehicle until the wheel C
has been completely mounted.
D
Removing the wheel E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 253: Vehicle raised L
Fig. 251: Socket with an auxiliary tool Fig. 252: Levering off the cover using the auxiliary tool
e Ensure that the vehicle is not resting on the
The auxiliary tool C for removing the cover is located 3. Carefully lever the cover out of its seating using M
in the socket. Remove this from the square and stow the auxiliary tool. To do this, insert the metal wheel being secured during the fitting process.
it there after use. tongue deep into the opening groove A on the N
central bolt. Then swivel back the auxiliary tool O
NOTICE more than 90°.
P
The cover may be scratched if removed carelessly. Preparing the vehicle Q
e Exercise care when removing the cover. 1. Vehicles with PDK: Activate the transmission
parking lock using the P button on the selector R
lever. S
– or –
Vehicles with manual transmission: Move the T
gear lever to neutral. U
2. Activate the electric parking brake.
V
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Remove the vehicle key. W
5. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling X
away, such as with wedges under the wheels on
the diagonally opposite side. Y
6. Raise the vehicle only at the specified jacking Fig. 254: Mounting the socket
Z
points.
313
Wheels and Tires
A 1. Position the socket and mount it against the Abrupt release of the
WARNING
slight resistance. central bolt
B
The socket engages audibly. This opens the re- A very high torque is necessary to release the central
C tainer of the central bolt. bolt. The release torque may be significantly higher
D than the tightening torque. The bolt may be released
Information abruptly.
E
If the socket cannot be fitted: A poorly fitted socket can slip off and cause injuries.
F After a very long period of use or heavy strain, the e Make sure there is sufficient clearance from
G retaining pin A can jam. people and vehicle parts for the lever.
e When loosening the central bolt, make sure that
H the socket remains pushed on fully and does not
I slide out of position.
J
NOTICE
K
L Unscrewing the central bolt with an incorrectly Fig. 256: Removing the central bolt
mounted socket can damage the retainer.
M 4. Release the central bolt with high degree of force
e When loosening the central bolt, make sure that and then unscrew completely and remove. The
N the socket remains pushed on fully and does not socket must remain pushed on fully until the end
slide out of position. of the procedure.
O
e Make sure that the direction of rotation is 5. Set down the central bolt with the outward side
P correct. facing upward, protected from water, dust, dirt,
Q e Hold the steering wheel tightly when loosening etc.
the front wheels.
R NOTICE
S Fig. 255: Releasing the retaining pin
Risk of damage to brake disks on vehicles with a
T e In this case, release retaining pin A by striking Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).
lightly with a rubber mallet and a suitable auxil-
U e Do not rest the wheel on the PCCB brake disk
iary tool.
when removing.
V e Use the PCCB assembly aid.
2. Insert a torque wrench or a long lever (l (ideal
W length 4 ft. (1.2 m) – 5 ft. (1.5 m)) with a
6. Remove the wheel carefully.
1“ square fitting into the socket.
X
3. With the help of a second person, brake the
Y Preparing to mount the wheel
wheel firmly with the brake pedal. The rotary
forces cannot be held by the parking brake or All the components involved must be cleaned,
Z checked and, where applicable, greased prior to
transmission alone.
314
Wheels and Tires
wheel mounting. Go to a qualified specialized repair A

shop. Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the B
necessary parts and tools. C
Checking the central bolt D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Fig. 258: Checking the retainer Fig. 259: Checking the retaining pin L
e It must be possible to turn retainer D clockwise. e Press retaining pin E around a third of an inch M
It clicks like a safe lock when turned. (one centimeter) into the bolt. When released,
N
e It must not be possible to turn retainer D coun- the pin must snap back. Jamming indicates
ter-clockwise. Irregular clicking, delayed locking, damage to the retainer. Do not use the central O
skipping or jamming indicate damage to the re- bolt or retainer under any circumstances.
tainer. Do not use this central bolt under any P
Fig. 257: Checking the cone ring circumstances. Q
e It must be possible to turn the cone ring A in the
central bolt smoothly and without significant re- R
sistance. If turning is almost impossible, re- S
grease the central bolt inside. Go to a qualified
specialized repair shop. Porsche recommends an T
authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained U
V
W
X
Y
Z
315
Wheels and Tires
A Mounting the wheel Grease the following areas each time you mount a
wheel
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L Fig. 262: Installing the central bolt
M 4. Insert the central bolt into the wheel hub and

Fig. 260: Fitting the wheel onto the wheel hub screw it in by hand.
N Fig. 261: Greasing components
NOTICE 2. Wipe away old grease and dirt at conical surfa-
O
ces E in the wheel as well as at outer front side F
P Risk of damage to brake disks on vehicles with a of the wheel hub. Then coat very thinly with alu-
Q Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). minum paste. This helps the bolt to slide better
e Do not rest the wheel on the PCCB brake disk into its seat.
R when fitting it onto the wheel hub. 3. Thread G in the wheel hub must be well greased.
S e Use the PCCB assembly aid. To this end, re-grease with aluminum grease
each time the bolt is removed or installed. Do not
T 1. Carefully fit the wheel onto the wheel hub with- remove the old grease. All other parts and con-
U out tilting it. Engage the wheel in the wheel bolts tact surfaces must be free of grease.
by turning it slightly and press it against the e Only use aluminum grease that has been ap-
V brake disk. proved by Porsche.
W
X
Y
Z Fig. 263: Fitting the socket
316
Wheels and Tires
5. Position the socket and mount it against the Information 4. Make sure that retaining pin C is located in the A
slight resistance. front at the groove in the toothing.
If the wheel hub, brake disk, wheel bolts, wheel or B
The socket engages audibly. This opens the re- 5. Lower the vehicle fully.
tainer of the central bolt. central bolt have been replaced, the central bolt C
6. Insert the torque key into the socket with a must be tightened twice.
Information D
1" square fitting.
7. With the help of a second person, brake the Re-tightening the central bolt after E
wheel firmly with the brake pedal. The rotary 30 miles (50 km) or so is not necessary.
F
forces cannot be held by the parking brake or
transmission alone. G
e Hold the steering wheel tightly when fastening
H
the front wheels.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Fig. 265: Use of new parts
P
1. Tighten the central bolt to 442 ft lb. (600 Nm).
Q
2. Loosen the central bolt again by a 1/4 turn.
3. Tighten the central bolt again to Fig. 267: Installing the cover R
442 ft lb. (600 Nm).
6. Lightly grease the rubber ring of the cover. This S
facilitates installation and later removal. T
Fig. 264: Tightening the central bolt 7. Position the cover in the central bolt so that the
positioning tab faces the slot in the bolt. Then U
8. Tighten the central bolt to 442 ft lb. (600 Nm).
press the cover into position. V
Do not drive without the cover mounted. Other-
wise, water and dirt can penetrate and affect W
operation of the retainer.
X
Y
Fig. 266: Checking the retaining pin position
Z
317
Wheels and Tires
A Information 2. Tighten the central bolt to 74 ftlb (100 Nm) us-

ing a suitable torque wrench.
B e Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
C settings after changing the wheel.
D
E
Performing emergency fastening
of the central bolt
F
Insufficiently tightened
WARNING
G central bolt
H Driving with an insufficiently tightened central bolt
I can lead to accidents.
e Avoid rapid acceleration and cornering.
J e Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
K e Emergency fastening must never be used when
driving on racetracks.
L Fig. 268: Tighten the central bolt and loosen it again.
If no suitable torque wrench for the high tightening
M 1. Tighten the central bolt with great force using a
torque of 442 ftlb. (600 Nm) is available in a break- long lever and loosen it again by a 1/4 turn.
N down situation, perform emergency fastening of the Fig. 270: Markings on the central bolt
central bolt. The central bolt has and markings.
O
– Long lever (approx. 3 ft. (1 m)) with a 1“ adapter. e Draw a guide line on the wheel opposite the
P – Torque wrench for 74 ftlb. (100 Nm) with a marking using a pen.
1" adapter.
Q
e Perform the wheel change.
R > Please see chapter "Changing wheels with a
S central lock" on page 311.
e Ensure that the vehicle is not resting on the
T
wheel being secured during the fitting process.
U
V
W
X
Y
Z Fig. 269: Tightening the central bolt
318
Wheels and Tires
Driving on racetracks (e.g. sports Alternatively, have a second, greased set of bolts A
driving training, motorsport available.
B
e Never drive with a defective central bolt retainer.
events) e Never tighten the wheels using emergency C
Compared to normal road use, the vehicle is sub- fastening.
D
jected to disproportionately higher loads when driv- e Each time after racetrack operation, check all
ing on racetracks. components of the central lock, such as the E
For this reason, the following instructions for the central bolt, retainer, wheel, wheel hub, wheel
central lock also need to be observed during race- F
bolts and brake disk for wear and damage, and
track operation. replace them if in dubious condition. G
Racetrack operation e Replace the axle components subjected to heavy
WARNING H
strain at the intervals specified by Porsche. In-
quire about the current specifications before I
Disregarding checking, maintenance and replace- driving on racetracks.
J
ment measures along with incorrectly carrying out e Other parts, such as ball joints, rubber mounts,
installation instructions can result in component etc., whose wear may alter vehicle handling, for K
failure and accidents. example, must be checked and replaced without
Fig. 271: Tightening the central bolt This is especially true when a high total mileage is delay if in dubious condition.
L
3. Continue tightening the central bolt with the reached in racetrack operation. M
long lever until the STOP marking is aligned e Make sure to use perfectly functioning tools and N
with the guide line. The bolt is now securely correctly clicking torque wrenches.
tightened. e Always ask about the current requirements and O
4. Perform the steps for checking the retaining pin usage regulations before driving on racetracks:
and for fitting the cover. P
Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
> Please see chapter "Mounting the wheel" on Q
page 316. e Check the tightening torque of the central bolts
e Have an authorized Porsche dealer loosen the before and, if necessary, during and after driving R
central bolt again as soon as possible and then on racetracks. S
retighten it to the specified torque of e Follow the described procedure exactly when
442 ftlb. (600 Nm) using a suitable torque changing a wheel.
T
wrench. > Please see chapter "Changing wheels with a U
Porsche recommends an authorized Porsche central lock" on page 311.
V
dealer, as they have trained technicians and the e Perform the specified re-greasing procedures
necessary parts and tools. during every wheel change. The high tempera- W
tures result in faster grease consumption.
X
Y
Z
319
Windows
A Windows Information
B
Opening and closing windows If a window is blocked by an obstruction when clos-
C ing, the window stops and opens again a few
Opening and closing centimeters.
D WARNING
windows If the window is blocked a second time within
E around 10 seconds, one-touch mode for this win-
When opening or closing the windows, particularly in
dow is locked. The window can be closed manually.
F automatic mode, body parts can become trapped One-touch mode is enabled again once the window
between the moving window and stationary vehicle has been completely shut once in manual mode.
G parts.
H e When opening and closing the windows, make
sure that no parts of the body can become trap- Opening and closing windows
I
ped between the moving windows and stationary b Ignition is switched on.
J vehicle parts. – or –
e Always switch off the ignition when leaving the b The ignition has been switched off, but for no
K
vehicle. People who are unfamiliar with the ve- longer than 10 minutes.
L hicle could be injured when operating the power b The driver's or passenger's door has not yet been Fig. 272: Buttons for driver's door power window
windows. opened.
M A Power window button, driver side
e In case of danger: release the power window B Power window button, passenger side
N button immediately. C Switch between front and rear windows (Cabriolet)
e Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
O The switches feature a two-stage function. When
P Closing a window the switches are actuated, both stages can be clearly
WARNING felt due to a resistance when pushed or pulled.
manually
Q
Stage one – manual operation
R If one-touch mode was deactivated after a window e Press or pull the relevant switch to the first stage
was blocked, the window will close with its full force until the required position is reached.
S when closed manually. The process stops when the switch is released.
T e Make sure that nobody is trapped or crushed
Stage two – automatic operation
during closing of the windows.
U e Briefly push or pull the relevant switch fully to
V the second stage.
The window opens or closes automatically to the
W final position.
X e Actuating the switch again stops the window in
the required position.
Y
Cabriolet: select windows
Z e Select the front or rear windows with button C.
320
Windows
Light indicator on button C lights up if the rear A

windows have been selected.
B
When the convertible top is open, the rear windows
can only be closed if the front windows are closed. C
Storing final position of windows D

The final positions of the windows are lost after the E
battery is disconnected and reconnected. Windows
F
automatic mode is not operative.
Perform the following steps for all windows: G
1. Close the window completely once by pulling the H
rocker switch to the second setting.
I
2. When the window is completely closed, briefly
pull the rocker switch to the second setting J
again.
K
3. Completely open the window once by pressing
the switch. L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
321
Windshield Wipers
A Windshield Wipers
B
Brief overview
C
This brief overview is not a substitute for the com-
D
prehensive descriptions provided in the "Windshield
E wipers" chapter. Safety messages and warnings, in
particular, are not replaced by this brief overview.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O Fig. 273: Windshield wiper lever Fig. 274: Switch for rain sensor/intermittent operation and
rear wiper
P
Q What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?
R Wipe automatically at front (rain sensor/intermit- e Press the lever to detent position 1. > p. 323
S tent operation)
T Set rain sensor/intermittent operation sensitivity e Adjust switch B on the right of the lever upward > p. 324
(wipe more often) or downward (wipe less
U
often).
V
Wipe at front e Slow: Press the lever to detent position 2. > p. 323
W e Fast: Press the lever to detent position 3.
X e Once: Push lever to position 4 (holding lever in
position 4 accelerates wiping action).
Y
Z
322
Windshield Wipers
e Pull the lever towards the steering wheel at po- > p. 324
B
Spray and wipe at front
sition 5 and hold. C
Wipe at rear (intermittent wiping) e Press switch A. > p. 324 D
E
Fold windshield wipers out e Switch off the ignition and press the wiper lever > p. 323
downward once in position 4. The windshield F
wipers move upward through approx. 90°.
G
WARNING
Undesired wiping Operating windshield wipers 2 Slow wipe H
e Move wiper lever upward to the second
detent.
I
In rain sensor mode, the windshield wipers wipe au- 3 Fast wipe J
tomatically when water is detected on the e Move wiper lever upward to the third
windshield. detent. K
e Always switch off the windshield wipers before 4 Windshield wipers - one-touch operation
L
cleaning the windshield. e Move wiper lever downward.
The windshield wipers carry out one wiping M
cycle. N
NOTICE
5 Windshield wiper and washer system
e Pull wiper lever toward the steering wheel. O
Risk of damage to the luggage compartment lid,
When the wiper lever is released, a few P
windshield and wiper system.
drying wipes are performed.
e Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet, After a number of wipes, the Night View Q
otherwise it could become scratched Assist camera is automatically cleaned.
e Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the R
windshield before driving. S
Information
e Always switch off windshield wipers in car
T
washes to prevent them from wiping uninten- Fig. 275: Windshield wiper lever e If windshield is very dirty, repeat the cleaning
tionally (rain sensor mode). process. U
e Always hold the wiper arm securely when re- 0 Windshield wipers off e Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be
When the windshield wipers and the ignition
V
placing wiper blades. removed regularly.
e Pay attention to the varying length of wiper are switched off, the wipers move up slightly W
blades when replacing them. from their rest position so that the wiping Windshield wiper blades in perfect condition are vi-
tal for ensuring a clear view. X
edges are aligned correctly.
1 Rain sensor/intermittent operation, wind- > Please see chapter "Caring for wiper blades" on Y
shield wipers page 80.
Z
e Move wiper lever upward to the first detent.
323
Windshield Wipers
A Setting the wiper speed After exceeding a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h), Operating the rear wiper
the system switches to the preselected wiper
B setting.
C
D Information
E – If the wiper lever is already in position 1 when the

ignition is switched on, the rain sensor remains
F activated at speeds above approx. 2.5 mph (4
G km/h).
– If the wiper lever is already in position 2 or 3
H when the ignition is switched on, the rain sensor
I remains switched off until the wiper lever is
moved.
J
K Information
L Opening the luggage compartment lid stops the
M wiper.
Fig. 276: Switch for rain sensor/intermittent operation e To switch on the wiper again, press the wind- Fig. 277: Switch for rear wiper
N shield wiper lever upward/downward.
In vehicles without a rain sensor, the wiper speed of
O the windshield wipers can be adjusted in 4 settings: Switching on rear wiper intermittent mode
Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity manually e Press button A.
P Reducing wiper speed
e Move switch A upward. The wiper speed can be adjusted manually:
Switching off rear wiper intermittent mode
Q e Press switch A upward – high sensitivity.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the e Press button A.
R windshield. The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
windshield.
S Increasing wiper speed Activating reversing function
e Press switch A downward – low sensitivity.
e Move switch A downward. When the windshield wipers are active, the rear
T
wiper performs a few wipes when reverse gear is
U Setting rain sensor operation engaged. The function can be activated or deacti-
The amount of rain on the windshield is measured in vated in the PCM.
V > Please see chapter "Vehicle Settings" on
vehicles that have a rain sensor. The wiper speed is
W automatically adjusted accordingly. page 270.
X At a driving speed below approx. 2.5 mph (4 km/h),

rain sensor operation is activated automatically
Y when the windshield wipers are switched on.
Z
324
Windshield Wipers
Wiper blades CAUTION

Incorrectly mounted A
windshield wipers
NOTICE B
Windshield wipers that are not attached properly
C
when replaced can come loose while driving.
If the wiper arms accidentally fall back onto the
windshield, they can damage the windshield. e Lock wiper blades correctly into the wiper arm. D
e Check that the wiper blades are securely set in
e Always hold the wiper arms securely when re- E
place.
placing the wiper blades. F
Replacing windshield wiper blades G

NOTICE
Extending windshield wipers H
The wiper blades can freeze at low temperatures. b Ignition switched off. I
e Thaw and release frozen wiper blades before 1. Press the wiper lever down once (position 4).
J
driving. The windshield wipers move upward through
approx. 90°. K
NOTICE 2. Change the wiper blades in accordance with the
L
separate installation instructions provided by the
manufacturer. Pay attention to the different M
The graphite coating on the wiper blades can be
lengths of the wiper blades.
damaged if they are not cleaned properly. N
e Ensure that the cleaning jet does not strike the Retracting windshield wipers
O
wiper blades. b Ignition is switched on.
e Do not clean wiper blades with a cloth or sponge. e Press the wiper lever down for approx. 2 seconds P
e Clean wiper blades with clear water only. (position 4).
Q
The windshield wipers return to their initial
position. R
Replacing wiper blades S
The wiper blades should be replaced twice per year Information
(before and after the cold season) or if wiper per- T
formance deteriorates or the wipers are damaged. If necessary visit an authorized Porsche dealer to
have this work carried out. Porsche recommends an U
The wipers must be extended to replace the wiper
authorized Porsche dealer, as they have trained V
blades or attach the windshield snow covers or sun
shades. W
X
Y
Z
325
Technical Data
On the following pages you will find technical data
for your vehicle.
326
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle identification data Safety compliance sticker
The safety compliance sticker is your assurance that
Vehicle identification number your new Porsche complies with all applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which were in
effect at the time the vehicle was manufactured.
The sticker also shows the month and year of pro-
duction and the vehicle identification number of your
car (perforations) as well as the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Tire pressure plate

The tire pressure plate is fixed to the door sill area of
the driver’s door.
Vehicle data carrier

You will find the vehicle data carrier in the Mainte-
nance booklet. It contains all important data about
Fig. 279: Safety compliance sticker
your vehicle. This data carrier cannot be reordered if
it is lost or damaged.
Fig. 278: Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is located at the
bottom left behind the windshield as well as in the
passenger footwell under a cover in the carpet.
e When ordering spare parts, always quote the
vehicle identification number.
Fig. 280: Tire pressure plate
327
Technical Data
Loading information The load rating is the maximum load that a tire is Vehicle Load Capacity
rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Definitions The maximum load rating is the load rating for a tire
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the rear at the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
axle plus the weight of the transported load. The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of car-
The Curb weight – actual weight of your vehicle – is go, the subtracted weight of passengers from the
the vehicle weight including standard and optional load limit.
equipment, fluids, and emergency tools. This weight e Never exceed the permissible limits.
does not include passengers and cargo.
Riding in a Cargo Area
The Gross Vehicle Weight is the sum of the curb DANGER
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo Fig. 281: Example for determining the combined weight of
combined. Injuries are much more likely in an accident if occu- occupants and cargo
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum pants ride in the cargo area. e The combined weight of occupants and cargo
total weight of vehicle, passengers, luggage and op- e Occupants must ride only in the seats provided should never exceed the weight shown on the
tional equipment. for this purpose. tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum load e Make sure that all occupants fasten their seat e Never exceed the number of passengers shown
limit for the front or the rear axle. This information is belts. on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
located on the safety compliance sticker located in
the driver’s side door aperture area. Determining the combined weight of occupants
Overloading Vehicle
DANGER and cargo:
For determining the compatibility of the tire and ve-
hicle load capabilities: e Add the weight of all occupants and then add the
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on Overloading will lead to dangerous vehicle reactions total luggage weight (figure)
page 300. and long braking distances. Steps for determining correct load limit:
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a mini- e Never exceed the specified axle loads. 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
mum requirement. For more information: occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on NOTICE or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
page 300. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Risk of damage to the vehicle if the vehicle is
total weight rating of vehicle, passengers and cargo. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
overloaded.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight – Load Limit – is the passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
maximum total weight limit specified of the load Overloading can shorten the service life of the tires
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the and car. Damage due to overloading is not covered
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
maximum weight of passengers and cargo that can by the vehicle warranty.
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
be loaded into the vehicle. This information can be e Never exceed the specified axle loads. will be four 150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
found on the tire pressure plate. the amount of available cargo and luggage load
The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the sum of capacity is 650 lbs. [1400 – 600 (4 x 150) =
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity 800 lbs.].
weight and production options weight. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
328
Technical Data
may not safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Engine data
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4
Displacement 2,981 cm³
Max. engine power 283 kW (379 hp)
at rpm 6,500 1/min
Max. torque 450 Nm
at rpm 1,950 1/min – 5,000 1/min
Max. permitted engine speed 7,500 1/min
911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S
Displacement 2,981 cm³
Max. engine power 331 kW (443 hp)
at rpm 6,500 1/min
Max. torque 530 Nm
at rpm 2,300 1/min – 5,000 1/min
Max. permitted engine speed 7,500 1/min
911 Turbo 911 Turbo S
Displacement 3,745 cm³ 3,745 cm³
Max. engine power 427 kW (572 hp) 478 kW (640 hp)
329
Technical Data
911 Turbo 911 Turbo S
at rpm 6,500 1/min 6,750 1/min
Max. torque 750 Nm 800 Nm
at rpm 2,250 1/min – 4,500 1/min 2,500 1/min – 4,000 1/min
Max. permitted engine speed 7,200 1/min 7,200 1/min
Dimensions
Length (depending on equipment) 4,519 mm – 4,535 mm
Width (depending on equipment) 1,852 mm – 1,900 mm
Width with door mirrors 2,024 mm
Height at empty weight to DIN

1,288 mm – 1,303 mm
depending on the chassis variant
Ground clearance at empty weight to DIN

113 mm – 126 mm
depending on the chassis variant
Filling quantities
e Use only fluids and fuels approved by Porsche. For further information: Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
approx. 0.65 gals (2.5 liters) (vehicles with Night Assist: approx. 0.9 gals (
Windscreen washer fluid
3.5 liters))
Vehicles with rear-wheel drive: approx. 17 gals (64 liters), with a reserve of
approx. 2.1 gals (8 liters) (vehicles with PDK) or approx. 2.6 gals (10 liters)
(vehicles with manual transmission)
Fuel tank
Vehicles with all-wheel drive: approx. 17.7 gals (67 liters), with a reserve of
approx. 2.1 gals (8 liters) (vehicles with PDK) or approx. 2.6 gals (10 liters)
(vehicles with manual transmission)
330
Technical Data
Refrigerant R1234yf 875 g (only vehicles with air-conditioning system use refrigerant R1234yf)
Air-conditioning system compressor oil SP-A2 100 g (only vehicles with air-conditioning system use refrigerant R1234yf)
Weights
e Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight rating and maximum permitted axle loads. If additional accessories are installed, the maximum possible payload
will be reduced.
e Only use roof transport systems that are from the Porsche Tequipment product line and that have been tested and approved by Porsche for this vehicle.
e Do not drive at a speed of more than 80 mph (130 km/h) when the roof transport system is fitted.
> Please see chapter "Roof transport system" on page 225.
911 Carrera 911 Carrera Cabriolet

PDK PDK
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight shown on the tire pressure
Vehicle load capacity
plate in the vehicle.
Maximum axle load, front 1,841 lbs. (835 kg) 1,841 lbs. (835 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear 2,734 lbs. (1.240 kg) 2,822 lbs. (1.280 kg)
Maximum gross weight 4,321 lbs. (1.960 kg) 4,442 lbs. (2.015 kg)
Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) –
911 Carrera 4 911 Carrera 4 Cabriolet

PDK PDK
Maximum axle load, rear 2,756 lbs. (1.250 kg) 2,844 lbs. (1.290 kg)
331
Technical Data
911 Carrera 4 911 Carrera 4 Cabriolet

PDK PDK
Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) –
911 Carrera S 911 Carrera S

PDK Manual Transmission
Maximum axle load, rear 2,789 lbs. (1,265 kg) 2,723 lbs. (1,235 kg)
Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg)
911 Carrera S Cabriolet 911 Carrera S Cabriolet

Maximum gross weight 4,497 lbs. (2,040 kg) 4,431 lbs. (2,010 kg)
332
Technical Data
911 Carrera 4S 911 Carrera 4S

Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) 165 lbs. (75 kg)
911 Carrera 4S Cabriolet 911 Carrera 4S Cabriolet

911 Targa 4 911 Targa 4S 911 Targa 4S

PDK PDK Manual Transmission
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed the weight shown on the tire pressure plate in the
vehicle.
Maximum axle load, front 1,885 lbs. (855 kg) 1,929 lbs. (875 kg) 1,929 lbs. (875 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear 2,888 lbs. (1,310 kg) 2,932 lbs. (1,330 kg) 2,866 lbs. (1,300 kg)
Maximum gross weight 4,542 lbs. (2,060 kg) 4,597 lbs. (2,085 kg) 4,530 lbs. (2,055 kg)
333
Technical Data
911 Turbo 911 Turbo Cabriolet

PDK PDK
Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) -
911 Turbo S 911 Turbo S Cabriolet

PDK PDK
Maximum roof load 165 lbs. (75 kg) -
Wheels and tires

Wheel and tire sizes
Tires approved by Porsche are the best possible tires for your vehicle. The load capacity index (e.g. "105") and classification letter (e.g. "Y") for maximum permitted
speed are minimum requirements. When fitting new tires or changing tires:
> Please see chapter "Wheels and Tires" on page 300.
e Snow chains must only be fitted to the appropriately marked wheel and tire sizes. Observe the applicable national regulations regarding maximum speeds when
snow chains are fitted. Only use snow chains approved by Porsche.
e For further information, please contact your authorized Porsche dealer.
334
Technical Data
Tire type Tire size Wheel size Fitting snow chains
911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4,

911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S, 911 Targa 4S
FA: 235/40 ZR 19 (92Y)1 FA: 8,5J x 19, RO 521

No
RA: 295/35 ZR 20 (101Y)1 RA: 11,5J x 20, RO 671
Summer tires FA: 8,5J x 20, RO 53

FA: 245/35 ZR 20 (91Y) or
FA: 8,5J x 20, RO 50 No
RA: 305/30 ZR 21 (100Y)
RA: 11,5J x 21, RO 67
FA: 235/40 R 19 92V M+S1 FA: 8,5J x 19, RO 521

On rear axle only
RA: 295/35 R 20 101V M+S1 RA: 11J x 20, RO 661
Winter tires
FA: 245/35 R 20 91V M+S FA: 8,5J x 20, RO 53
On rear axle only
RA: 295/30 R 21 98V M+S RA: 11J x 21, RO 66
911 Turbo, 911 Turbo S
FA: 255/35 ZR 20 (97Y) XL FA: 9J x 20, RO 41

No
RA: 315/30 ZR 21 (105Y) XL RA: 11,5J x 21, RO 67
Summer tires
FA: 255/35 ZR 20 (97Y) XL FA: 9,5J x 20, RO 44
No
RA: 315/30 ZR 21 (105Y) XL RA: 12J x 21, RO 70
FA: 245/35 R 20 91V M+S FA: 8,5J x 20, RO 40

Winter tires On rear axle only
RA: 305/30 R 21 100V M+S RA: 11J x 21, RO 66
FA = front axle, RA = rear axle, RO = rim offset
Tire pressure
These tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche for cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C).
e Set the load condition of the vehicle in Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Adapt the tire pressure to suit the vehicle load.
1. Not suitable for vehicles with Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).
335
Technical Data
> Please see chapter "Setting the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the PCM" on page 303.
Standard tire pressure for 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4 and 911 Targa 4
FA = front axle, RA = rear

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA
19-/20 inch summer tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi 2.4 bar / 240 kPa / 35 psi 3.0 bar / 300 kPa / 44 psi
19-/20 inch winter tires 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.2 bar / 220 kPa / 32 psi 2.5 bar / 250 kPa / 36 psi
Standard tire pressure for 911 Carrera S and 911 Carrera 4S except for:
– Convertibles with Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
– Coupés with Aerokit
– Coupés with Porsche Active Suspension Management and without electric slide/tilt (glass) sunroof

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA
Standard tire pressure for 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S and 911 Targa 4S:
– Convertibles with Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
– Coupés with Aerokit
– Coupés with Porsche Active Suspension Management and without electric slide/tilt (glass) sunroof
336
Technical Data

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA
Standard tire pressure for 911 Turbo and 911 Turbo S:

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA
Comfort tire pressure for summer tires up to 165 mph (270 km/h)
b Vehicles with "Comfort pressure" setting in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
These tire pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche for cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C).
e Set the load condition of the vehicle in Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Adapt the tire pressure to suit the vehicle load.
> Please see chapter "Setting the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the PCM" on page 303.
Tire pressure too low
WARNING
The "Comfort tire pressure" selection option is country-dependent and is not available in all country versions.
Driving at high speed and low tire pressure damages the tires.
e Comfort tire pressure in the tires must only be set on vehicles with the "Comfort tire pressure" selection option in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
Comfort tire pressure for 911 Carrera, 911 Carrera 4, 911 Targa 4, 911 Carrera S, 911 Carrera 4S and 911 Targa 4S:
337
Technical Data

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA
Comfort tire pressure for 911 Turbo and 911 Turbo S:

Part load Full load
axle
FA RA FA RA

Technical data: Audio and video files
Supported SD cards up to 128 GB

media Portable players MTP Player, USB 2.0 devices of "USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" such as, for example, USB sticks, USB MP3 players without
special driver software, external USB Flash memory and hard drives
File system SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memory cards

USB mass storage exFAT, FAT or FAT32, NTFS file systems with a maximum of 4 partitions
Format MPEG 1/2 Layer 3; Windows Media Audio 9 and 10; MPEG 2/4; FLAC, MPEG 1/2; ISO-MPEG4; DivX 3, 4 and 5; Xvid; ISO-MPEG4 H.264
(MPEG4 AVC); Windows Media Video 9
File extension .mp3; .wma; .asf; .m4a; .m4b; .aac; .flac; .mpg; .mpeg; .avi; .mp4; .m4v; .mov; .wmv
Playback lists .M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Characteristics max. 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampling frequency; max. 2,000 kbit/s and 720x576 px. at max. 25 fps
338
Technical Data
Technical data: Audio and video files
Number of files USB mass storage and memory cards max. 10,000 files per medium, max. 1,000 files per directory/playback list
Metadata Album covers up to 800 x 800 pixels; GIF, JPG and PNG formats or via Gracenote® database
Technical data: Connectivity
Mobile networks GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad Band, 850/900 MHz/1,800/1,900 MHz

UMTS/HSPA+: Triple band, 850 MHz (band V)/AWS (band VI)/1,900 MHz (band II)
LTE: Quad band, 700 MHz (band 17)/850 MHz (band 5) /AWS (band 4)/1,900 MHz (band 2)
WiFi IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (2.4 GHz)
Bluetooth® Bluetooth® 2.1, IEEE 802.15.1, Class 2, range approx. 10 m
SIM card Mini-SIM, dimensions: 25 x 15 mm
Technical data: Radio
Frequency FM: 87.5 – 108 MHz

ranges/
AM: 537 – 1602 kHz (availability dependent on country)
standards
Tuning grid with FM: 200 kHz

automatic sta-
AM: 9 kHz (availability dependent on country)
tion search
License notices
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by AISIN AW CO., LTD.
Bluetooth®
is under licence. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Dolby Digital Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
339
Technical Data
License notices
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol,
DTS Digital
& DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS,
Surround
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Gracenote and “Powered by Gracenote” are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Gracenote, Inc. in the United
Gracenote®
States and/or other countries.
Inspection marks and declarations interference in which case the user will be required Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Indus-
of conformity to correct the interference at his own expense. trie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts
These Class A digital devices comply with Canadian de licence. L'exploitation est
Radio Frequency Devices and Radio Commu- ICES-003. 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
nication Equipment Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Radio Frequency Devices and Radio Communication la norme NMB-003 du Canada. brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
Equipment comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules ID Central Locking System brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. USA: FCC-ID IYZ-PK3 fonctionnement.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada: IC 2701A-PK3 USA Model: R3TR
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, FCC: LTQR3TR
and Information Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
2. this device must accept any interference re- the party responsible for compliance could void the
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or
ceived, including interference that may cause user’s authority to operate the equipment.
TV interference caused by unauthorized modifica-
undesired operation. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
tions to this equipment.
Changes or modifications made to the equipment and with RSS of the Industry Canada. Operation is
Such modification could void the user's authority to
not expressly approved by Porsche may void the FCC subject to the following two conditions:
operate the equipment.
authorization to operate the equipment. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
The equipment has been tested and found to comply Model: R3TR and
with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant IC: 3659A-R3TR 2. this device must accept any interference re-
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- This device complies with Industry Canada licence- ceived, including interference that may cause
signed to provide reasonable protection against exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the undesired operation.
harmful interference when the equipment is oper- following two conditions: Bluetooth® Transceiver
ated in a commercial environment. The equipment 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency en- and This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radia-
ergy and, if not installed and used in accordance 2. this device must accept any interference, in- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
with this manual, may cause harmful interference to cluding interference that may cause undesired environment. Any antenna used with this device
radio communications. Operation of the equipment operation of the device. must be located at least 8 inches (20,3 cm) from all
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful persons.
340
Technical Data
NOTICE: This device complies with Part 15 of the harmful interference, and (2) This device must ac- Bluetooth® approval (extract)
FCC Rules and contains license-exempt transmitter cept any interference that maybe received including Albania – Andorra – Angola – Aruba – Australia –
(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science interference that may cause undesired operation. Austria – Bahamas – Bahrain – Barbados – Belarus
and Economic Development Canada’s licence- WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and – Belgium – Belize – Bolivia – Bonaire – Bosnia and
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the complies with FCC and ISED rules. Changes or Herzegovina – Brazil – Brunei – Bulgaria – Burkina
following two conditions: modifications not expressly approved by the party Faso – Canada – Chile – China – Colombia – Costa
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, responsible for compliance could void the user's au- Rica – Croatia – Curacao – Cyprus – Czech Republic
and thority to operate the device. This equipment com- – Denmark – Dominican Republic – Ecuador – Egypt
2. this device must accept any interference re- plies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set – El Salvador – Estonia – Ethiopia – Finland –
ceived, including interference that may cause forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users France – French Guyana – French Polynesia – Ga-
undesired operation. must follow the specific operating instructions for bon – Germany – Ghana – Gibraltar – Guadeloupe –
satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter Guatemala – Greece – Greenland – Hong Kong –
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposi- must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not Hungary – Iceland – India – Indonesia – Ireland –
tion aux radiations de la FCC et de l'ISDE établies be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Iraq – Israel – Italy – Ivory Coast – Jamaica – Japan
other antenna or transmitter. – Jordan – Kenya – Kosovo – Kuwait – Latvia –
Toute antenne utilisée avec cet appareil doit être Canada (ISED) RSS-Gen (French) Lebanon – Lesotho – Liberia – Libya – Liechtenstein
située au moins 8 pouces (20,3 cm) de toutes les
Cet appareil est conforme aux règlements dalà FCC, – Lithuania – Luxembourg – Macau – Macedonia –
personnes.
section 15, et au CNR-210 d'innovation, Sciences et Madagascar – Malaysia – Malta – Martinique –
REMARQUER: L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de li- Développement économique Canada. Le fonc- Mauritius – Mexico – Monaco – Mongolia – Moroc-
cence contenu dans le présent appareil est con- tionnement est assujetti aux deux conditions sui- co – Mozambique – Netherlands – New Caledonia –
forme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et vantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer New Zealand – Nigeria – Norway – Oman – Pakistan
Développement économique Canada applicables aux d'interférences nuisibles et (2) cet appareil doit ac- – Panama – Peru – Poland – Portugal – Puerto Rico
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est cepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celle qui – Qatar – Réunion – Romania – Russia – San Marino
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement. MISE EN – Saudi Arabia – Senegal – Serbia – Singapore –
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et GARDE : L'émetteur a subi des tests et est conforme Slovakia – South Africa – Spain – St. Lucia – Swe-
2. l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélec- aux règlements de la FCC et d'ISDE. Les change- den – Switzerland – Tahiti – Taiwan – Thailand –
trique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible ments ou modifications non approuvés explicite- United Arab Emirates – United Kingdom – Uruguay
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. ment par la partie responsable de la conformité – USA – Venezuela – Vietnam – Yemen –
NOTICE: pourraient rendre caduque l'autorisation de l'utilisa- Zimbabwe
Changes or modifications made to this equipment teur de se servir du dispositif. Cet appareil est con-
not expressly approved by Continental Advanced forme aux limites d'exposition aux radiations de la
Antenna GmbH may void the FCC authorization to FCC et d'ISDE établies pour un environnement non
operate this equipment. contrôlé. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent respecter les
United States (FCC) 47 CFR Part 15 and Canada instructions d'utilisation spécifiques pour satisfaire
(ISED) RSS-Gen (English) aux exigences de conformité aux expositions de RF.
L'émetteur doit se trouver à 20 cm au minimum de
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and In-
l'utilisateur et ne doit pas être situé au même endroit
novation, Science, and Economic Development Can-
que tout autre émetteur ou antenne ni fonctionner
ada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
avec un autre émetteur ou antenne.
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
341
Technical Data
Recycling
Airbag and seat-belt pretensioner units
Non-ignited gas generators, or whole vehicles or as-
semblies with airbag and seat-belt pretensioner
units, must not be disposed of as "normal" scrap or
waste or put into any other form of end storage.
For recommendations for proper recycling:
e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
Old batteries
Old batteries must not be disposed of as "normal"
scrap or waste or put into any other form of end
storage.
e Observe the local disposal instructions. Hand in
old “household batteries at a battery collection
point.
For recommendations for proper recycling:
e Contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
342
Software Licenses
Software Licenses
Declaration on open source soft- source language processor. THE SOFTWARE IS CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER * TORTIOUS
ware for the instrument cluster - PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE * OF THIS
list of OSS components LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT- SOFTWARE.
The instrument cluster contains components that ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
are licensed as open source software. The affected TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT 3. EGLEXT Chromium
components and the associated license conditions SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE BSD 3-clause License
are listed below. The licensee receives a non-exclu- DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR Copyright (c) YEAR, OWNER
sive right of use for the open source software from ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN All rights reserved.
the respective copyright holders under the condi- CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
tions that provide for the relevant valid license con- Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
with or without modification, are permitted provided
ditions. The liability and warranty provisions of open OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
source licenses are only valid in relation to the re- that the following conditions are met:
SOFTWARE.
spective copyright holders. This list of open source Redistributions of source code must retain the above
program codes was compiled by reference to the 2. DRM CRTC copyright notice, this list of conditions and the fol-
third-party software that was integrated into the lowing disclaimer.
MIT Style License
services at the time the list was created. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
* Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
this software and its * documentation for any pur-
1. C11 Emulation Library following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
pose is hereby granted without fee, provided that * other materials provided with the distribution.
Boost Software License 1.0 the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
Boost Software License – Version 1.0 Neither the name of the ORGANIZATION nor the
that both that copyright * notice and this permission
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
August 17th, 2003 notice appear in supporting documentation, and *
promote products derived from this software with-
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any that the name of the copyright holders not be used
out specific prior written permission.
person or organization obtaining a copy of the soft- in advertising or * publicity pertaining to distribution
of the software without specific, * written prior per- THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
ware and accompanying documentation covered by
mission. The copyright holders make no representa- HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, dis-
tions * about the suitability of this software for any EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
play, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software,
purpose. It is provided "as * is" without express or BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and
implied warranty. * * THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
to permit third-parties to whom the Software is fur-
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
nished to do so, all subject to the following: The
THIS SOFTWARE, * INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WAR- SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBU-
copyright notices in the Software and this entire
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, IN-
statement, including the above license grant, this
NO * EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE CIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
restriction and the following disclaimer, must be in-
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR * CONSE- CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
cluded in all copies of the Software, in whole or in
QUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHAT- NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless
SOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, * DATA GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
such copies or derivative works are solely in the form
OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-
of machine-executable object code generated by a
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
343
Software Licenses
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR Unless otherwise noted in a file's first 5 lines, all This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) source code published on http://create.stephan- IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS brumme.com and its sub-pages is licensed similar to encourage inclusion and use of free software in
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY the zlib license: This software is provided 'as-is', commercial and freeware products alike. As a con-
OF SUCH DAMAGE. without any express or implied warranty. In no event sequence, its main points are that:
will the author be held liable for any damages arising We don't promise that this software works. How-
4. Expat XML Parser-libexpat from the use of this software. Permission is granted ever, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports.
Expat License to anyone to use this software for any purpose, in- (às is' distribution)
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source cluding commercial applications, and to alter it and You can use this software for whatever you want, in
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper redistribute it freely, subject to the following re- parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`roy-
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, strictions: The origin of this software must not be alty-free' usage)
2006 Expat maintainers. misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If
the original software. If you use this software in a you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
product, an acknowledgment in the product docu- acknowledge somewhere in your documentation
person obtaining a copy of this software and asso-
mentation would be appreciated but is not required. that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits')
ciated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as
in the Software without restriction, including with- We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion
such, and must not be misrepresented as being the of this software, with or without modifications, in
out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
original software. commercial products. We disclaim all warranties
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of
the Software, and to permit persons to whom the covering The FreeType Project and assume no liabil-
6. Free Type ity related to The FreeType Project.
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the fol-
lowing conditions: Freetype Project License Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form
The above copyright notice and this permission no- The FreeType Project LICENSE for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this
tice shall be included in all copies or substantial ——————————————————————- license. We thus encourage you to use the following
portions of the Software. —— text:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT 2006-Jan-27 "Portions of this software are copyright © 1996-
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by 2002, 2006 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN- David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg org). All rights reserved."
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR- Introduction Legal Terms
TICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN ============ ============
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive Definitions
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES packages; some of them may contain, in addition to ————————————
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF the FreeType font engine, various tools and contri- Throughout this license, the terms `package',
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, butions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE Project. the set of files originally distributed by the authors
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE This license applies to all files found in such pack- (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lem-
SOFTWARE. ages, and which do not fall under their own explicit berg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as
license. The license affects thus the FreeType font alpha, beta or final release.
5. FASTCRC32 engine, the test programs, documentation and `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
License of Stephan Brumme/Zlib style License makefiles, at the very least. project, where ùsing' is a generic term including
344
Software Licenses
compiling the project's source code as well as linking deletions or changes to the original files must be and distribution. If you are looking for support, start
it to form a `program' or èxecutable'. This program clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. in this list if you haven't found anything to help you
is referred to as à program using the FreeType The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files in the documentation.
engine'. must be preserved in all copies of source files. devel@nongnu.org
This license applies to all files distributed in the Redistribution in binary form must provide a dis- Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design
original FreeType Project, including all source code, claimer that states that the software is based in part issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution Our home page can be found at
in the file in its original, unmodified form as distrib- documentation. We also encourage you to put an http://www.freetype.org
uted in the original archive. If you are unsure whether URL to the FreeType web page in your documenta- — end of FTL.TXT —
or not a particular file is covered by this license, you tion, though this isn't mandatory.
must contact us to verify this. These conditions apply to any software derived from 7. Freetype_BDF
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000, or based on the FreeType Project, not just the un-
The MIT License
2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner modified files. If you use our work, you must ac-
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified knowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. Copyright (c) year copyright holders
below. Advertising Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
No Warranty person obtaining a copy of this software and asso-
————————————
———————————— Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor in the Software without restriction, including with-
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ÀS IS' you shall use the name of the other for commercial, out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EX- advertising, or promotional purposes without spe- publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of
PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED cific prior written permission. the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT- We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or Software is furnished to do so, subject to the fol-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT more of the following phrases to refer to this soft- lowing conditions:
WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT ware in your documentation or advertising materials: The above copyright notice and this permission no-
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType li- tice shall be included in all copies or substantial
BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE brary', or `FreeType Distribution'. portions of the Software.
FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not re- THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
Redistribution quired to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
——————————————— is copyrighted material, only this license, or another INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN-
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, per- one contracted with the authors, grants you the right TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR-
petual and irrevocable right and license to use, exe- to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, TICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN
cute, perform, compile, display, copy, create distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the indicate that you understand and accept all the HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
FreeType Project (in both source and object code terms of this license. OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; Contacts CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the ————————— OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
rights granted herein, subject to the following There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
conditions: freetype@nongnu.org SOFTWARE.
Redistribution of source code must retain this li- Discusses general use and applications of FreeType,
cense file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, as well as future and wanted additions to the library
345
Software Licenses
8. FreeType_PCF THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as
The MIT License WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN- original software.
page 345. TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR- 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from
TICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN any source distribution.
9. HarfBuzz NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LI-
The MIT License ABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LI- 15. Libva
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on ABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, The MIT License
page 345. TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR > Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE page 345.
10. Intel DVO i915 USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Sili- 16. Linus Graphics Drivers from Intel – Kernel
MIT Style License
con Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or
> Please see chapter "2. DRM CRTC" on page 343. DRM-bsd
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
The MIT License
11. Khronos EGL Headers in this Software without prior written authorization > Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on
from Silicon Graphics, Inc. page 345.
The MIT License
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on 13. libdrm
page 345. 17. lua
The MIT License The MIT License
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on
12. Khronos Group-OpenGL ES > Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on
page 345. page 345.
SGI Free Software License B v2.0
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 14. libunibreak
18, 2008) 18. lz4 Compression algorithm
zlib License BSD 2-clause "Simplified" License
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon The zlib/libpng License
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
Copyright (c) year copyright holders with or without modification, are permitted provided
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express that the following conditions are met:
person obtaining a copy of this software and asso-
or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be Redistributions of source code must retain the above
held liable for any damages arising from the use of copyright notice, this list of conditions and the fol-
in the Software without restriction, including with-
this software. lowing disclaimer.
out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of Permission is granted to anyone to use this software Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
the Software, and to permit persons to whom the for any purpose, including commercial applications, above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the fol- and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
lowing conditions: following restrictions: other materials provided with the distribution.
The above copyright notice including the dates of 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepre- THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR
first publication and either this permission notice or sented; you must not claim that you wrote the orig- "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN-
a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ inal software. If you use this software in a product, TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IM-
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions an acknowledgment in the product documentation PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
of the Software. would be appreciated but is not required. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
346
Software Licenses
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, of its contributors may be used to endorse or pro- AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM- mote products derived from this software without EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PRO- specific prior written permission. SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RE-
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS AND CONTRIBUTORS `ÀS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS SULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLI-
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER- GENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI- CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, 21. PCFUtil
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN- Open Group License
19. Mesa3D – MesaLib CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT Copyright 1996, 1998 The Open Group
The MIT License OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP- this software and its documentation for any purpose
page 345. TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY is hereby granted without fee, provided that the
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LI- above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
20. NetBSD ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR both that copyright notice and this permission no-
BSD-4-Clause (University of California-Specific) OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE tice appear in supporting documentation.
BSD-4-Clause (University of California-Specific) USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE The above copyright notice and this permission no-
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. tice shall be included in all copies or substantial
Copyright [various years] The Regents of the Uni-
versity of California. All rights reserved. BSD 3-clause portions of the Software.
> Please see chapter "3. EGLEXT Chromium" on THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
page 343. WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met: HPND Like License INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN-
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR-
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the Corporation. TICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN
following disclaimer. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the software for any purpose with or without fee is FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the hereby granted, provided that the above copyright WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or notice and this permission notice appear in all cop- OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON-
other materials provided with the distribution. ies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corpo- NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
ration not be used in advertising or publicity OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
pertaining to distribution of the document or soft- Except as contained in this notice, the name of The
use of this software must display the following ac-
ware without specific, written prior permission. Open Group shall not be used in advertising or oth-
knowledgement: This product includes software de-
veloped by the University of California, Berkeley and THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DIGITAL erwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
its contributors. EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES this Software without prior written authorization
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING from The Open Group.
347
Software Licenses
22. static_drm_mode DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

The MIT License HOWEVER * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LI-
> Please see chapter "7. Freetype_BDF" on ABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, * STRICT LI-
page 345. ABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
23. Video Accelarator USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF * ADVISED OF
BSD Style License THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution. Redistribution and use in binary form,
24. zlib
without modification, are * permitted provided that
the following conditions are met: * Redistributions Zlib license
must reproduce the above copyright notice and the > Please see chapter "14. libunibreak" on
following * disclaimer in the documentation and/or page 346.
other materials provided with the * distribution. *
Neither the name of Intel Corporation nor the names
of its suppliers may be used * to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior * written permission. * No reverse engineering,
decompilation, or disassembly of this software is
permitted. * Limited patent license. Intel Corporation
grants a world-wide, royalty-free, * nonexclusive li-
cense under patents it now or hereafter owns or
controls to make, have made, * use, import, offer to
sell and sell (.Utilize.) this software, but solely to the
extent that any * such patent is necessary to Utilize
the software alone. The patent license shall not ap-
ply * to any combinations which include this soft-
ware. No hardware per se is licensed here under. *
DISCLAIMER. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE COPYRIGHT * HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED * WAR-
RANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER * OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, * SPECIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-
ING, BUT * NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; * LOSS OF USE,
348
Index
Index Adjusting seat position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Air conditioning system Switching between iPod and Apple CarPlay. . . . . . . . . . . 62
Symbols Adjusting air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adjusting air flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Apps
Porsche Connect App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Defrosting windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Porsche Road Trip app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
A Setting automatic air-recirculation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Porsche Track Precision App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
A/C MAX button Setting climate style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Ashtray
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Setting the footwell temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ABS (anti-lock braking system) Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Switch on automatic air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Assigning the ◊ button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
ACC Switching A/C MAX mode on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Attaching windshield snow covers or sun shades. . . . . . . . . . 325
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
AUTO (light switch)
Adaptive Cruise Control, operating principle . . . . . . . . . . 45 Switching maximum cooling output on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Automatic headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing the desired speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Switching the ionizer on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Upper ventilation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Auto Start Stop function
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Automatic engine start (vehicles with manual
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Air distribution transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Automatic engine start (vehicles with PDK) . . . . . . . . . . 67
Interrupting and resuming speed and distance Air-conditioning Automatic engine stop (vehicles with manual
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Air-recirculation button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Automatic engine stop (vehicles with PDK). . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overriding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Air-recirculation mode Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Radar sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the desired distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Automatic Coming Home lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Alarm system
Accepting/rejecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Active Lane Keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Function display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 B
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Battery
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Switching off passenger compartment monitoring system Care (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 and inclination sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Charging (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Charging (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
System limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Alcantara® Emergency starting (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Active Parking Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Emergency starting (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Alloy wheels Install location (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Installation location (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Changing the desired speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Allwheel drive Lead-acid battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Allwheel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Lithium battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Torque distribution display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Maintenance (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Notices (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Aluminum rims
Interrupting and resuming speed and distance Notices (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Procedure after connection (lead-acid battery). . . . . . . . 69
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Procedure after connection (lithium battery). . . . . . . . . . 71
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Replacing (lead-acid battery). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Overriding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Replacing (lithium battery). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Radar sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Vehicle electrical system voltage warning (lead-acid
Setting the desired distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Anti-theft protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Vehicle electrical system voltage warning (lithium
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
349
Index
Warnings on the battery (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . 69 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Center armrest

Warnings on the battery (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Front storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Belts Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Center console
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Protective films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Front storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247-248
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Race-Tex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Central locking
Opening the belt buckle and removing the belt. . . . . . . 231 Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Locking vehicle using vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Seat-belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Locking vehicle with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Warning light on the tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Storing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Opening and locking vehicle from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Textiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Unlocking the vehicle using the vehicle key. . . . . . . . . . . 87
Bluetooth® Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Connecting a cellphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing battery
Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chassis setup
Changing brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Car jack mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Checking brake fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Check Engine (emission control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Brakes Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking voicemail messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Footbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Alcantara® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Cleaning camera
Test stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Car wash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Operating camera cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Breakdown Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Cleaning wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Breakdown call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Decorative films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Climate style
Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Breakdown call
Fabric lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Clock
Data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Foot mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 on the dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Clutch
Bremsen Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Porsche Surface Coated Brakedisc (PSCB) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
PCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Coasting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Protective films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Race-Tex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Cockpit
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adjusting lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
C Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Car & Info display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Coolant temperature gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cabriolet Fuel gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Care of the convertible top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Storing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Textiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Opening/closing convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Speed & Assist display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rollover bar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Touch displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Trip counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Cabriolet: side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Warning lights and light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Calling up Manual in PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Carpet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Comfort Access
Calling up Owner’s Manual in vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Locking vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Car care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cellphone
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Unlock vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Connecting a cellphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Alcantara® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Connecting via Bluetooth® (known cellphone) . . . . . . . . 190 Comfort memory package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Connecting via Bluetooth® (new cellphone) . . . . . . . . . . 189 Comfort pressure
Car wash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Connecting via Bluetooth® (second cellphone) . . . . . . . 190 Selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Decorative films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Connecting via Bluetooth® (Windows® and iOS® operating Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fabric lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Congestion updates (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Stowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
350
Index
Connect Digital manual Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Porsche Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connecting an external device via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 On-board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Testing on brake test stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Connection Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Digital speed display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Connection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Electrical socket (12-volt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Connections in the armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Embedded SIM card
Discharged vehicle key battery Establishing a data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Connectivity
Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Establishing a data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Display Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using Porsche Connect Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Car & Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Breakdown call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Contacts (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Speed & Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Emergency flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Convertible top Displaying and resetting odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Emergency key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Displaying and resetting trip counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Emergency locking of doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Displaying service intervals on the instrument cluster. . . . . . 145 Emergency operation
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Displaying/editing e-mails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Raising/lowering the wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Of the convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Displaying/editing messages (text message/e-mail) . . . . . . 191
Convertible top compartment lid Of the wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Displaying/editing text messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Targa roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Displays
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Adding coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 External power supply (lead-acid battery) . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Checking coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Door External power supply (lithium battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cornering light Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Dynamic cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Emergency unlocking
Locking vehicle with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Cruise control Locking with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Of luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Locking with vehicle key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Emergency unlocking of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Emission control (Check Engine). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Opening and locking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Emission control warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Door mirrors Encounter lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Interrupting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Engine
Storing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Folding in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Setting as parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Storing settings (memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Stopping automatically (Auto Start Stop function) (vehicles
Curve ahead warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Doors with manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cabriolet windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Stopping automatically (Auto Start Stop function) (vehicles
D Driver memory package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 with PDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Data connection Driver profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Driving off Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Establishing (embedded SIM card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Launch Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Topping up oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123-124
Establishing (external SIM card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Driving program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Establishing (external WiFi hotspot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Driving Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting access point (APN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the vehicle hotspot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Dynamic cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Date and time Dynamic high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123-124
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Entering a stopover (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Decorative films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 E Entering/finding a destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Electric parking brake Extendable front and rear spoilers
Device Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Automatic parking brake release when moving off . . . . . 75 Extending and retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Diagnostic socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
351
Index
Extendable rear spoiler Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 High-pressure cleaning equipment

Extending and retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Fuel Evaporation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Notes on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Extendable rear spoilers Fuel gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Highway light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Fuel level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 HOLD function
Extending/retracting the air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Fuels With a manual transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
External SIM card Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 With PDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Establishing data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Screenwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 HOLD Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Full load Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
F Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 HomeLink®
Fabric lining (care instructions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Function buttons on the multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 140 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Factory settings Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 HomeLink® Garage Door Opener
Resetting vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Changing electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fade-out Fuse assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Filler flap Hotspot
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 G Establishing data connection via external WiFi
Indication for location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 G-Force display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Garage Door Opener Using the PCM WiFi hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Filling quantities
Screenwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 I
Flat bed Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Ignition lock
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Gasoline Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
FM Fuel gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the reception range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Fuel reserve warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 INDIVIDUAL mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Inflation pressure
Folding backrest down/up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Folding down rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Refueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Foot mats Info widget. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Gasoline octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Glove compartment Adapting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Footbrake Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Adjusting lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Car & Info display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Footwell temperature
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 H Displaying service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hand brake (electric parking brake) Fuel gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Freeze protection
Automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
In coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Manual release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
In washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Front axle lift system Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Automatic lift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Headlight calibration, automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Headlights Selecting options and activating functions . . . . . . . . . . 140
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Setting a speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Setting a speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Front seat Speed & Assist display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Matrix Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Sport Chrono stopwatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Folding backrest down/up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fuel High beam
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fuel reserve warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Dynamic high beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 High beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Trip counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 High beam lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Refueling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 High beam assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Warning lights and light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
352
Index
Instrument lighting Lane Change Assist (LCA) Loads

Adjusting brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rear Turn Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Transporting on the roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Setting fade-out duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Locking
Instrument panel Lane Keep Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Emergency locking of vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Adapting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Locking vehicle from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adjusting lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Language Locking vehicle using vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87, 89
Car & Info display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Locking vehicle with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Coolant temperature gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Lateral acceleration forces Locking options
Fuel gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Longitudinal acceleration forces
Launch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Speed & Assist display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 LCA
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Low beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Warning lights and light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Leather Luggage compartment
Intelligent detour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Interfaces in the armrest Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
SD card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Lighting Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
SIM card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting the duration of fade-out of vehicle interior Luggage compartment lid
Interior lighting
lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Lights Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adverse weather lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Interior mirror
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Automatic Coming Home lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 M
Automatic headlight calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Maintenance position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Switching automatic dimming on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Automatic headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Internet Maintenance work
Establishing a data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Adding engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Ionizer Topping up the washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Dynamic high beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Malfunctions
Emergency flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
J Encounter lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Emergency operation of filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Jack Entry function/Exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Saving final position of sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Slide/tilt sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fog function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Storing final position of slide/tilt sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . 238
K High beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
High beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Storing final position of windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Key Highway function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Targa roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Locking vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Vehicle key battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Removing emergency key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Matrix Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Manual transmission
Unlocking vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) . . . . 157- Upshift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 158 Map (Navigation)
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Configuring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
L Setting the fade-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Side lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Matrix Beam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Lane Change Assist Signage glare reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adjusting warning indicator brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Situational lighting distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Browsing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Driving situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Connecting an external device via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Interfaces in the armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
353
Index
Making settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Night View Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Parking

Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Active Parking Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 ParkAssist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Storing/editing a favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 PDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Supported media and data formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tuning to/storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
O Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Remote parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Octane rating
Memory package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Surround View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Minor repairs Parking aid
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
In the event of a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Swiveling mirror glass downward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Securing vehicle to prevent it from rolling away . . . . . . 126 Filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Parking brake
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Mirrors Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123-124 Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adjusting door mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Testing on brake test stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
On-board computer
Door mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Partial load
Folding door mirrors in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Setting door mirror as parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 PAS
Storing the door mirror settings (memory) . . . . . . . . . . 172 General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Online navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Switching automatic interior mirror dimming on/off. . . 174 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Online services
Warn and Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Establishing a data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Mobile data (connectivity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management)
Opening and locking
Mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Selecting chassis setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multi-collision braking Slide/tilt sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Passenger's side mirror
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Multifunction steering wheel Sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Folding in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Assigning the ◊ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Setting as parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Opening playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 PCM
Music Adapting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Operating mode display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Connecting an external device via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Operating rotary push button and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Interfaces in the armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Operating the PCM Configuring Home screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Storing/editing a favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Using the touch display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Configuring Info widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Supported data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 With rotary push button and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Entering text and characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Freehand writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
N P Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Info widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Avoiding traffic disruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Opening menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Configuring map contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 PCM phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Displaying traffic notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Setting display of time or temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Displaying/configuring the map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Preserving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Removing marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Switching on PCM phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Entering a stopover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Switching on telephone function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Entering GPS coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Repairing damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Touch display in dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Entering/finding a destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Panic button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Map view and navigation information on the instrument ParkAssist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Using the PCM WiFi hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Active Parking Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
PCM hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Planning a tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Rear Cross Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 PCM phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Smart routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Remote parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 PDK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Toll devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Surround View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Shifting gear on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PDLS Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157-158
354
Index
Performing emergency fastening of the central bolt . . . . . . . 318 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) Power windows
Petrol Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Opening/closing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Saving final position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Phone Porsche Communication Management (PCM) Private mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Breakdown call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Calling up Manual in vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Protective films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Connecting via Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Connecting via Bluetooth® (known cellphone) . . . . . . . . 190 Touch display in dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 PSM (Porsche Stability Management)
Connecting via Bluetooth® (new cellphone) . . . . . . . . . . 189 Porsche Connect Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connecting via Bluetooth® (second cellphone) . . . . . . . 190 Establishing a data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connecting via Bluetooth® (Windows® and iOS® operating Logging in user (Porsche ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 PSM Sport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Managing user (Porsche ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 PCM phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Dialing number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Private mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
R
Emergency call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Using services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Race-Tex
Functions available during a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Porsche Connect App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Making settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Connecting to the PCM via WiFi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Radar sensor
Managing contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)
Phone settings on the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Coasting mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Storing/editing a favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Online radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Stowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Setting the reception range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Shifting gear on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Using PCM with SIM card (data connection) . . . . . . . . . 190 Storing/editing a favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) . . . . 157-158
PID (Porsche InnoDrive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Tuning to/storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Rear Cross Traffic Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Activating and deactivating consideration of speed Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Activating and deactivating consideration of speed Rear fog light
limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Adaptation of lighting distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Braking to a standstill and driving off again . . . . . . . . . . 213 limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Braking to a standstill and driving off again . . . . . . . . . . 213 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Changing the desired speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Changing the desired speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rear glass window
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Example of how it works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Rear seat storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Interrupting and resuming control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Example of how it works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Rear spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Interrupting and resuming control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Rear Turn Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Overriding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting the desired distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Overriding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Setting the desired distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Rear window
Setting the maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Switching heating on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Setting the maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Rear wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
System limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Reversing function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
System limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Planning a tour (navigation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Porsche Road Trip app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Porsche Active Safe Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Identification for location of filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Preventive occupant protection function . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Porsche Surface Coated Brakedisc (PSCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Locking vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Setting the distance warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Unlock vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setting the warning time for the collision warning . . . . 194 Porsche Track Precision App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Remote parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Switching collision warning off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Retrieving personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus (PVTS Plus) . . . . . . . . 218
Warn and Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Rollover Bar System (Cabriolet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Porsche WET Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
355
Index
Roof transport system Shifting Stopping

Installing carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Stopping engine automatically (Auto Start Stop function)
Transporting loads on the roof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 (vehicles with manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Stopping engine automatically (Auto Start Stop function)
Signage glare reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 (vehicles with PDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
S SIM card Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Storage compartment
Saving final position of sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Establishing data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Inserting and removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 In front armrest, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Saving the final position of the slide/tilt sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 238
SIM card reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Storage options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Screens
Siri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Storage options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Storage compartment in front armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Screenwash SiriusXM®
Setting the reception range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Storing
Filling quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SD card reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Slide/tilt sunroof
Cleaning wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Storing final position of power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sealant/sealing set
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
For defective tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Functional description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Storing/editing a favorite
Seals
In the event of failure of the roof mechanism . . . . . . . . 238 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Storing final position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Seat belts
Smart routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Stowing cellphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Smartphone Summer tires
Opening the belt buckle and removing the belt. . . . . . . 231 Connecting via Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Seat-belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Stowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Warning light on the tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Smoker's Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Sunblind
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Snow chains Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Storing final position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Seat memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Snow tires Switching automatic interior mirror dimming on/off . . . . . . . 174
Seat-belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Switching door mirror heating on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Seats Speed control Switching off
Adjusting front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Adjusting seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Spoilers Switching on telephone function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Switching seat heating on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Folding backrest down/up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Sport Chrono mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Switching seat ventilation on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Folding rear seat backrest down/up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Sport Chrono stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Switching the heated steering wheel on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Storing and retrieving seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Sport exhaust system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Selecting access point (APN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Selecting APN (access point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
SPORT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 T
SPORT PLUS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting source (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Standard pressure Targa
Service history Selecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Care of the convertible top element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Start Stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Extending/retracting the air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Setting a speed limit in the instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Starting Targa roof
Setting a speed warning in the instrument cluster. . . . . . . . . 144 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Setting automatic air-recirculation mode Steering wheel Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Targa roof system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Setting button assignment on multifunction steering Assigning the ◊ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Technical data
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Switching heating on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Settings Filling quantities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Storing and retrieving personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Tire pressure tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
356
Index
Wheel and tire sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tightening torque for wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 V
Test stands Touch display Valves
Brake test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Adapting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tightening torque Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Vehicle
Time and date Touch display in dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tire filling compressor Info widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Locking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Towing Locking with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Stowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Flat bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Locking with vehicle key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tire Mobility System - TMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Unlocking with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Unlocking with the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tire pressure
Using tow rope or tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Vehicle door
Checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Displaying on instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Towing hook Locking with Porsche Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 In tool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
System learns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Opening and locking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Traffic notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Traffic sign recognition Vehicle hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Curve ahead warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Vehicle key
Tire pressure tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Displaying speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Changing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Transmission Locking vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Unlocking vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tire sealant
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Vehicle Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Removing and stowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.) Vehicle settings
Tire sealant/sealing set
Securing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Adapting instrument cluster display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
For defective tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tray (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Adapting PCM display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Adjusting volume of warning signals and ParkAssist. . . 270
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Displaying pressure deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Displaying pressure difference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Trip information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Resetting to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Fixing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Tuning to/storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Setting button assignment on multifunction steering
Inscriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Turn signal wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Learn new tires in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Setting Car jack mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Replacing tires (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Setting language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Selecting comfort pressure or standard pressure . . . . . 304 U Setting locking options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Setting seat heating, seat ventilation and seat
Setting full load or partial load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Underbody protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Setting the tire type and tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Setting the tire type and tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Snow chains (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Unlocking Setting units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Snow tires (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Emergency unlocking of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Setting voice control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Unlocking and opening the luggage compartment Storing on personal buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Tire Mobility System - TMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Unlocking the vehicle from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Vehicle Settings
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Unlocking the vehicle using the vehicle key. . . . . . . . . . . 87 Making . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Toll devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Unlocking vehicle using vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Video
Tool box Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Supported data formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Removing and stowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Upper ventilation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 USB connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-203 Adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Torque Air conditioning voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
357
Index
App voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Tire Mobility System - TMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Calendar voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Tire sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Global voice commands for online music services . . . . 278 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Media voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Wheel bolts (care instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Navigation voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 WiFi
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Phone voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Establishing data connection via external WiFi
Radio voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Using the PCM WiFi hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Wind deflector
Speaking commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Voice Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Windows
W Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Warn and Brake Assist Defrosting windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Porsche Active Safe (PAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Warning and information messages Saving final position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Switching heated rear screen on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Windscreen wiper system
PCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Filling quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Windshield
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Defrosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Warning assistant and BrakeAssist Windshield wiper
General safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 One-touch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Replacing wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Switching on rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Washer fluid Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Freeze protection agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Wiping rear screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Windshield wiper system
Weights Freeze protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Topping up the washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
WET Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Windshield wipers
Wetness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Care instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Windshield wiping and washer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Wheel and tire sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Wiper blades
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Wheel care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Wireless Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Changing (with a central lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Changing (without central lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Driving on racetracks (wheels with central lock). . . . . . 319
Fixing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Inscriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Performing emergency fastening of the central bolt. . . 318
Replacing tires (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Security wheel bolt (socket) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Snow chains (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Snow tires (general information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
358

Porsche 911 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Porsche 911 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Porsche 911 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

911

b Prerequisites that must be met in order to use a

Practical Tips Topics from A - Z Technical Data Index

e CAR e CONTROL e Manual

An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load in the

Children often cannot judge dangers correctly and

If the systems detect malfunctions or defective

Just in case: Safety in the event of

Do not use voice control in case of an

Certain work to the vehicle requires the wearing of

Towing Flat tires Carry Emergency equipment

1. Feature might be available at a later point of time or limited to specific markets

Sensors and cameras

Garage door opener

Active Parking Support1 CAUTION

A – If the vehicle key or cellphone is out of range for

Adaptive Cruise Control traffic calming. WARNING

A Symbol Meaning – The status display B is gray. Information

The vehicle continues driving automatically. Responding to warning message A

A Airbag Systems DANGER

death to the child from an airbag deployment Information inflating airbag. A

A > Please see chapter "Child Restraint Systems

Air Conditioning System (2- A

Fig. 14: Brief Overview – Air Conditioning

Switch on air-recirculation manually In some countries, air-recirculation mode can be > p. 59 R

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

D e Press button D. > p. 57

Switching air flow on or off Switching air-recirculation mode e CLIMATE e AIR e A

1. CLIMATE e AIR e Footwell O

A Storing A/C settings Switching the heated rear screen Information

A Apps b The PCM WiFi function is activated. Information

Since vehicle-specific data can be accessed using B

A Information – at least one prerequisite for the auto engine stop

Battery vehicle. components. A

C Lead-acid battery care

A Brake Fluid Checking the brake fluid level

A Refrigerant Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where?

A Information Unlocking doors from inside Information

Child Restraint Systems DANGER

E Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

A b Ignition is switched on. Emergency operation of the con-

A 4. Unscrew both screws D of the Rollover protec- De-tensioning the convertible-top

M 3. Fold both Rollover protection trim panels C for-

O Fig. 53: Folding in the wind deflector

Opening the convertible-top compartment lid A

A Emergency operation of the rear side trim

Cruise control Controls Display elements A

If the storage compartment or cup holder is not in- E

Spilling hot cups

A Driving program WET NORMAL SPORT SPORT PLUS

O Under unfavorable conditions, an emergency call to Information

A Emergency Starting cable manufacturer. Performing emergency starting

A > Please see chapter "Emergency unlocking of

A – Wheels should be properly aligned.

A Front Axle Lift System b Engine is running. NOTICE

If the button is pressed during automatic raising, T

Opening the fuse box in the driv- No. Load Row C A

8 BCM control unit

F 11 Airbag control unit 4 Seat ventilation, front right